История английского языка (на английском) Р.В. Резник, Т.А. Сорокина, Н.В. Резник

Р.В. Резник, Т.А. Сорокина, И.В. Резник
A HISTORY
OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE
ИСТОРИЯ
АНГЛИЙСКОГО ЯЗЫКА
Учебное пособие
Рекомендовано Учебно-методическим объединением
по лингвистическому образованию Министерства образования
Российской Федерации в качестве учебного пособия
для студентов и аспирантов лингвистических
вузов и факультетов
Москва
Издательство «Флинта»
Издательство «Наука»
2001
УДК 802.0
ББК 8J.2 Англ
Р 34,
Резник Р.В., Сорокина Т.А., Резник И.В.
A History of the English Language. История английского языка:
Учебное пособие. — М.: Флинта: Наука, 2001. — 496 с.
ISBN 5-89349-176-9 (Флинта)
ISBN 5-02-022584-3 (Наука)
Первая часть пособия — краткий лекционный курс; вторая —
хрестоматия: содержит подборку текстов, включающих образцы древнеанглийского, среднеанглийского и новоанглийского периодов, с
вопросами и заданиями к ним; третья — словарь к текстам и краткий справочник по их анализу и переводу. Приложение включает
вопросы для повторения и самоконтроля.
Для студентов и аспирантов лингвистических вузов и факультетов, а также всех, интересующихся историей английского языка.
Учебное издание
Резник Р.В., Сорокина Т.А.,
Резник Й.В.
A HISTORY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE
ИСТОРИЯ АНГЛИЙСКОГО ЯЗЫКА
Изготовление оригинал-макета ООО "ВЕНЗИ"
Подписано в печать 23.07.2001. Формат 60x88/16
Гарнитура Тайме. Печать офсетная. Усл. печ. л. 31,0. Уч.-изд. л. 28,4
Тираж 5000 экз. Изд. № 322. Заказ 1503
ИД №04826 от 24.05.2001г.
ООО "Флинта", 117342, г. Москва, ул. Бутлерова, д. 17-Б, комн. 332
Тел/факс 336-03-11; тел. 334-82-65, E-mail: [email protected], [email protected]
ЛР № 020297 от 23.06.1997 г.
Издательство "Наука", 117864, ГСП-7, Москва В-485,
ул. Профсоюзная, д. 90
Отпечатано с готовых диапозитивов во ФГУП ИПК "Ульяновский
Дом печати". 432980, г. Ульяновск, ул. Гончарова, 14
ISBN 5-89349-176-9 (Флинта)
ISBN 5-02-022584-3 (Наука)
© издательство, ','Флинта", 2001
ОГЛАВЛЕНИЕ
Оглавление
Предисловие
Часть 1. Лекции
1
Введение. Общая характеристика
германских языков
2
Древнеанглийский период. Общая
характеристика
3
Среднеанглийский период. Общая
характеристика
,
4
Новоанглийский период. Общая
характеристика
5
Фонетика древнеанглийского периода
6
Грамматика древнеанглийского периода.
Система имени
7
Грамматика древнеанглийского периода.
Система глагола
\
8
Изменения в фонетической системе в
среднеанглийский и новоанглийский
периоды
9
Изменения в системе имени в среднеанглийский и новоанглийский периоды
10
Изменения в системе глагола в среднеанглийский и новоанглийский периоды
11.
Словарный состав английского языка
12
Этимологические слои современногого
английского языка
Часть 2. Семинары
1.
Вводный семинар. Германские языки
2.
Основные характеристики германских
языков. Грамматика
3.
Обзор периодов в истории английского
языка. Общая характеристика древнеанглийского периода
4.
Фонетика древнеанглийского периода.
Гласные
5.
Фонетика древнеанглийского периода.
Согласные.'
з
стр.
3
7
13
15
33
48
63
77
89
107
126
145
157
173
190
203
205
208
211
217
220
Имя
7.
Грамматика древнеанглийского периода.
Глагол
8.
Древнеанглийский период. Обсуждение ....
9.
Общая характеристика среднеанглийского периода
10.
Фонетика среднеанглийского периода.
Гласные
11.
Фонетика среднеанглийского периода.
Согласные
12.
Грамматика среднеанглийского периода.
Имя
:
13.
Грамматика среднеанглийского периода.
Глагол
14.
Среднеанглийский период. Обсуждение ....
15.
Общая характеристика новоанглийского
периода
16.
Фонетика новоанглийского периода.
Гласные
17.
Фонетика новоанглийского периода.
Согласные
18.
Грамматика новоанглийского периода.
Имя
19.
Грамматика новоанглийского периода.
Глагол
:
20.
Словарный состав английского языка
21.
Слои словарного состава языка
22.
Современные правильные и неправильные
формы имени и глагола
Часть 3.
Ключи
Семинары 3 и 6. Путешествие Охтхере
Семинары 4, 5 и 7. Хроники
Семинары 9, 10 и 12. Чосер
Семинары 11 и 13. Тревиза
Семинары 15, 16 и 18. Шекспир, "Гамлет"
Семинар 20. Шекспир, Сонет
Семинар 21. Диккенс
Часть 4.
Глоссарий
Часть 5. Краткое изложение лекций
Лекции1-12
'"
4
2 2 1
2 2 6
228
231
240
241
244
247
248
251
261
263
267
271
272
274
277
281
283
301
316
338
359
396
405
419
477
479
TABLE OF CONTENTS
pages
Оглавление
3
Table of Contents
'.
5
Предисловие
7
Foreword
10
Part 1.
Lectures
13
1
Introductory. General Characteristics
of Germanic Languages
15
2
Old English. General Characteristics
33
3
Middle English. General Characteristics
48
4
New English. General Characteristics
63
5
Old English phonetics
77
6
Old English grammar. The nominal system
89
7
Old English grammar. The verbal system
107
8
Changes in the phonetic system in Middle
and New English
126
9
Changes in the nominal system in Middle
and New English
145
10
Changes in the verbal system in Middle
and New English
157
11
English vocabulary
173
12
Ethymological strata in Modern English
190
Part 2.
Seminars
203
1.
Introductory. Germanic languages
205
2.
Chief characteristics of Germanic languages.
Grammar
208
3.
Survey of the periods in the history of English.
General characteristics of the Old English
period
211
4.
Old English phonetics. Vowels
217
5.
Old English phonetics. Consonants
220
6.
Old English grammar. Noun
221
7.
Old English grammar. Verb
226
5
8.
9.
Old English. Discussion
228
General characteristics of the Middle English
period
•
231
10.
Middle English phonetics. Vowels
240
11.
Middle English phonetics. Consonants
241
12.
Middle English grammar. Noun
244
13.
Middle English grammar. Verb
247
14.
Middle English. Discussion
248
15.
General characteristics of the New English
period
251
16.
New English phonetics. Vowels
261
17,. New English phonetics. Consonants
263
18.
New English grammar. Noun
267
19.
New English grammar. Verb
271
20.
English wordstock
272
21.
Vocabulary layers
274
22.
Modern regular and irregular noun and verb
forms
277
Part 3.
Keys
281
Key to Seminars 3 & 6. Ohthere's account of his
first voyage
283
Key to Seminars 4,5 & 7. Anglo-Saxon
Chronicle
301
Key to Seminars 9, 10 & 12. Chaucer, Canterbury
Tales
....316
Key to Seminars 11 & 13. Trevisa, About
thelanguages of the inhabitants
338
Key to Seminars 15, 16 & 18. Shakespeare,
Hamlet
;
359
Key to Seminar 20. Shakespeare, Sonnet
396
Key to Seminar 21. Dickens, David Copperfield .... 405
Part 4.
Glossary
419
Part 5.
Summary
477
Лекции1-12
479
6
ПРЕДИСЛОВИЕ
Предлагаемый учебный комплекс предназначен для
студентов и аспирантов-филологов, а также всех лиц,
интересующихся вопросами исторического развития языка и
желающих расширить свои знания о нем.
В состав комплекса входит курс лекций, задания к
семинарам, ключи, словарь и краткое капсульнбе изложение
лекций.
Объем материала (12 лекций и 22 семинаров) рассчитан
на прохождение курса в течение 2 семестров, согласно новой
программе подготовки специалистов на филологических
факультетах институтов и университетов.
Весь комплекс отличает стройность построения по
единому плану. Это относится как к лекциям, так и к
семинарским занятиям, где работа проводится по едидой
логической схеме, от простого к сложному и от общего к
частному, с постепенным углублением и конкретизацией
знаний по каждому периоду исторического развития языка.
Четкость и прозрачность структуры подачи материала и его
анализа позволяет студенту уделить больше внимания
содержательной стороне курса.
Лекции (Часть 1) сопровождаются большим
количеством таблиц и примеров, делающих теоретические
положения более наглядными и запоминающимися. Схемы и
таблицы, кроме того, могут использоваться впоследствии в
ходе выполнения практических, заданий на семинарских
занятиях.
Материалы для проведения семинаров (Часть '2)
содержат теоретические вопросы для обсуждения в классе' и
практические задания. Непременным компонентом каждого
семинара (за исключением вводного) является анализ
аутентичного текста соответствующего исторического
7
периода с точки зрения его фонетических, грамматических и
этимологических особенностей.
Семинары разбиты на блоки, соответствующие
периодам истории английского языка. Первые семинары
каждого блока содержат модель анализа текста; для
последующих семинаров предусмотрена возможность
самостоятельной работы с проверкой сделанного анализа по
ключам, приведенным после семинаров (Часть 3).
Заключительный семинар каждого блока содержит текст для
анализа без ключей, который предлагается провести и
оформить в соответствии с изученной моделью и представить
в качестве составной части итоговой письменной работы,
позволяющей провести оценку усвоения материала.
В книге приводится словарь (Часть 4), содержащий
необходимые сведения структурного и этимологического
характера в отношении всех языковых единиц, содержащихся
в текстах семинаров, и позволяющий студенту проводить их
анализ и выполнять другие практические задания семинаров.
После лекций приводится их краткое капсульное
изложение на русском языке с отсылкой на соответствующие
разделы той или иной лекции (Часть 5). Подобная отсылка
возможна благодаря четкой и достаточно дробной
рубрикации текста лекций. Этот раздел предназначен для
быстрого напоминания основных тем курса, удобства поиска
соответствующей темы, а также может использоваться для
предварительного ознакомления с изучаемой проблематикой
лиц, чьи практические знания языка несколько затрудняют
для них адекватную работу с английским текстом. Выбор
русского языка в качестве языка для изложения капсульного
изложения предмета объясняется стремлением сделать курс
более доступным, расширить круг лиц, которые могли бы
пользоваться предлагаемым пособием, и упростить их
работу.
От имеющихся изданий подобного рода учебный
комплекс, помимо прочего, отличают:
8
—
самодостаточность, не требующая привлечения
других источников для усвоения определенного
программой материала;
—
четкость и компактность изложения материала;
—
ясная структура и модульная система его подачи;
—
детальная рубрикация, позволяющая осуществлять
перекрестную отсылку и быстрый поиск нужной
информации;
—
возможность использования лицами с разным
уровнем владения английским языком;
—
наличие большого объема материала для
семинарских занятий с подробной разработкой
плана
их
проведения,
теоретическими,
практическими и текстовыми заданиями;
—
ключи к заданиям по анализу текстов различных
периодов, позволяющие использовать их для
самоконтроля;
—
задания для самостоятельной работы, дающие
возможность студентам творчески осмыслить
материал и провести небольшую работу
исследовательского характера, оформленную в виде
письменной
итоговой
курсовой
или
экзаменационной работы;
—
тщательно выверенный глоссарий, содержащий
словарные единицы разных периодов английского
языка;
—
наличие в конце каждой лекции небольшой статьи
познавательного характера, тематически связанной с
предметом данной лекции и делающей изучение
материала не только полезным, но и приятным.
Авторы
ч
FOREWORD
Trie, present study manual is intended for philology students
Eind post-graduates, as well as all those interested in the problems
of historical development of the language and wishing to extend
their knowledge of it.
T^.manual consists of a set of lectures, seminars including
materials for recapitulation, keys, tasks for independent work arid
control of retention, as well as a glossary.
The scope and volume of the material (12 lectures and 22
seminars) is calculated for a course of studies during 2 semesters,
according to the new program of training specialists at philology
faculties and departments of universities.
Th,e whole complex follows a clearly defined plan. This,
refers both to the lectures and seminars, where all activity is to be
conducted according to. a uniform pattern, from simple to
difficult and from general to particular, with gradual
complication and deepening of knowledge on each period of the
historical development of the language. The clear and. welldefined structure of the material presentation and analysis allows!
the sjxident to pay more attention to the informative content of the;
course,
The lectures (Part 1) are accompanied by many tables and,
language, examples making the theoretical notions more visual
and easy to remember. Besides that, the schemes and tables can
be used later when fulfilling practical tasks for the seminars.
The'materials for conducting seminars (Part 2) contain
theoretical' problems for discussion in class and practical tasks.
An indispensable.component of each seminar, (except for the
introductory one) is the analysis of an authentic text of the
appropriate historical period from the point of view of its
phonetic, grammar and etymological features.
The' seminars are divided into units corresponding to the
periods in the history of the English language, The first seminars
10
of each unit contain a text analysis pattern; the subsequent
seminars provide for the possibility of independent work to be
checked using the keys.(Part 3). The final seminar of each unit
contains a text for analysis with no keys; a written analysis of this
text is to form a part of the course paper permitting to evaluate
the comprehension and mastering of the material.
The manual includes a glossary (Part 4) containing the
necessary structural and etymological data concerning all
language units to be found in the texts of the seminars and
permitting the student to conduct their analysis and perform other
practical tasks.
There is also a brief capsule summary of the lectures given
in Russian with reference to the appropriate sections of the full
text of the lectures (Part 5). Such reference is possible due to
clear and sufficiently detailed subdivision of the text of the
lectures according to subject headings. This section is intended as
a reminder of the principal topics of the course, allowing a
convenient method of search for an appropriate issue, and can
also be used for preliminary acquaintance with the studied
problems of those whose practical knowledge of the language is
yet not fully adequate for free work with the English text. The
choice of Russian as the language for the summary of the subject
is explained by the desire to make the course easier and more
readily accessible to a larger group of readers.
The manual differs from other similar publications in the
following:
— self-sufficiency requiring no additional sources for
mastering the material stipulated by the programme;
—; clear and concise recital of the material;
— transparent structure and modular system of its
presentation;
— detailed division into subsections permitting crossreference and fast finding of the necessary information;
I!
— possibility of use by thos e with a different level of
knowledge of English;
— extensive material for seminars with an in-depth plan,
theoretical, practical and text analysis tasks;
— keys to the analysis of the texts of different periods
allowing their use for self-control;
— tasks for independent work giving the students a
possibility to creatively interpret the material and to
conduct a limited research with the results to be presented
as a written course or exam paper;
— carefully checked-out glossary containing vocabulary
entries of different periods of the English language;
— presence of a brief article at the end of each lecture giving
some interesting facts connected with the topic of the
lecture and making the study of the material not only
useful, but also pleasant.
Authors
Tart 1, Lectures
"Learning makes life more rewarding and enjoyable;
...the worst thing of all is ignorance."
King Alfred the Great
Mappe Monde from a MS of the 9th century at the Strasburg library
- one of the oldest existing maps of the world
List of Lectures
pages
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Introductory. General Characteristics
of Germanic Languages
Old English. General Characteristics
Middle English. General Characteristics
New English. General Characteristics
Old English phonetics
Old English grammar. The nominal system
Old English grammar. The verbal system
Changes in the phonetic system in Middle
and New English
Changes in the nominal system in Middle
and New English
Changes in the verbal system in Middle
and New English
English vocabulary
Ethymological strata in Modern English
15
33
48
63
77
89
107
126
145
157
173
190
LECTURE 1.
INTRODUCTORY.
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
OF GERMANIC LANGUAGES
"The Germans themselves I should regard as
aboriginal, and not mixed at all with other races... For
who would leave Asia, or Africa or Italy for Germany, with
its wild country, its inclement skies, its sullen manners and
aspect, unless indeed it were his home? ...The name
Germany, on the other hand, they say is modern and newly
introduced, from the fact that the tribes whichfirstcrossed
the Rhine and drove out the Gauls, and are now called
Tungrians, were then called Germans. Thus what was the
name of a tribe, and not of a race, gradually prevailed, till
all called themselves by this self-invented name of
Germans, which the conquerors had first employed to
inspire terror."
Tacitus, Germania
List of principal questions:
1.
2.
3.
The aim of the study Of the subject
Inner and outer history of the language
Chief characteristics of the Germanic languages
3.1. Phonetics
3.2. Grammar
3.3. Alphabet
\5
PART i. LECTURES
1. The aim of the study of the subject
It is well known that language, whether it is English, Russian
or any other, is a historical phenomenon. As such it does not stay
unchanged for any considerable period of time, or for any time at
all, but it inconstantly changing throughout its history.
The changes affect all the spheres of the language: grammar
and vocabulary, phonetics and spelling. The changes that any
language undergoes are gradual and very slow but pronounced
enough if you compare the stages of its development within a
century or even half a century. You can imagine that with the
passage of time the difference between different stages of the
development of the language grows and you will easily deduce
that if you speak of such a language as English the history of
which embraces over fifteen centuries you will have to analyze
and explain a great number of linguistic data characterizing the
language at different stages of its history.
The aims set before a student of the history of the English
language are as follows:
1.
2.
to speak of the characteristics of the language at the
earlier stages of its development;
to trace the language from the Old English period up to
modern times;
3.
to explain the principal features in the development of
modern language historically.
To achieve those aims a student will have to know the
theoretical basis of the subject and to work with the text to apply
the theoretical knowledge to the practical analysis of English
texts at different periods of the language development.
While speaking about the importance of theoretical courses
we may quoting Simeon Potter's words:
16
1. INTRODUCTORY. GERMANIC LANGUAGES
"We cannot know too much about the language we
speak every day of our lives... knowledge is power. The
power of rightly chosen words is very great, whether
these words are intended to inform, to entertain or to
move."
Simeon Potter, Our language
Thus the main purpose of studying the history of the English
language is to account for the present-day stage of the language
to enable a student of English to read books and speak the
language with understanding and due knowledge of the intricate
and complicates "mechanism" they use.
We said that the history of any language is an unbroken chain
of changes more or less rapid. But though the linguistic tradition
is unbroken it is impossible to study the language of over 15
centuries long without subdividing it into smaller periods. Thus
the history of the English language is generally subdivided
conventionally into Old English (5 th —11 th century), Middle
English (11th—15"' century) and New English (15th century—till
now).
2. Inner and outer history of the language
We are going to speak about the inner and the outer history
of the English language. The outer history of the language is the
events in the life (history) of the people speaking this language
affecting the language, i.e. the history of the people reflected in
their language. The inner history .of the language is the
description of the changes in the language itself, its grammar,
phonetics, vocabulary or spelling.
It is well known that the English language belongs to the
Germanic subdivision of the Indo-European family of languages.
The direct and indirect evidence that we have concerning old
Germanic tribes and dialects is approx-imatelv-.twenty centuries
17
PART I. LECTURES
old. We know that at the beginning of AD Germanic tribes
occupied vast territories in western, central and northern Europe.
The tribes and the dialects they spoke at the time were generally
very much alike, but the degree of similarity varied. It is common
to speak about the East Germanic group of dialects — mainly
spoken in central Europe — Gothic, Vandalic, Burgundian; North
Germanic group of dialects — Old Norwegian, Old Danish, Old
Swedish, Old Icelandic; and the West Germanic group of dialects
— the dialects of Angles, Saxons, Jutes, Frisians and others,
originally spoken in western Europe. The first knowledge of
these tribes comes from the Greek and Roman authors which,
together with archeological data, allows to obtain information on
the structure of their society, habits, customs and languages.
The principal East Germanic language is Gothic. At the
beginning of our era the Goths lived on a territory from the
Vistula to the shores of the Black Sea. The knowledge of Gothic
we have now is almost wholly due to a translation of the Gospels
and other parts of the New Testament made by Ulfilas, a
missionary who christianized the Gothic tribes. Except for some
runic inscriptions in Scandinavia it is the earliest record of a
Germanic language we possess. For a time the Goths played a
prominent part in European history, making extensive conquests
in Italy and Spain. In these districts, however, their language soon
gave place to Latin, and even elsewhere it seems not to have
maintained a very tenacious existence. Gothic survived longest in
the Crimea, where vestiges of it were noted down in the sixteenth
century.
North Germanic is found in Scandinavia and Denmark.
Runic inscriptions from the third century preserve our earliest
traces of the language. In its earlier form the common
Scandinavian language is conveniently spoken of as Old Norse.
From about the eleventh century on, dialectal differences become
noticeable. The Scandinavian languages fall into two groups:
ix
/. INTRODUCTORY. GERMANIC LANGUAGES
Map 1-1. Germanic tribes in Europe
PART 1. LECTURES
an eastern group including Swedish and Danish, and a western
group including Norwegian and Icelandic. Of the early
Scandinavian languages Old Icelandic is much the most
important. Iceland was colonized by settlers from Norway about
A.D. 874 and preserved a body of early heroic literature
unsurpassed among the Germanic peoples. Among the more
important monuments are the Elder or Poetic Edda, a collection
of poems that probably date from the tenth or eleventh century,
the Younger or Prose Edda compiled by Snorri Sturluson (1178—
1241), and about forty sagas, or prose epics, in which the lives
and exploits of various traditional figures are related.
West Germanic is of chief interest to us as the group to which
English belongs. It is divided into two branches, High and Low
German, by the operation of a Second (or High German) SoundShift analogous to that described below as Grimm's Law. This
change, by which West Germanic p, t, k, d, etc. were changed
into other sounds, occurred about A.D. 600 in the southern or
mountainous part of the Germanic area, but did not take place in
the lowlands to the north. Accordingly in early times we
distinguish as Low German tongues Old Saxon, Old Low
Franconian, Old Frisian, and Old English. The last two are
closely related and constitute a special or Anglo-Frisian
subgroup. Old Saxon has become the essential constituent of
modern Low German or Plattdeutsch; Old Low Franconian, with
some mixture of Frisian and Saxon elements, is the basis of
modern Dutch in Holland and Flemish in northern Belgium; and
Frisian survives in the Dutch province of Friesland, in a small
part of Schleswig, in the islands along the coast, etc. High
German comprises a number of dialects and is divided
chronologically into Old High German (before 1100), Middle
High German (1100—1500), and Modern High German (since
1500). High German, especially as spoken in the midlands and
used in the imperial chancery, was popularized by Luther's
20
1. INTRODUCTORY.
GERMANIC
LANGUAGES
translation of the Bible into it (1522—1532), and since the
sixteenth century has gradually established itself as the literary
language of Germany.
3. Chief characteristics
of the Germanic languages
The barbarian tribes — Goths, Vandals, Lombards, Franks,
Frisians, Teutons, Angles, Saxons, Jutes and Scandinavians —
lived on the fringes of the Roman Empire. All these spoke
Germanic languages, which had distinctive characteristics of
structure and pronunciation which are reflected in its
descendants.
3.1. Phonetics
One of the most important common features of all Germanic
languages is its strong dynamic stress falling on the first root
syllable. The fixed stress emphasised the syllable bearing the
most important semantic element and to a certain degree later
contributed to the reduction of unstressed syllables, changing the
grammatical system of the languages.
The most important feature of the system of Germanic
vowels is the so-called Ablaut, or gradation, which is a
spontaneous, positionally independent alteration of vowels
inhabited by the Germanic languages from the Common IndoEuropean period. This ancient phenomenon consisted in
alteration of vowels in the root, suffix or ending depending on the
grammatical form or meaning of the word.
There are two types of Ablaut: quantitative and qualitative.
The qualitative Ablaut is the alteration of different vowels,
mainly the vowels [e] / [a] or [e] / [o]
21
PART I. LECTURES
Old Icelandic
Old High German
Cf.:
Russian
Latin
bera (to give birth) — barn (baby)
stelan (to steal) — stal (stole)
бреду (I stroll, I wade) — брОД (ford, wade)
tego (to cover, to cloth) — toga (clothes)
Quantitative Ablaut means the change in length of
qualitatively one and the same vowel: normal, lengthened and
reduced. A classic example of the Indo-European Ablaut is the
declension of the Greek word "pater" (father):
[e:]
[e]
[—\
pater
pater
patros
(nominative case,
lengthened stage)
(vocative case,
normal stage)
(genitive case,
reduced stage)
Ablaut in Germanic languages is a further development of
Indo-European alterations. Here we often find cases with both the
quantitative and qualitative ablaut. It should be also mentioned
that in the zero stage before sonorants an extra-short vowel [u]
was added:
quantitative ablaut
Goth1 qiman (to come) — qums (the arrival)
qualitative ablaut
OHG stelan (to steal) — stal (stole)
quantitative+quaUtative ablaut
OE . findan (tofind)— fand (found, — fundan (found,
past tense)
past part.)
Ablaut as a kind of an internal flexion functioned in Old
Gemnanic languages both in form- and word-building, but it was
the most extensive and systematic in the conjugation of strong
verbs.
1
We shall use the following abbreviations
Gk - Greek
Goth - Gothic
Lat - Latin
OE - Old English
OHG - Old High German
22
for the names of the languages:
Old - Old Icelandic
OSc - Old Scandinavian
OSx - Old Saxon
Rus - Russian
Snsk - Sanskrit
/.INTRODUCTORY. GERMANIC LANGUAGES
Another phenomenon common for all Germanic languages
was the tendency of phonetic assimilation of the root vowel to the
vowel of the ending, the so-called -Umlaut, or mutation. There
were several types of mutation, but the most important one was
palatal mutation, or i-Umlaut, when under the influence of the
sounds [i] or.{j] in the suffix or ending the root vowels became
more front and more closed. This process must have taken place
in the 5lh,—6lh centuries, and-can-be,.illustrated by comparing
words from the language of the 'Qothic bible (4lh century)
showing no palatal mutation with corresponding words in other
Germanic languages of a later period.!)
Goth harjis
OE here (annyy,
Goth domjan
OE deman (deem);
Goth kuni
OE cynn (шк
Traces of this tendency can be" seen both in word-building
and form-building as a kind of an internal flexion:
OHG gast (guest) — gestl (guests)
man (man) — mennisco (human)
Speaking about Germanic caiisonans, we should first of all
speak of the correspondence between Indo-European and
Germanic languages which was,presented as- a system of
interconnected facts by the German linguist Jacob Grimm in
1822. This phenomenon is called the First Consonant Shift, or
Grimm's law.
The table below shows-a scheme of Grimm's law with the
examples from Germanic and other Indo-European languages..
However, there are-some, instances where Grimm's law
seems not to apply. These cases were explained by a Dutch
linguist Karl Ver.ner, and the seeming exceptions from Grimm's
law have come to be known as Venter's law.
23
PART 1. LECTURES
7Ш(? /-/. Grimm's law
1
Indo-European
Germanic
voiceless stops
voiceless fricatives
f p h
p tк
Lat
Lat
Gk
2
0£
Gtff/?
<9#G
voiced stops
b d g
Rus
Lat
Gk
3
pater
tres
kardia
voiceless stops
p tк
OE
Goth
O/c/
болото
duo
egon
voiced aspirated stops'
bh dh gh
pol (pool)
twai (two)
ek (I)
voiced non-aspirated stops
bdg
__
Snsk
Lat
Snsk
bhratar
OE
frater, Rus брат
madhu
OE
Rus
мед
*Snsk
songha
omphe (voice)
Gk
fseder (father)
preis (three)
herza (heart)
Old
brodor
medu (mead)
syngva (sing)
Verner's law explains the changes in the Germanic voiceless
fricatives f p h resulting from the first consonant shift and the
voiceless fricatives depending upon the position of the stress in
the original Indo-European word, namely:
'Note that the correspondencies in the third group are less clear, for aspirated,
stops can be found only in Sanskrit, the other Indo-European languages having
either voiceless fricatives or voiced stops, and the [gh] sound in Sanskrit is only
reconstructed.
24
Л INTRODUCTORY. GERMANIC LANGUAGES
Table 1-2. Verner's law
Indo-European
Germanic
p t к s
b d/d g z/r
Gk
Gk
G&
Sn.yfe
hepta
pater
dekas
ayas
Goth
OSc
Gof/г
Goth
sibun (seven)
fadir, OE faeder
tigus (ten, a dozen)
aiz, O#G er (bronze)
According to Verner's law, the above change occurred if the
consonant in question was found after an unstressed vowel. It is
especially evident in the forms of Germanic strong verbs, except
the Gothic ones, which allows to conclude that at some time the
stress in the first two verbal stems fell on the root, and in the last
two — on the suffix:
OE
OSx
Goth
teon
tiohan
tiuhan
teah
toh
tauh
Ш30П
OE
Old
Goth
ceosan
kiosa
kiusan
ceas
kaus
kaus
curon
k0rom
kusum
tugun
tauhum
to3en (to tug)
gitogan
tauhans
coren (to choose)
k0renn
kusans
3.2. Grammar
One of the main processes in the development of the
Germanic morphological system was the change in the word
structure. The common Indo-European notional word consisted
of three elements: the root, expressing the lexical meaning, the
inflexion or ending, showing the grammatical form, and the socalled stem-forming suffix, a formal indicator of the stem type.
However, in Germanic languages the stem-forming suffix fuses
25
PART I. LECTURES
with the ending and is often no longer visible, thus making the
word structure a two-element one. Nevertheless, it should be
taken into account when explaining the differences in the
categorial forms of words originally having different stemforming suffixes.
It should also be mentioned that Germanic languages
belonged to the synthetic type of form-building, which means that
they expressed the grammatical meanings by changing the forms
of the word itself, not resorting to any auxiliary words.
The Germanic nouns had a well-developed case system with
1
1
four cases (nominative, genitive, dative, accusative) and two
number forms (singular and.plural). They also had the category of
gender (feminine, masculine and neuter). The means of formbuilding were the endings added to the root/stem of the noun.
The Germanic adjectives had two types of declension,
conventionally called strong and weak. Most adjectives could be
declined both in accordance with the strong and weak type.
Agreeing with the noun in gender,' case and noun, the adjective by
its type of declension expressed the idea of definiteness (weak
declension) or indefiniteness (strong declension), the meaning
which was later to become expressed by a grammatical class of
words unknown in Common Germanic — the article.
The adjective also had degrees of comparison, the forms of
which were im most instances formed with the help of suffixes
-iz/oz and -ist/-ost, but their©эдегеalso, instances of suppletivism,
i.e. use of different roots for different forms — a means common
for many Indo-European languages:
Goth leitils—minniza—minnists (little—less—least)
Rus
хороший—лучше—7лучший
'Some languages had elements of the instrumental and vocative cases.
26
/. INTRODUCTORY. GERMANIC
LANGUAGES
The Germanic verbs are divided into two principal groups:
strong and weak verbs, depending on the way they formed their
past tense forms.
The past tense (or preterite) of strong verbs was formed with
the help of Ablaut, qualitative or quantitative. Depending upon
the phonetic root structure, the exact manifestation of Ablaut
could be somewhat different, and accordingly strong verbs were
further subdivided into classes.
Weak verbs expressed preterite with the help of the dental
suffix -d/-t. They also had stem-forming suffixes, depending on
which they fell into separate classes.
There was also a small group of highly frequent suppletive
verbs forming their forms from different roots, the same as in
other Indo-European languages:
im (/I/am)
Rus есть
was (/I/ was)
был
The Germanic verb had a well-developed system of
categories, including the category of person (first, second, third),
number (singular and plural)1, tense (past and present, the latter
also used for expressing future actions), mood (indicative,
imperative and optative) and vr : ?e (only in Gothic—active and
mediopassive). The categprial forms employed synthetic means
of form-building.
Goth
ЗЛ Alphabet
Although the people of the Germanic tribes were mostly
illiterate, some of the Germanic nations had their own mode of
writing, with a distinctive alphabet called runic, each letter of
which was called a rune. We know that runes were used to record
early stages of Gothic, Danish, Swedish, Norwegian, English,
'And in Gothic also dual.
27
PART 1. LECTURES
Frisian, Frankish and various tribal tongues of central Germania,
and they may also have supplied other Germanic languages
without leaving any evidence surviving till today. "On
archaeological grounds the earliest estant runes are dated to the
second century AD. The script continued in use in some regions
throughout the Middle Ages and into early modern times.
The early runes were not written, but incised—runic script
was designed for inscribing, at first on wood, which explains
many of its characteristics. Since runes were designed for
incising in wood, the letter forms, in their earliest stage, eschew
curves, which are hard to cut in such a grainy material. Letters
were made up of vertical strokes, cut at right angles to the grain,
and of slanting strokes which stood distinct from it. Horizontal
strokes, which would mingle with the grain and be hard to
distinguish, were avoided.
Even the earliest examples of the script show there were
variations in some letter forms, so it is not possible to give a
standard pattern for the Germanic runic alphabet. The rune-row
below is one of the most generally accepted variants:
futharkg
whni
j p e r s t
bemlngd
о
The earliest known runic alphabet had twenty-four letters
arranged in a peculiar order, which, from the values of its first
letters, is known as the futhark. In early times texts could be
written not only from left to right, but from right to left equally
well. Some texts could even be written with alternate lines in
opposite directions. Even in left-to-right texts an individual letter
could be reversed at whim, and occasionally a letter might be
inverted. There was no distinction between capital and lowercase letters.
28
1. INTRODUCTORY. GERMANIC LANGUAGES
The Roman equivalents for the Germanic runes given above
are only approximate, for the sounds of Early Germanic did not
coincide with those of Modern English.
We do not know where and when runes were invented. The
obvious similarities with the Roman alphabet brought early
scholars to the belief that the script first appeared among
Germanic peoples living close to the Roman empire, and that the
runes were an adaptation of the more prestigeous alphabet. Early
finds of rune-inscribed objects in eastern Europe (Pietroassa in
Rumania, Dahmsdorf in central Germany and Kowel in the
Ukraine) suggest that runes may have been invented by Goths on
the Danube or beside the Vistula. This is further supported by the
similarity of occasional runes to letters of one or other of the
Greek alphabets. However, continued discovery of early runic
texts in various regions of Europe do not allow to consider the
matter of the origin of runes conclusively proven.
Be it as it may, wherever and whenever they were created,
runes soon spread over the Germanic world, and by 500 AD they
are found not only in Denmark, Sweden, Norway, England, but
also in Poland, Russia and Hungary, recording different Germanic
languages and being cut, stamped, inlaid or impressed on metal,
bone, wood and stone.
Runes were used for many centuries and in many lands,
gradually changing in their passage through time and space. In
England the script died out, superseded by Roman, somewhere in
the eleventh century; in Germany and the Low Countries —
rather sooner. In Scandinavia and its colonies, however, runes
continued well into the Middle Ages. Nevertheless, the later runic
inscriptions are of comparatively little interest, for there is plenty
of other evidence for the state of the language they record,
whereas the early inscriptions are of great importance to the
linguist, for they record material for which there is otherwise
little or no evidence.
29
PART 1. LECTURES
Thus we may summarize the above discussion stating that
the principal features common to all the languages of the
Germanic language area were: (i) fixation of the main stress on
the initial syllable of the word; (ii) the first, or Germanic sound
shift affecting the Indo-European voiceless and voiced stops and
the spirant [s]; (iii) certain vowel changes; (iv) reduction in the
number of cases as compared to Common Indo-European; (v) full
development of the weak declension of the adjective with a
particular categorial meaning; (vi) development of a dental
preterite and appearance of the strong/weak verb distinction;
(vii) a peculiar alphabet.
Some more facts ...
The British
Britain, as far as we can trace men in our island, was first
inhabited by cave-men, who have left no history at all. In the
course of ages they passed away before the Iberians, or
Ivernians, who came from the east and bore a striking
resemblance to the Basques. It may be that some Mongolian
tribe, wandering west, drawn by the instinct which has driven
most race-migrations westward, sent offshoots north and south
— one to brave the dangers of the sea and inhabit Britain and
Ireland, one to cross the Pyrenees and remain sheltered in their
deep ravines. These sturdy voyagers were short and dark, harshfeatured and long-headed, worshipping the powers of Nature
with mysterious and cruel rites of human sacrifice, holding
beliefs in totems and ancestor-worship. When the stronger and
more civilised Celt came he drove before him these little dark
men, he enslaved their survivors and wedded their women, and
in his turn fell into slavery to the cruel Druidic religion of his
subjects. To these Iberians, and to the Celtic dread of them, we
probably owe all the stories of dwaifs, goblins, elves and earth30
1. INTRODUCTORY. GERMANIC J^NGUAGES
gnomes; and if we examine carefully the descriptions of the
abodes of these beings we shall find them not inconsistent with
the earth-dwellings, caves, circle huts, or even with the burial
mounds of the Iberian race.
The race that followed the Iberians, and drove them out or
subdued them, was the proud Aryan Celtic race. Of different
tribes, Gaels, Brythons and Belgcv, they were all one in spirit
and one in physical feature.
Tall, blue-eyed, with fair or red hair, they owerpowered the
diminutive Iberians in every way. Their civilisation was of a
much higher type than that of the Iberians; their weapons, their
war-chariots, their mode of life are all so closely similar to that
of the Greeks of Homer that a theory has been advanced and
ably defended that when on the continent the Celts — Gaelic or
Gaulish tribes from the north of Europe — had been invaded by
the Homeric Greeks. It is to the Celts that we owe a debt of
imperishable culture and civilisation. To them belongs our
passion for the past, the ardent patriotism, the longing for
spiritual beauty, so different from the Saxon materialism.
The Celt, however, had his day of supremacy and passed; the
Roman crushed his power of initiative and made him helpless
and dependent, and the Teuton — whether as Saxon, Angle,
Frisian or Jute — dwelt in his homes and ruled his former lands.
The Teuton was a hardier, more sturdy man than the Celt; he was
by choice a warrior and a sailor, a wanderer to other lands. To
him physical cowardice was the inforgivable sin, next to
treachery to his chieftain. A quiet death-bed was the worst end to
a man's life, in the Anglo-Saxon's creed: it was «a cow's death»,
to be avoided by everything in one's power, the only worthy
finish to a warrior's life being a death in fight. Perhaps there
was little of spiritual insight in the minds of these Angles and
Saxons, little love of beauty; little care for the amenities of life;
but they had a sturdy loyalty, an uprightness, a brave disregard
of death in the cause of duty, which we can still recognise in
modern Englishmen.
When the English, or Anglo-Saxons, as we generally call
them, had settled down in England, united their warring tribes
and developed a somewhat centralised givernment, their whole
national existence was imperilled by the incursions of the Danes,
31
PART I. LECTURES
or Northmen, Vikings from Norway and Iceland, whose fame and
the dread of whom went before them. They were related to the
nations they came to harry and plunder, but their spirit was
different from that of the conquered Teutonic tribes. The
rapturous fight with the elements in which the Northman lived
and moved and had his being, gave him a strain of ruthless
cruelty unlike anything in the more peaceful
Anglo-Saxon
character. There was also a power of bold and daring action, of
reckless valour, of rapid conception and execution, which
contrasted strongly with the slower and more placid
temperament of the Anglo-Saxon, and to this strain modern
Englishment probably owe the power of initiative, the love of
adventure and the daring action which have made England the
greatest colonising nation on the earth.
These were far from the last men of many nations that were
brought to England by war, trade, love of adventure or religion
and with whom the English came into contact during their long
and colourful history, all of them leaving their trace. With all
these different elements amalgamated in one, it is no wonder
that the present-day English nation, its nature and beliefs
represented in its language are a unique phenomenon worthy of
careful and detailed study.
after M.I. Ebbutt
LECTURE 2.
OLD ENGLISH.
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
"The greatest Englishman that ever lived
was King Alfred."
- Winston Churchill
"Alfred found learning dead and he restored it,
Education neglected and he revived it,
The laws powerless and he gave them force,
The church debased and he raised it,
The land ravaged by afearfid enemy from which
he delivered it - Alfred's name will live as long
as mankind shall respect the past"
(Inscription on the base of the statue
of King Alfred in Wantage,
Oxfordshire, his place of birth)
List of principal questions:
1.
Outer history
1.1. Principal written records
1.2. Dialectal classification
1.2.1. The dialects in Old English
1.2.2. Old English written records
2.
Inner history
2.1. Phonetics
2.2. Spelling
2.3. Grammar
2.4. Vocabulary
33
PART 1. LECTURES
1. Outer history
As we have already said, the forefathers of the English nation
belonged to the western subdivision of old Germanic tribes, and
the dialects they spoke later lay the foundation of the English
national language.
The history of the English language begins in the fifth
century AD. when the ruthless and barbaric Germanic tribes of
Angles, Saxons, Jutes, Frisians, who up to that time had lived in
western Europe between the Elbe and the Rhine, started their
invasion of the British Isles.
At the time of the invasion Britain was inhabited by the sor
called "romanised Celts", that is, Celts who had lived under the
Roman rule for over four centuries and who had acquired Roman
culture and ways of life and whose language had undergone
certain changes mainly in the form of borrowings from the Latin
language.
The Celtic tribes, whose languages, the same as Germanic,
also belonged to the Indo-European family, were at one time
among its most numerous representatives. At the beginning of our
era the Celts could be found on the territories of the present-day
Spain, Great Britain, western Germany and northern Italy. Before
that they had been known to reach even Greece and Asia Minor.
But under the steady attacks of Italic and Germanic tribes the
Celts had to retreat, so that in the areas where they were once
dominant they have left but the scantiest trace of their presence.
The Celts who first came to Britain gradually spread to
Ireland, Scotland and the Isle of Man. Their languages are
represented in modern times by Irish, Scottish Gaelic and Manx.
A later wave of Celtic tribes, having occupied for some centuries
the central part of England, were in turn driven westwards by
Germanic imvaders, and their modern language representatives
are Welsh, Cornish and Breton.
34
2. OLD ENGLISH. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
The Romans invaded Britannia as it was then called in 55—
54 ВС when the troops of Julius Caesar and others conquered the
isles. No centralised government was formed, instead there
existed petty principalities under the control of local landlords. In
407 AD, with the departure of the last Roman emissary
Constantine hostilities among the native tribes in England began
anew. To normalise the situation the local chieftains appealed to
influential Germanic tribes who lived on the continent inviting
them to come to their assistance, and in 449 the Germanic troops
Jed by Hengest and Horsa landed in Britain.
The Roman occupation of England left little mark on its future. Most of what the Romans did perished after they left, so it is
with the Germanic tribes that the history of England truly begins.
The invaders, or Barbarians, as they were generally called,
who came to the Isles were representatives of a by far inferior
civilisation than the Romans. A bulk of the invaders came from
the most backward and primitive of the Germanic tribes. They
were an agricultural rather than a pastoral people. Their tribal
organisation was rapidly disintegrating.
The invaders came to Britain in hosts consisting not only of
warriors, but also including labourers, women and children. They
plundered the country, took possession of almost all the fertile
land there and partly exterminated, and partly drove away the
native population to the less inhabited mountainous parts of the
country — Cornwall, Wales, Scotland. The rest of the natives
became slaves to the conquerors.
.In view of the historical facts mentioned above it is quite
clear why the language of the invaders underwent so few changes
under the influence of the Celtic tongue as almost no normal
intercourse between the invaded and the invaders was possible,
the latter being very few and far below socially.
It should be noted that nowadays the remnants of the Celtic
group of languages face the threat of complete disappearance,
35
PART 1. LECTURES
unable to survive in the competition with English. Cornish
became extinct already in the 18th century, Manx — after the
second world war. Scottish Gaelic is spoken only in the
Highlands by about 75 thousand people, Irish — by half a
million, the figures showing a steady declining tendency, and the
absolute majority of those speaking these languages are bilingual,
English being no less familiar to them than their former native
tongue. Although in recent years a certain revival of nationalist
sentiments helped to somewhat arrest the decline, many linguists
fear the inevitable disappearance of the whole branch of the IndoEuropean family of languages.
We have very little indirect evidence about the beginning of
the Old English period — 5th—7lh centuries. The first written
records were dated as far back as the beginning of the 8th century,
that is why the 5th—7th centuries are generally referred to as "the
pre-written period" of the English language.
1.1. Principal written records
of the Old English period
The principal written records that came to us through the
centuries date from as far back as the 8th century. They were
written with the help of the so-called "Runic Alphabet". This was
an alphabet of some 26 letters, the shape of which is quite
peculiar.
['fuGark], or ['fuGork]
We have already said that it is assumed the Runic alphabet
was composed by Germanic scribes in the II—III centuries AD.
and their angular shape is due to the material those inscriptions
were made on — wood, stone, bone — and the technique of
36
2. OLD ENGLISH. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
"writing" — the letters were not written but carved on those hard
materials. The word "rune" meant "mystery", and those letters
were originally considered to be magic signs known to very few
people, mainly monks, and not understood by the vast majority of
the illiterate population. Among the first Old English runic
inscriptions we generally mention two: the inscription on the socalled "Franks' casket" — a small box made of whalebone
containing a poem about it1, and the inscription on the "Ruthwell
cross" — a religious poem engraved on a stone cross found in
Scotland.
Rune
P
h
t>
F
<
X
N
1*
1
*
t
Anglo-Saxon
Name
Meaning
feoh
cattle, wealth
bison (aurochs)
thorn
god/mouth
journey/riding
torch
gift
joy
hail
necessity/trouble
ice
year
[unknown]
[unknown]
sun
Tiw (name of a god)
birch
horse
man
water/sea
Ing (name of a hero)
land/estate
day
oak
ash
bow
f
u
P
ur
0
OS
r
с
rad
cen
born
gfj]
giefu
w
h
n
i
j
P
wyn
X
h»gl
nied
is
gear
peor
eolh
sigel
tiw/tir
beorc
M
s
t
b
e
M
1
ng
oe
d
epel
daeg
a
ac
У
yr
t
и
r
m
eoh
man
lagu
ing
a;sc
'See a picture of the Franks' casket in Pan 2 — Seminars.
37
PART 1. LECTURES
Map 2-1. Germanic settlement in England
Source: Vie Cambridge Encyclopedia
of the English Language, 199S
38
2. OLD ENGLISH. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
th
In the 7 century the Christian faith was introduced and with
it there came many Latin-speaking monks who brought with them
their own Latin alphabet.
The Latin alphabet was used by the majority of the people
who could read and write. It ousted the Runic alphabet. But the
Latin alphabet could not denote all the sounds in the English
language, for example, the sounds [w], [0]. For that purpose
some runes were preserved — w, p, F*, or some Latin letters were
slightly altered — б to denote the sounds [0], [6] together with
the rune p.
This alphabet that is a combination of the Latin alphabet
with runes and some other innovations is called "insular writing",
i.e. the alphabet typical of the Isles. The majority of Old English
records are written in this insular alphabet. The spelling in these
early records is on the whole phonetic and reasonably consistent,
so that it is possible to learn much about the early pronunciation.
1.2. Dialectal classification
of Old English written records
1.2.1. The dialects in Old English
As we have already said, the onset of invasion by the
members of the four principal Germanic tribes: Angles, Saxons,
Jutes and Frisians — began about the middle of the fourth century and their conquest of England was completed within the next
century and a half. By about AD 600 they established their separate kingdoms, the principal among them being:
- those formed by the Angles: Northumbria (north of the
river Humber), Mercia (in the centre of England) and East Anglia
— central eastern part of the country;
- those formed by the Saxons — mainly to the south of the
river Thames: Wessex, Sussex and Essex;
- the one formed by the Jutes — Kent.
39
PART 1. LECTURES
Only the Frisians did not form a separate kingdom, but
intermarried with the population belonging to different tribes.
The prevailing importance of these seven kingdoms gave to
the next two centuries the title of Heptarchy. Gradually three of
the seven — Wessex, Mercia and Northumbria — began to establish some sort of domination over their smaller neighbours. It was
an important step towards the achieving the eventual unity of
England. Another vital factor contributing to the unity was the
appearance of Christianity in England in AD 597, and afterwards
the spread of Christianity and changes of the supremacy of this or
that kingdom follow almost the same course.
The Old English dialects are generally named after the
names of the kingdoms on the territory of which the given dialect
was spoken — the Northumbrian dialect, the Mercian dialect, the
Wessex dialect, etc.
Though the differences between the three types were later to
assume considerable importance, they were at first slight, and
records of the 8th and 9th centuries reveal that Englisc, as it was
collectively called, had by that time emerged as an independent,
language. The virtually complete geographical separation of
England from the Continent was a factor favouring the further
development of those characteristic features that already
distinguished English from its parent Germanic language.
Among the principal Old English dialects the most important
for us is the Wessex dialect, as the majority of Old English
written records that we have can be traced back to that dialect.
But the prominence of the Wessex dialect is also based on other
extralinguistic criteria.
As is known, efforts to unite England failed for a very long
period of time, because as soon as one kingdom became great it
was in the interests of the rest to pull it down. Some historians
say that the reason for that was the lack of the strongest possible
motive towards any union, namely, the presence of a foreign foe.
40
2. OLD ENGLISH. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Such enemy appeared in the second half of the 8lh century, when
the Northmen, particularly the Danes, began their devastating
raids on the isles. At the beginning of the 9th century, when the
Danish invaders destroyed in turn the dynasties of Northumbria,
Mercia and East Anglia, Wessex was left as the sole survivor, and
its leaders became the leaders of the emerging nation.
The most famous of all English kings, Alfred of Wessex,
which would later come to be called Alfred the Great, came to
the throne in 871 and is reputed to have been one of the best
kings ever to rule mankind. He successfully fought with the
Danes who by that time had conquered most of Eastern England
and were moving southwards towards Wessex. Alfred managed to
stop the Danes, although temporarily, and in 878 signed a treaty
with the Danish king dividing England between them.
But Alfred's true greatness lay not in his military, but peacetime activity. He set aside a half of the revenue to be spent on
educational needs, established schools where the sons of the
nobility could be taught to read and write, brought in foreign
scholars and craftsmen, restored monasteries and convents,
published a collection of laws and enforced them. He also
mastered Latin and translated many books into Anglo-Saxon and
ordered the compilation of the first history book, the AngloSaxon Chronicle, which was continued for more than two
centuries after his death. All this allows to say that even had
Alfred never fought a battle, he would still deserve a place among
the greatest rulers of history.
King Alfred formulated his aims as follows: "Desire for and
possession of earthly power never pleased me overmuch, and I
did not unduly desire this earthly rule... I desired to live worthily
as long as I lived, and to leave after my life, to the men who
should come after me, the memory of me in good works."
41
PART 1. LECTURES
Map 2-2. Old English dialects
2. OLD ENGLISH. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
However, after the death of Alfred the Great in 901 the
supremacy of Wessex gradually began to decline, and for a time,
from 1017 till 1042, the throne was occupied by Danish kings.
1.2.2. Old English written records
Old English written records which are rather numerous are
generally classified either in accordance with the alphabet used
or in accordance with the dialect of the scribe who wrote the
record.
If we speak about the first criterion — the alphabet (runic or
insular) -— the first group is rather scarcely represented (Frank's
casket, Ruthwell cross), the other group having many written
records. But generally the records are classified in accordance
with their dialect: Northumbrian (Franks' casket, Ruthwell cross,
Caedmon's hymns), Mercian (translation of the Psalter), Kentish
(psalms), West Saxon (The Anglo-Saxon chronicle, the
translation of a philosophical treatise Cura Pastoralis, King
Alfred's Orosius — a book on history).
There were also many translations from other dialects, an
example of which is Bede's Ecclesiastical History of the English
People (731 AD). Bede, a learned monk at Jarrow, is said to have
assimilated all the learning of his time. He wrote on language,
science and chronology and composed numerous commentaries
on the Old and New Testament.
With the rise of Wessex to the dominant position among the
Old English kingdoms in the 9th and. 10"1 centuries, and thanks to
the powerful influence of their learned King Alfred, the West
Saxon dialect became the chief vehicle of literature. All the
works of literary importance that have survived, both prose and
poetry, are written in West Saxon, with only occasional traces of
other dialects, and in this sense it may be regarded as typical of
the Old English period.
43
PART 1. LECTURES
2. Inner history
During the period the language was developing very slowly.
2.1. Phonetics
The phonetics of the Old English period was characterised
by a system of dynamic stress. The fixed stress fell on the first
root syllable:
agane (gone); 3eseon (see); 3aderian (gather)
The vowels had the following characteristic features:
a) The quantity and the quality of the vowel depended upon its
position in the word. Under stress any vowel could be found,
but in unstressed position there were no diphthongs or long
monophthongs, but only short vowels [a], [ej, [i], [o], [u].
b) The length of the stressed vowels (monophthongs and
diphthongs) was phonemic, which means that there could be
two words differing only in the length of the vowel:
metan (to mete, to measure) — metan (to meet)
pin (pin) — pin (pain)
god (god) — god (good)
ful (full) — ful (foul)
c) there was an exact parallelism of long and short vowels:
Short: а о е u i se у ea eo
Long: а о ё п Т з ё у ё а ё о
The consonants were few. Some of the modern sounds were
non-existent (Ц], [3], Щ №])•
The quality of the consonant very much depended on its
position in the word, especially the resonance (voiced and
voiceless sounds: hlaf [f] (loaf) — hlaford [v] (lord, "bread-keep
and articulation (palatal and velar sounds: climban [k] (to climb)
— cild [k'] (child)), etc.
44
2. OLD ENGLISH. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
2.2. Spelling
The Old English spelling was mainly phonetic, i.e. each
letter as a rule denoted one sound in every environment. Note
should be taken that the letters f, s, J), 5 could denote voiced
consonants in intervocal positions or voiceless otherwise; the
letter с was used to denote the sound [k] (palatal or velar); the
letter у denoted the sound [y] (similar to German [u] in the word
"GemUt" or Russian [ю] in the word "бюро").
The letter 3 could denote three different sounds:
0] — before or after front vowels [ae], [e], [i] :
3iefan (give), зёаг (year), dx^ (day)
[y] — after back vowels Fal, fol, lul and consonants П1 and
M:
da3as (days), fo^ian (follow)
[g] — before consonants and before back vowels [a], [o], [u]:
30d (good), 3leo (glee)
2.3. Grammar
Old English was a synthetic language (the lexical and
grammatical notions of the word were contained in one unit). It
was highly inflected, with many various affixes. The principal
grammatical means were suffixation, vowel interchange and
supplition.
Suffixation:
Ic Сёре (1 keep) — pU Cepst (you keep) — he Серб (he keeps)
Vowel interchange:
WrTtan (to write) — Ic wrat (I wrote)
Supplition:
3Ш1 (to go)
—
eode (went)
45
PART I. LECTURES
beon (to be) —
Ic eom (I am)
bu eart (you are)
he is (he is)
There was no fixed word-order in Old English, the order of
the words in the sentence being relatively free.
2.4. Vocabulary
Almost all of it was composed of native words, there were
very few borrowings.
Borrowings were mainly from Latin:
a) The forefathers of English, when on the Continent, had
contacts with the Roman empire and borrowed words connected
mainly with trade:
ciese (cheese), win (wine), aeppel (apple)
b) They borrowed Latin words from the Romanized Celts:
strast (street), weall (wall), myln (mill)
c) Some borrowings were due to the introduction of
Christianity:
biscop (bishop), deofol (devil), munic (monk)
New words appeared as a result of two processes:
a) word derivation:
' fisc+ere
= fiscere (fish —fisher)
wulle+en
= wyllen (wool — woolen)
claene+s+ian = claensian (clean — to cleanse)
b) word composition:
sunne + dae3 • = Sunnandas3 (sun + day = Sunday)
mona + dae3 = M5nandae3 (moon + day = Monday).
46
2. OLD ENGLISH. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Some more facts....
Origin of Modern Alphabet
The Northumbrian Alcuin of York (735—804) was the creator
of the modern alphabet. He was an English scholar who, while
head of the cathedral school of York, wrote a history of England.
Charlemagne, or Charles the Great, emperor of the Franks,
invited him to start a palace school at Aachen. Charlemagne
belonged to the famous dynasty of Carolingians. He was a
patron of letters and culture, and during his reign there began a
period of literary and artistic activity upsurge. This period of
intellectual advance, in which Alcuin played a leading role, was
called the Carolingian Renaissance.
Alcuin introduced
English scholastic
methods
to
Charlemagne's empire and wrote poignant love lyrics, but his
farthest-reaching contribution was to normalise the empire's
writing. When Alcuin arrived at Aachen, scribes at one end of
the empire could not read the writing of scribes at the other end.
Ironically, Charlemagne, who was probably illiterate himself,
understood the importance of clear communication and recordkeeping better than his own scribes.
Drawing from English and Irish models, especially the
Insular pointed hand, Alcuin created the Carolingian minuscule
hand, a highly readable script that was used by scribes
throughout the empire. This hand became the model for the
lowercase letters of the I5'h-century Italian Humanistic and
Chancery Cursive hands (the uppercase, letters were modeled
after I"- and 2'"'-centuiy Roman inscriptions in stone, such as
the Trajan Column). These hands in turn became the models for
the Roman and Italic typefaces introduced by Aldus Manutius
(1449—1515), which are the basis for most modern typefaces.
After D.F.B. Reed.
LECTURE 3.
MIDDLE ENGLISH.
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
n n
.
,.
,
"Never before has such terror appeared in
Britain as we have now sufferedfroma pagan
race, nor was it thought that such an inroad
from the sea could be made. Behold, the
church ofSt Cuthbert spattered with the blood
of the priests of God, despoiled of all its
ornaments; a place more venerable than all
in Britain is given as prey to pagan people."
Alcuin, AD 793
"It is not correct to paint the, Scandinavians
in either black or white; like most people they
were grey... They were no mean, destructive
people: rather people of wide vision who were to
make a considerable contribution to European
wholeness once they had become Christian and
had settled down to become the nations which we
know to-day."
.
D.M. Wilson, AD 1993
(Viking ship prow decoration,
Thames and Hudson archives)
List of principal questions:
1.
Outer history
1.1. Scandinavian Invasion
1.2. Norman Conquest
2.
1.3. Formation of the English national language
Inner history
2.1. Phonetics
2.2. Grammar
2.3. Word-stock
48
3. MIDDLE ENGLISH. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
1. Outer history
1.1. Scandinavian Invasion
The end of the Old English period and the beginning of
Middle English is marked by two outstanding political events —
the Scandinavian invasion and the Norman conquest.
It is impossible to state the exact date of the Scandinavian
invasion as it was a long process embracing over two centuries,
the first inroads of the Scandinavian Vikings having began as far
back as the end of the 8th century. Various Scandinavian
adventurers at the head of their troops came to England wave
after wave, although the English offered the invaders a stubborn
resistance. At first the invaders fought with the natives, robbed
and plundered the country, but later they began to settle on the
lands they had managed to conquer. The part of England which
suffered more from the invasion was the North-Eastern part of
the country. From that part the invaders trying to conquer the
whole of the country gradually proceeded to the South-West.
The kingdom that was the strongest among many existing in
Britain at that time and that could consequently withstand the
invasion more successfully than any other was the Wessex
kingdom, especially under the rule of King Alfred the Great. King
Alfred the Great was so powerful and successful in his struggle
against the invaders that hostilities ceased for a time and a peace
treaty was concluded — the Treaty of Wedmore, in accordance
with which the territory of the country was subdivided into two
parts: the south-western part remained English under the rule of
King Alfred and the north-eastern part was to be Scandinavian.
That part was referred to as Danela3U or Danelaw, i.e. the
territory which was under the rule of Scandinavians, or "Danes".
49
PART I. LECTURES
The Scandinavians in England remained very strong through
centuries, and at the beginning of the 1 lIh century, namely in the
period between 1016 and 1042 the whole of England came under
the Scandinavian rule — the conquest was completed and the
Danish king was seated on the English throne. Although in 1042
England was back under English power, the English king who
came to the throne — Edward the Confessor — was to be the last
English king for more than three centuries.
The Scandinavian invasion and the subsequent settlement of
the Scandinavian on the territory of England, the constant
contacts and intermixture of the English and the Scandinavians
brought about many changes in different spheres of the English
language: word-stock, grammar and phonetics. The influence of
Scandinavian dialects was especially felt in the North and East
parts of England, where mass settlement of the invaders and
intermarriages with the local population were especially
common. The relative ease of the mutual penetration of the
languages was conditioned by the circumstances of the AngloScandinavian contacts, i.e.:
a) There existed no political or social barriers between the
English and the Scandinavians, the latter not having formed the
ruling class of the society but living on an equal footing with the
English;
b) There were no cultural barriers between the two people as
they were approximately the same in their culture, habits and
customs due to their common origin, both of the nations being
Germanic.
c) The language difference was not so strong as to make their
mutual understanding impossible, as their speech developed from
the same source — Common Germanic, and the words
composing the basic word-stock of both the languages were the
same, and the grammar systems similar in essence.
3. MIDDLE ENGLISH. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Map 3-1. Viking attacks on England
Source: DM. Wilson
Tile Vikings and their origin, 1993
51
PART 1. LECTURES
1.2. Norman Conquest
The Norman Conquest began in 1066. The Normans were by
origin a Scandinavian tribe who two centuries back began their
inroads on the Northern part of France and finally occupied the
territory on both shores of the Seine. The French King Charles
the Simple ceded to the Normans the territory occupied by them,
which came to be called Normandy. The Normans adopted the
French language and culture, and when they came to Britain they
brought with them the French language.
In 1066 King Edward the Confessor died, and the Norman
Duke William, profiting by the weakness of King Harold who
succeeded King Edward on the English throne, invaded England.
He assembled an army, landed in England and in a battle of
Hastings on October 14, 1066 managed to defeat Harold and
proclaimed himself King of England.
The Norman conquest had far-reaching consequences for the
English people and the English language.
The English nobility perished through different reasons and
was replaced by the Norman barons. The new king William
confiscated the estates of the Anglo-Saxons nobility and
distributed them among the Norman barons. The Norman
conquerors continued pouring into England thousands after
thousands, years and years after the conquest, and during the
reign of King William over 200,000 Frenchmen settled in
England and occupied all positions of prominence in the country,
be it in court, Parliament, Church or school.
The heritage of the Norman Conquest was manifold. It
united England to Western Europe, opening the gates to European
culture and institutions, theology, philosophy and science. The
Conquest in effect meant a social revolution in England. The
lands of the Saxon aristocracy were divided up among the
52
3. MIDDLE ENGLISH. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Normans, who by 1087 composed almost 10% of the total
population. Each landlord, in return for his land, had to take an
oath of allegiance to the king and provide him with military
services if and when required.
The Saxon machinery of government was immensely
reinforced, with a Norman monarch and his officials as effective
centralised controllers. Royal power was spread to provinces,
royal justice was much more impartially done. The Normans
created a strong medieval monarchy which was gradually to
complete the unification of England.
The 13th century witnessed the appearance of the first
Parliament, or a council of barons, which later was changed to a
national Parliament, representing the nobility, clergy, knights of
the shires and major cities.
The Norman conquerors, though Germanic by origin, were
French by their language, habits and customs. They were a people
and a class that stood aloof from the conquered English, whose
habits and customs they despised and whose language they could
not understand. They spoke French and addressed people in
French. They taught their children French — the only language
they could speak, which is noticed by many writers and scholars.
And for more than two centuries after the conquest the English
country was ruled by French-speaking Kings and nobility, and the
French language was the state language of the country.
The Norman Conquest put an end to the West Saxon literary
language. But eventually after a prolonged struggle the English
language got ascendance over French and again became the state
language of the country. The victorious and defeated peoples
continued to speak their own languages. The language spoken
and written by the English continued to develop in accordance
with tendencies already active before the conquest.
The English language emerged after the straggle, but it came
in a different position. Its vocabulary was enriched by a great
53
PART 1. LECTURES
number of French words and its grammatical structure underwent
material changes.
They generally mention-the following decisive steps in the
way upward of the English language after the Norman conquest:
a) 1258 — Proclamation of King Henry III was published
besides French also in English;
b) 1362 — the English language became the language of
Parliament, courts of law; later, at the end of the century — the
language of teaching;
c) the rule of King Henry IV (1399—1413) — the first king
after the conquest whose native tongue was English.
The end of the 14th century also saw the first "English"
translation of the Bible, and Chaucer was writing his "English"
masterpieces. The new merchant class and the spread of lay
learning were building a national civilisation, and by the end of
the century French had probably died out as a spoken language.
1.3. Formation of the English
national language
We can speak about the English national language as a
language understood and mainly used throughout the country
beginning with late Middle English — Early New English. They
generally say that the end of the Middle English period and the
beginning of New English is marked by the following events in
the life of the English people:
1. The end of the war between the White and the Red Rose
— 1485 and the establishment of an absolute monarchy on the
British soil with Henry Tudor as the first absolute monarch — the
political expression of the English nation.
The War of the Roses (1455—1485) was the most important
event of the .15* century which marked the decay of feudalism
and the birth of a new social order. It signified the rise of an
54
3. MIDDLE ENGLISH. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
absolute monarchy in England and a political centralisation, and
consequently a linguistic centralisation leading to a
predominance of the national language over local dialects.
2. The introduction of printing — 1477 by William Caxton
(1422— 1490).
Printing was invented in Germany by Johann Gutenberg in
1438. It quickly spread to other countries and England was
among them. The first English printing office was founded in
1476 by William Caxton, and in 1477 there appeared the first
book to be printed in England called The Dictes and Sayings of
the Philosophers. The appearance of a considerable number of
printed books contributed to the normalisation of spelling and
grammar forms fostering the choice of a single variant over
others. William Caxton established a printing-press at
Westminster, from which he issued a stream of books, many of
them translated from Latin and French by himself. Caxton, a
native of Kent, acquired the London dialect and made a
conscious choice from among competing variants, which he even
described in a preface to one of his translations, saying that he
had submitted it to princess Margaret, sister of the then king, and
"anon she found a default in my English which she commanded
me to amend."
Since that time — the end of the 15"1 century the English
language began its development as the language of the English
nation, whereas up to that time, beginning with the Germanic
conquest of Britain in the 5th century and up to the 15th century,
what we call the English language was no more than a
conglomerate of dialects, first tribal and then local. Indeed, a
notable feature of the Middle English period is the dialectical
variety that finds expression in the written documents. It was only
•ate in the 14lh century that the London dialect, itself a mixture of
the southern and south-eastern dialects, began to emerge as the
dominant type.
55
PART 1. LECTURES
Thus, the English national language was formed on the basis
of the London dialect which was uppermost among Middle
English dialects due to the political, geographical, economic and
"linguistic" position of London which became the capital of
England already in the 11th century — before the Norman
conquest and which was in the 15th century a thriving economic
centre and port of England due to its geographical position near
the estuary of the largest river in England. The geographical
position of London as a large port and city in the centre of the
country where people of the North mingled with "people of the
South, on the one hand, enabled the Londoners to acquire
features of both southern and northern dialects, and on the other
hand, the people coming to London helped to spread the London
dialect all over the country.
The importance of the London dialect as the foundation of
the English national language grew also because of the fact that
many of the best writers of the 14th—15th centuries, and Geoffrey
Chaucer among them, whose poetry achieved tremendous
contemporary prestige and popularity, were Londoners or used
the London dialect in their writings. As we have said, the 15th
century is generally referred to as the time of the beginning of the
English national language. But the literary norm of the language
was established later, already in Early New English, many
English authors of the forthcoming centuries contributing to it,
among them such as Edmund Spenser, Christopher Marlowe, Ben
Johnson and, finally, William Shakespeare.
56
3. MIDDLE ENGLISH. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Map 3-2. Middle English dialects
57
PART 1. LECTURES
2. Inner history
The Middle English period was a time of unprecedentedly
rapid development of the language. For the first three centuries
English was only a spoken language, and as such had no norm
and could develop without any restrain. All the elements of the
language changed fundamentally.
2.1. Phonetics
The stress is dynamic and fixed in the native words. But in
the borrowed French words the stress was on the last syllable:
licour [li'ku:r], nature [na'nr.r], etc.
New consonant sounds developed in native words:
[П ship
OE
scip
[f ] child
[Cfe] bridge
cild
Ьгусз
The resonance of the consonant does not depend so much on
the position of the consonant, and voiced consonants can appear
not only in intervocal, but also in initial and other positions.
Vowels in unstressed position were reduced:
Old English
Middle English
These sounds were in the end of the word, and it neutralised
the difference between the suffixes — the main grammar means.
Compare:
58
3. MIDDLE ENGLISH. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Genitive Singular
Nominative Plural
Old English
Middle English
fisces ~~~^—^_ fishes
fiscas . - " - " " ^ fishes
Vowels under stress underwent mainly quantitative changes.
In Middle English we observe a rhythmic tendency, the aim of
which is to obliterate overlong and overshort sequences. The
tendency is to have in the word one long vowel + one consonant
or one short vowel + two consonants.
2.2. Grammar
The grammar system in Middle English gradually but very
quickly changed fundamentally: the Old English was a synthetic
language, the Middle English at the end of the period — an
analytical language. The principal grammatical means of the Old
English were preserved, but were no longer principal. At the end
of the Middle English period the analytical means, which began
developing in Middle English, are predominant. They are:
1. analytical verb-forms (Chaucer: perfect — hath holpen
(has helped); passive — engendered is (is bom));
2. the use of prepositions for grammatical purposes
(Chaucer; drought of March);
3. a fixed word-order began to develop.
2.3. Word-stock
In Middle English it underwent fundamental changes and
became almost new. If in Old English the word-stock was almost
completely native, in Middle English there were many
borrowings. The principal sources of them were:
1. Scandinavian (those who came in the end of the Old
English period) — over 500 words (take, give, sky, wrong, etc.);
59
PART I. LECTURES
2. French (the language of the Norman conquerors) — over
3500 words (government, army, battle, etc.).
Though the number of the French words is greater, all the
Scandinavian words — common, colloquial, everyday,
indispensable — entered the very core of the language, and their
influence is very great. The French words are generally terms
indispensable only in certain official spheres, but not colloquial.
The Scandinavian borrowings are intensive, the French
borrowings — extensive:
1. the Scandinavians and the English were linguistically
similar (both Germanic), the English and the French — different
(Germanic and Romance languages);
2. the English and the Scandinavians were similar socially
(neither of the nations formed the upper class); the French and
the English were different socially (the French-speaking people
forming the ruling class, the English-speaking — the lower
class);
3. the English and the Scandinavians had similar culture,
habits, customs, traditions; the French and the English —
different;
that is why the assimilation of the French words could not
proceed so quickly and intensively as that of Scandinavian.
The principal means of enriching vocabulary were thus outer
means, i.e. borrowings.
Some more facts....
Who are the Scots?
Our country and people come into recorded history in AD
84, characteristically resisting foreign domination as we were to
do on and off until 1603. By this time the Romans had
penetrated as far as modern Stirling. Calgacus, our native
60
3. MIDDLE ENGLISH. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
leader, addressed his men in the following terms : "The invaders
loot and massacre and call it government. They make a
wilderness and call it peace." The ensuing Battle of Mons
Graupius near Stirling checked the Romans and they retired
behind their fortified line stretching from what is now Glasgow
to Edinburgh.
Christianity was to unite the different tribes into that
conscious entity we now know as "Scottish". About 400 St
Ninian preached the faith to his own Pictish clansfolk. About
550 St Columba came from the famous monastery of lona to
evangelise many Scots and Picts. His friend, St Kentigern of
Glasgow, was the apostle of the Strathclyde Britons. These great
missionaries had many followers and disciples who continued
their apostolate. These men laid a sound foundation, for our
Scottish Christianity with its valuable cultural heritage stems
from them. Today it still informs most of us.
Scots, Picts and Britons have been mentioned and some hold
that these three words denote the "tattooed people". These unite
with the Celt, warrior in name, warrior in our history. Perhaps
our love of colourful tartans and our age-old martial spirit come
from this racial fusion, Angles and Vikings from the seventh
century onwards and Normans from the tenth are assimilated
into our race, giving us much, and taking much. By about the
twelfth century intermarriage and the Christian faith made us
into that united Scottish nation we still are today. About 900 the
word "Scot", originally meaning a native of Ireland, came to
mean one of ourselves.
By 1153 Scotland was one nation, though not all our
national strains were fully integrated. The lovely and remote
isles of the Hebrides did not become ours till 1266, and the
Orkneys and Shetlands not until 1467.
It needed the shock and storm of foreign invasion to fuse us
into a strong and virile nation — yet still fundamentally a kindly
one — a trait which comes into prominence so strikingly in the
long history of Scotland the Brave. Much more unites us now
than divides us. And though many of us have to leave Scotland,
as our small land cannot provide for us all at present, these
people and their descendants come back each year in their
61
PART I. LECTURES
thousands to the land of their ancestors, where they are inspired
and encouraged by the ever-fresh memory of the gallant exploits
of our forefathers.
From Pict and Scot and Cell and Briton,
And Angle, Viking, Norman diversity
We Scots in time from these were forged
Now conscious of our common unity.
Skirl of pipe and swirl of kilt —
A joy to us, a joy to others —
Fond memory of our mountain home
Unites all Scots as hand of brothers.
See Bruce and Wallace nobly fight
To free our folk and lochs and bens
While Burns and Scott and Raeburn too
Make known our land of lovely glens.
Queen Mary lives in spite of fate
In her descendants good and greatFor Charlie Flora death will face,
She, finest flower of Highland race.
Our men of God give out His Word,
New things and old, with charm and wit.
Dear Scotland the Brave aye bless it, Lord,
Hear we that Word by doing it.
After J. A. Carruth
LECTURE 4.
NEW ENGLISH.
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
"It was the nation and the race
dwelling all round the globe that
had the lion's heart."
Winston Churchill •
Walter Raleigh,
explorer of America
James Cook,
explorer of Australia
and New Zealand
David Livingstone,
explorer of Africa
Benjamin Franklin,
explorer of Antarctica
List of principal questions:
1. Outer history
1.1. Emergence of the nation
1.2. Establishment of the literary norm
1.3. Geographical expansion of English
2. Inner history
2.1. Phonetics
2.2. Grammar
2.3. Word-stock
PART 1. LECTURES
1. Outer history
1.1. Emergence of the nation
The 15 century is a border-line in the history of the English
people. In 1485 there ended the War between the Roses. The end
of the war meant the end of feudalism and the beginning of
capitalism, a new, more peaceful era and the transition between
the Middle Ages and the Renaissance. An absolute monarchy was
established, the first absolute monarch being Henry Tudor. It
meant a real unification of the country, political and economic,
resulted in the development of capitalism and made it inevitable
that one nation and one national language be established.
The first king of the period, Henry VII (1485—1509)
strengthened the monarchy and provided the revenue imperative
for its very existence. During his reign commerce and
shipbuilding were encouraged, and the material wealth of the
country increased. New lands — Newfoundland and Nova Scotia
— were discovered. Following in his steps, his son, Henry VIII
(1509—1547) broke away from the ecclesiastical influence of
Rome, made himself head of the Church of England and of the
State and transferred the property of the monasteries to himself.
Dozens of large ships were built, trade continued to develop, and
new territories were drawn into it. It was during the reign of
Henry's son, Edward VI (1547—1553), that trade with Muscovy,
or Russia, as we call it today, was opened up.
The long reign of Elizabeth I (1558—1603) was one of the
most remarkable for the country, its progress in the discovery and
colonizing field tremendous. Queen Elizabeth's reign was also
particularly rich in learning — it was the age of Shakespeare,
Sidney, Spencer, Bacon, Marlowe and many other famous names.
Nevertheless, the evident achievements in foreign policy,
trade and culture did not put an end to the controversy of various
64
4. NEW ENGLISH. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
powerful forces in the country. Another problem which was to
have far-reaching concequences was that of whether sovereignty
lay with monarch or Parliament advocating the interests of the
new developing classes of society. The strife between the Crown
and Parliament was aggavated by religious differences. The
development of the country required more regular revenue, and
forced the Crown to raise taxes, which met with disapproval from
Parliament.
In the XVII century Charles I (1625—1649) for over a
decade ruled without Parliament, but had finally to reach a
compromise, according to which the powers of Parliament were
greatly extended. Henceforth one legal system was to apply to the
king and his subjects alike, and no taxation was to be raised
without Parliament's consent. However, when Paliament
demanded further concessions, denied the king control of the
army, a crisis followed which is now known under the title of the
Great Rebellion. The Crown lost the ensuing war, Charles I
surrendered and was executed, and for over a decade the country
was ruled by Parliament alone, the most notable leader of that
time being Oliver Cromwell. Granted the title of Lord Protector,
he was a virtual dictator of the nation, heavily relying on the
Army and disillusioning Parliament which had first brought him
to power.
After the death of Oliver Cromwell the Army and Parliament
We
re unable to agree on a government, and the restoration of
monarchy that followed in 1660, when the son of the executed
kin
g, Charles II, was.invited to return to the throne, was more a.
restoration of Parliament than of the King himself. Charles II,
w
ho during the time of Cromwell lived in exile in France,
brought with him from the Continent a keen interest in scientific
development, culture and arts, together with a considerable
mfluence of the French language spoken by his supporters.
PART I. LECTURES
1.2. Establishment of the literary norm
As we have said, in New English there emerged one nation
and one national language. But the English literary norm was
formed only at the end of the 17* century, when there appeared
the first scientific English dictionaries and the first scientific
English grammar. In the 17* and 18* centuries there appeared a
great number of grammar books whose authors tried to stabilise
the use of the language. Thus Samuel Johnson, the author of the
famous Dictionary (1755), wrote that he preferred the use of
"regular and solemn" pronunciation to the "cursory and
colloquial." Many famous writers also greatly contributed to the
formation of English, and among them, first and foremost, the
great Shakespeare.
Early New English (15* — beginning of the 18* century) —
the establishment of the literary norm. The language that was
used in England at that time is reflected in the famous translation
of the Bible called the King James Bible (published in 16И).
Although the language of the Bible is Early Modern English, the
authors tried to use a more solemn and grand style and more
archaic expressions.
A great influence was also connected with the magazine
published by Joseph Addison and Richard Steele called The
Spectator (1711—1714), the authors of which discussed various
questions of the language, including its syntax and the use of
words.
-tit
Late New English — since the 18 century.
If the gradual acceptance of a virtually uniform dialect by all
writers is the most important event in the emergence of Modern
English, it must be recognised that this had already gone a
considerable way before 1500, and it was undoubtedly helped by
Caxton's introduction of printing in 1477. The fact that the
London dialect was used by him in his translations and prefaces,
66
4. NEW ENGUSH. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Map 4-1. The Growth of Empire
S m
" " J-K Horrabin. An Alias of European History
67
PART 1. LECTURES
and that Chaucer's works were among the books he published,
led to its rapid diffusion throughout the country. But the adoption
of a standard of spoken English was a slower process. It was not
until Elizabeth's time that the language of the court came to be
generally recognised as the best form of spoken English; and as
late as the 18*, and even the early 19* century country gentlemen
in their occasional visits to polite society in London were no
ashamed to use dialect.
Nevertheless, despite the persistence of wide varieties in
pronunciation, the basic phonetic changes that distinguish
Modern English from Middle English are profound, though they
are not reflected in a similar modification of spelling. The early
printers, whose practice was to prove of decisive importance for
the future, derived their spelling from the Middle English scribes
(a fact that largely accounts for the difficulty of English spelling
today). The most important of these changes was that affecting
the sound of vowels and diphthongs, with the result that the
"continental values" of Middle English were finally replaced by
an approximation to modern pronunciation. Lesser changes also
occurred in the pronunciation of consonants, though some ot
these have since been restored by conscious, and often mistaken,
attempts to adapt pronunciation more closely to the received
spelling.
1.3. Geographical expansion of English
in the li—20* centuries
and its effect on the language
Up to the 17l century the English language was spoken by
the people who lived only on the British Isles (at the time of
William the Conqueror there were about 2 million people), but
even there in the far-away mountainous parts of the country the
people preserved their own Celtic dialects very long into the New
68
4. NEW ENGLISH. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Map 4-2. The English Language Today
Source,- The Cambridge B^lopedia
"M" English Language, MS
69
PART 1. LECTURES
English period. Thus in Cornwall the local dialect, Cornish died
out in the 18th century. In Wales there arose a tendency to revive
the local Celtic language. In 1893 the Welsh University was
founded, and in 1961 the number of those speaking Welsh
amounted to 650 thousand. In Ireland through centuries a struggle
against English was fought. It reached its climax in 1916 with the
Irish rebellion. In 1922 the Irish free state was formed and in
1949 the new state — Eire — left the Commonwealth of Nations.
Now Eire occupies the whole but the Northern part of Ireland,
which is a part of Britain. The number of people rose from 300
thousand to over 600 thousand, but the majority speak English.
The penetration of the English language to other parts of the
globe mainly began in the 16 century together with the
expansion of British colonialism. The 16' century was an age of
great adventurers, and England's progress in the discovery and
colonising field was tremendous. The first Virginian colony was
founded; Drake circumnavigated the globe; the East India
Company was established and English seamen left their mark in
many parts of the world. In 1620 the famous ship The Mayflower
reached North America in the region which is now the state of
Massachusetts. This marked the beginning of English in the New
World.
The 18 century witnessed the coming of English to India,
where nowadays the language is widely spread, although its
sphere is limited to large cities and a certain social layer, and in
today's India English is a state language together with the native
languages of Hindi and Urdu.,
th In the 18 ' century England conquered Canada. During the
19ft century the colonisation of Australia took place. In the
20 century English penetrated into South Africa.
***
Now about 300 million people speak English as their
national language in various parts of the globe, and many times
70
4. NEW ENGLISH. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
that — as a second language. To foretell the future of any
language, English among them, is of course impossible, but the
mere fact of its wide diffusion throughout the world is a
guarantee that it will continue to change and develop.
2. Inner history
The speed of the development of the language was lesser
than in Middle English. The language developed quickly at the
beginning of the period and slowly — at the end (with the
exception of the word-stock which develops equally quickly
during the whole period). When the literary norm was formed, it,
being always very conservative, prevented the change of the
language, that is why the speed of the development slowed down.
2.1. Phonetics
2. LI. The system of stress
In native words the stress is fixed and falls on the first root
syllable (as in Old English and Middle English). Some of
the borrowed words were not fully assimilated phonetically, that
is why the stress falls on another syllable, those fully assimilated
have the stress on the first root syllable, like in native words.
Native English words are short — they have one or two
syllables, that is why it is a norm, a rhythmic tendency of the
language to have one stressed syllable and one unstressed one =»
in borrowed words there developed a system of two stresses.
Sometimes the stress is used to differentiate the words
formed from the same root by the process called conversion (to
pro'duce— 'produce).
71
PART I. LECTURES
2.1.2. Consonants
a) A new [3] was introduced in borrowed words. Otherwise
the changes were not so great as in Middle English.
b) Vocalisation of consonants (some consonants in some
positions were vocalised — they disappeared, influencing the
preceding vowel).
Ex.: [r] disappeared at the end of the words and before
consonants changing the quantity of the vowel immediately
preceding it:
for
form
Middle English
[for]
[form]
New English
[fo:]
[fo:m]
2.1.3. Vowels
a) In the unstressed position the vowels that were levelled in
Middle English generally disappeared at the end of the words.
Some of them were preserved for phonetic reasons only, where
the pronunciation without a vowel was impossible.
Compare, for example, the plural forms of nouns:
Old English
-as
Middle English
-es
New English
[z] dogs
[s] cats
[iz] dresses
b) All Middle English long vowels underwent the Great
Vowel'Shift (in early New English, 15th—18th century). They
became more narrow and more front. Some of them remained
monophthongs, others developed into diphthongs.
Middle English
he
name
[he:]
[na:me]
New English
[hi:]
[neim]
72
e: => i:
a: => ei
4. NEW ENGLISH. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
2.2. Grammar
In New English it did not change fundamentally. The main
changes are the strengthening of analytical features of the
language:
a) In many more cases empty grammatical words are used
(form-words);
b) Analytical forms of the Middle English are preserved, and
in addition to them in New English non-finite analytical forms
appear (in Middle English only finite forms could be analytical);
c) A fixed word-order is established.
2.3. Word-stock
The vocabulary is changing quickly. Many new words are
formed to express new notions, which are numerous.
Ways of enriching the vocabulary:
1. inner means (conversion: hand => to hand);
2, outer means. The sources here are numberless, as
the English have not only direct, but also indirect (through books,
later — TV, radio, films) contacts with all the world.
In the beginning of the Early New English (15 th —16 th
century) — the epoch of the Renaissance — there are many
borrowings from Greek, Italian, Latin.
The ,17th century is the period of Restoration =>.borrowings
come to the English language from French (a considerable
number of these words being brought by Charles II and his court).
In the 17th century the English appear in America =>
borrowings from the Indians' languages are registered.
In the 18"1 century the English appear in India => borrowings
from this source come to the English language (but these words
73
PART 1. LECTURES
are not very frequent, for they denote some particular reality of
India, ex.: curry).
In the 19* century the English colonisers appear in Australia
and New Zealand => new borrowings follow (kangaroo).
At the end of the 19th—beginning of the 20th century the
English appear in Africa, coming to the regions formerly
colonised by the Dutch => borrowings from Afrikaans and Dutch
appear.
Old English and Middle English Russian borrowings are
scarce — the contacts between the countries and their peoples
were difficult. In New English there are more borrowings: sable
(very dark), astrakhan, mammoth; in the 20lh century — soviet,
kolkhoz, perestroika, etc.
Some more facts...
Modern Dialects
More often than not it is still possible in Britain to tell from a
man's speech from which part of the country, sometimes even
from which county, he comes; while the phonetic differences
between the speech of any American and any Englishman are
even more apparent, although less than three hundred years ago
their accents would have been indistinguishable. With regard to
grammar, leaving aside dialect forms that are locally still »>
everyday use (e.g. such plurals as 'housen', or 'childer', or in
Dorset the indiscriminate use of the pronoun 'en' for 'him' or
'her'), there are significant differences. These are largely
independent
of educational background,
between
our
spontaneous colloquial speech and the written language.
Usually we should write: 'the man to whom I was speaking', 'as
tall as he', 'if I were she', 'am I not?', but most of us say. 'the
man who I was talking to', 'as tall as him', 'if I was her', 'aren't
I?' and it would be hazardous to express a confident opinion as
to which of these grammatical forms, the written or the spoken,
will eventually survive. More immediately obvious, perhaps, are
the changes taking place in respect of vocabulary. In some of the
74
4. NEW ENGLISH. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
older trades and industries the use of specific dialect terms is
still almost essential for the local conduct of everyday business;
while since the beginning of the century thousands of new words,
mainly derived from Greek and Latin, have been created to meet
the needs of scientists and technologists. At the same time, in
every department of life, our borrowing from other languages
continues, particularly from America; though here, more often
than we appreciate, they are simply restoring words and
expressions originally taken from us.
Broadly, these changes are of two kinds: those that arise
from tendencies inherent in the nature of the language; and
those that are the result of external factors. To the fanner belong
many phonetical and grammatical changes, and from their study
of language in general and of the whole history of English in
particular philologists have discovered that these tend to
conform to patterns, and can therefore be stated as 'laws'. The
latter type of development is usually the result of political and
social forces.
Reference has already been made to the effect of
geographical isolation on the early development of English, and
similarly it is clear that the preservation of a number of
Elizabethan and Stuart words and idioms in contemporary
American speech is due to the remoteness of the earliest settlers
from their native land, while political independence and the
encouragement of wholesale immigration from almost every part
of the world were subsequently
to cause yet further
differentiation between the two great English-speaking systems.
In contrast to such diversifying influences, others operate in the
direction of greater uniformity, for instance, in the spread of
literacy, increasing dependence on books and the extension of
broadcasting. Remembering that these examples of change and
variety are taken from a short period, it is easier to appreciate
the total qualitative effect produced by a series of small and
gradual modifications in the course of a millennium and a half.
During that period English has been transformed from the
dialect of a few thousand scattered tribesmen into a highly
developed language spoken by millions of people in many parts
of the world.
75
PART 1. LECTURES
In its original form Old English is today only intelligible to
specialists; even Middle English.the language of J. Chaucer, is
not easy to read without a glossary. Thus, while for purposes of
description it is justifiable to treat these as separate periods, and
to distinguish both from a language we are familiar with, it is
equally important to realise that at no stage were the people of
England any more conscious of the changes they were effecting
than we are today.
After D. Crystal
LECTURE 5.
OLD ENGLISH PHONETICS
In such ships Germanic tribes first came to the British Islands.
Souire: Vie Cambridge Encyclopedia of the English Language, 1995
List ofprincipal questions:
1.
Old English vowels
1.1. Origin of Old English vowel phonemes
1.2. Changes in Old English vowel phonemes
1.2.1. Breaking
1.2.2. Palatal mutation
1.2.3. Effect of palatal mutation upon grammar
and word-stock
2.
Old English consonants
2.1. Dependence of the quality of the consonant
phoneme upon its environment in the word
2.2. Grimm's law, Verner's law
77
PART 1. LECTURES
1. Old English vowels
1.0. There were the following vowel phonemes in Old English
monophthongs
a
e l
a зё ё I
0
0
diphthongs
u У
п У
еа
ёа
ео
ёо
As we see in Old English there existed an exact parallelism
between long vowels and the corresponding short vowels. Not
only monophthongs but even diphthongs found their counterparts
which differed from them not only in quality but also in quantity.
Thus we may say that in the system of vowels both the quality
and the quantity of the vowel was phonemic. All the diphthongs
were falling diphthongs with the first element stronger than the
second, the second element being more open than the first.
Examples:
monophthongs
a — a : stan
diphthongs
— da3as
(stone)
аё — аз: daed
(dead)
ёо—ео:
ceosan
(choose)
(days)
— dae3
ёа — е а :
(day)
ceas
(chose)
-- heorte
(heart)
-- eald
(old)
— 3od
6 — o : 3od
(god)
(good)
I — i : wrltan — writen
(write)
(written)
1.1. Origin of Old English
vowel phonemes
All Old English vowel phonemes can be traced back to Common
Germanic vowel phonemes. Old English monophthongs are, as a rule,
78
5. OLD ENGLISH PHONETICS
a further development of some Common Germanic monophthongs.
For example:
Old English
from Common Germanic
[a]
dags
ёгез (day)
0]
[i]
bindan
bindan (bind)
[o]
coren (chosen)
[u]
cusans, etc.
Some Old English monophthongs developed from Common
Germanic diphthongs:
Old English
from Common Germanic
[a]
ras (wrote)
[ai]
rais
Old English long diphthongs are a result of some further
development of Common Germanic diphthongs, though in the
course of history the quality of the diphthong may have
undergone a change:
Old English
from Common Germanic (Gothic)
ceosan (choose)
ceas (chose)
kiusan
kaus
Old English short diphthongs originated from monophthongs:
Old English
from Common Germanic
eald (old)
heorte (heart)
*ald
*herte
l
7>
PART I. LECTURES
1.2. Changes in Old English
vowel phonemes
1.2.0. The changes that took place in the prehistoric period of
the development of the English language and which explain the
difference between Old English and Common Germanic vowels were
of two types: assimilative changes and independent (non-assimilative)
changes.
Independent changes do not depend upon the environment
in which the given sound was found. They cannot be explained,
but they are merely stated.
Common Germanic
ai
a
Old English
>
>
a
аз, etc.
Assimilative changes are explained by the phonetic position
of the sound in the word and the change can and must be
explained. Among the many phonetic assimilative changes which
took place in the prehistoric period of the development of the
English language and which account for the discrepancy between
the Old English and the Common Germanic vowel system the
most important are breaking and palatal mutation.
1.2..1. Breaking
th
The process of breaking took place in the 6 century. It affected
two vowels — [se] and [e] when they were followed by the
consonants [r], [1], [h] generally followed by another consonant.
The resulting vowel was a diphthong (hence the name "breaking"
— a monophthong "was broken" into a diphthong), consequently the
process may be summed up" as diphthongization of short vowels [a?]
and [e] before certain consonant clusters.
80
5. OLD ENGLISH PHONETICS
For example:
a; > ea before r+consonant
1+consonant
h+consonant
h
final
asrm > earm (arm)
asld > eald (old)
aehta > eahta (eight)
sseh > seah (saw)
e > ea before r+consonant
lc+consonant
1 h+consonant
h
final
herte > heorte (heart)
melcan > meolcan (to milk)
selh > seolh (seal)
feh > feoh (cattle)
1.2.2. Palatal mutation
The qualitative change of Old English vowels that experts
call palatal mutation, or i-mutation, occurred somewhere during
the 6th—7th centuries. The process affected Germanic words where a
vowel in a stressed syllable was immediately followed by the sound [i]
or [j] in the next syllable. Almost all vowels, both diphthongs and
monophthongs, in the context described above became further
forward and higher, or more palatal and more narrow, with the
exception of [e] and [i] which could go no further. This may be
described as a kind of vowel hamiony — a natural process affecting
many modern languages: the vowels mutate, the change being caused
by their partial assimilation to the following vowel (or semi-vowel).
Monophthongs
a>e
ae > e
a > её
о>e
* strangipu
*tselian
*halian
*ofstian
> strengpu1 (strength)
> tellan (to tell)
> hiilan (to heal)
> efstan (to hurry)
1
Compare with the root vowel of the noun "talu" from the root of which the
i"b was formed, or in the second case the adjective "slrang" and the noun
"streng".
ve
81
PART 1. LECTURES
о>ё
u >у
п>у
*domian
*fullian
*CUbian
> deman (to deem)
> fyllan (to fill)
> cypan (to announce)
As a result of palatal mutation new phonemes entered the vowelsystem in Old English — the vowel phoneme [y] and. the vowel
phoneme [y], the result of the mutation of [u] and [п], respectively.
Diphthongs
ea > ie
ёа > Те
eo > ie
to > Те
*ealdira
*3eleafian
*afeorrian
*3etreowi
> ieldra (elder)
> 3el!efan (to believe)
> afierran (to remove)
> 3etnewe (true)
1.2.3. Effect of palatal mutation upon grammar and
word-stock
Though palatal mutation was a phonetic process it left traces
in Old English grammar and word-stock.
Grammar: As a result of the process of palatal mutation
there appeared vowel gradation in the system of the declension of
nouns (root-stem declension). In the system of adjectives we have
vowel gradation in the degrees of comparison, in the system of verbs
vowel gradation is found in Old English irregular weak verbs.1
Word-stock: Palatal mutation resulted in vowel interchange as a
word building means.
1
Adjective
Verb
ful (full)
Noun
dom (doom)
fyllan (fill)
Verb
deman (deem)
Verb
sittan (sit)
Verb
settan (set)
See Lecture 7, Old English Grammar.
82
5. OLD ENGLISH PHONETICS
2. Old English consonants
2.0. The Old English consonant system consisted of some 14
consonant phonemes denoted by the letters
p, b, m, f, t, d, n, s, r, 1, b(5),c, 3, h.
The consonant system in Old English manifested the following
peculiarities.
1. The relatively small number of consonant phonemes — only
14 phonemes.
2. The absence of affricates and fricative consonants which
we now find in the language such as
WL [d 3 ], [J]> [3]
3. Dependence of the quality of the phoneme upon its
environment in the word.
If the first two points require no particular explanation, the
last point calls for a special comment.
2.1. Dependence of the quality of the consonant
phoneme upon its environment in the word
Among the 14 consonant phonemes that existed in Old English
there were at least 5 that gave us positional variants which stand rather
wide apart.
1 • The phonemes denoted by the letters f, J>, d or s are.voiced or
voiceless depending upon their phonetic position. They are generally
voiced in the so-called "intervocaj position" that is between vowels
and voiceless otherwise.
For example:
hlaf[f]
(bread)
—
hlaford[v]
(lord, originally hlafweard — bread-keeper)
83
PART I. LECTURES
36s [s]
—
35ses [z]
(goose, Nom. Sing.)
(Gen. Sing.)
tod [9] •
to6es [6]
—
(tooth, Nom. Sing.)
(Gen. Sing.)
2. The phoneme denoted by the letter с also gave at least two
1
variants — palatal [k ] and velar [k]. In the majority of cases it was a
velar consonant and palatal generally before the vowel i. Compare:
Cild (child) , SCip (ship)
1
where с denotes the palatal consonant [k ] and such words as
can (can), climban (to climb)
when the letter с denotes the corresponding velar variant of the
phoneme [k].
3. Similar remarks can be made about the phoneme denoted
by the letter 3: we have the voiced velar plosive variant [g] of it at the
beginning of the word before back vowels or consonants or in the
middle of the word after n:
3od (good), 3retan (to greet, to address), запзап (to go),
the voiced velar fricative variant [y] in the middle of the word
between back vowels:
da3as (days),
the voice palatal fricative variant [j] before and after front vowels:
dae3 (day), зёаг (year).
The system of consonant phonemes that we observe in Old
English involves certain peculiarities that are typical of the majority of
Germanic dialects which set them (those Germanic dialects and Old
English among them) apart from the majority of the Indo-European
84
5. OLD ENGLISH PHONETICS
languages. Those peculiarities were mainly accounted for by two
linguists — Jacob Grimm and Karl Verner, hence they are generally
referred to as "Grimm's law" (or the first Germanic consonant shift)
1
and "Verner's Jaw" .
2.2. Grimm's law & Verner's law
Grimm's law explains the correspondence between certain
groups of Germanic and non-Germanic consonants. Those
correspondences involve three sets of Germanic consonants,
consequently they generally speak of three stages of Grimm's law. But
we shall speak here about only one stage which is the simplest to
explain and the most consistent — the Germanic consonants [f], [8],
[h] and the corresponding consonants [p], [t] [k] we find in similar
phonetic environment.
The essence of this stage of the first Germanic consonant shift is
the following:
The voiceless plosive consonants [p], [t], [k] of IndoEuropean languages other than Germanic shifted in Germanic
languages into the voiceless fricative consonants [f], [9], [h]. It
was a non-assimilative change which presumably affected
Germanic languages at the beginning of the first millennium AD.
Examples:
Russian
пена
пять
Три
Ты
кров, кровля
Greek
Old English
fama (foam)
fiv (five)
6rie (three)
t>U (thou)
hrof (roof)
heorte (heart)
eahta (eight)
kardia
octo
' p or more discussion of Grimm's law and Verner's law see Lecture 1.
85
PART 1. LECTURES
It should be noted, however, that these correspondences are not
absolutely clear in all the cases. Some more complicated phenomena
were formulated in the so-called Venter's law.
A careful analysis of Germanic words and the corresponding
Indo-European words other than Germanic shows, however, that
there are certain words or word-forms in Germanic languages
where instead of the expected voiceless fricative consonants we
find in Germanic languages voiced plosive consonants. These
seeming "exceptions" to the rule are a result of the further
development of the fricative consonants which appeared in Germanic
languages after the first consonant shift.
The essence of this change was explained by Karl Verner —
hence its name: Verner's law.
The Germanic voiceless fricative consonants [f], [0], [h] which
appeared due to Grimm's law later became voiced if they were found
after unstressed vowels. Compare:
Latin
pater
Old English
feeder (father)
t>0 in accordance with Grimm's law, but as the stress in the word
"fseder" in the prehistoric period was on the second syllable the
voiceless fricative consonant [0] became voiced [5]; later the voiced
fricative consonant [6] underwent "hardening" and became [d].
Consequently the whole process of the change may be presented in
the following way:
I.E. [t]
>
Com. Germ. [9] >
Grimm's law
[3]
>
[d]
Verner'slaw hardening
The change referred to as "Verner's law" also affected a fourth
consonant — [s] in addition to the three consonants which appeared
in the language under Grimm's law, i.e. [f], [0], [h]. The [s] was also
voiced after unstressed vowels — [s] > fz], later the resulting
86
5. OLD ENGLISH PHONETICS
consonant [z] became [r] — the change [z] > [r] is called rhotacism.
Verner's law explains the appearance of "consonant gradation" in
some strong verbs. For instance:
I
II
cwe9an
ceosan
cwsed
ceas
III
IV
cwaedon cweden (say, Strong V)
curon
coren
(choose, Strong II), etc.
In Common Germanic the stress in the third and fourth verbforms originally fell on the second syllable, hence the consonant
[9] and the consonant [s] which were originally in the forms
cwsdon/cweden and curon/coren became voiced, i.e. *[9] > [6]
and [s] > [z] — Vemer's law, later [5] > [d] — hardening and [z] > [r]
— rhotacism1.
Some more facts...
Relative Chronology
Temporal variation affects any language, giving rise to
various highly distinctive processes and varieties. How, then,
can one know when exactly the changes in the language, if any,
took place?
The time of the change, like that of many language
phenomena, may be established with sufficient accuracy by
relating it to other events, borrowings among them. It would be
clear that foreign words entering the language while a certain
phonetic change was in force would be affected in the same way
as native words, and those borrowed after it was over would
remain unchanged.
Thus, palatal mutation is thought to have begun after the
Anglo-Saxon invaders arrived in Britain, but before the Old
English was first written down, because the words which
emerged in Old English out of the Germanic spoken on the
Rhotacism affected only North and West Germanic languages. It did not affect
ast
Germanic languages and the Gothic language among them.
87
PART 1. LECTURES
Continent looked and, consequently, sounded very different
from their later counterparts in the early days of German. Early
Latin borrowings — those acquired in the pre-written period of
the English language — are affected by palatal mutation:
hat. molina
> OE myln (mill),
Lat. caseus
> OE cyse (cheese),
although no French word shows the change. This proves that at
the time of the earliest contacts with French the process was no
longer in force.
A still more difficult task is to establish the chronology of
the great consonant shift, described by Jakob Grimm and now
bearing his name as the Grimm's law. At one time it was thought
that the changes took place simultaneously in separate groups
into the Indo-European family had split. But so great a change
must have been resulted from a long and gradual process. The
lower limit is set by the fact that the mutation did not affect
Latin and Greek words borrowed through early contact with
the Mediterranean nations, so that we may take the first century
A.D. as the time by which the first consonant shift was fully
accomplished.
As to the upper limit — the beginning of the change — it is
far more a matter of conjecture, although it had apparently not
begun when certain words were borrowed from the Finns. Thus
we may say that the first consonant change was at its height in
the centuries immediately preceding the Christian era.
It.will be seen further that the situation with phonetic
changes in later periods is considerably simpler, for there exists
written evidence to support the educated guesswork based on
logic and comparative reconstruction.
After O.F. Emerson
LECTURE 6.
OLD ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
Т Щ NOMINAL SYSTEM
Norntan uniform
Anglo-Saxon uniform
Source: The New Universal Library, 1969
List of principal questions:
1. General survey of the nominal system
2. The noun
2.1.Gender
2.2.Number
2.3.Case
2.4.Homonymity of forms in Old English and its
influence on the further development of noun
forms
3. The pronoun
3.1.Personal pronouns
3.2.Other pronouns
4. The adjective
4.1.Declension of adjectives
4.2.Degrees of comparison of adjectives
89
PART 1. LECTURES
0. Old English grammar
0. The Old English language was a synthetic language which
means that all the principal grammatical notions were expressed
by a change of the form of the word in the narrow meaning of the
term.
The grammatical means that the English language used were
primarily a) suffixation, b) vowel gradation and c) use of
suppletive forms.
Old English was a highly inflected language. The abundance
of inflections resulted from the fact that the paradigm of
declension and the paradigm of conjugation were formed by
many grammatical categories and there was more than one
declension in the system of declension and more than one
conjugation in the system of conjugation due to the splitting of
the once uniform paradigm in accordance with the original
structure of the word.
1. General survey of ihe nominal system
1.0. There were five declinable parts of speech in Old
English1: the noun, the pronoun, the adjective, the numeral,'the
participle. The nominal paradigm in Old English was
characterised by the following grammatical categories (see Table
6.1).
As we can see, the paradigms of different parts of speech had
the same number of grammatical categories but these parts of
speech were different in the number of categorial forms
composing a given grammatical category. Hence the system of
forms of each part of speech requires special consideration.
Among the non-finite forms of the verb the infinitive was also declined.
90
6. OLD ENGLISH GRAMMAR. THE NOMINAL SYSTEM
Table 6-/.Grammatical categories
of declinable parts of speech
^ \ ^ Categories
Parts^\^^
of speech ^ ^ \
Gender
Number
Case
Noun
Pronoun
Adjective
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Numeral
+
+
+
2. The noun
2.0. The Old English noun paradigm was composed by the
following grammatical categories: gender, number, case.
2.1. Gender
The category of gender was formed by the opposition of
three gender-forms: masculine, feminine and neuter. All nouns,
no matter whether they denoted living beings, inanimate things or
abstract notions belonged to one of the three genders.
The subdivision of Old English nouns in accordance with
their grammatical gender is traditional, the correspondence
between the meaning of the word and its grammatical gender
bei
ng hard to trace.
Some nouns denoting animals were also treated.as neuter,
s
uch as cicen (chicken), hors (horse), etc.
The grammatical gender did not always coincide with the
natural gender of the person and sometimes even contradicted it
(thus, for instance, the noun wifman (woman) was declined as
Masculine).
91
PART I. LECTURES
Compare stSn (stone, masculine), ban (bone, neuter), cwen (queen,
feminine) which belong to different genders but have similar
forms.
More examples:
Male beings
faeder (father)
sunu (son)
cyning (king)
Masculine
Lifeless things
hlaf (bread)
Stan (stone)
hrof (roof)
Feminine
Female beings Lifeless things
modor (mother) tunge (tongue)
dohter (daughter) meolc (milk)
CWen (queen)
3OS (goose)
Living beings
cicen (chicken)
hors (horse)
madden (maiden)
Abstract notions
Stenc (stench)
faer (fear)
nama (name)
dom (doom)
Abstract notions
trywdu (truth)
huntin3 (hunting)
lufu (love)
Neuter
Lifeless things
ёазе (eye)
scip (ship)
Abstract notions
mod (mood)
riht (right)
2.2. Number
The grammatical category of number was formed by the
opposition of two categorial forms: the singular and the plural.
Nominative Singular
Nominative Plural
fiscas
ёазап
te6
scipu
use (fish)
ёазе (eye)
t55 (tooth)
scip (ship)
92
6. OLD ENGLISH GRAMMAR. THE NOMINAL SYSTEM
2.3. Case
The Old English noun formed its paradigm by the opposition
of three genders, two numbers and four cases. Thus, presumably,
the noun had twenty-four word-forms.
On the whole the same could be observed in Common
Germanic. In the course of the development of Old English,
however, the original paradigm had undergone great changes due
to the fusion of the original stem suffix and the original
grammatical ending into one element which from the point of
view of Old English is to be regarded as a grammatical ending.
As a result of that fusion nouns that are known to have had
different stem-suffixes originally in Old English acquired
materially different endings in the same case, for example:
a-stem
Nominative plural
б-stem
n-stem
stan-as (stones) car-a (cares)
nam-an (names), etc.
The original stem suffixes were formed both by vowels and
by consonants. Thus there were two respective principal groups
of declensions in Old English: the vowel declension ("strong"
declension) and the consonant declension ("weak" declension).
The vowel (strong) declension comprises four principal
Paradigms: the a-stem, the o-stem, the u-stem and the i-stem
paradigm.
The consonant declension comprises nouns with, the stem
originally ending in -n, -r, -s and some other consonants.
In rare cases, however, the new form is constructed by
adding the ending directly to the root. It is these words that
formed the so-called root-stem declension.
93
PART 1. LECTURES
Table 6-2. Declensions in Old English
^Declension
Vowel (strong) stems Consonant (weak) stem Root
Case \ .
n
о
u
i
and number\ а
Nom. Sing. stan cam sunu wine nama
(stone) (care) (son) (wine) (name)
Nom. Plur.
stanas cara suna
wine
stems
r
faeder
(father)
naman fsederos
Vowel-Stems. Declension ofa-stem
s
lamb fot
(lamb) (foot)
lamb
fet
nouns
This type of declension consists of the masculine and the
neuter genders of Old English nouns. As a rule those are common
everyday words that formed the very core of the word-stock, such
as:
ЪШ (bread), hwffirte (wheat), hors (horse), fisc (fish), SCip (ship)
etc.
As is seen from Table 6-3 below, the paradigm of the a-stem
nouns is characterised by the homonymity of the Nominative and
Accusative case-forms. The rest of the forms retain their endings.
The difference between the genders of the nouns is clearly seen
from the different endings in the Nominative and the Accusative
plural, i.e. -as for the masculine and -u for the neuter.1
Consonant stems. Declension ofn-stem nouns
The consonant declensions consisted of nouns with the stern
originally ending in -n, -r, -s and other consonants.2
1
Nouns which had a long stem syllable had the zero ending in the Nominative
and the Accusative Plural (such as sceap (sheep), land (land), etc.)
2
Declensions of stems other than -n are not analysed here as nouns belonging
to them are few and show a tendency to fall under other declensions.
94
6. OLD ENGLISH GRAMMAR. THE NOMINAL SYSTEM
Masculine
Neuter
Singular
Nominative
Genitive
Dative
Accusative
fisc (fish)
fisces
fisce
fisc
scip (ship)
scipes
scipe
scip
Plural
Table 6-3. Declension of a-stem nouns
Nominative
Genitive
Dative
Accusative
fiscas
fisca
fiscum
fiscas
scipu
scipa
scipum
scipu
Case
^^~^-^^^
The n-stem class was formed by nouns of all the three
genders, such as nama (name.) — masculine, tunge (tongue) —
feminine, еазе (eye) — neuter.
table 6-4. Declension of n-stem nouns
Feminine
Neuter
Nominative
Genitive
Dative
Accusative
nama (name)
naman
naman
naman
tunge (tongue)
tungan
tungan
tungan
еазе (eye)
еазап
еазап
еазе
Nominative
Genitive
Dative
Accusative
naman
namena
namum
naman
tungan
tungena
tungum
tungan
еазап
еазепа
еазшп
еазап
/
Plural
f
Singular
^*~\Gender Masculine
Case^\^
.95
PART 1. LECTURES
The n-stem was the most important among all the
consonant stem declensions. This class of nouns was composed
of common words. The group was very extensive in Old English
and like the a-stem declension it exhibited a tendency to spread
its forms over other declensions.
The original stem-suffix -n may be observed in the majority
of case forms, but very often the grammatical ending had been
dropped in the pre-written period; this phenomenon gave rise to
a well-marked homonymity of the noun forms of the declension.
Five case forms of the masculine and the feminine genders
all the Singular with the exception of the Nominative and the
Nominative and the Accusative plural are homonymous, in case
of neuter nouns only four forms are homonymous, as the
Accusative case of neuter nouns is homonymous to the
Nominative.
Gender oppositions in this declension are also not distinct,
the masculine nouns being different from the feminine only in
the Nominative Singular and from the neuter — in the
Nominative and the Accusative Singular.
Declension of root-stem nouns
Root-stems require special consideration. This class was
not extensive and stood apart among other Old English nouns
due to peculiarities of form-building which was partly retained
in Modern English.
Unlike other classes the root-stem nouns such as man (man,
masculine), mfls (mouse, feminine) originally had no stem-suffix
the grammatical ending was added directly to the root. As a
result of that in the Dative Singular and the Nominative and the
Accusative Plural the root-vowel had undergone palatal
mutation due to the [i]-sound in the grammatical ending of
these forms. Later the ending was dropped and vowel
interchange remained the only means of differentiating the
96
6. OLD ENGLISH GRAMMAR. THE NOMINAL SYSTEM
1
given forms in the paradigm. The endings of the rest of the
forms are built up on analogy with those of the a-stems, hence the
difference between genders can- be observed only in the Genitive
Singular
es for the masculine, -e for the feminine.
Table 6-5. Declension of root-stem nouns
Masculine
Feminine
Singular
Nominative
Genitive
Dative
Accusative
man (man)
mus (mouse)
mannes
man
man
muse
mys
mus
Plural
^^^--^^
Gender
Case ^~""~"-~^^^
Nominative
Genitive
Dative
Accusative
men
manna
mannum
men
mys
musa
musum
mys
2.4. Homonymity offorms in Old English
and its influence on the further development
of noun forms
In. the prehistoric period of the development of the English
language each case had an ending typical of its uninflected form.
In the course of the development of the English language,
however, due to various semantic and phonetic changes different
cases began to develop similar endings within one and the same
paradigm; this phenomenon gave rise to the well-marked
1
The feminine nouns with the short root had the ending -u in the Nominative
and the Accusative Singular, and -e in the Nominative and the Accusative
Plural.
4 История английского языка
97
PART 1. LECTURES
homonymity of case-forms in English. The reference table given
below show the principal noun suffixes in Old English. The table
serves to prove that the twenty-four word-forms which built up
the noun paradigm had but nine materially different endings.
The most distinct among them are:
-es
— genitive singular, masculine and neuter
-a/ena — genitive plural, all genders
-um — dative plural, all genders
-as
— nominative and accusative plural, masculine.
As for the rest of the forms their mutual homonymity is
considerable. For example, nouns with the stem originally ending
in -a show gender differences only in the plural, all the forms in
the singular but the nominative being homonymous, irrespective
of gender and case differences.
The existence of different endings of nouns grammatically
alike and homonymous endings of nouns grammatically different
testifies to a certain inadequacy of the morphological devices or
the Old English noun to show the relation of the noun to other
words in the sentence and a need for the development of new
means to denote the grammatical meanings formerly denoted
morphologically.
Table 6-6. Reference table of the principal
grammatical noun suffixes in Old English
-
Gender
Masculine
l
Case ^ ^ - ^ a
— e
Nominative
Genitive
es es
Dative
e e
Accusative
— e
1
D-i
Nominative
Genitive
Dative
Accusative
as
a
um
as
u
u/o
a'
a
a
Neuter
Feminine
n
a
an
an
an
e/es a
0
u
e
e
e
i
u
u/o
e a
e a
-/e a
ana e a
a a ena a a
um um um um um
e/as a
an a e
98
a
a
um
a
i
-/e
es
e
e
n
e
an
an
e
n
e
an
an
an
a
n
enr
um
an
u/o u an
a
a ena
um um um
u/o/- u
an
es
e
—
6. OLD ENGLISH GRAMMAR. THE NOMINAL SYSTEM
3. The pronoun
0. The following classes of pronouns were to be observed in
Old English: personal, possessive, demonstrative, interrogative,
relative and indefinite pronouns.
The system of declension of the pronoun was not the same
for all the classes. It has at least two subsystems that should be
singled out: the declension of personal pronouns on the one hand
and the declension of other pronouns. Although the grammatical
categories of each subsystem were the same, i. e. gender, number,
case, the number of the categorial forms composing those
categories was different.
3.1. The personal pronoun
The Old English personal pronoun similar to the Old English
noun had the grammatical categories of gender, number and case.
Gender
Three genders could be distinguished in the pronominal
paradigm: masculine, feminine and neuter, but different forms for
different genders were found only in the third person singular, the
rest of the forms being indifferent to gender.
The category of number differs from that of the noun as in
the first and second person we find three categorial forms:
singular, dual and plural, for instance:
PART 1. LECTURES
Singular
Icf/j
Plural
Dual
wit (two of us)
we (we)
Case
The category of case is built up by the opposition of four
categorial forms, similar to those of the noun: Nominative,
Genitive, Dative, Accusative.
The table below may serve as an example of the declension
of personal pronouns.
Unlike the Old English noun, the paradigm of which was
composed of forms that mainly differed in the ending, the
paradigm of the Old English personal pronouns is built up by
suppletive forms and the homonymity of pronominal forms is not
great. We find it only in the Dative and the Accusative cases.
Table 6-7. Declension of the personal pronoun Ic
Nominative
Genitive
Dative
Accusative .
Singular
Dual
Plural
ic
mm
me
mec, me
wit
uncer
unc
unc
we
user, Ore
us
usic, us ..
3.2. Other pronouns
All Old English pronouns with the exception of personal
pronouns were declined almost alike. They expressed the
grammatical categories of gender (three forms: masculine,
feminine and neuter), number (two forms: singular and plural)
and case, which was built up by five categorial forms: the
Nominative, the Accusative, the Dative, the Genitive and the
100
6. OLD ENGLISH GRAMMAR. THE NOMINAL SYSTEM
Instrumental, different from the Dative only in the Singular. See,
for example, the declension of the demonstrative pronoun se in
Table 6-8 below.
If we compare the paradigms of these pronouns with those of
the noun and the personal pronoun we cannot but take notice that
they differed in the number of the categorial forms composing the
categories of case and number.
The personal pronoun unlike the rest of the pronouns and
the noun possessed three categorial forms composing the
category of number.
All the other pronouns unlike the personal pronoun and the
noun had five cases.
Table 6-8. Declension of the demonstrative pronoun se
4. The adjective
4.1. Declension of adjectives
The paradigm of the adjective is similar to that of the noun
and the pronoun, i.e. it comprises Gender, Number, Case.
The grammatical category of case was built up by five forms:
the Nominative, the Accusative, the Dative, the Genitive and the
Instrumental.
101
PART 1. LECTURES
There were two ways of declining Adjectives — the Definite
and the Indefinite declension. The adjective followed the Definite
declension mainly if the noun if modified had another attribute
— a demonstrative pronoun, and they were declined as Indefinite
otherwise.
The grammatical suffixes — forms of cases mainly
coincided with those of nouns with the stem originally ending in
a vowel or -n, yet in some cases we find pronominal suffixes. For
example, in the Genitive Plural, in the Dative singular, etc.
Table 6-9. Declension of adjectives
4.2. Degrees of comparison
The Adjective in Old English changed its forms not only to
show the relation of the given adjective to other words in the sentence which was expressed by the gender, number and case of the
adjective, but also to show the degree of the quality denoted by
the adjective, i.e., the forms of the adjective in Old English could
express degrees of comparison.
102
6. OLD ENGLISH GRAMMAR. THE NOMINAL SYSTEM
The degrees of comparison were expressed, the same as all
other grammatical notions, synthetically, namely:
a) by means of suffixation:
heard — heardra -— heardost
(hard)
b) by means of vowel gradation plus suffixation:
eald — ieldra — ieldest
(old)
c) by means of suppletive forms
3od — bettra — betst
(good),
the first means being unquestionably the most common.
Both suffixation and the use of suppletive forms in the
formation of the degrees of comparison are original means that
can be traced back to Common Germanic. But the use of vowel
interchange is a feature which is typical of the English language
only and was acquired by the language in the prehistoric period
of its development.
The origin of vowel gradation in the forms
eald — ieldra — ieldest
is a result of the process of palatal mutation which the root-vowel
ea underwent under the influence of the original stem-forming
suffix -i, i.e.
Positive
Comparative
Superlative
degree
degree
degree
eald
ieldra
ieldest
*ealdira
*ealdist
ealdira > ieldra
ealdist > ieldest
A similar case is observed with strong (strong), long (long),
etc.
***
Summary
A careful study of the systems of declensions of nouns,
pronouns and adjectives shows that the pronominal and adjectival
103
PART I. LECTURES
paradigms are more developed, they are richer in the number 01
word-forms. The homonymity of forms although existing
(especially in the declension of the definite adjective) is not so
pronounced and the oppositions between word-forms are more
evident.
There were three kinds of declensions — noun, pronoun
(with two subdivisions) and adjective. They had the same
grammatical categories, the main difference being in the quantity
of the categorial forms of number (three number-forms m
persona] pronouns) and case (four case-forms — nouns, five
case-forms — personal pronouns and adjectives).
The subdivision within the system of each part of speech was
based on the difference in the material forms (the noun — based
on the original stem-suffix, the pronoun — the number of
categorial forms, the adjective — strong and weak declensions
with the functional difference.
Some more facts...
Irregular Comparisons
Irregularity may be encountered not only in nouns and verbs,
but also in adjectives. Some forms of the degrees of comparison
may be called irregular, for they do not follow the predominant
pattern. The Positives marked below with an asterisk have
borrowed their comparatives and superlatives from other roots.
Such Positives are therefore irregular, because they have no
Comparative or Superlative of their own. The Comparative and
Superlative are also defective, because they have no Positive of
their own. In all the other examples the Comparative and
Superlative are irregular, but formed from the same root as the
Positive.
Bad, ill, evil*
worse*
worst*
Fore
Good*
former
better*
foremost, first
best*
104
6. OLD ENGLISH GRAMMAR. THE NOMINAL SYSTEM
Hind
Late
hinder
later, latter
hindmost
Little*
less*
least*
Much (quantity)*
more*
most*
Many (number)*
more*
most*
Nigh
nigher
Highest, next
Old
older, elder
oldest, eldest
latest, last
•
Many of the present-day irregular comparatives
are
interesting from a historical point of view. Late has later—
latest, beside the older latter—last, both of which have lost
something of their comparative force. Nearer—nearest are
examples of new forms based upon an older comparative near,
the older comparison being nigh—near—next. In a similar way
worser and lesser are based on true comparatives worse, less.
Far has two sets of words used somewhat indiscriminately as
comparative and superlative. These are farther—farthest,
further—furthest,
only one of which is original, the
comparative further. The superlative of further was fyrst, our
first, which has become entirely separated from the series. Later
the superlative furthest was formed, and by analogy the
remaining forms with the vowel offar. More—most are from an
original adverb ma, which became an adjective in Middle
English and remained in early Modern English as moe. It may
be mentioned also thai evil was in Old English use the positive
to worse— worst, but in Middle English both a new adjective
badde and ill from the Norse replaced evil in this use.
Another instance of irregularity in the degrees of comparison
is represented by the following five words which are adverbs in
the Positive degree, but adjectives in the Comparative and
Superlative:
far
farther
farthest
in
inner
innermost, inmost
out
outer, utter
uttermost, utmost
beneath
nether
nethermost
up
upper
uppermost
105
PART 1. LECTURES
Thus instances of irregularity may be found in all the principal
grammatical classes of English words.
after O.F. Emerson and J.C. Nesfield
LECTURE 7.
OLD ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
THE VERBAL SYSTEM
King Edward the Confessor (10421066) with his servant, fragment of a
contemporary embroidery ("Bayeux
tapestry", or "Queen Mathilde's
tapestry", Musee de Bayeux).
List ofprincipal questions:
1.
General survey of finite and non-finite forms of
the verb
2.
Grammatical categories of the finite forms of the verb
2.1. Person
2.2. Number
2.3. Tense
2.4. Mood
3.
Morphological classification of verbs
3.1. Strong verbs
3.2. Weak verbs
3.3. Irregular verbs
107
PART 1. LECTURES
1. General survey of finite and non-finite
forms of the verb
The verb-system in Old English was represented by two sets
of forms: the finite forms of the verb and the non-finite forms of
the verb, or verbals (Infinitive, Participle). Those two types of
forms — the finite and the non-finite — differed more than they
do today from the point of view of their respective grammatical
categories, as the verbals at that historical period were not
conjugated like the verb proper, but were declined like nouns or
adjectives. Thus the infinitive could have two case-forms which
may conventionally be called the "Common" case and the
"Dative" case.
Common case
Dative case
Writan (to write)
to writenne (so that I shall write)
cepan (to keep)
to cepenne (so that I shall keep)
drincan (to drink)
to drincenne (so that 1 shall drink)
The so-called Common case form of the Infinitive was
widely used in different syntactical functions, the Dative case
was used on a limited scale and mainly when the Infinitive
functioned as an adverbial modifier of purpose, i.e.
Ic 3a to drincenne (/ go to drink)
The participle had a well-developed system of forms, the
declension of the Participle resembling greatly the declension of
adjectives. The one typically "verbal" grammatical category of
the participle was the category of tense, for example:
Present tense
writende
cepende
drincende
Past tense
writen
cept
druncen
108
7. OLD ENGLISH GRAMMAR. THE VERBAL SYSTEM
2. Grammatical categories
of the finite forms of the verb
As we have already said the system of conjugation mainly
embraced the finite forms of the verb as the non-finite forms
were not conjugated but declined. The system of conjugation of
the Old English verb was built up by four grammatical categories,
those of person, number, tense and mood.
2.1. Person
There were three person forms in Old English: first, second
and third. For example:
First person
— Ic write
Second person — pu writes
Third person
— he wrlte5
But we have distinct person forms only in the Indicative
mood, the Imperative and the Oblique mood forms reflecting no
person differences and even the Indicative mood forms changing
for person only in the Singular, the plural forms being the same
irrespective of person, for example:
2.2. Number
The grammatical category of number was built up by the
opposition of two number forms — Singular and Plural
Ic write (singular)
we wnta6 (plural)
109
PART I. LECTURES
2.3. Tense
The grammatical category of tense was represented by two
forms: Present tense and Past terise, for example:
Present
Past
Indicative
Ic write
Ic wrat
Oblique
Ic write
Ic write
There was no Future tense in Old English, future events were
expressed with the help of a present tense verb + an adver
denoting futurity or by a combination of a modal verb (generally
sculan (shall) or willan (will) + an Infinitive, for example:
Wille ic asec3an mserum peodne min aerende
(7 want to tell the glorious prince my mission)
2.4. Mood
There were three mood forms in Old English: Indicative,
Imperative and Oblique, for example:
Indicative
Imperative
Oblique
pu cepst
сер
сере
The Indicative Mood and the Imperative Mood were used Ш
cases similar to those in which they are used now But the Oblique
mood in Old English differed greatly from the corresponding
mood in New English. There was only one mood form in Old
English that was used both to express events that are thought of
as unreal or as problematic — today there are two mood forms to
denote those two different kinds of events, conventionally called
the Subjunctive and the Conjunctive!
The forms of the Oblique Mood were also sometimes used in
contexts for which now the Indicative mood would be more
suitable — to present events in the so-called "Indirect speech":
He ssede past pset land sie swipe 1апз.
(He said that that land is very long/large).
110
7, OLD ENGLISH GRAMMAR, THE VERBAL SYSTEM
3. Morphological classification
of verbs
All Old English verbs may be subdivided into a number of
groups in accordance with the grammatical means with the help
of which they built their principal stems.
There were two principal means for forming verb-stems in
Old English: (1) by means of vowel interchange of the root vowel
and (2) by means of suffixation.
In accordance with these two methods of the formation of
the verb-stems all the verbs in Old English formed two main
groups — the strong verbs and the weak verbs. There were other
means of the formation of verb-stems in Old English as well, but
the number of verbs belonging to those groups was not large.
A.I. Smirnitsky suggested the following morphological
classification of verbs in Old English.
Table 7-1. Morphological classification
of Old English verbs
Strong verbs
I, II, III, IV, V, VI,
VII classes
Other verbs
Weak verbs
I, II, III classes
suppletive
irregular (anomalous)
preterite-present verbs
3.1. Strong verbs
The strong verbs are verbs which use vowel-interchange as
the principal means of expressing different grammatical
categories. They differ from weak'ones not only in the manner of
the building of their forms but also in the number of these
principal forms. The strong verbs have four principal forms, the
weak ones — three principal forms.
in
PART 1. LECTURES
These terms "strong" and "weak" were introduced into the
science of philology by the famous German linguist Jacob Grimm
who considered strong verbs to be of "a more noble nature" as
compared with weak verbs, because strong verbs conjugated by
means of vowel interchange better reflected the prehistoric
"golden age" of the language.
This vowel interchange, or "ablaut", which was the principal
grammatical means in the conjugation of the Old English strong
verbs was of two kinds: qualitative and quantitative.
The first five classes are mainly based on the qualitative
ablaut; the sixth class — on the quantitative ablaut; verbs of the
seventh class originally formed their principal forms by means ot
the so-called reduplication of the root syllable, but in the course
of the development of the language that means was obliterated.
The Old English qualitative ablaut is akin to the Common
Germanic ablaut and even Indo-European ablaut — its essence,
as we remember, is the use of the gradation series consisting of a
front vowel, back vowel and zero,
e — o— 0
i — a —0
In Russian, for instance, they use two grades of the series,
e/zero to form the category of tense:
Present tense
Past tense
e — беру
0 — брал
Classes of the strong verbs
There were seven principal gradation series in Old English
and there were seven classes of the strong verbs — from I to VII.
As we have already said, the seventh class of the strong verbs
stands apart from the rest of the classes, because it was the only
class formed by verbs which originally used reduplication of the
root-vowel as their principal grammatical means; the sixth class
7. OLD ENGLISH GRAMMAR. THE VERBAL SYSTEM
of the strong verbs shows a peculiarity that is also typical only of
one class within the system of the strong verbs — original
quantitative gradation; the rest-of the classes — from I to VII —
are characterised by a certain similarity in their original
grammatical means as all of them originally used the same type
of qualitative ablaut, i.e. the interchange of a front vowel — back
vowel — zero in the form of
i —a-~0.
The difference in the gradation series of each of the classes
within the first five was mainly due to the splitting of that one
gradation into variants under the influence of the vowel or the
consonant of the stem that followed the vowel of gradation.
Thus in the first class of the strong verbs the vowel of
gradation was followed by the vowel -i, in the second — by the
vowel -u, in the third, fourth and fifth — by a sonorous consonant
+ another consonant, by one sonorous consonant or by a noise
consonant, respectively.
The root of the verbs of the sixth class consisted only of
consonants, and the purely quantitative vowel interchange of
prehistoric times developed into a quantitative and qualitative
°ne. The verbs of the seventh class show traces of the original
reduplication (addition of an extra syllable including the initial
consonant of the infinitive and having the vowels -e- or -eo- in
the past singular and plural)1.
The original structure of the verb is still quite clear in the
Gothic language. In table 7-3 below the bold type vowel in the
Gothic verb is the vowel of gradation. As is seen from the
examples, in the third and second forms of the verb there was no
vowel of gradation — the zero grade of gradation.
Рог more details on Class VII see also p. 124-125
113
PART 1. LECTURES
Table 7-2. Classes of the strong verbs
^XStems
N.
N.
Class
\
I
II
Ш
IV
V
VI
VII
I stem
Infinitive,
Present tense.
Imperative
Elstem
Past tense
singular
III stem
Past tense
plural
nsan (rise)
ceosan (choose)
bindan (bind)
teran (tear)
etan (eat)
scacan (shake)
hatan (-call)
ras
rison
curon
bundon
ceas
band
tser
set
scoc
het
tseron
seton
scocon
heton
IV stem
Past
Participle
JParUJl__
risen
coren
bunden
toren
eten
scacen
haten
Table 7-3. Old English and Gothic strong verbs
In the following table there is given the paradigm of some
types of strong verbs.
114
7. OLD ENGLISH GRAMMAR. THE VERBAL SYSTEM
Table 7-4. Conjugation of Old English strong verbs
PART 1. LECTURES
3.2. Weak verbs
The Old English weak verbs are relatively younger than the
strong verbs. They reflect a later stage in the development of
Germanic languages.
They were an open class in Old English, as new verbs that
entered the language generally formed their forms on analogy
with the weak verbs.
Whereas the strong verbs used vowel-interchange as a means
of differentiation among principal verb stems, the weak verbs
used for that purpose suffixation, namely, suffixes -t or -d. For
example:
cepan — cepte — cept (keep)
The strong verbs, as we remember, were "root-stem" verbs,
i.e. they did not have any stem-forming suffix following the root,
but they added their grammatical endings to the root directly. The
weak verbs, however, had a stem-forming suffix that followed the
root and preceded the grammatical ending. By way of an example
we may use a Gothic verb where that original stem-forming
suffix is better preserved than in English.
Infinitive
Past tense
Past Participle
Singular
I class haus-j-an (hear) haus-i-d-a
haus-i-ps
Classes of the weak verbs
In accordance with the character of the stem-suffix the weak
verbs are subdivided into three classes.
If the English strong verbs had four principal forms, the
English weak verbs had three principal forms.
We may draw the following table of the English weak verbs.
116
7. OLD ENGLISH GRAMMAR. THE VERBAL SYSTEM
Table 7-5. Classes of the weak verbs
Classes
Stem
suffix
I
i
oi
1
П
Past tense
Singular
Past
Participle
deman (deem)
fyllan (fill)
demde
fyllde
denied
fylled
lufian (love)
locian (look)
lufode
lufod
locode
locod
Infinitive
Class I - the stem-suffix -i
The class includes many verbs formed from other nouns,
adjectives or verbs. All of them have a front root vowel — the
result of the palatal mutation due to the -i- element of the stemsuffix.
e.g.
deman
fyllan
<- dom
<r- ful
In the course of time this palatal stem-suffix was as a rule
lost. It was preserved only in some participles in the form of -e(after sonorous consonants):
deman — demde — demed.
Class II - the stem-suffix -oi
The o-element of the suffix is preserved in the past tense and
in the Past Participle.
If the first class of the weak verbs reflected the palatal
mutation of the root-vowel due to the i-element of the stemsuffix, the root vowel of the weak verbs belonging to the second
class remained unchanged (because of the preceding 6).
luf-oian —> lufeian -» lufean —> lufian
The following table shows the paradigm of weak verbs.
' Of the third class there remained in Old English only three verbs — habban
(haw), libban (live), sec3an (see).
117
PART I. LECTURES
Table 7-6. Conjugation of Old English weak verbs
7. OLD ENGLISH GRAMMAR. THE VERBAL SYSTEM
3.3. Irregular verbs
Regularity means conformity with some unique principle or
pattern. It does not require any exact material marker. That is
why it is said that most verbs in Old English were regular I in
theor conjugation they followed one of the patterns typical of this
or that class of strong or weak verbs. However, there were also a
few irregular verbs, conjugated in some specific way.
Irregular weak verbs
The majority of the weak verbs belonging to the 1st and 2nd
classes were regular. The weak verbs of the 3 rd class are
considered to be irregular, because the class consists of only three
verbs, following their own individual patterns of form-building.
However, among the Is1 class there were also some irregular
verbs. This irregularity was inherent, but it was manifested in
pre-historic times and in Old English differently. Here we may
speak of such verbs as
tellan — talde — tald (to tell)
sellan — salde — said (to sell)
The sign of irregularity of the weak verbs in Old English was
vowel interchange, a feature not typical of this group of verbs.
The cause of it was the original absence of the sterrwforming
suffix -i- in Past Singular and Past Participle:
* talian — talde — tald
Under the influence of -i- only the form of the infinitive
could change during the process of palatal mutation:
* talian > tellan;
the other two remaining unchanged, and as a result the verb
acquired vowel interchange.
119
PART 1. LECTURES
Irregular strong verbs
There was a group of strong verbs which in the pre-wntten
period lost some of their forms and'preserved the others,
ontis
changing their lexical and grammatical meaning. F
historically past changed so as to become present in meaning.
These verbs are called preterite-present, for in the written peno
they build their present tense forms from the original past
(preterite) ones. The new past tense forms of these verbs in 0
English are built with the help of dental suffixation, like weak
verbs. The majority of preterite-present verbs are defective ver s
— they do not have all the forms of regular verbs, which los
their connection with the other forms and were dropped.
The group of Old English preterite-present verbs includes,
among others, the following:
infinitive
Present
Singular
азап
cunnan
sculan
тазап
4
cann
sceal
тэез
mot
Present
Plural
азоп
.cunnon
sculon
тазоп
moton
Past
Singular
ahte
cu5e
scolde
meahte
moste
Ратсц
азеп
cunnen
—
—
The Old English forms of preterite-present verbs correspond
to the following pre-written forms of the verb:
Pre-written
Infinitive
Written
Infinitive
Л
Past
Singular
Past
Plural
Present
Singular
Present
Plural
If
Participle u
Past
Singular
Participle II
Preterite-present verbs were further to develop in a number
of different ways.
120
7. OLD ENGLISH GRAMMAR. THE VERBAL SYSTEM
The verb a^an later developed into several words:
— the infinitive азап as a result of phonetic changes gave
the New English verb owe with the past tense/participle II form
owed built according to the pattern of weak verbs;
— the past participle азеп gave the New English adjective
own from which there was later formed the regular verb own —
owned ~ owned;
— the past tense singular ante developed into the modern
modal verb ought.
The verb cunnan lost its infinitive. The form can began to
be used for the present, the past tense form acquired the dental
suffix -d, in Middle English began to be spelled with -ou- instead
°f -u-, and later acquired the letter -I- on analogy with such verbs
as should and would.
The verb т а з а п also lost its infinitive and participle I, using
the form of таез for its present, and the former meahte gave us
the present-day might.
The verb mot has preserved but one form — must — which
goes back to its past tense form moste and is understood as a
present tense form — it is an example of a second change of its
meaning, when the new past form came to be understood as the
present tense one.
The verb sculan, similar to other verbs of this group, lost its
infinitive, using the form sceal for the present, and the former
sceolde was to develop into should, both verbs nowadays being
used as modal or auxiliary.
Suppletive verbs
Supplition, as we know, is one of the oldest means of formbuilding. All Indo-European languages, and English among them,
have suppletive verbs — those building different forms from
different roots. Each of them is a class in itself. Among such
verbs we may mention the following:
121
PART 1. LECTURES
beon —wesan (be)
3§n — eode (go)
don — dyde (do)
The first verb of each of the pairs above is the root for the
Present tense forms, the second — for the past.
wa
A similar phenomenon is observed in German: sein
— ich bin, Russian: быть — есть, иду — шел, Latin: sum -*
fui, French: aller —je vais —j'irai. In fact, the forms of the verb
cortresponding to the present-day be are derived from three
different roots: wes~, es- and be- (for a complete paradigm of the
verbs Ьёоп/wesan and jan/eode see table 7-7 on the next page)***
Summary
If we compare the system of conjugation with that of the
system of declension we shall observe a number of instances oi
basic difference between them.
— The principal grammatical means used in the paradigm of
declension was suffixation, in the paradigm of conjugation —'
vowel gradation.
— With reference to the structure of the noun we generally
speak .of three elements of word-structure: root + stem-suffix +
grammatical ending. In the verb we very often have only two
elements — the root and the grammatical ending.
— The system of declension manifested a tendency to
simplification from the point of view of the number of.
declensions and the number of grammatical categories, the
system of conjugation preserved its principal groups and classes
of verbs and also retained and developed its original grammatical
categories.
122
7. OLD ENGUSH GRAMMAR. THE VERBAL SYSTEM
Table 7-7. Conjugation of beon/wesan and зап/eode
Infinitive
wesan/beon
Present hid.
Sing. 1
2
3
Plur.
eom
eart
is
sint, sindon
Present Subj.
Sing.
sy, si
Plur.
syn, sin
Imperative
Sing.
Plur.
3an/eode
beo
bist
bif>
beob
3a
зФ
beo
beon
За
За
Wfes
beo
waesaf)
beof)
wesende
beonde
3§n
Participle I
Past /nd.
Sing. 1
WJBl'On
code
eodest
code
eodon
waere
wSren
eode
eoden
2
waes
wsere
3
W£BS
Plur.
Past Subj.
Sing.
Plur.
3ande, 3an3ende
Participle II
a*»
123
PART 1. LECTURES
Some more facts...
Reduplication
The seventh class of Old English strong verbs is formed by
the so-called reduplicating verbs, which, as the name implies,
used repetition of their elements as a means of'form-building,
although due to later contracting we see but traces of it in u
English. These verbs are put in a class by themselves because Щ
their unusual pattern of preterits and are significant as fanning
a connecting link between the Teutonic1 and other IndoEuropean languages, such as Greek and Latin, which also №
reduplication — one of the oldest word- and form-building
means of any language, encountered even now in some cieo
languages, for example:
now-now (immediately),
fast-fast (very fast)
- in South African English.
Reduplication was perfectly preserved only in Gothic, the
oldest representative of Teutonic, where past tense was formed
by repeating the root syllable, for example:
haitan (to call) —- haihait
tekan (to touch) — taitok.
In Anglo-Saxon examples of reduplication are far less
distinctly preserved, some of the most evident of them being:
hatan (to call)
— heht
(Gothic 'haihait'),
which shows reduplication by the repetition of'h';
rcedan (to advise)— reord (Gothic 'rairoth'),
which shows reduplication by the repetition of Y;
lacan (to skip)
— leolc
(Gothic 'lailaik'),
which shows reduplication by the repetition of T.
More commonly the repeated consonant
diphthong is substituted for the root vowel, as in:
Teutonic = Germanic
124
is lost, and ci
7. OLD ENGLISH GRAMMAR. THE VERBAL SYSTEM
Gothic
Old English
faifall
feoll (fell)
haihald
heold (held)
Reduplicating verbs differed in one other respect from the
remaining strong verbs, since their four principal steins had but
two different vowels, one for the present and participle and
another —for the preterite singular and plural. However, due to
later changes most of them have lost the pattern, preserving the
vowel interchange to become 'irregular', such as
beat, blow, fall, grow, hold, know, let, throw,
or started to use dental suffixes for their past and participle,
losing the vowel difference completely and thus becoming
'regular':
blend, claw, dread, fold, glow, leap, row, salt, swoop,
wheeze, wield.
The only certain example of the pattern remaining in Modern
English is hight (to call), which in Old English was heht, the
past tense ofhatan and in Gothic — haihait, as shown above.
after O.F. Emerson and J.C. Nesjicld
LECTURE 8.
CHANGES IN THE PHONETIC
SYSTEM IN MIDDLE ENGLISH
AND NEW ENGLISH
William the Conqueror listening
to his messenger, fragment of a
contemporary embroidery
("Bayeux tapestry", or "Queen
Mathilde's tapestry", Musee de
Bayeux).
List of principal questions:
1.
Changes in the phonetic system in Middle English
1.1. Vowels in the unstressed position
1.2. Vowels under stress
1.2.1. Qualitative changes
1.2.2. Quantitative changes
1.3. Consonants
2.
Changes in the phonetic system in New English
2.1. Vowels in the unstressed position
2.2. Vowels under stress
2.2.1. Qualitative changes
2.2.2. Quantitative changes
2.3. Consonants
3.
Changes in alphabet and spelling in Middle and
New English
126
8. CHANGES IN THE PHONETIC SYSTEM IN MIDDLE AND NEW ENGLISH
1. Changes in the phonetic system
in Middle English
1.1. Vowels in the unstressed position
All vowels in the unstressed position underwent a qualitative
change and became the vowel of the type of [э] or [e] unstressed.
This phonetic change had a far-reaching effect upon the system
of the grammatical endings of the English words which now due
to the process of reduction became homonymous. For example:
—forms of strong verbs
Old English writan — wrat — writon — writen
with the suffixes -an, -on, -en different only in the vowel
component became homonymous in Middle English:
writen — wrpt — writen — writen
—forms of nouns
Old English Nominative Plural a-stem
Genitive Singular
Middle English for both the forms is
or
Old English Dative Singular
Genitive Plural
Middle English form in both cases is
1.2. Vowels under
fiscas
fisces
fisces;
fisce
fisca
fisce.
stress
1.2.1. Qualitative changes
— Changes of monophthongs
Three long monophthongs underwent changes in Middle
English:
127
PART 1. LECTURES
Table 8-1. Long Monophthongs
^-\Periods
Middle English
Old English
a>9
y>I
(New English)
stan
bat
st9n
bot
stone
slaepan
slfpen
sleep
fyr
fir
fire
boat
the rest of the monophthongs presenting their original quality, o»
example:
6
[5]
Old English
tep
top
ut
п1
tTma
Middle English
teeth
(though the spelM
tooth
devices may be
out
different)
time
Out of the seven principal Old English short monophthongsa, e, o, i, u, ге, у — two changed their quality in Middle English,
thus [ae] became [a] and [y] became [i], the rest of the
monophthongs remaining unchanged, for example:
Old English
paet
wses
fyrst
but:
Middle English
that
was
first
tell an
hors
singan
putan
tellen
hors
sin gen
putten
128
.
S. CHANGES IN THE PHONETIC SYSTEM IN MIDDLE AND NEW ENGLISH
— Changes of diphthongs
All Old English diphthongs were contracted (became
monophthongs) at the end of the Old English period.
Table 8-2. Diphthongs
"\Periods
Sounds^\^
ёо>ё
ёа>|
eo>e
ea>a
Old English
Middle English
deep
bread
seven
aid
deop
bread
seofon
eald
But instead of the former diphthongs that had undergone
contraction at the end of the Old English period there appeared in
tyTiddle English new diphthongs. The new diphthongs sprang into
being due to the vocalization of the consonant [j] after the front
vowels [e] or [ae] or due to the vocalization of the consonant [y]
or the semi-vowel [w] after the back vowels [o] and [a]. For
instance:
Old English
da?3
we3
gr§3
ёгазап
аз an
Ьоза
> da3
> we3
> gre3
> drawen
> 8 wen
> bowe
Middle English
> dai
> wei
> grei
> drauen
> ouen
> boue
(New English)
day
way
grey
draw
own
bow
Thus in Middle English there appeared four new diphthongs:
[ai], [ei], [au], [ou].
129
PARTI. LECTURES
1.2.2. Quantitative changes
Besides qualitative changes .mentioned above vowels under
stress underwent certain changes in quantity.
— Lengthening of vowels
The first lengthening of vowels took place as early as late
Old English (IX century). All vowels which occurred before the
combinations of consonants such as mb, nd, Id became long.
Old English
[i] > [i:]
[u] > [u:]
climban
findan
cild
hund
Middle English
climben
finden
cild
hound
(New English)
climb
find
child
hound
The second lengthening of vowels took place in Middle
English (XII—XIII century). The vowels [a], [o] and [e] were
affected by the process. This change can be observed when the
given vowels are found in an open syllable.
Old English
Middle English
(New English)
a>a
talu
tale
tale
e>e
sprecan
speken
speak
09
hopian
hopen
hope
— Shortening of vowels
All long vowels were shortened in Middle English if they are
found before two consonants (XI century).
Old English
Middle English
(New English)
cepte
cepte
keep
wisdom
wisdom
wisdom
Through phonetic processes the lengthening and the
shortening of vowels mentioned above left traces in grammar and
wordstock.
130
8. CHANGES IN THE PHONETIC SYSTEM IN MIDDLE AND NEW ENGLISH
Due to it vowel interchange developed in many cases
between:
— different forms of the same word;
— different words formed from the same root.
For instance:
Middle English
[i:] — [i]
[e:] — [e]
[k] — [i]
child
kepen
wis
but
children
kept
wisdom
1.3. Consonants
The most important change in the consonant system that can
be observed if we compare the Old English and the Middle
English consonant system will be the development of the
fricative consonant [J] and the affricates ftp and [d3] from Old
English palatal consonants or consonant combinations. Thus:
Old English
Middle English
И > [tj]
cild
benc
cin
cicen
child
bench
chin
chicken
[sk1] > [J]
scip
sceal
ship
shall
[g'l > [d 3 ]
brycx
bridge
Thus we can notice that variants of some Old English
consonant phonemes developed differenly. For example:
The phoneme denoted in Old English by the letter с had two
1
variants: [k] — hard and [k ] — palatal, the former remaining
unchanged, the latter giving us a new phoneme, the phoneme [tj].
131
PART 1. LECTURES
The phoneme denoted by the letters "g" or "сз" and which
1
existed in four variants: [g ], [g] — in spelling "сз" and Ц], IYI
in spelling "g" had the following development:
1
[g ] > [d3]
w e
e
Ш> [Yl r vocalized:
bridge
das3>dai, 3iet>yet,
Ьоза>Ьоие, dra3an>drauen
[g] remained unchanged: 3od > good
Special notice should be taken of the development of su ^
consonant phonemes that had voiced and voiceless vanan
Old English, such as:
[fj — [v]
in spelling f
[s] — [z]
in spelling s
[9] — [ 5 ]
in spelling p, 5
They became different phonemes in Middle English.
* * *
Summary — Middle
English
1. Levelling of vowels in the unstressed position.
2. No principally new monophthongs in the system of the
language appeared, but the monophthongs of the [o] and [e] type
may differ: they are either "open" — generally those developed
from the Old English a (stan > stpn) or "close" — developing
from the Old English о (boc > bok (book)).
2. The sounds [аз] and [y] disappeared from the system of the
language.
3. There are no long diphthongs.
4. New diphthongs appeared with the glide more close than
the nucleus (because of the origin) as contrasted to Old English
with the glide more open than the nucleus.
5. No parallelism exists between long and short
monophthongs different only in their quantity.
132
8. CHANGES IN THE PHONETIC SYSTEM IN MIDDLE AND NEW ENGLISH
6. The quantity of the vowel depends upon its position in the
word, (a, o, e — always long in an open syllable or before Id, mb,
nd. All vowels are always short before two consonants, with the
exception of Id, mb, nd).
Only in one position — in a closed syllable before one
consonant vowels of any quantity could be found (wls but pig).
7. New affricates and the fricative [J] appeared in the system
of the language.
8. The resonance (the voiced or the voiceless nature) of the
consonants ([fj, [v], [s], [z] and [9], [6]) became phonemic.
2. Changes in the phonetic system
in New English
2.1. Vowels in the unstressed position
Vowels in the unstressed position already reduced in Middle
English to the vowel of the [э] type are dropped in New English
if they are found in the endings of words, for example:
Old English
nama
writan
sunu
Middle English
name
writen
sone
New English
name
write
son
[neim]
[rait]
[sAn]
The vowel in the endings is sometimes preserved — mainly
for phonetic reason:
wanted, dresses
"— without the intermediate vowel it would be very difficult to
Pronounce the endings of such words.
133
PART 1. LECTURES
S. CHANGES IN THE PHONETIC SYSTEM IN MIDDLE AND NEW EN GUSH
the resulting vowel is more open, than the resulting vowel in such
cases when the long vowel undergoing the Shift was followed by
a consonant other than "r". For example:
[ei]
[i:]
[ai]
[ш]
[аи]
but
but
but
but
but
[еэ]
[is]
[ais]
[иэ]
[аиэ]
fate but fare
steep but steer
time but tire
moon but moor
house but hour
As a result of the Great Vowel Shift new sounds did not
appear, but the already existing sounds appeared under new
conditions. For instance:
The sound existed
before the Shift
[ei]
[u:]
[i:]
The sound appeared
after the Shift
make
moon
see,
wey
hous
time
etc.
Two short monophthongs changed their quality in new
glish (XVII century), the monophthong [a] becoming [as] and
the monophthong [u] becoming [л]. For instance:
En
Middle English
[a] > [аз]
[и]>[л]
that
cut
New English
that
cut
However, these processes depended to a certain extent upon
the preceding sound. When the sound [a] was preceded by [w] it
changed into [o]. Compare:
Middle English
[a] > [аз]
[a] > [o]
that
was
New English
that
was
(but: wax [wseks]).
135
Where the sound [u] was preceded by the consonants [p], И
or [f], the change of [u] into [л] generally did not take place,
hence:
bull, butcher, pull, push, full, etc.
But sometimes even the preceding consonant did not preven
the change, for instance:
Middle English
[u] > [л]
but [but]
New English
but [bAt]
— Changes of diphthongs
Two out of the four Middle English diphthongs changed m
New English, the diphthong [ai] becoming [ei] and the diphthong
[au] contracted to [o:] For example:
Middle English
[ai] > [ei]
[au]> [o:]
dai
lawe
New English
day
law
2.2.2. Quantitative changes
Among many cases of quantitative changes of vowels in New
English one should pay particular attention to the lengthening of
the vowel, when it was followed by the consonant [r]. Short vowels followed by the consonant [r] became long after the disappearance of the given consonant at the end of the word or before
another consonant:
[a] > [a:]
[o] > [o:]
Middle English
farm
hors
New English
farm
horse
When the consonant [r] stood after the vowels [e], [i], [u],
the resulting vowel was different from the initial vowel not only
in quantity but also in quality. Compare:
136
8. CHANGES IN THE PHONETIC SYSTEM IN MIDDLE AND NEW ENGLISH
her
fir
fur or [h] before [t]: might, night, light.
2.3. Consonants
The changes that affected consonants in New English are not
very numerous. They are as follows.
1) Appearance of a new consonant in the system of English
phonemes — [3] and the development of the consonants [d3J and
Щ] from palatal consonants.
Thus Middle English [sj], [zj], [tj], [dj] gave in New English
the sounds [J], [3], [tf], [cfc]. For example:
fcj] > [J]
fcH > [3]
Ш > [tf]
Ш > [d3]
Asia, ocean
measure, treasure
nature, culture, century
soldier
Note should be taken that the above-mentioned change took
place in borrowed words, whereas the sounds [tf], №3], Ш which
appeared in Middle English developed in native words.
2. Certain consonants disappeared at the end of the word or
before another consonant, the most important change of the kind
affecting the consonant [r]:
farm, form, horse, etc.
(see above, quantitative changes of vowels).
3. The fricative consonants [s], [0] and [f] were voiced after
Unstressed vowels or in words having no sentence stress — the
so-called "Verner's Law in New English":
possess, observe, exhibition; dogs, cats; the, this, that,
there, then, though, etc.
137
•I* V
V
Summary — New English
The changes that affected the vowel and the consonant
system in New English were great and numerous.
Vowels — Qualitative changes:
1. Disappearance of vowels in the unstressed position at the
end of the word.
2. Changes of all long vowels — the Great Vowel Shift.
3. Changes of two short vowels: [a] > [аг] or [o] and [u] >
[л].
Vowels — Quantitative changes:
4. Changes of two diphthongs: [ai] > [ei], [au] > [o:].
5. Lengthening of vowels before [r] — due to the
vocalisation of consonants.
Consonants:
6. Appearance of the consonant [3] and the consonants [yJ>
[d3] in new positions.
7. Disappearance or vocalisation of the consonant [r].
8. Voicing of consonants — Verner's Law in New English.
9. Positional disappearance:
r
w
к
h
vocalised
at the end of the word:
before r
before n
before t
138
far
write
knight
light
S. CHANGES IN THE PHONETIC SYSTEM IN MIDDLE AND NEW ENGLISH
3. Changes in alphabet and spelling
in Middle and New English
As we remember, the Old English spelling system was
1
th
th
mainly phonetic. However, the 13 and 14 centuries witnessed
many changes in the English language, including its alphabet and
spelling. As a result of these modifications the written form of
the word became much closer to what we have nowadays.
In Middle English the former Anglo-Saxon spelling tradition
was replaced by that of the Norman scribes reflecting the
influence of French and often mixing purely phonetic spelling
with French spelling habits and traditions inherited from Old
English. The scribes substituted the so-called "continental
variant" of the Latin alphabet for the old "insular writing". Some
letters came into disuse, replaced by new means of expressing the
sounds formerly denoted by them — thus the letters p ("thorn")
and p ("wen"), being of runic origin, unknown to the Norman
scribes, disappeared altogether. Some letters, already existing in
Old English but being not very frequent there, expanded their
sphere of use — like the letter k. New letters were added —
among them j , w, v and z. Many digraphs — combinations of
letter!? to denote one sound, both vowel and consonant —
appeared, mostly following the pattern of the French language.
The following letters disappeared:
5, p [6/9] replaced by th: bat — that
3 [g. j]
g
3od — g° d
or у
зеаг — year
ae [e]
e
lsetan — leten (let)
P [w]
w
Strictly phonetic spelling means that every sound is represented by only one
distinct symbol, and no symbol represents more than one sound
139
PARTLLECTURES
The following letters were introduced:
gfor [g] in god and Щ] in singe
j for $3] in words of French origin: joy, judge
к for [k] instead о/ с before front vowels and n:
drincan — drinken, cnawan — taiowen.
у for [v] instead off as a separate phoneme:
lufu — love [luva]
q/ог [k] {followed by u) in quay
or [kw] in cwen—queen to replace OE cw2
г for [z] as a separate phoneme: zel ( # я "
The following digraphs appeared:
consonant digraphs:
ch for the sound [tj] cild — child
dg
У3] Ьгусз — bridge
h
§
1X3 ri3t—right,
th
[5, 6] pencan — thinken,
modor — mother
sh
[J] scip — ship
ph
[f] щ w < ? r ^ borrowed from Latin'phonetics
ch
[к] in words borrowed from Latin'chemistry
vowel digraphs — to show the length of the vowel:
еа [е]
mete — meat
ее [е]
fet — feet
оа [о]
bat — boat
оо [о]
fot — foot
ie [e:]
feld — field
ou/ow [u:] hus — hous, tun — town
Until the 17* century reform v was an allograph of u, the two letters often
being interchangeable: over—ouer, love—loue.
" Although sometimes [z] is still rendered by s: losen (lose), chesen (choose).
140
8. CHANGES IN THE PHONETIC SYSTEM IN MIDDLE AND NEW ENGLISH
Some changes were made for ease of reading and for a better
visual image of the word:
к instead of с boc — book
in the final position for
У
i by, my
better visual separation
w
u now
of words
Besides, у and w were considered more ornamental than i
and u at the end of the word, allowing to finish it with an elegant
curve.
о instead of u cumen — come
close to letters
опзштеп — bigonne consisting only
sunu — sone
of
vertical
lu$a — love
strokes, such as
munuc — monk
u/v, n, m
The New English period witnessed the establishment of the
literary norm presupposing a stable system of spelling. However,
the spelling finally fixed in the norm was influenced by many
factors, objective and subjective in character, preserving separate
elements of different epochs and showing traces of attempts to
improve or rationalise it.
In New English with the revival of learning in the 16th
century a new principle of spelling was introduced, later to be
called etymological. It was believed that, whatever the
pronunciation, the spelling should represent to the eye the form
from which the word was derived, especially in words of Latin or
Greek origin. Thus,.the word dett borrowed from French dette
w
as respelled as debt, for it could be traced to Latin debitum,
dout borrowed from French douter — as doubt from Latin
dubitare.
However, the level of learning at that age was far from
Perfect, and many of the so-called etymological spellings were
Wrong. Here it is possible to mention such words as:
141
PART 1. LECTURES
ME ake (from OE acan) respelt as ache from a wrongfully
supposed connection with Greek achos;
ME tonge (from OE tunge) respelt-as tongue on analogy
with French langue, Latin lingua;
a
ME iiand (from OE igland) respelt as island from
wrongfully supposed connection with French isle, Latin insu a.
ME scool borrowed in OE from Latin and always writ
with sc- (OE scool) respelt as school, because in Latin the sou
[k] in words of Greek origin was rendered as ch;
ME delit borrowed from French delit came to be spelt wi
mute dighraph -gh- on analogy with light — delight, etc.
At the same time, the major phonetic changes of the регю ^
and first of all, the Great Vowel Shift, found practically n^
corresponding changes in spelling. This resulted in the prese
day system where one sound can be denoted in several ways,
instance:
3 — torn, co&mel, herd, heard, bird, blwrred, erred, stirred,
word;
ou — note, noble, both, toad, toe, soul, dough, mow, brooch,
oh, mauve, beau, depof, yeoman, sew;
one symbol can stand for different sounds:
ch — cfeaos, c/taise, such, cho'u; dracAm (mute)
о — hot, cold, wolf, women, whom, son, button, lost, hero
In addition, there are many so-called "silent letters", the
presence of which can be explained only historically. Among the
latter there are often mentioned the following:.
e {mute e) at the end of words: house, take
b after m: lamb, limb, comb
b before t: debt, doubt
ch — yacht
g before n and m: gnaw, phlegm
h — heir, hour, exhibitor
142
S. CHANGES IN THE PHONETIC SYSTEM IN MIDDLE AND NEW ENGLISH
к before n: knife, knee
1 — could, yolk, palm
n after m: autumn, column
s — island, aisle
t after s and f and before 1 or n — listen, often, wrestle,
soften
w — wrap, sword, answer
There are also double consonants used not to denote the
quality or quantity of the consonant, but the quantity of the
preceding vowel: bigger, redder, stopper.
All these features make the present-day English system of
spelling one of the most complex and complicated in the world.
As Walter Skeat, the famous specialist in the History of English,
puts it, "we retain a Tudor system of symbols with a Victorian
pronunciation".
Some more facts...
Shakespeare's Pronunciation
Shakespeare's pronunciation, though not ours, was much
more like ours than has always been realized. He pronounced
[e] for [i] in some words just as Pope could still say lay for tea.
The falling together of er, ir, ur (e.g., herd, birth, hurt) was
under way but not yet completed. As is known, M.E. ё was
sometimes open, sometimes close [s: e:] and the two sounds
were still distinct in Shakespeare's day, [e;] and [i:] respectively.
Consequently sea [se:] does not normally rime with see [si:],
heap with keep, speak with seek, etc. Toward the close of the
fifteenth century an attempt was made to distinguish between
them by the spelling. The closer sound was often spelled with ее
or ie (deep, field) while the more open sound was as often
written ea (sea, clean). But the practice was not consistently
carried out. Although the two sounds are now identical, this
143
PART 1. LECTURES
variation
in spelling
is a reminder
of the difference i»
pronunciation that long existed.
We should also probably notice considerable difference m
the pronunciation of words containing M.E. д. This regula) у
developed into fu:J, as in room, food, roof, root, and it retains
this sound in many words today. In some words the vowel was
shortened in the fifteenth century and was unrounded tot e
sound in blood, flood. In still other words, however, it retained
its length until about 1700, but was then shortened without being
unrounded, giving us the sound good, stood, book, fool,
apparent that in Shakespeare's day there was much fluctuation in
the pronunciation of words containing this Middle Eng '
vowel, both in the different parts of the country and in the usage
of different individuals.
Consequently we find in the poetry of the period word we
flood riming not only with blood but with mood and good. №
fact, as late as Dryden we find in the same rime flood—moodgood, the three developments of the sound at the present dayis only in recent times that the pronunciation of these words w$
been standardized, and even today there is some vacillation
between a long and short vowel in some of them, e.g., in broom,
room, and roof.
In addition to such differences in the quality of vowels there
were some differences of accent. Shakespeare said persev'er,
demon'strate, and generally aspect', de'testable, while he has
charact'er, com'mendable, envy', se'cure, welcome', etc., i"
contrast to the accentuation that is customaiy in these words
today.
On the whole, however, we should probably have little more
difficulty in understanding Shakespeare's pronunciation than we
experience in listening to a broad Irish brogue.
after A.C. Baugh and T. Cable
LECTURE 9.
CHANGES IN THE NOMINAL
SYSTEM IN MIDDLE ENGLISH AND
NEW ENGLISH
Soldier of James I (1566—
1625) from "A Schoole for
Young Soldiers, containing in
briefe the whole Discipline of
warre"
List of principal questions:
1.
General survey of grammar changes in Middle and
New
English.
2.
The noun
2.1. Middle English
2.1.1. Morphological classification
2.1.2. Grammatical categories
2.2. New English
2.2.1. Morphological classification
2.1.2. Origin of irregular noun forms
2.1.3. Grammatical categories
3.
The adjective
4.
The pronoun
5.
The article
145
PART 1. LECTURES
1. General survey of grammar changes
in Middle and New English
The grammar system of the language in the Middle and ew
English periods underwent radical changes. As we remember,
principal means of expressing grammatical relations in Old bng
were the following:
—suffixation
— vowel interchange
— use of suppletive forms,
all these means being synthetic.
. .
In Middle English and New English many grammatical
notions formerly expressed synthetically either disappeared tro
the grammar system of the language or came to be expressed У
analytical means. There developed the use of analytical form
consisting of a form word and a notional word, and also word order,
special use of prepositions, etc. — analytical means.
.
In Middle English and New English we observe the process or
the gradual loss of declension by many parts of speech, formeny
declined. Thus in Middle English there remained only three declinable
parts of speech: the noun, the pronoun and the adjective, against five
existing in Old English (the above plus the infinitive and the participle)In New English the noun and the pronoun (mainly personal) are the
only parts of speech that are declined.
2. The noun
2.1. Middle
English
1.1.1. Morphological classification
In Old English there were three principal types of declensions: astem, n-stem and root-stem declension, and also minor declensions —
146
9. CHANGES IN THE NOMINAL SYSTEM IN MIDDLE AND NEW ENGLISH
i-stem, u-stem and others. These types are preserved in Middle
English, but the number of nouns belonging to the same declension in
Old English and Middle English varies. The n-stem declension though
preserved as a type has lost many of the nouns belonging to it while
the original a-stem declension grows in volume, acquiring new words
from the original n-stem, root-stem declensions, and also different
groups of minor declensions and also borrowed words. For example:
Old English
a-stem singular stan (stone)
plural
stanas
n-stem singular nama (name)
plural
namen
root-stem singular boc (book)
plural
bee
Borrowed
Middle English
singular stpn
plural
stpnes
singular name
plural
namen
singular book
plural
bookes
singular corage (courage)
plural
corages
2.7.2. Grammatical categories
There are only two grammatical categories in the declension of
nouns against three in Old English: number and case, the category of
gender having been lost at the beginning of the Middle English period.
Number
There are two number forms in Middle English: Singular and
Plural. For example:
Singular
Plural
Old English
Middle English
fisc
stan
nama
fiscas fishes
stanas
naman
fish
stpn
name
stpnes
names
147
PART 1. LECTURES
Case
r e d u
The number of cases in Middle English is
| J JJ*
compared to Old English. There are only two cases m №
English: Common and Genetive, the Old English Nomin^ ^
Accusative and Dative case having fused into one case
Common case at the beginning of Middle English.
For example:
Old English
Nominative
Accusative
Dative
Genitive
stan
stan
stane
stanes
Middle English
nama 1
n a
naman \ —» Common case stpn
naman J
naman => Genitive case stones nam
Thus we see that the complicated noun paradigm that existe
Old English was greatly simplified in Middle English, which 1
reflected in the following:
1) reduction of the number of declensions;
2) reduction of the number of grammatical categories;
3) reduction of the number of categorial forms within one
of the two remaining grammatical categories — the category
of case.
2.2. New English
The process of the simplification of the system of noun declension
that was manifest in Middle English continued at the beginning of the
New English period.
2.2.1. Morphological classification
In Old English we could speak of many types of consonant and
vowel declensions, the a-, n- and root-stem being principal among
them. In Middle English we observe only these three declensions:
148
P. CHANGES IN THE NOMINAL SYSTEM IN MIDDLE AND NEW ENGLISH
a-stem, n-stem, root-stem. In New English we do not find different
declensions, as the overwhelming majority of nouns is declined in
accordance with the original a-stem declension masculine, the endings
of the plural form -es and. the Possessive -s being traced to the
endings of the original a-stem declension masculine, i.e.:
Old English
Nominative & Accusative
Plural ending
-as
Genitive Singular
ending
-es
Middle English
Common Plural
ending
Genitive Singular
ending
-es
-s
Of the original n-stem and root-stem declensions we have in
New English but isolated forms, generally referred to in modern
grammar books as exceptions, or irregular noun forms.
2.2.2. Origin of modern irregular noun forms
All modern irregular noun forms can be subdivided into several
groups according to their origin:
a) nouns going back to the original a-stem declension, neuter
gender, which had no ending in the nominative and accusative plural
even in Old English, such as:
sheep — sheep (OE sceap — sceap)
deer — deer (OE deor — deor)
b) some nouns of the n-stem declension preserving their plural
f°rm, such as:
ox — oxen (OE oxa — oxan)
c) the original s-stem declension word
child — children (Old English cild — cildra)
In Middle English the final vowel was neutralised and the ending n
added on analogy with the nouns of the original n-stem declension.
This shows that the power of the n-stem declension was at the time
still relatively strong.
149
PART
d) remnants of the original root-stem declension, such as:
foot — feet (OE fot — fet)
tooth — teeth (OE to6 — ted)
e) "foreign plurals" — words borrowed in Early New English
from Latin. These words were borrowed by learned people from
scientific books who alone used them, trying to preserve their oiigm
form and not attempting to adapt them to their native language. Among
such words are:
datum — data, automaton — automata, axis — axes, etc.
It should be noted that when in the course of further history these
words entered the language of the whole people, they tended to a
regular plural endings, which gaveriseto such doublets as:
molecula—moleculae and moleculas,
formula —formulae
and formulas,
antenna—antennae
and antennas,
the irregular form being reserved for the scientific style.
2.2.3. Grammatical categories
The category of gender is formal, traditional already in Old
English; in Middle English and New English nouns have no category от
gender.
The category of number is preserved, manifesting the difference
between singular and lural forms.
The category of case, which underwent reduction first to three
and then to two forms, in New English contains the same number of
case-forms as in Middle English, but the difference is the number of
the nouns used in the Genitive (or Possessive) case — mainly living
beings, and the meaning — mainly the quality or the person who
possesses something.
the boy's book
a women's magazine
a two miles' walk
150
9. CHANGES IN THE NOMINAL SYSTEM IN MIDDLE AND NEW ENGLISH
Inanimate nouns are not so common:
the river's bank
the razor's edge
In Modern English, however, we observe a gradual spreading of
the ending -s of the Possessive case to nouns denoting inanimate
things, especially certain geographical notions, such cases as
England's prime minister" being the norm, especially in political style.
3. The adjective
Only two grammatical phenomena that were reflected in the
adjectival paradigm in Old English are preserved in Middle English:
declension and the category of number.
The difference between the Indefinite (strong) and the Definite
(weak) declension is shown by the zero ending for the former and the
ending -e for the latter, but only in the Singular. The forms of the
^finite and the Indefinite declension in the Plural have similar endings.
For instance:
Singular
Plural
Indefinite
a yong squier
n J •
,
yonge
Definite
the yonge sonne
The difference between number forms is manifest only in the Indefinite (strong) declension, where there is no ending in the Singular
but the ending -e in the Plural.
In New English what remained of the declension in Middle
English disappeared completely and now we have the uninflected form
f
°r the adjective used for all puiposes for which in Old English there
existed a complicated adjectival paradigm with two number-forms,
five case-forms, three gender-forms and two declensions.
As we have seen above, all grammatical categories and
declensions in Middle and New English disappeared. Contrary to that
degrees of comparison of the adjective were not only preserved but
also developed in Middle and New English. For example:
151
PART 1. LECTURES
Table 9-1. Degrees of Comparison
^^\^^
Period
Degree
Positive
Comparative
Superlative
^*"\.
Old English
Middle English
New English
heard
hard
hard
heardra
hardre
harder
heardost
hardest
hardest
Old English
Middle English
New English
eald
aid
old
ieldra/yldra
eldre
elder
ieldest
eldest
eldest
-
Old English
Middle English
New English
3od
3ood
good
betera
bettre
better
1
•
—
betst
best
best
It should be noted, however, that out of the three principal means
of forming degrees of comparison that existed in Old Engli
suffixation, vowel interchange and suppletive forms, there remained
a productive means only one: suffixation, the rest of the means see
only in isolated forms. At the same time there was formed an
developed a new means — analytical, which can be observed in sue
cases encountered, for instance, in the works of J. Chaucer, as:
comfortable — more comfortable.
4. The pronoun
In Old English all pronouns were declined, and the pronominal
paradigm was very complicated. In Middle English the system was
greatly simplified and nowadays what remained of the pronominal
declension is mainly represented by the declension of the personal
pronoun and on a small scale — demonstrative and interrogative
(relative).
152
9. CHANGES IN THE NOMINAL SYSTEM IN MIDDLE AND NEW ENGLISH
Case
The four-case system that existed in Old English gave way to a
two-case system in late Middle English and in New English. The
development may be illustrated by the following scheme of the
pronominal paradigm (see Scheme 9-1).
Scheme 9-1. Personal Pronouns
Old English
Middle English
New English
Nominative Ic
=$ Nominative I ,=> Nominative I
Accusative m e c ]
>-,,..
.
л , .
Dative
me }
Genitive
mm
Objective
=>
Possessive Pronouns
me => Objective
me
mine
mine
=>
Gender
As a grammatical phenomenon gender disappeared already in
Middle English, the pronouns he and she referring only to animate
notions and it — to inanimate.
Number
The three number system that existed in Early Old English
(Singular, Dual, Plural) was substituted by a two number system
a
bady in Late Old English.
5. The article
The first elements of the category of the article appeared already
Ь Old English, when the meaning of the demonstrative pronoun was
Weakened, and it approached the status of an article in such phrases
as:
Se mann (the man), S60 see (the sea), "past lond (the land).
153
LECTURES
However, we may not speak of any category if it is not represente
by an opposition of at least two units. Such opposition arose only m
Middle English, when the indefinite article an appeared.
The form of the definite article the can be traced back to the Old
English demonstrative pronoun se (that, masculine, singular), whic 1
the course of history came to be used on analogy with the forms ot
same pronoun having the initial consonant [8] and began to be use
with all nouns, irrespective of their gender or number.
The indefinite article developed from the Old English numeral an.
In Middle English an split into two words: the indefinite pronoun an,
losing a separate stress and undergoing reduction of its vowel, and tne
numeral one, remaining stressed as any other notional word. Later m
indefinite pronoun an grew into the indefinite article a/an, and togethei
with the definite article the formed a new grammatical category — t"6
category of determination, or the category of article.
* * *
Summary
The system of the declinable parts of speech underwent
considerable simplification, at the same time developing new analytical
features:
1. Reduction in the number of the declinable parts of speech.
2. Reduction in the number of declensions (whatever is preserved
follows the a-stem masculine).
3. Reduction in the number of grammatical categories
4. • Reduction in the number of the categorial forms (the category of
number of personal pronouns and case — of all nominal parts of
speech)
5. Formation of a new class of words — article.
154
9. CHANGES IN THE NOMINAL SYSTEM IN MIDDLE AND NEW ENGLISH
Some more facts...
TheSHEPuzde
Plotting the way sounds and words changed between Old
and Middle English can be an intriguing business, and one
which cannot always be resolved, as the story of she illustrates.
There is a fairly obvious relationship between most of the Old
English pronouns and their Modem English equivalents. But
what is the link between heo and she? The question has attracted several answers, and remains controversial.
• The simplest solution is to argue that there was a series of
sound changes by which heo gradually changed into she.
1. Sometime between Old and Middle English, the
diphthong altered, the first element becoming shorter and
losing its stress, [he: 9] thus became [hjo:].
2. The fhj] element then came to be articulated closer to the
palate, as [3], in much the same way as happens to modern
English huge.
3. [3] then became [J], to give the modern consonant.
There are certain facts in favour of this theory. Spellings
such as scho are found in very early Middle English in the
north. Also, a similar development took place in a few place
names, such as Old Norse Hjaltland becoming modern
Shetland. The main argument against the theory is that there is
no clear evidence for Step 3 elsewhere in English at any time —
apart from in these few foreign place names. Is it plausible to
propose a sound change which affected only one word? Also,
we are still left with the problem of getting from [o:J to [e:],
which is required in order to produce the modern sound of she.
For this, we have to assume a process such as analogy — the
vowel of she being influenced by that of he. But there is no clear
evidence for this.
• Alternative theories argue that heo comes from seo, the
feminine form of the definite article. The simplest version
postulates similar sound changes to the above, giving [sjo:J as
a result. This is a short, plausible step away from Ifo:}.
However, we are still left with the question of why the jo:)
vowel became fe:].
155
PART I. LECTURES
• A third argument also begins with seo, but takes a different
phonological route. Sometime after the Conquest, we have a lot
of evidence to show that the sound of ёо [е:э] changed to
become close to ё [е:]. This would have had the effect of making
the words heo and he sound the same. In these circumstances,
there would be a need to find a way of keeping the two words
apart; and the suggestion is that seo filled this need.
Why seo? There is a close semantic link between personal
and demonstrative pronouns in many languages, and it can be
seen in Old English too, where seo meant "that" as well US
"the". The same could apply to seo in its relation to heo. It
would be very natural to use the phonetic distinctiveness of the
former to help sort out the ambiguity of the latter. All that
would then be needed was a further consonant change from [si
to If], as the vowel is already on course for its modern sound.
The problem here is in this last step. How can [s] become [f]
in front of an [e:] vowel? It would be the equivalent of a change
from same to shame. To get from [s] to [f], there needs to be
some intervening sound which "pulls" the s in the direction of
the more palatal sound [J]. The obvious candidate is [j], itself a
palatal sound, but the whole point of this third argument is that
there is no [j] left in heo. The possibility of a [j] developing disappeared when we argued that ёо became [e:].
The origins of she thus remain one of the unsolved puzzles
the history of English.
ltl
After D. Crystal
LECTURE 10.
CHANGES IN THE VERBAL
SYSTEM IN MIDDLE ENGLISH
AND NEW ENGLISH
Family worship in 1563
(The Whole Psalms in
foure partes, John Day,
1563)
List ofprincipal questions:
1. Non-finite forms (verbals)
2.
Morphological classification of verbs in Middle
English and New English
2.1. Strong verbs
2.1.1. Classes of the strong verbs
2.1.2. Principal forms of the strong verbs
2.2. Weak verbs
2.2.1. Classes of the weak verbs
2.2.2. Principal forms of the weak verbs
2.3. Origin of modem irregular verbs
3Grammatical categories of the English verb
157
PART I. LECTURES
1. Non-finite forms (verbals)
A comparison of the verbals in Old English and in Middle
and New English shows that the number of verbals ш и
English was less than that in Middle and New English At the en
of the Middle English period a new verbal developed —
Gerund, in addition to the Infinitive and the Participle existing
already in Old English. The Gerund appeared as a result of a
blend between the Old English Present Participle ending ш
'-ende' and the Old English Verbal noun ending in '-inge'. №
the Verbal noun the Gerund acquired the form (the ending
'-ing(e)'), but under the influence of the Participle it became
more "verbal" in meaning
In the process of English history the Verbals are gradually
shifting from the system of declension into the system
conjugation Thus in Old English the verbals existing at the time,
the infinitive and the participle could be declined (see above, О
English). In the course of history the Infinitive (already at the end
of the Old English period) and the Participle (in Middle English)
lost their declension. And at the end of the Middle English and in
New English they acquired elements of conjugation — t n e
grammatical categories of order, voice and aspect (the infinitive)
and the grammatical categories of order and voice (the participle
and the gerund). The Old English preposition to preceding the
Dative case of the infinitive loses its independent meaning and
functions simply as a grammatical particle showing that the
Verbal is an Infinitive.
But even in Modern English we can find such contexts where
the form of the verbal is active, though the meaning is passive:
The book is worth reading.
The coat needs ironing.
15X
,
Ю- CHANGES IN THE VERBAL SYSTEM IN MIDDLE AND NEW ENGLISH
or the non-perfect form expresses order, i.e. is used to express
events that took place prior to the action of the finite form of the
verbs:
I remember doing...
I thanked him for bringing the happy tidings.
Such phenomena reflect the previous stage of the development of
the English language, when the given verbals were indifferent to
voice and order.
2. Morphological classification of verbs
in Middle English and New English
2.0. The subdivision of Old English verbs into Strong and
Weak is preserved with modifications in Middle English.
2.1. Strong verbs
2.1.1, Classes of the strong verbs
In New English, however, the original regularity that was
observed in the group of strong verbs in Old English and partly in
Middle English is no longer felt due to the following:
0 Splitting of original classes into subclasses, for example:
Old English
<
New English
rise — rose — risen
bite — bit — bitten
2) Some strong verbs of one class entering another class.
th
1595 class:
Thus, the Old English verb of the
PARTI. LECTURES
sprecan — sprsec — spraicon — sprecen
th
passed into the 5 class in Middle English with the forms
speken — spak — speken — spoken
on analogy with such verbs as
stelen — stal — stelen — stolen.
3) Passing of some strong verbs into the group of weak ver s
and (rarely) vice versa. For example:
Old English
New English
I class
gripan
glidan
to grip
to glide
II class
creopan
Шозап
to creep
to lie
III class
climban
helpan
to climb
to help
VI class
bacan
waecnan
to bake
to wake
The contrary process, as we have already said, is quite rare.
Old English
New English
hydan
to hide
waerian
to wear
4) But some weak verbs acquired only some features of the
strong verbs, like the Old English weak verb sceawian •—
Modern English show, showed, but shown.
2.1.2. Principal forms of the strong verbs
The strong Verbs in Old English had four principal forms, for
example:
writan — wrat — writon — writen (to write)
bindan — band — bundon — bunden (to shake)
160
10. CHANGES IN THE VERBAL SYSTEM IN MIDDLE AND NEW ENGLISH
In Middle English, however, they exhibited a marked
tendency to have the same vowel in both the forms of the past
tense, thus- gradually reducing the number of the principal forms
to three. In New English we have only three principal forms in
verbs originally belonging to the group of strong verbs:
write — wrote — writen
The vowel that is preserved in the Past tense is generally
traced back to the vowel of Old English past tense singular. For
example:
Old English
Middle English
New English
I class
wrat
wrot
wrote (to write)
II class
scoc
shok
shook (to shake)
but sometimes it is the vowel of the original past tense plural:
Old English
bitan —bat —biton —biten
Middle English biten — bot — biten — biten
New English • bite — bit — bitten
with the Past tense form deriving its vowel from the past tense
plural form of the verb.
Sometimes the vowel of the past tense form was borrowed from
the form of the past participle:
Old English
stelan — stsel — staelon — stolen
Middle English stelen — stal — stelen — stolen
New English
steal — stole — stolen
2.2. Weak verbs
As we have said above the number of strong verbs was
diminishing in Middle English and New English mainly due to
the passing of some strong verbs into the weak conjugation. Weak
v
ei'bs, however, were becoming more and more numerous, as
they not only preserved in Middle and New English almost all the
verbs that were typical of the group in Old English, but also
i6i
PART 1. LECTURES
added to their group the majority of borrowed verbs and about
seventy verbs originally strong (see above), and also such vei
as:
to call
to want
Scandinavian borrowings
to guess
to pierce
to punish
to finish
French borrowings
to contribute
to create
to distribute
Latin borrowings
Alike strong verbs many weak verbs became irregular in the
course of history, especially weak verbs of the first class This
irregularity was mainly conditioned by qualitative and
quantitative changes that many weak verbs underwent in Middle
English and New English. For instance:
Old English
cepan — cepte — cept
Middle English kepen — kepte — kept
New English
keep — kept — kept
As we see the Old English weak verb of the first class
became irregular due to the quantitative change — shortening of
the vowel in the second and third forms in Middle English
(before two consonants — for example, pt), thus acquiring
quantitative vowel interchange. This quantitative interchange was
followed by qualitative in New English after the Great vowel
shift, which only the vowel of the first form, being long,
underwent, the short vowel of the second and third forms
retaining their quality.
162
10. CHANGES IN THE VERBAL SYSTEM IN MIDDLE AND NEW ENGLISH
2.2.1. Classes of the weak verbs
In Old English there were two principal classes of the weak
verbs. In Middle English some verbs that did not become
irregular lost the class difference and .we have but one class of
verbs going back mainly to the weak verbs of the second class.
For instance:
Old English II class
Middle English
lufian — lufode — lufod (to love)
loven — lov(e)de — luv(e)d
2.2.2. Principal forms of the weak verbs
In Old English there were three principal forms of the weak
verbs, for instance:
cepan—cepte —cept (to keep)
lufian — lufode — lufod (to love)
In Late Middle English — Early New English, with the loss
of the final -e in the second form the second and the third form
became homonymous, thus we speak of three principal forms of
such verbs as to love or to keep mainly on analogy with original
strong verbs, and also because of the existing tradition as no
Modern English regular verb, originally belonging to the weak
conjugation, shows any trace of difference between the second
and third forms.
Thus in New English due to different phonetic processes and
changes on analogy the two principal groups of verbs that existed
m Old English, strong and weak, gave us two principal groups of
Modern verbs: regular and irregular, neither of which is directly
derived from either of the Old English groups of strong and weak
verbs.
163
PART I. LECTURES
2.3. Origin of modem irregular verbs
In Old English most verbs were regular, although there weie
a number of irregular ones. In Middle English not only the ^
Old English irregular verbs were preserved, but also n
irregular verbs appeared. This was due, first of all, °
disappearance of the division of verbs into strong and weak, m ^
strong verbs losing their regular pattern of conjugation and
becoming irregular.
Another source of irregular verbs was the 1st class of
verbs the irregularity of which was due to several reasons. ^
addition to the examples given above we can show three gr°P
of verbs originally belonging to the 1st class of weak verbs, wni
later became irregular:
a) verbs with a long root vowel, the root ending in -t or -d.
Old English
metan — mette — mett
Middle English meten — mette — mett
New English
meet — met — met
In Middle English the root vowel of the second and third
forms is shortened due to the rhythmic tendency of the language
requiring the shortening of all vowels if followed by two
consonants. The vowel interchange in Middle English is
quantitative only.
In New English the long root vowel in the first form due to
the great vowel shift is changed qualitatively, so now we have
both quantitative and qualitative vowel interchange in the verb.
b) verbs with a long root vowel, the root ending in a
consonant other than -t or -d:
Old English
cepan — cepte — cept
Middle English kepen — kepte — kept
New English
keep — kept — kept
164
10. CHANGES IN THE VERBAL SYSTEM IN MIDDLE AND NEW ENGLISH
In Middle English the dental suffixation of the 2nd and 3 rd
forms is supplemented with a quantitative vowel interchange
similar to that explained above, and in New English we have both
vowel interchange (quantitative and qualitative) and suffixation
as form-building means.
c) verbs with a short root vowel, the root ending in -t or -d:
Old English
settan — sette — sett
Middle English setten — sette — sett
New English
set
— set
— set
No changes took place in the root vowel, the ending
disappeared due to the final reduction of unstressed vowels, and
now the verb forms its forms without any material manifestation.
Even in the 2nd class of weak verbs examples of irregularity
can be found. One of them is the verb to make.
Old English
macian — macode — macod
Middle English maken — makede — maked
New English
make — made — made
The middle syllable of the 2nd and 3rd forms was lost, making
the verb irregular.
Still another source of irregular verbs may be found in some
loan words borrowed into the language in Middle English and
New English. Although most borrowed verbs formed their forms
in accordance with the weak verbs of the 2nd class, some of them
are irregular. Here it is possible to mention Scandinavian strong
verb borrowings which preserve their original vowel interchange
a
nd thus are nowadays irregular, as:
give — gave — given
take — took — taken
get — got — gotten.
Another irregular loan word is the French borrowing to catch
(caught, caught) which is irregular, forming its forms on analogy
with the verb to teach (taught, taught).
165
PARTLLECTURES
Thus, among New English regular verbs there may be
encountered either native words (almost all Old English weak
verbs of the 2nd class and some Old English strong verbs having
lost their irregularity and forming their forms on analogy with the
weak verbs of the 2nd class, such as to help, to bake, etc.) or
borrowings (almost all loan verbs).
3. Grammatical categories
of the English verb
In Old English the verb had four categories: person, number,
tense and mood.
In Middle English and New English there gradually
developed three more grammatical categories — order, voice ana
aspect.
These grammatical categories used a new grammatical
means for the formation, namely, analytical forms. These
analytical forms developed from free word combinations of the
Old English verbs habban, beon/wesan + an infinitive (or
participle). The way of the formation of those analytical forms
was the following:
In the free word combination habban, beon/wesan + a n
infinitive (or participle) the first element was gradually losing its
lexical meaning, and the second — its grammatical one, thus
tending to become notionally and grammatically inseparable:
idiomatic.
The category of order was the oldest, formed already in
Middle English from the Old English free combination habban +
past participle.
ffie hsefdon hlera cynin.3 awor^enne
(They had already overthrown their king)
166
10. CHANGES IN THE VERBAL SYSTEM IN MIDDLE AND NEW ENGLISH
The younge sonne hath in the Ram his halve
course y-runne
(The young sun has run its half-course in the Ram)
... Whan the sonne was to reste,
So hadde I spoked with hem everichon...
(When the sun was about to rest,
So I had spoken with every one of them)
The same idea of order is sometimes still expressed with the
help of the combination to be + participle 2, going back to the
Old English beon + past participle:
This gentleman is happily arrived.
Now he is gone.
The category of voice appeared out of the free combination
°f weorpan (beon) + past participle:
Old English
he wearb ofslae3en
(he was slain)
Middle English
engendered is the flour
(the flower is generated [born])
The category of aspect was formed in Middle English on the
basis of the free combination of ben (beon) + present participle:
Singinge he was ... al the dai
(he was singing all the day)
The grammatical categories of tense and mood which
existed in Old English acquired new categorial forms.
The Old English present and past tense forms were
supplemented with a special form for the future tense which
a
Ppeared in Middle English out of the free combination of the
Old English modal verbs "sculan" and "willan" with the
infinitive. This free combination of words was split into two
groups: in the first, remaining free, the modal meaning is
Preserved:
167
PART 1. LECTURES
You shall do it
I will do it
— necessity
— volition
in the second the independent meaning is lost and the fixed word
combination is perceived as the future tense form:
I shall go there.
You will go there.
The category of mood in Old English was represented by
three mood forms, one for each of the moods (indicative,
subjunctive and imperative). The subjunctive in Old English did
not show whether the events were probable or contrary to fact,
but it had two tense forms — past and present, which in the
course of history developed into two subjunctive moods:
- I/he be present
— out of the Old English present
tense form of the subjunctive mood
- I/he were present — out of the Old English past tense
form of the subjunctive mood.
The difference between these two subjunctive moods now is
in the shade of probability, and not in the tense, the second one
denoting events which are contrary to fact.
In addition to that at the end of Middle English and the
beginning of New English two more subjunctive mood forms
appeared making use of the analytical form building means:
- I/he should be present
— to show events which are
probable, though problematic
- Г should be present 1 — to show imaginary events,
he would be present } contrary to fact.
Here should and would are the subjunctive mood forms of
the Old English sculan and willan.
168
10. CHANGES IN THE VERBAL SYSTEM IN MIDDLE AND NEW ENGLISH
* * *
Summary
Thus the system of conjugation in Middle English and New
English is becoming more and more complicated:
1. New non-finite forms appear (the gerund).
2. Conjugation of verbals and disapeareance of their
nomimal categories.
3. New grammatical categories are formed.
4. The already existing grammatical categories acquire new
forms.
5. The predominant regularity of the verbs and' their
conjugation in Old English gives way to many diverse
irregularities.
Some more facts...
Progressive forms
Among the developments as are of most significance in the
language of today one of great importance concerns the verb,
English is distinctly more varied and flexible in some of its
verbal expressions than the other better-known
modern
languages. Thus, where the French say 'je chante' or the
German 'ich singe', the English may say 7 sing\ 7 do sing', or
7 am singing'. The do- forms are often called emphatic forms,
and this they sometimes are; but their most important uses are in
negative and interrogative sentences ( 7 don't sing', 'do you
sing'). The forms with 'to be' and the present participle are
generally called progressive forms since their most common use
is to indicate an action as being in progress at the time implied
by the auxiliary. The wide extension of the use of progressive
forms is one of the most important developments of the English
verb in the modern period.
!f>9
PARTLLECTURES
In Old English such expressions as 'he was la-rende' (he was
teaching) are occasionally found, but usually in translations
from Latin. In early Middle English, progressive forms are
distinctly rare, and although their number increases m №
course of the Middle English period, we must credit then
development mainly to the period since the sixteenth centui)'The chief factor in their growth is the use of the participle as a
noun governed by the preposition
'on' ('he burst oil
laughing').* This weakened to 'he burst out a-laughing ana.
finally to 'he burst out laughing'. In the same way 'he was on
laughing' became 'he was a-laughing' and 'he was laughingToday such forms are freely used in all tenses ('is laughing >
'was laughing', 'will be laughing', etc.).
The extension of such forms to the passive ('the house i
being built') was an even later development. It belongs to the
very end of the eighteenth century. Old English had no
progressive passive. Such an expression as 'the man is love ,
feared, hated' is progressive only in so far as the verbs 'loving >
'fearing', 'hating' imply a continuous state. But no such force
attaches to 'the man is killed', which does not mean the man is
being killed but indicates a completed act. The construction 'the
man is on laughing 'was capable also of a passive significance
under certain circumstances. Thus 'the house is on building' can
only suggest that the house is in process of construction- This
use is found from the fourteenth century on, and in its weakened
form the construction is not unknown today. Colloquially, at
least, we say 'there is nothing doing at the mill this week'. 'The
dinner is cooking' and 'the tea is steeping' are familial'
expressions. In some parts of America one may hear 'there's a
new barn a-building down the road'. When the preposition was
completely lost (on building > a-building > building) the form
became 'the house is building'. Since such an expression may at
times be either active or passive, it had obvious limitations. Thus
'the wagon is making' is a passive, but 'the wagon is making a
noise' is active. And whenever the subject of the sentence is
animate or capable of pe if arming the action, the verb is almost
certain to be in the active voice ('the man is building a house').
With some verbs the construction was impossible in a passive
170
10. CHANGES IN THE VERBAL SYSTEM IN MIDDLE AND NEW ENGLISH
sense. Thus the idea 'he is always being called1 could not be
expressed by 'he is always calling'.
In the last years of the eighteenth century we find the first
traces of our modern expression 'the house is being built'. The
combination of 'being' with a past participle to form a
panicipial phrase had been in use for some time. Shakespeare in
'Hamlet' says: 'which, being kept close, might move more grief
to hide'. This is thought to have suggested the new verb phrase.
It seems first to have been recognized in an English grammar in
1802. As yet it is generally used only in the present and simple
past tense ('is' or 'was being built'). We can hardly say 'the
house has been being built for two years', and we avoid saying
'it will be being built next spring'.
The history of the new progressive passive shows that English
is a living and growing thing, that its grammar is not fixed, that
it will continue to change in the future as it has changed in the
past, even if more slowly. If the need is felt for a new and better
way of expressing an idea, we may rest assured that a way will
be found. But it is interesting to note that even so useful a
construction was at first resisted by many as an unwarranted
innovation.
Although supported by occasional instances, it was
consciously avoided by some and vigorously attacked by others.
In 1837 a writer in the North American Review condemned it as
"an outrage upon English idiom, to be detested, abhorred,
execrated, and given over to six thousand penny-paper editors."
And even so enlightened a student of language as Marsh, in
1859, noted that it "has widely spread, and threatens to establish
itself as another solecism," "The phrase 'the house is being built'
for 'the house is building'," he says, "is an awkward neologism,
which neither convenience, intelligibility, nor syntactical
congruity demands, and the use of which ought therefore to be
discountenanced, as an attempt at the artificial improvement of
the language in a point which needed no amendment."
Artificial it certainly was not. Nothing seems to have been
more gradual and unpremeditated in its beginnings. But, as late
as 1870 Richard Grant White devoted thirty pages of his Words
and Their Uses to an attack upon what still seemed to him a
171
PART 1. LECTURES
neologism. Although the origin of the construction can be traced
back to the latter part of the eighteenth century, its
establishment in the language and ultimate acceptance required
the better part of the century just past.
after A.C. Baugli and T. Cable
LECTURE 11.
ENGLISH VOCABULARY
The habit of smoking (from the title-page
of The Roaring Girle, or Moll Cut-Purse
by T. Middleton and T. Dekker, 1611).
In the 17th century tobacco played a great
part in English colonial and commercial
expansion. Already in the 1590-ies the new
American weed, together with its name,
was wellfamiliar in England.
List of principal questions:
1.
Old English
1.1. General characteristics
1.2. Means of enriching vocabulary
1.2.1. Internal means
1.2.2. External means
2.
Middle English
2.1. General characteristics
2.2. Means of enriching vocabulary
2.2.1. Internal means
2.2.2. External means
3.
New English
3.1. General characteristics
3.2. Means of enriching vocabulary
3.2.1. Internal means
3.2.2. External means
173
PART 1. LECTURES
1. Old English
1.1. General characteristics
The vocabulary of Old English was rather extensive. It is
said to have contained about 50 000 words. These words were
mainly native words. They could be divided into a number or
strata. The oldest stratum was composed of words coming from
the Common Indo-European parent tongue.
Many of these words were inherited by English together with
some other Indo-European languages from the same common
source, and we shall find related words in various Indo-European
languages. Compare:
Old English
New English
Latin
Russian
modor
niht
neowe
beran
mother
night
new
bear
mater
nox
novus
ferre
мать
ночь
новый
брать
Another layer, relatively more recent, was words inherited by
English and other Germanic languages from the same common
Germanic source. You will find them in many languages, but only
those belonging to the Germanic group. Compare:
Old English
New English
German
еогбе
land
see
grene
findan
earth
land
sea
green
find
Erde
Land
See
grim
finden
The third stratum, and that not very extensive, was made up
of words that existed only in English, for instance, the word
174
И. ENGLISH VOCABULARY
clypian (to call), the root preserved in the now somewhat obsolete
word yclept (named).
The vocabulary was changing all the time, old words
becoming extinct and new words entering the language, enriching
it.
As is known, there are two principal ways of enriching the
vocabulary of a language: internal means — those that are
inherent in the language itself, and external means, which result
from contacts between peoples. The English-speaking people of
the period mainly used internal means of enriching the
vocabulary to adapt their language to the expression of more
varied or new notions.
1.2. Means of enriching vocabulary
While creating new words the English language, as we have
mentioned above, principally resorted to its own, internal means:
word derivation, primarily affixation and vowel interchange, and
word composition.
1.2.1. Internal means of enriching
vocabulary
— Word derivation
In Old English affixation was widely used as a wordbuilding means.
There were very many suffixes, with the help of which new
nouns, adjectives, adverbs and sometimes verbs were formed, for
instance:.
— noun suffixes of concrete nouns:
-ere
-estre
-in3
fisc+ere (fisher)
,
spinn+estre (spinster) }
J
'cyn+in3 (king)
175
denoting the doer
of the action
PART I. LECTURES
— noun suffixes of abstract nouns:
-6
treow+5 (truth)
-nis
30d+nis (goodness)
-Scip
freond+SCip (friendship)
-dom
freo+dom. (freedom)
-had
cild+had (childhood)
— adjective suffixes
-13
Ts+13 (icy), bys+ i3 (busy)
-isc
Engl+isc (English), Frens+lSC (French)
-ful
car+ful (careful)
-leas
slffip+ leas (sleepless)
Prefixes were used on a limited scale and they generally had
a negative meaning:
formisUllVowel
for+3iefan (forgive)
mis+dsed (misdeed)
un+спб (uncouth)
interchange:
noun
son3 (song)
dom (doom)
verb
singan (to sing)
deman (to deem)
— Word composition
Word composition was a well-developed means of enriching
vocabulary in Old English. For instance:
Nouns
saS+man
(seaman),
gold+smid
(goldsmith),
monan+da^3 (Monday), sunan+dae3 (Sunday),
Engla+land (land of the Angles, England)
Adjectives
Tc+ceald (ice-cold)
176
11. ENGLISH VOCABULARY
1.2.2. External means of enriching vocabulary
(Old English borrowings)
As we understand, borrowings into a language are a result of
contacts with other nations. The Germanic tribes had but few
contacts with other nations at the beginning of A.D.,
consequently the number of borrowed words in Old English was
not great. The main borrowings that we can single out in Old
English were Latin and Celtic borrowings.
— Latin borrowings
The first Latin borrowings entered the language before the
Germanic tribes of Angles, Saxons, Jutes and Frisians invaded the
British Isles, i.e. at the time when they still lived on the continent.
Due to trade relations with their southern powerful neighbour —
the Roman empire — Germanic tribes learned a number of
products that had been unknown to then, and, consequently, their
names. So the first stratum of borrowings are mainly words
connected with trade. Many of them are preserved in Modern
English, such as:
pound, inch, pepper, cheese, wine, apple, pear, plum, etc.
The second stratum of words was composed of loan Latin
words that the Germanic tribes borrowed already on British soil
from the romanized Celts, whom they had conquered in the 5"1
century. Those were words connected with building and
architecture, as the preserved nowadays:
tile, street, wall, mill, etc.
They denoted objects which the Germanic invaders
encountered on the British Isles.
The third stratum of Latin loan words was composed of
words borrowed after the introduction of the Christian religion.
They are generally of a religious nature, such as the present-day
Words:
177
PART 1. LECTURES
bishop, devil, apostle, monk.
As Latin was the language of learning at the time, there also
entered the language some words that were not directly
connected with religion, such as:
master, school, palm, lion, tiger, plant, astronomy, etc.
— Celtic borrowings
The Celtic language left very few traces in the English
language, because the Germanic conquerors partly exterminate
the local population, partly drove them away to the less feni
mountaineous parts of the country, where they were not withm
reach of the invaders. The Celtic-speaking people who remained
on the territory occupied by the Germanic tribes were slaves, and
even those were not very numerous. It is small wonder therefore
that the number of Celtic loan words was limited. Among the tew
borrowed words we can mention:
d o w n (the downs of Dover), binn (bin - basket, crib, manger).
Some Celtic roots are preserved in geographical names, such
as:
kil (church — Kilbrook), ball (house — Ballantrae), esk (water —
river Esk)
and some others.
2. Middle English
2.1. General characteristics
An analysis of the vocabulary in the Middle English period
shows great instability and constant and rapid change. Many
words became obsolete, and if preserved, then only in some
dialects; many more appeared in the rapidly developing language
17X
11. ENGLISH VOCABULARY
to reflect the ever-changing life of the speakers and under the
influence of contacts with other nations.
2.2. Means of enriching vocabulary
in Middle English
2.2.1. Internal means of enriching vocabulary
Though the majority of Old English suffixes are still
preserved in Middle English, they are becoming less productive,
and words formed by means of word-derivation in Old English
can be treated as such only etymologically.
Words formed by means of word-composition in Old
English, in Middle English are often understood as derived
words.
2.2.2. External means of enriching vocabulary
The principal means of enriching vocabulary in Middle
English are not internal, but external — borrowings. Two
languages in succession enriched the vocabulary of the English
language of the time — the Scandinavian language and the
French language, the nature of the borrowings and their amount
reflecting the conditions of the contacts between the English and
these languages.
— Scandinavian borrowings
The Scandinavian invasion and the subsequent settlement of
the Scandinavians on the territory of England, the constant
contacts and intermixture of the English and the Scandinavians
brought about many changes in different spheres of the English
language: wordstock, grammar and phonetics. The relative ease
of the mutual penetration of the languages was conditioned by the
circumstances of the Anglo-Scandinavian contacts (see above,
Lecture 3).
179
PART 1. LECTURES
Due to contacts between the Scandinavians and the Englishspeaking people many words were borrowed from the
Scandinavian language, for example:
Nouns:
law, fellow, sky, skirt, skill, skin, egg, anger,
awe, bloom, knife, root, .bull, cake, husband,
leg, wing, guest, loan, race
Adjectives: big, week, wrong, ugly, twin
Verbs:
call, cast, take, happen, scare, hail, want, bask,
gape, kindle
Pronouns: they, them, their; and many others.
The conditions and the consequences of various borrowings
were different.
1. Sometimes the English language borrowed a word for
which it had no synonym. These words were simply
added to the vocabulary. Examples:
law, fellow
2. The English synonym was ousted by the borrowing.
Scandinavian taken (to take) and callen (to call) ousted the
English synonyms niman and clypian, respectively.
3. Both the words, the English and the corresponding
Scandinavian, are preserved, but they became different in
meaning. Compare Modern English native words and
Scandinavian borrowings:
Native
Scandinavian borrowing
heaven
sky
starve
die
4. Sometimes a borrowed word and an English word are
etymological doublets, as words originating from the
same source in Common Germanic.
180
U. ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Native
Scandinavian borrowing
shirt
skirt
shatter
scatter
raise
rear
5. Sometimes an English word and its Scandinavian doublet
were the same in meaning but slightly different
phonetically, and the phonetic form of the Scandinavian
borrowing is preserved in the English language, having
ousted the English counterpart. For example, Modern
English to give, to get come from the Scandinavian gefa,
geta, which ousted the English 3iefan and 3ietan,
respectively: Similar Modern English words: gift, forget,
guild, gate, again.
6. There may be a shift of meaning. Thus, the word dream
originally meant "joy, pleasure"; under the influence of
the related Scandinavian word it developed its modern
meaning.
— French borrowings
It stands to reason that the Norman conquest and the
subsequent history of the country left deep traces in the English
language, mainly in the form of borrowings in words connected
with such spheres of social and political activity where Frenchspeaking Normans had occupied for a long time all places of
importance. For example:
— government and legislature:
government, noble, baron, prince, duke, court,
justice, judge, crime, prison, condemn, sentence,
parliament, etc.
— military life:
army, battle, peace, banner, victory, general,
colonel, lieutenant, major, etc.
181
PART 1. LECTURES
— religion:
religion, sermon, prey, saint, charity
— city crafts:
painter, tailor, carpenter (but country occupations
remained English: shepherd, smith)
— pleasure and entertainment:
music, art, feast, pleasure, leisure, supper, dinner,
pork, beef, mutton (but the corresponding names oj
domestic animals remained English: pig, cow, sheep)
— words of everyday life:
air, place, river, large, age, boil, branch, brush,
catch, chain, chair, table, choice, cry, cost
— relationship:
aunt, uncle, nephew, cousin.
The place of the French borrowings within the English
language was different:
1. A word may be borrowed from the French language to
denote notions unknown to the English up to the time:
government, parliament, general, colonel, etc.
2. The English synonym is ousted by the French borrowing:
English
French
micel
large
here
army
§a
river
3. Both the words are preserved, but they are stylistically
different:
English
French
to begin
to work
to commence
to labour
182
U. ENGLISH VOCABULARY
to leave
to abandon
life
existence
look
regard
ship
vessel
As we see, the French borrowing is generally more literary or
even bookish, .the English word - a common one; but sometimes
the English word is more literary. Compare:
foe (native, English) — enemy (French borrowing).
4. Sometimes the English language borrowed many words
with the same word-building affix. The meaning of the
affix in this case became clear to the English-speaking
people. It entered the system of word-building means of
the English language, and they began to add it to English
words, thus forming word-hybrids. For instance, the
suffix -ment entered the language within such words as
"government", "parliament", "agreement", but later there
appeared such English-French hybrids as:
fulfilment, amazement.
The suffix -ance/-ence, which was an element of such
borrowed words as "innocence", "ignorance", "repentance", now
also forms word-hybrids, such as
hindrance.
A similar thing: French borrowings "admirable", "tolerable",
"reasonable", but also:
readable, eatable, unbearable.
5. One of the consequences of the borrowings from French
was the appearance of ethymological doublets.
— from the Common Indoeuropean:
native
borrowed
fatherly
paternal
— from the Common Germanic:
183
PART 1. LECTURES
""
native
yard
ward
choose
borrowed
garden
guard
choice
— from Latin:
earlier
later
(Old English)
(Middle English)
borrowing
borrowing
mint
money
inch
ounce
6. Due to the great number of French borrowings there
appeared in the English language such families of words,
which though similar in their root meaning, are different
in origin:
native
borrowed
mouth
oral
sun
solar
see
vision
7. There are caiques on the French phrase:
It's no doubt Se n'est pas doute
Without doubtSans doute
Out of doubt Hors de doute.
3. New English
3.1. General Characteristics
The language in New English is growing very rapidly, the
amount of actually existing words being impossible to estimate.
Though some of the words existing in Old English and Middle
English are no longer used*In New English, the amount of new
words exceeds the number of obsolete ones manifold.
184
11. ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Both internal means and external means are used for the
purpose of enriching the vocabulary, and the importance of either
of them is hard to evaluate.
3.2. Means of enriching vocabulary
in New English
3.2.1. Internal means of enriching vocabulary
The principal inner means in New English is the appearance
of new words formed by means of conversion. Usually new
words are formed by acquiring a new paradigm and function
within a sentence. Thus, book (a noun) has the paradigm book —
books. Book (a verb) has the paradigm book — books — booked
— booking, etc. (The book is on the table - He booked a room.)
Similarly:
man (n) — man (v)
stone (n) — stone (v) — stone (adj)
(as in "a stone bench"), etc.
3.2.2. External means of enriching vocabulary
Very many new words appear in New English due to
borrowing. It is necessary to say here that the process of
borrowing, the sources of loan Words, the nature of the new
words is different from Middle English and their appearance in
the language cannot be understood unless sociolinguistic factors
are taken into consideration.
Chronologically speaking, New English borrowings may be
subdivided into borrowings of the Early New English period —
XV—XVII centuries, the period preceeding the establishment of
the literary norm, and loan words which entered the language
after the establishment of the literary norm — in the XVIII—XX
centuries, the period which is generally alluded to as late New
English.
185
PART 1. LECTURES
— Early New English borrowings (XV—XVII
centuries)
Borrowings into the English language in the XV—XVII
centuries are primarily due to political events and also to the
cultural and. trade relations between the English people and
peoples in other countries. Thus , in the XV century — the epoch
of Renaissance, there appeared in the English language many
words borrowed from the Italian tongue:
cameo, archipelago, dilettante, fresco, violin,
balcony, gondola, grotto, volcano;
in the XVI century — Spanish and Portuguese words, such as:
armada, negro, tornado, mosquito, renegade,
matador
and also Latin (the language of culture of the time), for instance:
— verbs, with the characteristic endings -ate, -ute:
aggravate, abbreviate, exaggerate, frustrate,
separate, irritate, contribute, constitute, persecute,
prosecute, execute, etc.,
— adjectives ending in -ant, -ent, -ior, -al:
arrogant, reluctant, evident, obedient, superior,
inferior, senior, junior, dental, cordial, filial.
As a result of numerous Latin borrowings at the time there
appeared many ethymological doublets:
Latin
strictum
(direct)
strict
strait (through French)
seniorem
senior
sir
186
11. ENGLISH VOCABULARY
fас turn
fact
feat
defectum
defect
defeat
In the XVII century due to relations with the peoples of
America such words were borrowed as:
canoe, maize, potato, tomato, tobacco, mahogany,
cannibal, hammock, squaw, moccasin, wigwam,
etc.
French boirowings — after the Restoration:
ball, ballet, billet, caprice, coquette, intrigue,
fatigue, naive.
—Late New English borrowings (XYHJ—XX centuries)
— German:
kindergarten, waltz, wagon, boy, girl
— French:
magazine, machine, garage, police, engine,
nacelle, aileron
— Indian:
bungalow, jungle, indigo
— Chinese:
coolie, tea
— Arabic:
caravan, divan, alcohol, algebra, coffee, bazaar,
orange, cotton, candy,
chess
IS7
PART 1. LECTURE
—Australian:
kangaroo, boomerang, lubra
— Russian:
Before the October Revolution the borrowings from the
Russian language were mainly words reflecting Russian realm о
the time:
borzoi, samovar, tsar, verst, taiga, etc.
After the Revolution there entered the English language such
words that testified to the political role of this country in the
world, as:
Soviet, bolshevik, kolkhoz.
Cultural and technical achievements are reflected in sue
borrowings as:
sputnik, lunnik, lunokhod, synchrophasotron
and recently such political terms as:
glasnost, perestroika.
In New English there also appeared words formed on the
basis of Greek and Latin vocabulary. They are mainly scientific
or technical terms, such as:
telephone, telegraph, teletype, telefax,
microphone, sociology, politology, electricity, etc.
Some more facts...
The Change of Calendar
Most of the new words coming into the language today have
been derived from the same sources or created by the satne
methods as those that have long been familiar. Among them are
borrowings, many of them reflecting events and changes in the
life of the people, committing to memory the names of their perpetrators. Here we may recollect the history of calendar.
Julius Caesar in 46 ВС fixed the length of the year at 365
188
U. ENGLISH VOCABULARY
days, and 366 days every fourth year. The months had thirty and
thirty-one days alternately, with the exception of February (then
the last month of the year), which had twenty-nine in ordinary
years, and thirty in leap years. To mark this change of calendar
July was named after its originator.
The Emperor Augustus upset this arrangement by naming
August after himself, and in order that it should have the same
number of days as July, i.e. thirty-one, took one day from February in both ordinary and leap years.
The Julian Calendar made a slight error in the length of the
year, a mere eleven minutes and fourteen seconds; but by the
sixteenth century the cumulative error was about ten days. This
was rectified by Pope Gregory XIII who, in 1582, decreed that 5
October should become the fifteenth. In order to prevent a
recurrence of the fault it was ordained that the centurial years
(i.e. 1600, 1700, etc.) should not be Leap years unless divisible
by 400.
England did not accept this Gregorian calendar until 1752,
thereby causing much confusion between English and
Continental dates, whilst the disparity between the Julian and
Gregorian calendars was now eleven days. An Act of Parliament
in 1750 made 2 September 1752 into 14 September and moved
the first day of the year from 25 March (still reckoned as the beginning of the financial year) to 1 January — 24 March 1700,
for example, was followed by 25 March 1701. In this way
England was brought into line with the rest of Europe.
After E. R. Deldeifield
LECTURE 12.
ETHYMOLOGICAL STRATA
IN MODERN ENGLISH
Figures of Red Indians
on the announcement of
The Lottery for Virginia,
1615 intended for
raising money required
for colonisation of
America.
List of principal questions:
1. General characteristics
2. Native element in Modern English
2.1. Common Indo-European stratum
2.2. Common Germanic stratum
.3. Foreign element in Modern English (borrowings)
3.1. Latin element
3.2. Scandinavian element
3.3. French element
4.
Word-hybrids
5. Ethymological doublets
10. ETHYMOLOGICAL STRATA IN MODERN ENGLISH
1. General characteristics
The English vocabulary of today reflects as no other aspect
of the language the many changes in the history of the people and
various contacts which the English speakers had with many
nations and countries. The long and controversial history of the
people is reflected in its vocabulary and especially in the number
of loan words in it, different in origin and time of their entering
the language and the circumstances under which the acquisition
of the foreign element took place. So large is the number of
foreign words in English that it might at first be supposed that the
vocabulary has lost its Germanic nature.
However, the functional role of the native element: the
lotions expressed by native words, their regularity and frequency
of occurrence, lack of restrictions to their use in written and oral
speech of different functional styles, proves that the Germanic
dement still holds a fundamental place, and the English
vocabulary should be called Germanic.
2. Native element in Modern English
English native words form" two ethymological strata: the
Common Indo-European stratum and the Common Germanic
stratum.
2.1. Common Indo-European stratum
The words forming this stratum are the oldest in the
vocabulary. They existed thousands of years B.C., at the time
w
hen it was yet impossible to speak about separate IndoEuropean languages, as well as about various nations in Europe.
Words of the Common Indo-European vocabulary have been
'nherited by many modem Indo-European languages, not only
191
PART 1. LECTURES
Germanic, which is often a possible proof of these words
belonging to the Common Indo-European stratum. Compare:
English
Latin
Russian
mother
brother
night
be
stand
two
three
ten
mater
frater
nox (noctem)
fieri
stare
duo
tres
decem
мать
брат
ночь
быть
стоять
два
три
десять, etc.
2.2. Common Germanic stratum
There are also words inherited from Common Germanic
Common Germanic is supposed to exist before it began splitting
into various subgroups around the 1st century B.C.—Г1 century
A.D. These words can be found in various Germanic languages,
but not in Indo-European languages other than Germanic.
English
German
Swedish
man
earth
harm
green
grey
mann
erde
harm
gran
grau
man
jord
harm
gron
gra
The occurrence or non-occurrence of corresponding words in
related languages is often a proof of their common origin. But, of
course, the word could be borrowed from the same source into
different languages, especially if we speak about languages in
modern times.
192
10. ETHYMOLOG1CAL STRATA IN MODERN ENGLISH
3. Foreign element in Modern English
(borrowings)
As we know, borrowed words comprise more than half the
vocabulary of the language. These borrowings entered the
language from many sources, forming consequently various
ethymological strata. The principal ones here are as follows:
— the Latin element
— the Scandinavian element
— the French element.
3.1. Latin element
The first Latin words entered the language of the forefathers
of the English nation before they came to Britain. It happened
during a direct intercourse and trade relations with the peoples of
[he Roman empire. They mainly denote names of household
•terns and products:
apple, pear, plum, cheese, pepper, dish, kettle, etc.
Already on the Isles from the Romanized Celts they
borrowed such words as:
street, wall, mill, tile, port, caster (camp — in such
words as Lancaster, Winchester).
Words of this kind denoted objects of Latin material culture.
Latin words such as:
altar, bishop, candle, church, devil, martyr, monk,
nun, pope, psalm, etc.
Were borrowed after the introduction of the Christian religion (7!h
century), which is reflected in their meaning.
The number of these words inherited from Old English is
almost two hundred.
193
PART I. LECTURES
We mentioned these words as Latin borrowings in the sense
that they entered English from Latin, but many of them were
Greek borrowings into Latin, such as
bishop, church, devil
and many others.
Another major group of Latin borrowings entered English
with the revival of learning (15th—I6ll! centuries). Latin was drawn
upon for scientific nomenclature, as at the time the language was
understood by scientists all over the world, it was considered the
common name-language for science. These words were mainly
borrowed through books, by people who knew Latin well and
tried to preserve the Latin form of the word as much as possible.
Hence such words as:
antenna — antennae, index — indices, datum
data, stratum — strata, phenomenon —
phenomena, axi s— axes, formula — formulae,
etc.
Very many of them have suffixes which clearly mark them as
Latin boiTOwings of the time:
— verbs ending in -ate, -ute:
aggravate, prosecute
— adjectives ending in -ant, -ent, -ior, -al:
reluctant, evident, superior, cordial.
These word-building elements together with the stylistic
sphere of the language where such words are used are generally
sufficient for the word attribution.
3.2. Scandinavian element
Chronologically words of Scandinavian origin entered the
language in the period between the 8th and the 10th centuries due
to the Scandinavian invasions and settlement of Scandinavians on
194
10. ETHYMOLOGICAL STRATA IN MODERN ENGLISH
the British Isles, with subsequent though temporary union of two
important divisions of the Germanic race. It is generally thought
that the amount of words borrowed from this source was about
500, though some linguists surmise that the number could have
been even greater, but due to the similarity of the languages and
scarcity of written records of the time it is not always possible to
say whether the word is a borrowed one or native, inherited from
the same Common Germanic source.
Such words may be mentioned here, as:
they, then, their, husband, fellow, knife, law, leg,
wing, give, get, forgive, forget, take, call, ugly,
wrong.
As we said, words of Scandinavian origin penetrated into the
English language so deeply that their determination is by no
means easy. However, there are some phonetic/spelling features
of the words which in many cases make this attribution authentic
enough. These are as follows:
— words with the sk/sc combination in the spelling, as:
sky, skin, skill, scare, score, scald, busk, bask
(but not some Old French borrowings as task, scare, scan, scape)
— words with the sound [g] or [k] before front vowels [i], [e]
fei], in the spelling i, e, ue, ai, a (open syllable) or at the end of
the word:
give, get, forgive, forget, again, gate, game, keg,
kid, kilt, egg, drag, dregs, flag, hug, leg, log, rig.
There are also personal names of the same origin, ending in
•son:
Jefferson, Johnson
or place names ending in -ly, -thorp, -toft (originally meaning
"village", "hamlet"):
Whitly, Althorp, Lowestoft.
195
PART 1. LECTURES
These places are mainly found in the north-east of England,
where the Scandinavian influence was stronger than in other parts
of England.
3.3. French element
The French element in the English vocabulary is a large and
important one. Words of this origin entered the language in the
Middle and New English periods.
Among Middle English borrowings we generally mention
earlier borrowings, their source being Norman French — the
dialect of William the Conqueror and his followers. They entered
the language in the period beginning with the time of Edward the
Confessor and continued up to the loss of Normandy in 1204.
Later Middle English borrowings have as their source
Parisian French. The time of these borrowings may be estimated
as end of the 13th century and up to 1500.
These words are generally fully assimilated in English and
felt as its integral part:
government, parliament, justice, peace, prison,
court, crime, etc.
Many of these words (though by no means all of them) are
terms used in reference to government and courts of law. •
Later Middle English borrowings are more colloquial words:
air, river, mountain, branch, cage, calm, cost,
table, chair.
The amount of these Middle English borrowings is as
estimated as much as 3,500.
French borrowings of the New English period entered the
language beginning with the 17th century — the time of the
Restoration of monarchy in Britain, which began with the
accession to the throne of Charles II, who had long lived in exile
at the French court:
196
10. ETHYMOLOGICAL STRATA IN MODERN ENGLISH
aggressor, apartment, brunette, campaign, caprice,
caress, console, coquette, cravat, billet-doux, carte
blanche, etc:
Later also such words appeared in the language as:
garage, magazine, policy, machine.
It is interesting to note that the phonetics of French
borrowings always helps us to prove their origin.
These phonetic features are at least two: stress and special
sound/letter features. Concerning the first (stress), words which
do not have stress on the first syllable unless the first syllable is a
prefix are almost always French borrowings of the New English
period. Words containing the sounds [$"] spelled not sh, [d3] —
£°-£ dg, [tj"] — not ch and practically all words with the sound [3] •
are sure to be of French origin:
aviation, social, Asia, soldier, jury, literature,
pleasure, treasure.
4. Word-hybrids
The extensive borrowing from various languages and
assimilation of loan words gave rise to the formation in English
°f a large number of words the elements of which are of different
origin — they are generally termed word-hybrids.
English
beaaout
over
fore
salt
false
French
-cause
-round
curse
cry
power
front
cell(ar)
hood
because
around
accurse
outcry
overpower
forefront
salt-seller
falsehood
197
PART 1. LECTURES
French
hobby
scape
trouble
plenty
aimre-
English
horse
goat
some
ful
-less
take
English
parbandy-
Scandinavian
take
partake
leg
bandy-legged
French
re-
Scandinavian
call
recall
Latin
juxta-
French
position
hobbyhorse
scapegoat'
troublesome
plentiful
aimless
retake
juxtaposition
5. Ethymological doublets
Ethymological doublets are words developing from the same
word or root, but which entered the given language, in our case
English, at different times of through different channels.
Classifying them according to the ultimate source of the doublets
we shall receive the following:
Ultimate
Modern
source
doublets
Common Indo-European
*pater
fatherly
paternal
Period and channel
native
M.E. French borrowing
148
10. ETHYMOLOGICAL STRATA IN MODERN ENGLISH
Common Gexmamc.
*gher-
yard
garden
choose
choice
native
M.E. French borrowing
native
M.E. French borrowing
*wer
ward
guard
native
M.E. French borrowing
*sker
shirt
skirt
native
M.E. Scandinavian borrowing
*skhed
shatter
scatter
native
M.E. Scandinavian borrowing
disk
disc
O.E. Latin borrowing
N.E. Latin borrowing
moneta
mint
money
O.E. Latin borrowing
M.E. Latin borrowing
uncia
inch
ounce
O.E. Latin borrowing
M.E. Latin borrowing
defectum
defect
defeat
N.E. Latin borrowing
M.E. Latin borrowing
factum
fact
feat
N.E. Latin borrowing
M.E. Latin borrowing
seniorem
senior
sir
N.E. Latin borrowing
M.E. Latin' borrowing
diamond
adamant
Early M.E. French borrowing
Later M.E. French borrowing
fancy
fantasy
N.E. French borrowing
M.E. French borrowing
*gens-
Latin
discus
Greek
adamas
fantasia
199
PART 1. LECTURES
Hebrew
basam
balm
balsam
M.E. French borrowing
N.E. Latin borrowing
The examples of various ethymological strata in the Modern
English vocabulary mentioned above may serve as a sufficient
testimony of a long and complicated .history of the English
nation and the English language. They prove that language
changes can be understood only in relation to the life of the
people speaking the language.
Some more facts...
Folk etymology
When people hear a foreign or unfamiliar word for the first
time, they try to make sense of it by relating it to words they
know well. They guess what it must mean — and often guess
wrongly. However, if enough people make the same wrong guess,
the error can become part of the language. Such erroneous
forms are called folk or popular etymologies.
Bridegroom provides a good example. What has a groom got
to do with getting married? Is he going to groom the bride? Or
perhaps he is responsible for horses to carry him and his bride
off into the sunset? The true explanation is more prosaic. The
Middle English form was bridgome, which goes back to Old
English brydguma, from "bride" + guma "man". However,
gome died out during the Middle English period. By the 16"
century its meaning was no longer apparent, and it came to be
popularly replaced by a similar-sounding word, grome, "serving
lad". This later developed the sense of "servant having the care
of horses", which is the dominant sense today. But bridegroom
never meant anything more than "bride's man".
Here are a few other folk etymologies:
• sparrow-grass — a popular name for asparagus —
though this vegetable has nothing to do with sparrows.
200
10. ETHYMOLOGICAL STRATA IN MODERN ENGLISH
• cockroach — the name came from Spanish cucuracha,
the first part of which must have been particularly obscure to
English ears. There is no connection with cock.
• salt-cellar — in Old French a salier was a salt-box. When
the word came into English, the connection with salt was
evidently not clear, and people started calling the object a saltsaler. The modern form has no connection with a cellar.
• sirloin — the first part of the word is simply derived from
the French word sur "above". The form must have greatly
puzzled the people of the Early Middle English period. Unused
to French, they etymologized the form to sir, and then thought
up a legend to make sense of it (the story of the English king
who found this joint of meat so splendid that he gave it a
knighthood.)
After D. Crystal
Tart Z. Seminars
he front panel of the Franks' casket, carved out of whale's bone in
Northumbria in about AD 750 and depicting scenes from classical
egend, Germanic mythology and the Bible. A runic inscription
bribes each panel.
(The original is kept at the British Museum, London)
LIST OF SEMINARS
205
1. Introductory. Germanic languages
2. Chief characteristics of Germanic languages.
Grammar
3. Survey of the periods in the history of English.
General characteristics of the Old English period
21
?17
4. Old English phonetics. Vowels
990
5. Old English phonetics. Consonants
6. Old English grammar. Noun
7. Old English grammar. Verb
8. Old English. Discussion
9. General characteristics of the Middle English
period
10. Middle English phonetics. Vowels
11. Middle English phonetics. Consonants
12. Middle English grammar. Noun
13. Middle English grammar. Verb
14. Middle English. Discussion
15. General characteristics of the New English
period
16. New English phonetics. Vowels
17..New English phonetics. Consonants
.•
18. New English grammar. Noun
19. New English grammar. Verb
20. English wordstock
21. Vocabulary layers
22. Modern regular and irregular noun and verb forms
22
22
228
2
^'
240
2
^
2
^
2
^'
248
251
261
263
267
271
272
274
277
SEMINARS 1—2.
GERMANIC LANGUAGES
1- Introductory. Germanic languages
2. Chief characteristics of Germanic languages. Grammar
An early engraving of a gold horn roughly dated about
550 AD, found in Jylland, Sweden. It has a maker's
formula cut in runes round the brim.
205
PART 2. SEMINARS
Seminar 1.
Introductory. Germanic languages
Topics for discussion in class
1.
Position of Germanic languages within the Indo-European
family (main groups of languages, with special reference to
Germanic, Celtic, Slavonic).
2. Formation of national Germanic languages in the late Middle
Ages and the new period.
3. Classification of Modern Germanic languages; countries
where they are spoken. The West and North Germanic
subgroups.
4. Old Germanic tribes and dialects: "Common Germanic".
Differentiation of Common Germanic into Germanic
dialects. East, North and West Germanic groups and their
representatives.
5. Development of the system of consonants in the pre-written
period.
6. Grimm's law, Verner's law. Reasons for the departure from
Verner's law in the pre-written period.
Questions and assignments
1.
2.
3.
4.
What are the aims of studying the history of a language?
What is meant by the outer and inner history of a language?
Make a table showing the relationship of English to the other
languages of the Indo-European family. Show the position of
English among allied Germanic languages.
What do we mean by the statement that two languages are
"related"? Explain the relations between English and French,
English and Greek, English and Welsh, English and Danish.
206
GERMANIC LANGUAGES
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
What is called the pre-written and written period of a
language?
What alphabets employed in the history of Germanic
languages do you know? Speak on the origin and structure of
Germanic alphabets.
What is meant by a phonetic law?
Show carefully how Grimm's law or any apparent exception
to it is illustrated by the following words:
stand, father, third, sweet.
Write down five illustrations of Grimm's law and five
illustrations of Verner's law.
207
PART 2. SEMINARS
Seminar 2.
Chief characteristics of Germanic
languages. Grammar
Topics for discussion in class
1.
2.
3.
4.
Development of the system of declension in the pre-written
period.
Development of the system of conjugation in the pre-written
period.
Means of form-building in the pre-written period.
Vowel interchange as a form-building means in the prewritten period. Ablaut.
Questions and assignments
1.
2.
3.
4.
Explain and illustrate the terms "synthetic" and "analytic"
languages. Give examples of modern synthetic and analytical
languages.
What form-building means were used in Germanic
languages?
What verbal and nominal categories existed in Germanic
languages? Compare them with the categories of modern
languages.
Prepare for reading Old English texts: study the table below
and learn to read Old English letters.
208
GERMANIC LANGUAGES
Reading of Old English texts
Letters & Sounds
Examples
ж
at, cwas6, hwasnne
9
mpnn, lpnd, ond
У
pystrodon, clypode, ymb
P
6
past, pystrodon, top
[8]
[6]
cwaed, оббе, du
cwe6an, hwe6er, Ьгобог
f
[f]
[v]
faeder, fot, faran
hlaford, wifan, griefe
s
[s]
и
Isaac, his, 3eseon
rlsan, forleosan, wyrsa
[у]
[gJ
ёазап, da3as, SI03
Запз, sin3an, 1епзга
dae3, be3ite, 3efeohtan,
3
Ш
h
с
his, he, mihte
[к']
M
супе, cyssan, cin
clypode, 3esceot, boc
209
SEMINARS 3—8.
OLD ENGLISH
3. Survey of the periods in the history of English.
General characteristics of the Old English period
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Old English phonetics. Vowels
Old English phonetics. Consonants
Old English grammar. Noun
Old English grammar. Verb
Old English. Discussion
A runic memorial stone from
Yttergarde, Sweden, telling of
a Viking warrior who made
three expeditions to England in
the early 11th century.
211
PART 2. SEMINARS
Seminar 3.
Survey of the periods in the history
of English. General characteristics
of the Old English period
Topics for discussion in class
1. Survey of the three periods in the history of English (dates,
principal historical events and linguistic facts).
2. Old English historical background (Germanic settlement,
West Germanic tribes and Old English dialects).
3. Old English alphabet and pronunciation.
4. Old English written records: runic inscriptions, religious
works, Anglo-Saxon chronicles.
Questions and assignments
1. What is called the pre-written and written Old English?
2. What is the time of the written records below (seminars
3—6)?
3. What is the dialect reflected in the records below (seminars
3—6)?
4. How do we pronounce words in Old English texts (vowels
and consonants — make use of the table in Seminar 2)?
5. How many vowels and consonants were there in Old
English?
6. How does the quality of the consonant depend on the
position of the word in the text?
7. Study the model of phonetic analysis of an Old English text.
Read and translate the text into Modern English / Russian.
212
OLD ENGLISH
Continue the phonetic analysis following the model (analyse
only the underlined words). Check your variant with the key.
From the Alfredian Version of Orosius's
World History; about 893 A.D.
Alfred the Great (849—900), King of Wessex, was an outstanding
military leader, educator and a man of letters of the time. He tried to
restore the cultural traditions of Anglo-Saxon England severely
damaged by the barbaric "inroads of the Danes" and to revive
learning and literature in his country. He also brought about a great
reform in the schools.
He translated into his native tongue some books on geography,
history and philosophy written by the popular authors of IV—VIII
centuries. This was fortunate for the language which became a medium
of expression in the simpler forms of speech itself.
King Alfred's translation from Latin of "The History of the World"
by the Spanish, monk Orosius (V century) is especially valuable as it
contains his own insertions — the descriptions of the sea-voyages in the
North West of Europe of the two Scandinavian merchants, Ohthere and
Wulfstan.
King Alfred's writings favoured flourishing of literature in Wessex
and marked the beginning of the literary tradition later known as "the
Alfredian prose"'.
The extract given below is "From Ohthere's account of his first
voyage". It contains interesting geographical and ethnographical
information of the places he visited. The dialect is West Saxon.
213
PART 2. SEMINARS
Ohthere's account of his first voyage
Ohthere saede his hlaforde, yElfrede cynin?e, bast he gaixa
Nor5monna пофтев! bude. He cwae5 bast he bude on разт lancle
noфweardum wip ba Westsas. He ssde beah bset bast land sie s\#£
1апз поф bonan; ас hit is eal weste, buton on feawum stowum
stycce-maslum wlcia5 Finnas, on huntoSe on wintra and on sumera
on fiscabe be bsere sai.
He sajde bast he a?t suraum cirre wolde fandian hu 1опзе j)£t
land пофгуЬле 1аёзе obbe hwas5er з з т з т о п Ьепогбап рает
westenne bude. J>a for he пофгуЫе be bsem lande; let him ealne
we3 baet weste land on 6st steor-bord. and -ha wTd-see on 6set bjefc
bord. brie da3as. I>a was he swa feor поф swaba hwselhuntan fil£S§i
farab. I>a for he ba 3iet пофгу^е swa feor swa he meahte on Ьзгт
obrum brim da3um 3esi3lan. M Ьёаз past land bjgr east-ry nte °^ e
seo see in on 5set lond, he nysse hwasder, buton he wisse 5ast he бгёг
bad westanwindes and hwon пофап, and si3lde 5a east be lande,
swa-swa he meahte on feower da3um 3esi3ian.
M sceolde he баёг bldan гуМ-пофапу/Ыез; for6aem ba&t land
Ьеаз baer subryhte obbe seo sae in on 6aet land he nysse hwseber. P&
si3lde he bonan sudryhte be lande, swa-swa he on fif da3um 3esi3lan.
Da 1ЖЗ.ЪЗГГ an micel ea up-in on bget land. Pa cirdon hie up-in on oa
ea, for-jbiem hie ne dorston & ф bi Ьззге ёа si3lan for unfripe; forpasm 6ast land waes eall зеЬпп on obre healfe bare eas. Ne mette he
ffir nan зеЬпп land, sibban he from his азпит ham for.
Fela spella him ssedon ba Beormas зззЬег зе of hiera азпит
lande зе of baem landum be ymb hie utan wseron, ac he nyste hwjet
bass sobes wass, for-Ъгёт he hit self ne 3eseah. M Finnas, him buhte,
and ba Beormas sprascon neah an 3ebeode. SwTbost he for 6ider,
t5-eacan b a s landes sceawun3e. for bsem hors-hwselum, for-бдат
hie habbad swlbe sepele ban on hiora t5bum, — ba t§6 hie brohton
sume bsem cynin3e —, and hiora hyd.
214
OLD ENGLISH
Model of phonetic analysis
Word as used
m the text
Analysis
Parallels from NE word
cognate
languages or
I related OE words
side
[s] — voiceless initially; OE SK^de
[as] — lengthening of [ae]
(variant form)
due to loss of [g]
said
cynirnje
[у] — palatal mutation of OHG kuning
[u] — caused by [ij; later
M>[i]
[ea] — breaking of [эе] Gt alls
before [l]+consonant,
[ж] — from PG [a]
king
Nor5monna
-monn: [o]=[a] — from
PG [a], later [a >a>as]
Gt mann(a)
Norman
lande
[a] — before nasal
consonants; [a] — from
PG [a], later [а >а>аг]
Gt land
land
t'eah
[ea] — from PG [au]
Gt
SWT{)e
p] — lengthening due
to loss of [n] before
a fricative
stycce
[y] __ palatal mutation
of [u] caused by [i]
[fj — from [p] by
Grimm's Law •
fi] _ . from [ie] —
monophthongisation of
diphthongs in EOE
ealra
fiscafce
cirre
norjjryhte
fcauh
. Gt s w i n g e
though
—
OHG Stukki
rel. to s t o c k
R пескарь
rel to fish
OS kerrian (v)
char
-ryht: [y] — from [ie] — Gt raihts [e]
monophthpngisation of
diphthongs in EOE
215
all
right
PART 2. SEMINAR,с
[б] — voiced intervocally, [se] — from
Gt hvabar
whether
[Её] — palatal mutation
of [a] caused by [i]
cp OE an
any
steor-bord
steor: Гёо] — from
PG [iuj;
bord: [d] — hardening
of [3]
rel. to Gt
star-board
baec-bord
[SE] — from PG [a]
OSk bak
back
brie
[9] — from [t] by
Grimm's Law
/?три
three
da3as
[a] — is caused by
a back vowel in the
next syllable
Gtdagos
days
WffiS
[se] — from PG [a]
OHG was
firrest
[i] — palatal mutation
of [eo] — (feor)
caused by [i]
(-ist) — suffix of
superlative degree:
[eo>ie>i]
EOE fierest
was
farther
farab
[a] — from PG [o]
Gt faran (inf)
fare
3iet
[Те] — (Wess) from PG
[ё] — diphthongisation
after palatal [j]
GtytX
yet
meahte
[ea] — breaking of [ac]
before [h]: [a>ae>ea]
OHG maht
might
Gt anbar
other
hwa25er
PGfaf
obram
stiurjan (v)
Cf. OSk bord
[o] — from PG [a];
lengthening due to the
• loss of [n] before a
fricative
Ьёаз
[ea] — from PG [au]
Gt baug
bow
Ьэзг
[Щ — from PG [a],
[8] «— initially voiceless
Gt bar
there
east
[ea] — from PG [au]
Gt austr
east
216
OLD ENGLISH
Seminar 4.
Old English phonetics. Vowels
Topics for discussion in class
1. The system of Old English vowels and their origin.
2. Assimilative changes of vowels (breaking, palatal mutation)
and their traces in Modern English.
Questions and assignments
'•
Make a list of Old English vowels and analyse the
differentiating features between them (in quality and
quantity).
2. Describe the Old English diphthongs and comment upon
their phonological status.
3. Explain the origin of short diphthongs in Old English:
eald (New English old), tealde (New English told),
earm (New English arm), feohtan (New English fight).
4. What are the phonetic conditions of palatal mutation? Give
some Old English or reconstructed forms showing these
conditions. Analyse the results of palatal mutation:
(a) in form-building of nouns in the root-stem declension,
e.g. Old English fot — fgt (New English foot —feet),
mUS —mys (New English mouse — mice)',
(b) in word-building of weak verbs of class 1 from noun and
adjective stems,
e.g. Old English dom — deman (New English doom — deem),
fod — fedan (New English food —feed),
ful — fyllan (New English full —fill).
217
PART 2. SEMINARS
5.
Read and translate the text below into Modern English /
Russian (part 1). Make the phonetic analysis following the
model given in Seminar 3 (analyse only the underlined
words). Check your variant with the key.
From the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle
A. 1013
The Old English Chronicle, sometimes called the Anglo-Saxon
Chronicle, contains the history of Britain from the time of Caesars
invasion to the reign of Henry II (1154).
It presents the original and authentic testimony of contemporary
writers to the most important events in the history of the country,
including many interesting facts relative to architecture, agriculture,
coinage, commerce, naval and military events, laws, liberty ana
religion. This ancient record is believed to be the second great
phenomenon in the history of mankind after the Old Testament, pi
there is no other work, ancient or modern, which exhibits at one view a
regular and chronological panorama of a people, described in rapw
succession by different writers, through so many ages, in their own
vernacular language. That is why it may be considered not only as the
primaeval source of factual material for all subsequent historians oj
England, but also as a faithful depository of the national idiom,
providing a very interesting, and extraordinary example of the changes
incident to a language, as well as to a nation, in its historical progress.
The writers of the Chronicle are not known, probably they were
monks, as MSS come from different monasteries. The dialect of the
extract given below is West Saxon. It describes the time of Scandinavian
Invasions in Britain and the fall of the Saxon dynasty.
(Part I)
On бает asftran зёаге рё se arcebiscop wass 3emartyrod, se
cynin3 3esette Lyfine biscop to Cantwarabvrh t5 6am arcest5le;
and on pissum ylcan зёаге, toforan pam топбе Augustus, com
Swe3en сутпз mid his flotan to SandwTc, and wende pa swi6e
218
OLD ENGLISH
габе abutan Eastenglum into Humbra muban. and swa upweard
andlang Trentan, 66 he com to 3enesburuh; and ba sona beah
Uhtred eori and ealle Nor6hymbre to 'him; and eall baet folc on
Lindesi3e, and si65an baet folc into Flfburhingum. and габе baes
eall here be погбап \Vsetlin3a straete, and him man sealde 3islas
of aelcere sclre. Sy66an he unde^eat bast eall folc him to 3ebogen
was, pa bead he {)set man sceolde his here mettian and horsian;
and he 5a wende sybban su6weard mid fulre fyrde, and betsehte
f>a scipu and ba 3islas Cnute his suna; and sy66an he com ofer
Wstlinga strEete, worhton baet maeste yfel bast еётз here don
mihte. Wende pa to Oxenforda, and seo buruhwaru sona beah and
3'slude, and banon to Winceastre, and hi pat ylce dydon. Wende
fra banon eastwerd to Lundene, and mycel his folces adrang on
Temese, for6am be hi nanre Ьгусзе ne cepton.
(Part 2)
f*a he to бгёге Ьупз com, ba nolde seo burhwaru Ьизап ас
heoldan mid fullan wi3e опзеап. for5an Ьжг waes inne se cyng
^belred and Purkyl mid him. Е»а wende Swe3en cyng banon to
Wealingforda, and swa ofer Temese westweard to Baban, and sast
ba5r mid his fyrde. And com ЛЕре1тэег ealdorman byder, and 5a
westernan Ьезепав mid him, and Ы130П ealle to Swe3ene, and hi
3»sludon. I>a he 5us 3efaren heefde. wende ba nor5weard to his
scipum, and eall peodscype hine haefde ba for fulne cyng; and seo
buruhwaru after 5am on Lundene beah and 3islude, forSon hi
QJDdredon baet he hT fordon wolde. Pa wses se cyning vEbelred
sume hwTle mid bam flotan be on Temese. 1аез, and seo hla3fdi3e
gewende ba ofer sae to hire Ьгёбег Ricarde, and se cyning
gewende ba fram 5am flotan to bam middanwintra to Wihtlande,
and waes баёг ba tTd; and sefter Ьэзге tide wende ofer 5a see to
Ricarde, and wses базг mid him ob bone byre b«e(: Swe3en wear6
dead.
219
PART 2. SEMINARS
Seminar 5.
Old English phonetics. Consonants
Topics for discussion in class
1. The system of Old English consonants and their origin.
2. Grimm's law, Verner's law; voicing, devoicing, hardening
. and rhotacism in Old English.
Questions and assignments
1.
Make a list of Old English consonants and analyse the
differentiating features between them.
2. What consonant correlations may be observed between
words in English and any other Germanic languages?
3. Find in the text examples showing that voiced and voiceless
fricative consonants (f/v, 0/6, s/z) were conditioned variants
(allophones) of the same phonemes.
4. Read and translate the text above into Modern English /
Russian (part 2). Make the phonetic analysis following the
model given in Seminar 3 (analyse only the underlined
words). Check your variant with the key.
220
OLD ENGLISH
Seminar 6.
Old English grammar. Noun
Topics for discussion in class
1 • Old English nominal system. Means of form-building.
2. Grammatical categories of nouns, adjectives and pronouns.
3. Morphological classification of Old English nouns (types of
declensions).
4. Traces of the Old English declensions in Modern English.
5. Degrees of comparison of adjectives in Old English and their
further history.
Questions and assignments
12.
3.
4.
5.
What form-building means were used in the Old English
nominal system?
Enumerate the grammatical categories of nouns, adjectives
and pronouns and state the difference between them.
Into what types of declensions did the Old English nouns
fall? Why are they termed "stems"?
Look through the noun paradigm and find instances of
different means used in form-building.
Copy and learn the declension of an a-stem, masculine (e.g.
Stan, New English stone), a root-Stem (e.g. man. New English man)
6.
and an n-stem (e.g. nama. New English name) noun. Point out
the forms or endings which have survived in Modern
English.
Explain the difference between the groupings of nouns into
types of declension and the two declensions of adjectives.
221
PART 2. SEMINARS
7.
8.
Define the case, number and gender of nouns, pronouns and
adjectives in the following:
foa wildan hranas; ealra norbmonna;
hiera азпшп lande; his yldran sunu;
mine da3as; to him
Study the model of grammar and vocabulary analysis of an
Old English text. Consult the text and your translation notes
for Seminar 3 (Ohthere's account of his first
voyage).
Continue the grammar and vocabulary analysis following the
model given below. Check your variant with the key.
Model of grammar and vocabulary analysis
Words as used
in the text
Analysis
notes
Ohthere
noun proper,
nominative singular
Corresponding
New English
word
Translation
Ohthere
(name)
sa;de
verb, У person
singular, past tense,
indicative mood of
secgan. weak verb,
class III
say
said
his
pronoun
personal,
л
У person singular,
masculine, genitive
his
(to) his
hlaforde
noun, dative singular
of hlaford, masculine,
a-stem
lord
lord
/Elfrede
noun proper, dative
singular
Alfred
Alfred
сушпзе
noun, dative singular of
cynin3, masculine,
a-stem
king
the King
л
222
OLD ENGLISH
paet
conjunction
that
that
he
pronoun personal,
3^ person singular,
masculine, nominative
he
he
ealra
pronoun indefinite,
plural, genitive of eal
all
of all
Nor6monna
noun, genitive plural of
Nor5monn,
masculine, root-stem
northmen
Northmen
(Scandinavians)
пофтеБ!
bude
adverb
northmost
to the north
lived
(or had lived)
verb, 3 rd person
singular, past tense,
indicative or subjunctive
mood of buan.
anomalous verb
cwae5
verb, 3rd person
singular, past tense,
indicative mood of
cwse6an, strong verb,
class V
obs. quoth
said
beet
conjunction
that
that
bude
see above
lived
(or had livedj
on
o n
preposition
P^m
pronoun demonstrative, that
dative singular,
masculine of se. seo. pact
the
lande
noun, dative singular of
land, neuter, a-stem
land
ОП
land
norjbweardum adjective, dative
singular, neuter of
noroward. used
adverbially
northward
to the North
whp
preposition
with
of
P§
pronoun demonstrative, that
accusative singular,
feminine of se. seo. feast
223
that (the)
PART 2. SEMINARS
Westsaj
noun proper, accusative
singular of Westsse,
feminine, i-stem
west sea
Atlantic
Ocean
beah
conjunction
though
also
jbaet
conjunction
that
that
baet
pronoun demonstrative,
nominative singular,
neuter of se. seo, past
that
that
land
noun, nominative
singular, neuter, a-stem
land
land
sle
verb, 3"1 person
singular, present tense,
subjunctive mood of
beon. suppletive verb
be
is
swibe
adverb
—
very
1апз
adjective, nominative
singular, neuter, strong
declension
long
long
поф
adverb
north
north
£onan
adverb
thence
from there
ас
conjunction
—
but
hit
pronoun personal, 3 r i
person singular, neuter,
nominative
it
it
is
verb, 3 rd person singular,
present tense, indicative
mood of beon, irregular
verb
is
is
eal
pronoun/adverb
all
weste
adjective, nominative
singular, neuter, strong
declension
—
all
uninhabited
(waste)
buton
conjunction
but
but
on
see above
on
on/in/at
224
OLD ENGLISH
feawum
adjective, dative plural of few
feaw, strong declension
few
Stowum
noun, dative plural of
Stow
st5w. feminine, wo-stem
places
styccemaelum
adverb
stockmeal
here and
there
wlciad
verb, У person plural,
present tense, indicative
mood of wTcian, weak
verb, class II
—
live
Finnas
noun proper, nominative Finn
plural of Finn, masculine,
a-stem
on
preposition
on
on/by
hunto5e
noun, dative singular of
huntoS. masculine,
a-stem
hunt
hunting
on
on/in
on
see above
(the) Finns
wintra
noun, dative singular of winter
winter, masculine, u-stem
and
conjunction
and
and
on
see above
on
on/in
noun, dative singular of
sumor/er. masculine,
u-stem
summer
summer
noun, dative singular of
fisco57a6. masculine,
a-stem
fish
fishing
be
preposition
by
by/from
f>Sre
pronoun demonstrative, that
dative singular, feminine
of se. seo. f>a;t
that
sae
noun, dative singular of
§ш, feminine, i-stem
sea
sumera
fiscafce
225
sea
winter
PART 2. SEMINARS
Seminar 7.
Old English grammar. Verb
Topics for discussion in class
1.
2.
3.
4.
Old English verbal system. Means of form-building.
Grammatical categories of finite and non-finite forms of the
verb.
Morphological classification of Old English verbs.
Traces of the Old English verb conjugation in Modern
English.
Questions and assignments
1.
Enumerate the grammatical categories of the finite and nonfinite forms, indicating the number of members within each
category.
2. Look through the verb paradigm and find instances of
different form-building means used.
3. What are the main differences between the weak and the
strong verbs? •
4. Why did the strong verbs fall into seven classes? Point out
the differences between them.
5. Copy and learn the principal forms of the strong verbs of
class 1 (e.g. writan. New English write), class 3 (e.g. drincajl,
helpan. New English drink, help), class 5 (e.g. wesan, New English
be).
6.
Account for the division of the weak verbs into classes and
point out the differences between them.
226
OLD ENGLISH
7.
Copy the conjugation of a weak verb (e.g. locaian. New
English look or macian. New English make) in the present and
past tenses of the indicative mood and say by what means the
verb distinguished person, number and tenses.
8.
Define the person, number, tense, mood and the
morphological class of the verb in the following:
he saide; Ohthere bad; he hwa?5;
ba aras he; buhte me; clypode he;
pa Isaac ealdode; bu 3esihst; his ёазап bystrodon
9.
Read the text in Seminar 4 (The Anglo-Saxon Chronicle).
Consult your translation notes for Seminars 4—5. Make the
grammar and vocabulary analysis following the model given
in Seminar 6. Check your variant with the key.
227
PART 2. SEMINARS
Seminar 8.
Old English. Discussion
Topics for discussion in class
1. Chronological division in the history of English.
2. Old English. Outer and inner history of the period.
3. Principal features of the Old English phonetic system.
4. Principal features of the Old English grammar system.
Questions and assignments
1. With what languages of Europe is the English language most
closely connected? Describe these relations in more detail.
2. What is meant by runes? Have any runic letters been
admitted to the English alphabet?
3. What Old English phonemes no longer exist in New
English? Give examples from the set of Old English vowels
and consonants.
4. What grammatical categories of Old English no longer exist
in New English? Give examples from the nominal and verbal
paradigm.
5. Read and translate the text below into Modern English /
Russian. Make a complete phonetic, grammar and
vocabulary analysis of the text following the models of
Seminar 3 and Seminar 6. Hand in your written work as
Part 1 of your course project.
228
OLD ENGLISH
From ^Elfric's Translation of the Genesis;
ab. 1000 A.D.
Aelfiic, the most outstanding author of the clerical prose of late Old
English, was abbot of the Ensham Benedictine monastery and a native
ofWessex. His chief writings are numerous Homilies, his translation of
The Lives of Saints" and from the Old Testament as well as of the
book "Ars Grammatica" by Donatus Aurelius (Latin, IV century)
The extract given below is "The Story of Jakob's Deceit" (Old
Testament, Genesis 27) and represents the classical Late West Saxon
dialect.
The Story of Jacob's Deceit
I. Da Isaac ealdode and his ёазап bystrodon, f>aet he ne
mihte nan bin3 3eseon, pa clypode he Esau, his yldran sunu, 2.
and cwae6 to him: ' M 3esihst Jjaet ic ealdi3e, and ic nat hwasnne
Kline da3as азапе beod. 3. Nim bin 3esceot, binne cocur and
pinne Ьозап, and запз ut; and, bonne bu ззшз Ь т з be3ite baes-be
f>u wene 4. paet me Iyci3e, Ьгшз me, paet ic ete and ic pe bletsi3e,
®r-bam-be ic swelte.' 5. Da Rebecca paet 3ehTrde and Esau
uta3an wass, 6. ba cwseb heo to Iacobe, hire suna: 'Ic 3ehlrde past
pin fasder с^азб to Esauwe, pmum Ьгёбег: 7. "Влпз me of binum
hunto6e, paet ic bletsi3e бё beforan drihtne, азг ic swelte." 8.
Sunu mm, hlyste mTnre lare: 9. far to базге heorde and Ьппз me
twa ba betstan tyccenu, baet ic maci3e mete pinum feeder разг-of,
and he ytt lustllce. 10. Donne 6u 6a in brin3St, he ytt and bletsab
be, aer he swelte.' 11. Da cwae6 he to hire: 'J>u wast bast Esau,
mm Ьгббиг, ys ruh, and ic eom sme6e. 12. 3if mm fasder me
handla6 and me 3ecnaew6 ic ondraBde baet he wene baet ic hine
wylle beswTcan and baat he wiri3e me, nass na bletsi3e.' 13. Da
cwasd seo modor to him: 'Sunu mm, S13 seo wiri3nys ofer me! Do
swa ic be эесзе: far and Ьппз P a pin3 be ic be bead.'
229
PART 2. SEMINARS
14. He ferde pa and brohte and sealde hit hys meder, and heo
hit 3earwode, swa heo wiste past his feeder llcode. 15. And heo
scrydde Iacob mid bam deorwurpustan reafe pe heo aet ham mid •
hire haefde; 16. and befeold his handa mid pasra tyccena fellum;
and his swuran, pair he nacod waes, heo befeold. 17. And heo
sealde him pone mete pe heo seap, and hlaf; and he brohte past
his faeder 18. and cwas5: 'Faeder mini' He andswarode and cwas5:
'Hwset eart рп, sunu mln?' 19. And Iacob cwae5: 'Ic eom Esau,
pin frum-cenneda sunu. Ic dyde swa рп me bebude. ArTs upp and
site, and et of mlnum hunto5e, past pu me bletsi3e.' 20. Eft Isaac
cwas6 to his suna: 'Sunu mm, hu mihtest рп hit swa hraedllce
findan?' Pa andswarode he and cwae5: 'Hit waes 3odes willa, bast
me hrasdlice опзёап com past ic wolde.' 21. And Isaac cwas6: '3a
hider near, past ic aethrine pin, sunu mm, and fandi3e hwas5er рп
S13 mln sunu Esau, pe ne S13.' 22. He eode to pam faeder; and
Isaac cwa?5, pa pa he hyne 3e3rapod hasfde: 'WitodlTce seo stemn
ys Iacobes stefn, and pa handa synd Esauwes handa.' 23. And he
ne 3ecneow hine, for-pam pa ruwan handa wseron swilce paes
yldran bropur. He hyne bletsode pa 24. and cwasb: 'Eart pu Esau,
mm sunu?' And he cwse6: 'la leof, ic hit eom.' 25. M cweed Ш
'Brin3 me mete of blnum hunto6e past ic pe bletsi3e.' P»a he pone
mete brohte, he brohte him eac win. Pa he hasfde 3edruncen, 26.
ba cwae6 h i to him: 'Sunu mm, запз hider and cysse me.' 27. He
nealeahte and cyste hine. Sona, swa he hyne on3eat, he bletsode
hine and cw3s6: 'Nfl ys mines suna stenc, swilce pass landes stenc
pe drihten bletsode. 28. Sylle pe 3od of heofenes deawe and of
еогбап fastnisse, and micelnysse hwastes and wines. 29. And
beowion pe eall folc, and 3eeadmedun pe ealle тгёзба. Вео pu
pinra brof)ra hlaford and sin pinre modur suna 3ebi3ed beforan
be. Se бе бе wiri3e, si he awiri3ed; and, se pe be bletsi3e, si he
mid bletsun3e 3efylled.'
230
SEMINARS 9—14.
MIDDLE ENGLISH
9. General characteristics of the Middle English period
10. Middle English phonetics. Vowels
11. Middle English phonetics. Consonants
12. Middle English grammar. Noun
13. Middle English grammar. Verb
14. Middle English. Discussion
The pilgrims outside the walls of the city of Canterbury,
an early 14"' century illustration
PART 2. SEMINARS
Seminar 9.
General characteristics
of the Middle English period
Topics for discussion in class
1. Historical events affecting the English language (the
Scandinavian invasion and the Norman conquest).
2. Changes in Middle English word-stock as compared with
Old English.
3. Innovations in spelling in Middle English as compared with
Old English.
4. Middle English written records.
Questions and assignments
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Comment on the position of French in the 12th—13'
centuries.
Speak of the role of foreign influence in Middle English.
Comment on the peculiarities of Middle English borrowings,
their character and distinctive features.
What new letters and digraphs denoting consonants appeared
in Middle English?
Comment on the origin of the underlined letters and digraphs
in the examples below:
with, that, shoures, droughte, every, Zeghirus
Find more examples of this kind in the text assigned for the
seminar.
Study the rules of reading a Middle English text (see the
232
MIDDLE ENGLISH
table below). What new spelling devices denoting vowels
appeared in Middle English?
Use the following examples from the text below as
illustrations:
a) shoures, foweles, yonge;
b) soote, breeth;
c) droghte.
7. Study the model of phonetic analysis of a Middle English
text. Read and translate the text into Modern English /
Russian (part 1, lines 1—18). Continue the phonetic analysis
following the model (analyse only the underlined words).
Check your variant with the key.
Reading of Middle English texts
Letters & Sounds
Examples
/. Vowels
1.1. Single letters
a
[a]
[a:]
whan, and
bathed, maken
e
[e]
[e:]
ende, wende
slepen, seken
i
[i]
[i:]
his, first
inspired, shires
u
[u]
[u:]
nature, vertu
but
233
PART 2. SEMINARS
0
[o]
[o:]
[u]
croppes, from
spoken, open
sonne, come
У
[i]
[i:]
fyngres
nyne, ryght
1.2. Digraphs
ее
[e:]
breeth, eek
ie
[i:]
grief
00
Co:]
root, soote
ou , ow
[uO
[ou]
shoures, how
soule, know
au , aw
[au]
straunge, lawe
ai, ay
[ai]
fair, day
ei, ey
[ei]
wey, reysed
2. Consonants
2.1. Single letters
с
M
[s]
courage^ licour, Caunterbury
certain, perced
g
[g]
№>]
goon, goos
engendred, corages, pilgrimages
f
[f]
fowels, bifil, y-falle
V
[v]
veyne, vertu, devout
s
[s]
his, is, soundry
seson, devyse
И
234
MIDDLE ENGLISH
2.2. Digraphs
sh
m
shoures, shires, shortly
ch
MI
chaumbres, everichon
th
[e]
[6]
that, thinketh, the
bathed, worthy
gh
№']
nyght, ryght, knight
wh
[hw]
whan, what
From Chaucer's Prologue
to his "Canterbury Tales";
ab. 1384—1400
Geoffrey Chaucer (? ab. 1340—1400) was a bom Londoner. His
father and relatives had some associations with the wine trade and with
the Court. For his early schooling he was sent to St. Paul's Almony and
later went on to be a page in the household of the Countess of Ulster.
There he acquired the finest education in good manners, a matter of
great importance not only in his career as a courtier but also in his
career as a poet. Later in his life he was many times sent abroad on
some commercial and diplomatic missions and finally became a
Comptroller of the customs and Justice of the Peace.
He had a passion for books and read a lot in Latin, French, AngloNorman and Italian. He made himself a considerable expert in
contemporaiy sciences — astronomy, medicine, physics and alchemy.
He was a man of Renaissance and he heralded the beginning of
English Renaissance in literature.
Chaucer's writings are numerous and diverse in subject and literary
manner but "The Canterbury Tales" are his greatest work.
It is a narrative of a pilgrimage that led to the outskirts of
Canterbury to the shrine of St. Thomas a Becket (the archbishop of
Canterbury in the XII century, murdered by the order of the king and
canonized by the Catholic Church). "The Canterbuiy Tales" are not
235
PART 2. SEMINARS
finished. They consist of a Prologue and 24 stories told by the persons
described in the Prologue. These people are of different degrees of the
medieval English society. The Prologue is the portrait of an entire
nation, high and low, old and young, lay and clerical, town and
country. The tales these pilgrims tell come from all over Europe, from
Chaucer's contemporaries (Dante, Boccaccio, Petrarch), from the
ancients, from the Orient.
Geoffrey Chaucer was the most outstanding figure of his time. He is
considered to be "the Father of English Poetry", the founder of literary
language.
He wrote in the London dialect which had by that time acquired
prevailing East Midland features with a considerable Southern
dialectal element. As it was the rise of national English standard
various forms coexisted, both dialectal, old and new (e.g. for to seke —
for to seken; soote — sweete; y-ronne; spoken; hem, her(<OE) — they
(Sc.)), hi bis rhymes (the meter is iambic pentameter); there are many
e-forms (Southern dialectal features descending from Kentish).
The Prologue
i
5
io
Whan that Aprille with his shoures soote
The droghte of March hath perced to the roote.
And bathed every veyne in swich licour,
Of which vertu engendred is the flour:
Whan Zephirus eek with his swete breeth
Inspired hath in every holt and heeth
The tendre cropes, and the vonge sonne
Hath in the Ram his halve cours y-ronne,
And srnale foweles maken melodye,
That slepen al the nyght with open ye —
So priketh hem nature in here corages —
Thanne longen folk to goon on pilgrimages,
And palmeres for to seken straunge strondes,
236
MIDDLE ENGLISH
is
20
25
30
35
40
To feme halwes, couthe in sondry londes;
And specially, from every shires ende
Of Engelond to Caunterbury they wende,
The hooly. blisful martir for to seke,
That hem hath holpen, whan that they were seeke:
Bifil that in that seson on a day.
In Southwerk at the Tabard as I lay,
Redy to wenden on my pilgrymage
To Caunterbury with ful devout corage,
At nyght were come into that hostelrye
Wei nyne and twenty in a compaignye
Of sondry folk by aventure y-falle
In felaweshioe, and pilgrimes were they alle,
That toward Caunterbury wolde ryde.
The chaumbres and the stables weren wyde.
And wel we weren esed atte beste.
And shortly, whan the sonne was to reste,
So hadde I spoken with hem everichon,
That I was of her felaweshipe anon,
And made forward erly for to ryse.
To take oure wey ther, as I yow devyse.
But natheless, whil I have tyme and space,
Er that I ferther in this tale pace.
Me thynketh it acordaunt to resoun
To telle yow al the condicioun
Of ech of hem, so as it semed me,
And whiche they were, and of what degree.
And eek in what array that they were inne;
And at a khyght than wol I first bigynne.
237
PART 2. SEMINARS
Model of phonetic analysis
Word as used
in the text
whan
Changes of spelling and sounds
Old English
hwsenne
[hw]
hw
that
shoures
(shour)
[hw]
> [a]
that
wit)
with
> [в]
th
his
his
[s]
[s]
scur
shour/showr
[sk']
> m[u:rl
u replaced by ou/ow
sc replaced by
sh
soote
[e:]
droghte
swote/sweete
swote/swete
ёгпзоб
>
[e:]
droght(e)/
drought
> [u:]
[u:]
u replaced by o/ou
3 replaced by
gh
perced
tpercen)
—
New English
>
>
replaced by
> [a]
> [6]
replaced by
a
replaced by
th
[6]
p replaced by
his
whan
past
Ы
[в]
x
p
with
Middle English
percen
when
[w]
[e]
w
that
>
>
[ae]
[5]
with
>
[3]
his
>
[z]
shower
>Ш
>
[аиэ]
sweet
> П:]
drought
>
[аи]
pierce
[c:] + vocalized | r)> [IQ]
238
MIDDLE ENGLISH
roote
—
rote/roote
lo:]
bathed
(bathen)
swich
SWilc
[k'J
с
which
bathed
badode
[a] (open syl.) > [a:]
[ode]
> [ede]
th
5 replaced by
replaced by
hwilc
>
—
flour
—
bathed
> [el]
> W
swich/s(w)uch
such
[tfl
>
tu]
> [Л]
ал
ch
which
[k'l
> [Ш
[hw]
(hwj
hw replaced by
wh
с replaced by
ch
vertu
root
> Iu:] > [u] before
a dental cons.
which
> №
> [wj
vertu
virtue
flour
flower
fi] + vocalized [r]> [э:]
[u:] + vocalized [r]> [аиэ]
239
PART 2. SEMINARS
Seminar 10.
Middle English phonetics. Vowels
Topics for discussion in class
1.
2.
Qualitative changes of long and short vowels in Middle
English.
Quantitative changes of vowels in Middle English:
lengthening and shortening.
Questions and assignments
1. What phonetic conditions affected the length of vowels in
Middle English?
2. What change affected the Old English monophthongs in
Middle English? Were the changes positional or
independent? Give examples from the text to illustrate points
1 and 2.
3. What changes did the unstressed vowels undergo in Middle
English? How did it affect the grammatical endings?
4. Comment on the changes of the short monophthongs [as] and
[y] and long monophthongs [а], [аз], [у] in Middle English.
5. Speak of the Old English diphthongs in Middle English.
6. Read and translate the text above into Modern English /
Russian (part 2, lines 19—42). Make the phonetic analysis
following the model given in Seminar 9 (analyse only the
underlined words). Check your variant with the key.
240
MIDDLE ENGLISH
Seminar 11.
Middle English phonetics. Consonants
Topics for discussion in class
1 • Consonant changes in Middle English. The rise of sibilants
and affricates.
2. Development of diphthongs due to vocalisation of
consonants.
Questions and assignments
1- What is the origin of the Modern English consonant
phonemes []"], [tf], $3] in native words?
2- Account for the underlined consonants in:
ship, child, bridge.
3
- What is the origin of the diphthongs [ai], [au], [ou] in
day, now, owe?
4. Read and translate the following text into Modern English /
Russian. Make the phonetic analysis following the model
given in Seminar 9 (analyse only the underlined words).
Check your variant with the key.
From Trevisa's Translation
of "The Polychronicon"; 1387
John de Trevisa {1326 —1412) of Cornwall, though educated at
Oxford, lived most of his life in Gloucestershire (South West of
England) serving as chaplain.
241
PART 2. SEMINARS
.
•
Trevisa's "The Polychronicon" is the translation from Latin of a
world history written by the English monk Ranulf Higden in the mum
of the 14"1 century. In his translation Trevisa inserted his own commem
marking it by his name (Trevisa), and by (R) the continuation oj
Higden's text.
The extract below shows the language situation in England in tm
tlteE s
Late Middle English period and the role of French in
^ fl
society of the time: the 14"' century witnessed the ascendancy ofbngus
in public life; whereas the practice had been to use French as saw
language (so Higden tells us in his Polychronicon), by the tune J
Trevisa English also gained a new place in the schools.
Trevisa's English of the Polychronicon combines Midland and South
Western dialectal forms, (typical South Western dialect features are we
ending of the Present tense, Plural -eth< OE -ath; the form oj
Participle II (e.g. i-meddled); /y/ > /u/(e.g. burthe < OE ge-byrd).
About the languages of the inhabitants
Chapter 59
As it is i-knowe how meny manere peple beef) in faS ilfiSS'
pere beep also so many dyvers longages and tonge_s; nopeles
Walsche men and Scottes, f>at beep nou3t i-medled wip sfcsl
naciouns, holdefc wel nyh hir firste longage and speche,; but 311
the Scottes pat were somtyme confederat and wonede wip Pe
Pictes drawe somwhat after hir speche; but pe Flemmynges bat
wonep in pe weste side of Wales havep i-left her straunge speche
and spekep Saxonliche i-now. Also Englische men, pey hadde
from the bygynnynge pre manere speche, norperne, sowjieffle'
and middel speche in pe myddel of pe lond, as pey come of f>re
manere peple of Germania, nopeles by comyxtioun and mellynge
firste wip Danes and afterward wip Normans, in meny pe contray.
longage is apayred, and som usep straunge wlafferynge,
chiterynge, harrynge, and garrynge grisbayting. This apayrynge of
the burbe of pe tunge is bycause of tweie pinges; oon is for
242
MIDDLE
ENGLISH
children, in scole aqenst pe usage and manere of alle opere
naciouns beef) compelled for to leve hire owne langage, and for
to construe hir lessouns and- here pynges in Frensche, and so pey
havej> sep pe Normans come first in to Engelond. Also gentil men
children beef) i-tau^t to speke Frensche from pe tyme pat pey
beep i-rokked in here cradel. and kunnep speke and playe wip a
Sbiides broche: and uplondisshe men wil likne hym self to gentil
men, and fondep wip greet besynesse for to speke Frensche, for to
be btojde of. Pis manere was moche i-used to for firste deth and
is sippe sumdel i-chaunged; for John Cornwaile, a maister of
grammer, chaunged pe lore in gramer scole and construccioun of
Frensche in to Englische; and Richard Pencriche lerned pe
manere techynge of hym and of opere men of Pencrich; so pat
flow, pe зеге of pure Lorde a powsand pre hundred and foure
Score and fyve, and of pe secounde kyng Richard after pe
conquest nyne. in alle pe gramere scoles of Engelond, children
ievep Frensche and construep and lernep an Englische, and hauep
{)erby avauntage in oon side and disavauntage in anoper side;
here avauntage is pat pey lernep her gramer in lasse tyme pan
children were i-woned to doo; disavauntage is pat now children
°f gramer scole connep na more Frensche pan can hir lift heele.
a
nd pat is harme for hem and bey schulle passe pe see and
travaille in straunge landes and in many oper places.
243
PART 2. SEMINARS
Seminar 12.
Middle English grammar. Noun
Topics for discussion in class
1.
Simplification of the case system and types of declension in
Middle English.
2. Means of form-building in Middle English.
3. Rise of the article.
Questions and assignments
1.
Describe and account for the loss of inflexions in English
nouns, speak about the remaining inflexions.
2. Discuss the grammatical elements of the words
children's; leaves; men; brethren's; ships
3. Speak of the changes in the adjective paradigm in Middle
English.
4. Study the model of grammar and vocabulary analysis of a
Middle English text. Consult your translation notes for
Seminars 9—10 (Chaucer, The Prologue). Continue the
grammar and vocabulary analysis following the model.
Check your variant with the key.
244
MIDDLE ENGLISH
Model of grammatical and ethymological analysis
wnan that
OE hwsenne
conjunction
when that
(adverb/pronoun)
pffit (pronoun)
(when)
OF avrill,
L aprilis
April
Aprille
noun proper
with
preposition
his
pronoun possessive,
masculine, 3rd person
singular
OE his (pronoun
personal)
his
shoures
noun, common case,
plural
OE sciir
shower
soote
adjective, plural •
OE swote/swete
sweet
the
definite article
OE se, seo, pset
the
droghte
noun, common case,
singular
OE drii3o6
drought
of
preposition
ftEof
of
March
noun proper
OF mars, march
(dial.), L martius
March
hath perced
verb, present perfect,
31X| person, singular of
percen. weak verb,
class 2
OE habban
OF percier
pierced)
to
preposition
OE to
to
roote
noun, common case,
singular
OSk rot
root
and
conjunction
OE and
and
with
245
pierce (has
PART 2. SEMINARS
bathe {has
bathed)
bathed
verb, present perfect
OE ba6ian
(hath bathed), 3rd person,
singular of bathen. weak
verb, class 2
every
pronoun indefinite
OE aefre
every
veyne
nolin, common case,
singular
OE veine
vein
in
preposition
0£in
in
swich
pronoun indefinite
OE swilc
such
licour
noun, common case,
singular
OF licur, L liquor
of
preposition
OEof
Of
which
pronoun indefinite
/interrogative
OE hwilc
which
vertu
noun, common case,
singular
OF vertu
virtue
(force)
OF engendrer,
present tense, 3 person L ingenerane
singular of engendren.
OE is
weak verb, class 2
engender
noun, common case,
singular
flower
engendred is verb, passive voice,
rd
flour
liquor
(moisture)
OF four
246
(is
engendered)
(blossoming)
MIDDLE ENGLISH
Seminar 13.
Middle English grammar. Verb
Topics for discussion in class
1. Historical changes in the verbal system. History of the Old
English categories of tense, number, mood and person.
2. Development of analytical forms and new grammatical
categories in Middle English.
Questions and assignments
1- Give two examples each of (i) strong verbs which have
acquired the weak-type conjugation; (ii) weak verbs which
have acquired the strong-type conjugation.
2. Account for the present and past tense forms of the principal
auxiliary verbs.
3- Account for the past tense forms of the following verbs:
taught, sold, sought, fed, felt, caught
4- Mention some verbs that, being originally preterites, have
come to be used as presents, and account for their usage.
5. Read the text in Seminar 11 (Trevisa, About the languages of
the inhabitants). Consult your translation notes for the
Seminar. Make the grammar and vocabulary analysis
following the model given in Seminar 12. Check your variant
with the key.
247
PART 2. SEMINARS
Seminar 14.
Middle English. Discussion
Topics for discussion in class
1. Middle English. Outer and inner history of the period.
2. Changes in the Middle English spelling system.
3. Changes in the Middle English phonetic system.
4. Changes in the Middle English grammar system.
5. Changes in the Middle English vocabulary.
Questions and assignments
1. What new spelling devices appeared in Middle English?
2. What environment allowed a stressed vowel to preserve its
Old English quantity?
3. What were the sources for the appearance of new categorial
forms? Give exampes from the nominal and verbal
paradigm.
4. Speak on the principal sources of enriching the vocabulary m
Middle English.
5. Read and translate the text below into Modern English /
Russian. Make a complete phonetic, grammar and
vocabulary analysis of the text following the models or
Seminar 9 and Seminar 12. Hand in your written work as
Part 2 of your course project.
248
MIDDLE ENGLISH
From Capgrave's Chronicle of England;
ab. 1463
John Capgrave (1393—1463) was a friar of the Augustinian Order
in England. He obtained a theological university education and was
regarded as one of the most learned men of his time.
Capgrave resided most of his life in the friary at King"s Lynn, where
he wrote in Latin and English sermons, theological works and
commentaries to many books of scripture. Among his books is a
chronicle of English history, which is of considerable importance as an
early English prose work
"The Chronicle of England" starts from the Creation of the World
and ends with the year 1417, evidently stopped by the death of the
author.
It is written in the London dialect bearing but few traces of other
late Middle English dialects.
[1393] In the month of Auguste was it proclamed thorowoute
Ynglond that alle Erishmen be at hom, in her owne lond, in the
fest of Nativite of oure Lady, in peyne of lesing of her hed. It was
proved be experiens that there were com to Ynglond so many
Erischmen that the Erisch cuntre, whech longeth to the king of
Ynglond, was so voyded fro his dwelleris that the wilde Erisch
were com in, and had dominacioune of al that cuntre. And, more
ovyr, it was noted, that in Kyng Edward tyme the Thirde, whan he
had set there his bank, his juges, and his chekyr, he received
every зеге XXX M. pound: and now the kyng Richard was fayn
to paye зег1у to defens of the same cuntre XXX M. mark.
(In this зеге, in the XXI. day of Aprile, was that frere bore
whech mad these Annotaciones.)
And in the same зеге Kyng Richard went into Erland, with
the duke of Glouceter, and erles March, Notingham and
Ruthland. Many of the Erisch lordis wold ha lettid his comyng;
249
PART 2. SEMINARS
but her power was ovyr weyk. Ther was he fro the Nativite of
oure Lady onto Esterne. And in that tyme were sent onto him, be
the clergi of this lond, the archbishop of York and the bishop of
London, praying him that he wold come horn ageyn to oppresse
the malice of Lollardis. For thei laboured sore to take away alle
the possessiones of the Cherch, and aftir to distroye alle the lawes
that were mad to favoure of the Cherch. Whan the kyng herd this,
he hastid him in al goodly maner to com horn ageyn.
[1394] In the XVIII. зеге the kyng held his Parlement at
Dulyn, and thidir com alle the lordes that had mad subjeccion
onto him.
And in that same tyme, Edmund, duke of York, Keper of
Ynglond, held a Parlement at London; to whech Parlement cam
the duke of Gloucetir fro Yrlond, expressing the kyngis costid in
Yrlond: and his legacion was so acceptabil, that the clergy
graunted him a dyme, and the lay fe a fiftene.
In this tyme the Lolardis set up scrowis at Westminster and at
Poules, with abhominable accusaciones of hem that long to the
Cherch, whech sounded in destruccioune of the Sacramentis, ana
of statutes of the Cherch. The meynteyneris of the puple that
were so infect were these: Richard Storry, Lodewik Clifford,
Thomas Latymer, Jon Mountagw. Thei were principal
instraetouris of heretikes. The kyng, whan he had conceyved the
malice of these men, he cleped hem to his presens, and snybbed
hem; forbad hem eke thei schuld no more meynten no swech
materes. Of Richard Story he took a hooth; for he swore on a
book that he schuld nevyr meynten no swech opiniones. And aftir
this hooth the kyng saide: "And I swere here onto the, If evyr thou
breke thin ooth, thou schal deye a foul deth." Thei that were gilty
in this mater withdraw gretly her oterauns of malys.
250
SEMINARS 15—22.
NEW ENGLISH
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
General characteristics of the New English period
New English. Phonetics. Vowels
New English. Phonetics. Consonants
New English Grammar. Noun
New English Grammar. Verb
English wordstock
Vocabulary layers
Modern regular and irregular noun and verb forms
William Shakespeare • • the engraving for the First Folio (1623)
251
PART 2. SEMINARS
Seminar 15.
General characteristics
of the New English period
Topics for discussion in class
1. Formation of the British nation and the English national
language in the Early New English period.
2. Expansion of English overseas. Contacts with other
languages.
3. Early New English vocabulary. New means of wordformation (conversion).
4. Influence of Latin and other languages in the New English
period. Etymological doublets.
5. New English spelling. Principal ways of indicating the
sounds in Modern English.
Questions and assignments
1. Compare the effect of different outside contacts upon the
English language.
2. Speak of the ways of enriching the vocabulary of a language.
Which of them were more important for the New English
period?
3. Speak of "mute" letters in New English.
4. What digraphs are used in New English? Give examples and
explain their pronunciation.
5. What sounds are denoted by the following letters in New
English: a, e, i, o, u?
Which of them are the oldest and which are the newest?
252
NEW ENGLISH
6.
Study the model of phonetic analysis of a New English text.
Read and translate the text into Modern English / Russian
(part 1). Continue the phonetic analysis following the model
(analyse only the underlined words). Check your variant with
the key.
William Shakespeare; ab. 1600
William Shakespeare (1565—1616) was born at Stratford-on-Avon.
His father was engaged in various kinds of trade and held various
municipal offices. Shakespeare was educated at a grammar school
learning to read and write and studying the works of some classical
historians, moralists and poets, but he did not go to the university. He
married at the age of 18. How Shakespeare spent the next 8 years or so
until his name begins to appear in London theatre records is not
known. By 1592 he seems to have attracted the attention of the Earl of
Southampton. It was very important for him: although the puritanical
tity of London was generally hostile to the theatre many of the nobility
were good patrons of the drama and friends of actors. From 1594
onward he was a recognised member of the Lord Chamberlain s
Company of players: they had the best theatre, the Globe, and the best
dramatist, Shakespeare. He became a full-time professional man of his
own theatre. For 20 years Shakespeare devoted himself to his art,
writing more than a million words of poetic drama.
Shakespeare lived at a time when ideas and social structure
established in Middle Ages still influenced man 's thought and
behaviour. Alongside that, economic and social orders were disturbed
by the rise of capitalism, expansion of education and by the new wealth
from the discovery of new lands. An interplay of new and old ideas was
typical of the time (in "Hamlet" discussions on man, belief, a
"rotten" state, and times "out of joint" clearly reflect a growing
disquiet and scepticism.)
It is a usual and reasonable opinion that Shakespeare's greatness is
nowhere more visible than in the series of tragedies — "Hamlet",
"Othello", "King Lear". With a few exceptions Shakespeare did not invent the plot of his
plays. Sometimes he used old stories ("Hamlet"), sometimes he worked
from the stories of comparatively recent Italian writers, the chronicles,
253
PART 2. SEMINARS
the popular prose fiction of his contemporaries. The source of the plot
("Tragical History of Hamlet, prince of Denmark") was probably the
Icelandic saga of Amleth narrated by Saxo Grammaticus in his history
of Denmark, in "Hamlet" the drama of revenge acquired new
philosophic aspects introduced by the genius of the author.
Given below is an extract from "Hamlet" (mostly MS 2-nd quarto,
published in 1604) which is the Performance
"The Murder o]
Gonzago " played by the actors at Hamlet's request.
The language of Shakespeare's plays gives a full representation <?/
the literary language of the Elizabethan Age (the age of literary
Renaissance in Early New English). In Shakespeare's day the syntax
and other aspects of English grammar and vocabulary1 were in a state
of transition from an earlier, highly inflected language. The loss oj
endings obscured the distinguishing marks of various parts of speec
and the result was not so much confusion as freedom.
Shakespeare's ability to create new words and use the living ones in
the full range of their polysemy, his versatile grammar are general^
typical of the Early New English period and sometimes are specificall)
Shakespearean (e.g. more than one negation in the sentence "nor it
not strange"; one stem used as both Past Tense and Participle '
"begunn "; placing a simple verb before the subject in questions Wha
means this...?"; subject-verb semantic agreement "the fruit...sticks..№
fall..."; polysemy of words when all the meanings of the word 'worn
at a time, e.g. posie — 1) poetry, 2) a motto, a short inscription,
mich(ing) — 1) to skulk or retire from view, 2) to steal small things, D
to pilfer, 4) to play truant, etc.)
From Hamlet, Act III, Scene II.
The Performance
(pan 1)
The Trumpets sounds. Dumbe show followes: Enter a King and a
Oueene. the Queene embracing him, and he. her, he takes her vp,
and declines his head vpon her песке, he lyes him downe upon a
bancke of flowers, she seeing him asleepe, leaues him: anori
come in an other man, takes off his crowne. kisses it, щщЦ
254
NEW ENGLISH
poyson in the sleepers eares. and leaues him; the Queene
returne.i finds the King dead, makes passionate action, the
poysner with some- three or foure come in againe, seeme to
condole with her, the dead body is carried away, the poysner
wooes the Queene with gifts, shee seemes harsh awhile, but in the
end accepts hue.
Oph.
What meanes this my Lord?
Ham.
Marry that munching Mallico, it meanes mischiefe.
Oph-
Belike this show imports the argument of the play.
Ham.
Oph.
Ham.
Oph.
Prol.
Ham.
Oph.
Ham.
King.
We shall know by this fellow, [Enter Prologue.]
The Players cannot keepe, they'le tell аЦ.
Will a tell vs what this show meant?
I, or any show that you will show him, be not
you ash am'd to show, heele not shame to tell
you what it meanes.
You are naught, you are naught. He mark the play.
For vs and for our Tragedie,
Heere stooping to your clemencie,
We begge your hearing patiently.
Is this a Prologue, or the posie of a ring?
Tis breefe my Lord.
As womans loue.
Enter King and Queene.
Full thirtie times hath Phebus cart gone round
Neptunes saj£ wash, and Tellus orb'd the ground,
And thirtie dosen Moones with borrowed sheene
About the world haue times twelue thirties beene
Since loue our harts, and Hymen did our hands
Vnite comutuall in most sacred bands.
255
PART 2. SEMINARS
Quee.
So many iourneyes may the Sunne and Moone
Make vs againe count ore ere loue be doone,
But woe is me, you are so sicke of late,
So farre from cheere. and from our former state,
That I distrust you, yet though I distrust,
Discomfort you my Lord it nothing must.
For women feare too much, euen as they loue.
And womens feare and loue hold quantitie,
Eyther none, in neither ought, or in extremitie.
Now what my Lord is proofe hath made you know,
And as my loue is ciz'd, my feare is so,
Where loue is great, the litlest doubts are feare.
Where little feares grow great, great loue growes there.
King
Faith I must leaue thee loue, and shortly to,
My operant powers their functions leaue to do
And thou shalt Hue in this faire world behind.
Honour'd. belou'd, and haply one as kind.
For husband shalt thou.
(part 2)
Quee.
О confound the rest,
Such loue must needes be treason in my brest,
In second husband let me be accurst.
None wed the second, but who kild the first.
Ham. That's wormwood
King
The instances that second marriage moue
Are base respects of thrift, but none of loue,
A second time I kill my husband dead,
When second husband kisses me in bed.
I doe belieue you thinke what now you speake.
But what we doe determine, oft we breake,
Purpose is but the slaue to memorie,
256
NEW ENGLISH
Of violent birth, but poore validitie,
Which now the fruite vnripe sticks on the tree.
But faH vnshaken when they mellow bee.
Most necessary tis that we forget
To gay our selues what to our selues is debt.
What to our selues in passion we propose,
The passion ending, doth the purpose lose.
The violence of eyther, griefe. or ioy,
Their owne ennactures with themselues destroy,
Where ioy most reuels, griefe doth most lament,
Greefe ioy, ioy griefes, on slender accedent,
This world is not for aye, nor tis not strange.
That euen our loues should with our fortunes change:
For tis a question left vs yet to proue.
Whether loue lead fortune, or els fortune loue.
The great man downe, you marke his fauourite flyes,
The poore aduaunc'd. makes friends of enemies,
And hetherto doth loue on fortune tend,
For who not needes, shall neuer lacke a friend,
And who in want a hollow friend doth try,
Directly seasons him his enemy.
But orderly to end where I begunne.
Our wills and fates doe so contrary runne.
That our deuises still are ouerthrowne.
Our thoughts are ours, their ends none of our owne,
So thinke thou wilt no second husband wed,
But die thy thoughts when thy first Lord is dead.
257
PART 2. SEMINARS
Model of phonetic analysis
Word as used
in the text
trumpet
Changes of spelling and sounds
Old English
-
New English
Middle English
trompet
trumpet
[u]
> [л]
о - a ME spelling device
sound
-
soun
[u:]
dumbe
domb
[u]
[u]
> [л]
[b] lost in NE
о - a ME spelling device
replaced by
rel. to v. sceaw(ian)
«. shewe
[sk1]
> Ш
sc replaced by
enter
[аи]
dumb
u
show
sound
>
-
dumb
show
> Ш
sh
fn/entre(n)
enter
unstressed [e] + vocalised [r] > [э]
king
сушпз
[y]
с
queene
kyng
cwen
queene
[e:]
> [e:]
cw replaced by
embracing
—
king
> [i] (East Midland
dialect)
replaced by
к
queene
> [i:l
qu
inf. embrace
[a:]
258
embrace
>
[ci]
NEW ENGLISH
he
her
take(s)
he
he
[e:]
> [e:]
hire
her/e
[i]
[e] + vocalised [r] > [э:]
inf. takan
[a]
с replaced by
decline(s)
his
head
his
[s]
head
[ea:]
tye(s)
he
> [i:l > [i-]
inf. Нсзеп
[g]
her
taken
take
[a:] open syllable > [ei]
к
inf. declynen
[i:]
> [ai]
his
[s]
his
> M
head
head
> [e:]
> [e] before a dental
consonant
liggen/lyen
of-dune
—
-
M
down
> [аи]
banke
[a]
flower(s)
>
a-doune
[u:]
> [u:]
u replaced by
ou/ow
bancke
lie
> Из]
[i:]
down
decline
bank
> [ее]
flour
flower
[u:] + vocalised [r] > [аиэ]
ou
replaced by
ow
see(ing)
inf. seon
[e:]
seen
> [e:]
259
see
>
[i:]
PART 2. SEMINARS
asleep
• on-slaep
asleep
[ffi]
> [e:]
ге replaced by
ее '
leaues
inf. ISfan
leven
[аз:]
> [e:]
гг
replaced by
f replaced by
v
asleep
> [i'-l
leave
> [i:l
ea
NEW ENGUSB
Seminar 16.
New English. Phonetics. Vowels
Topics for discussion in class
1-
Quantitative and qualitative changes of vowels in Early New
English.
2.
The Great Vowel shift and other New English vowel
changes; their effect on Modern English.
Questions and assignments
'• What phonetic conditions affected the length of vowels in
Early New English?
2.
What change affected the monophthongs [a] and [u] in New
English? Were the changes positional or independent? Give
examples from the text to illustrate points 1 and 2.
3.
Make a list of vowels that underwent the Great Vowel shift.
What is the general direction of the shift?
4.
What changes did the unstressed vowels undergo in New
English? How did it affect the grammatical endings?
5.
Copy the principal forms of the Old English verb wrltan and
the paradigm of the Old English noun stan and trace the
endings to New English.
6.
Write out words from the text to show the different spelling
of the sounds [ae], [e:], [ou], [ei], [л], [о], [i:] and explain the
origin of the sounds and spelling.
Account historically for the differences in the sound value of
the same letter or digraph, such as "ow", "ea", V \ "i" (in
stressed position). Find words in the text to illustrate your
answer.
7.
261
PART 2. SEMINARS
Read and translate the text above into Modern English /
Russian (part 2). Make the phonetic analysis following the
model given in Seminar 15 (analyse only the underlined
words). Check your variant with the key.
NEW ENGLISH
Seminar 17.
New English. Phonetics. Consonants
Topics for discussion in class
1.
Early New English consonant changes.
2.
The rise of sibilants and affricates in Early New English.
Questions and assignments
1-
What is the origin of the Modern English consonant
phonemes Ц], [3], [tfl, №3] in borrowed words?
2.
Account for the underlined consonants in:
a)
literature, Asia, soldier, measure.
b)
shall, drudgery, occasion, nature
3.
Account for the spelling of the fricatives and find examples
in the text to illustrate the same spelling and/or sound.
4.
Find words in the text to illustrate the so-called "Verner's
Law" in New English.
5.
Account for the "mute" letters "gh", "k" and "1", "r" before
"n" and at the end of words, position of stress in native and
borrowed words.
6.
Read and translate the text below into Russian. Make the
phonetic analysis following the model given in Seminar 15.
263
PART 2. SEMINARS
Ben Jonson; ab. 1606—1607
Ben Jonson (1572—1637) began to work as player and playwright
in 1597. He was a very prolific writer, and his plays were given, among
many others, by Shakespeare's
company, some with William
Shakespeare in the cast. Ben Jonson is mostly known for court masques
— dramatic entertainments involving dances and disquises, and
comedies which often had a morale in them.
"Volpone, or The Fox" is a comedy first acted in 1606 and printed
a year later. Volpone, a rich Venetian without children, feigns that he is
dying, in order to draw gifts from his would-be heirs. Mosca, his
parasite and confederate, persuades each of these in turn that he is to
be the heir, and thus extracts costly presents from them. One of the
victims of their deceit is Voltore. •
From "Volpone, or The Fox"
MOSCA. You still are what you were, sir. Only you,
Of all the rest, are he, commands his love;
And you do wisely to preserve it thus
With early visitation, and kind notes
Of your good meaning to him, which, I know,
Cannot but come most grateful. — Patron! sir!
Here's Signior Voltore is come —
VOLPONE. What say you?
MOSCA. Sir, Signior Voltore is come this morning
To visit you.
VOLPONE. I thank him.
MOSCA. And hath brought
A piece of antique plate, bought of Saint Mark,
With which he here presents you.
264
NEW ENGLISH
VOLPONE. He is welcome.
Pray him to come more often.
MOSCA. Yes.
VOLTORE. What says he?
MOSCA. He thanks you, and desires you see him often.
VOLPONE. Mosca.
MOSCA. My patron!
VOLPONE. Bring him near; where is he?
I long to feel his hand.
MOSCA. The plate is here, sir.
VOLTORE. How fare you, sir?
VOLPONE. I thank you, Signior Voltore.
Where is the plate? mine eyes are bad.
VOLTORE. I'm sorry
To see you still thus weak.
MOSCA. That he is not weaker.
VOLPONE. You are too munificent.
VOLTORE. No, sir, would to Heaven,
I could as well give health to you, as that plate!
VOLPONE. You give, sir, what you can. I thank you.
Your love
Hath taste in this, and shall not be unanswered.
I pray you see me often.
VOLTORE. Yes. I shall, sir.
VOLPONE. Be not far from me.
MOSCA. Do you observe that, sir?
VOLPONE. Hearken unto me still. It will concern you.
MOSCA. You are a happy man, sir; know your good.
VOLPONE. I cannot now last long —
265
PART 2. SEMINARS
MOSCA. — You are his heir, sir.
VOLTORE. Am I?
VOLPONE. I feel me going — Uhluh! uh! uh!
I'm sailing to my port — Uh! uh! uh! uh!
And I am glad I am so near my haven.
MOSCA. Alas, kind gentleman! Well, we must all go
VOLTORE. But, Mosca —
MOSCA. Age will conquer.
VOLTORE. Pray thee, hear me.
Am I inscribed his heir for certain?
MOSCA. Are you!
I do beseech you, sir, you will vouchsafe
To write me i' your family. All my hopes
Depend upon your worship. I am lost,
Except the rising sun do shine on me.
VOLTORE. It shall both shine and warm thee,
Mosca.
MOSCA. Sir.
I am a man that hath not done your love
All the worst offices: here I wear your keys,
See all your coffers,.and your caskets locked,
Keep the poor inventory of your jewels,
Your plate and monies: am your steward, sir,
Husband your goods here.
VOLTORE. But am I sole heir?
266
NEW ENGLISH
Seminar 18.
New English. Grammar. Noun
Topics for discussion in class
'•
Historical changes in the nominal system. History of the Old
English categories of case, number and gender.
2- Origin of modern categorial forms.
3. Development of personal and demonstrative pronouns.
Questions and assignments
12.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
What form-building means are used in New English as
compared to those in Old English?
What is the origin of the Modern English plural ending "es"
and the genitive ending "s" in:
lessons, mother's?
Speak of the changes in the number of cases of nouns and
personal pronouns in Middle English and New English.
What new personal and possessive pronouns appeared in
English in the course of history?
Write out the personal and possessive pronouns from the text
below and account for their origin.
Speak of the degrees of comparison of the adjectives in the
text below.
Study the model of grammar and vocabulary analysis of a
New English text. Consult your translation notes for
Seminars 15—16. Continue the grammar and vocabulary
analysis following the model. Check your variant with the
key.
267
PART 2. SEMINARS
Model of grammatical and ethymological analysis
Corresponding
NE word,
translation
Words as
used in
the text
trumpets
noun, genitive
case, plural
ME trompette, OF Irompette
sounds
n. common case, ME soun; OF soun
SOUnd(s)
plural
(oboes play)
dumbe
adjective
show
n. common case, ME sheue, rel. to
show
singular
OE sceawian (v);
ME shaven (v)
verb, present
OE fo^ian, weak, 2;
follow(s)
tense, 3"1 person, ME followen
(The dumb
singular ot
show enters)
follow
verb, present
ME entren weak, 2\ OF entrer enter
tense, plural
of enter
followes
enter
OE dumb; ME domb
trumpet(S )
dumb
a
article, indefinite OE an; ME a/an
a
king
n. common case OE суптз; ME kyng
singular
king
and
conjunction
and
queene
n. common case OE cwen; ME queen
singular
OE and; ME and
268
queen
(actors playing
the roles of
the King and
the Queen)
NEW ENGLISH
the queene
embracing absolute
ME embracen, weak 2:
the queen
embracing
participial
OF embracer.
construction
(nominative with
participle I)
him
pronoun
personal,
objective case,
3'* person,
singular,
masculine
OE him, hire; ME him
he
pronoun
OE he; ME he
personal,
nominative
case, 3rd person,
singular,
masculine
he
her
pronoun
personal,
objective case,
3™ person,
singular,
feminine
her
takes
verb, present
OE takan, sir. 6; ME taken
tense, 3|U person,
singular of take
vp
adverb
declines
verb, present
ME declynen; OF decliner
tense, 3' J person,
singular of decline
decline
his
pronoun
possessive,
3rd person,
singular,
masculine
his
OE hire; ME her(e)
OE up, upp; ME up
OE his; ME his
269
him
take
up
(raises her
from the knees)
PART 2. SEMINARS
head
n. common case, OE heafod; ME heed
case, singular
head
Vpon
preposition
upon
песке
п. common case, OE hnecca; ME nekke
singular
lyes
verb, present
OE Исзап, sir. 5; ME lyen
tense, 3rJ person,
singular of lie
downe
adverb
bancke
n. common case, ME banke
singular
bank (bed)
Of
preposition
of
flowers
n. common case, OF flour
plural
flower(s)
she
pronoun
OE heo; ME he/she
personal,
nominative
case,
3rf person,
singular,
feminine
she
seeing
v., participle 1
of see
OE seon, sir. 5; ME seen
asleepe
adjective
OE on-slajp; ME on sleep,
asleep
leaues
v., present
tense,
3"* person,
singular
of leave
OE lsefan, weak, 1; ME leven
OE uppon; ME upon
OE of-dfme; ME a-doune
OE of; ME of
270
neck
(on her
shoulder)
lie
down
seeing'
asleep
leave(s)
NEW ENGLISH
Seminar 19.
New English. Grammar. Verb
Topics for discussion in class
' • Historical changes in the verbal system. History of the Old
English categories of tense, number, mood and person.
2- Development of analytical forms and new grammatical
categories in Early New English.
3- Origin of the main groups of standard and non-standard
verb-forms.
Questions and assignments
'•
What form-building means are used in New English as
compared to those in Old English?
2. Write out the analytical verb-forms from the text and
account for their origin.
3- Speak of the origin of non-finite verb forms: the infinitive,
the participles, the gerund.
4- Read the text (Ben Jonson, Volpone, or The Fox). Consult
your translation notes for Seminar 17. Make the grammar
and vocabulary analysis following the model given in
Seminar 18.
271
PART 2. SEMINARS
Seminar 20.
English wordstock
Topics for discussion in class
1. Historical changes in English wordstock.
Questions and assignments
1. Write out from the text examples of native English words,
French (or Latin) and Scandinavian borrowings and trace
them back to the Middle English or Old English periods.
2. Analyse the word-building elements in the following words
and comment on their origin:
favourable, miscalled, nominally, recall, good-natured
3. Account for the etymological layers in the English wordstock which you discover in the text by describing the
relevant events in the history of Britain.
4. Speak of phonetic marks and components in the
morphological structure of the word helping to distinguish
etymological layers in the English word-stock.
5. Give examples from the text of hybrids with different
etymological components.
6. Read and translate the text given below into Modern English
/ Russian. Make a complete phonetic, grammar and
vocabulary analysis of the text following the models or
Seminar 15 and Seminar 18. Check your variant with the
key.
272
NEW ENGLISH
William Shakespeare,
Sonnets, ab. 1600
Another form of literary work at which Shakespeare excelled was the
writing of sonnets, lyric verse fashionable in Elizabethan England. It is
justly said that there were few poetic compositions of any author or age
that have evoked so much admiration as Shakespeare's sonnets. Most of
them were probably written between 1593 and 1599 and were first
published as a collection in 1609.
Sonnet #153
Cupid laid by his brand, and fell asleep:
A maid of Dian's this advantage found,
And his love-kindling fire did quickly steep
In a cold valley-fountain of that ground;
Which boirow'd from this holy fire of Love
A dateless lively heat, still to endure,
And grew a seething bath, which yet men prove
Against strange maladies a sovereign cure.
But at my mistress' eye Love's brand new-fired,
The boy for trial needs would touch my breast;
I, sick withal, the help of bath desired,
And thither hied, a sad distemper'd guest,
But found no cure: the bath for my help lies
Where Cupid got new fire — my mistress's eyes.
273
PART 2. SEMINARS
Seminar 21.
Vocabulary layers
Topics for discussion in class
1.
2.
Geographical expansion of English in the course of history.
Etymological strata in New English vocabulary and their
historical explanation.
3. Influence of Latin on English in different periods.
4. Influence of the French language on English in different
periods.
5. Latin and French word-building elements in English.
Questions and assignments
1.
From what languages and when did the English language
received the following words:
orange, receive, street, chess, kiln, sovereign,
potato, fetish?
Prove your point of view.
2. Give five examples each of Latin words borrowed to Englisn
directly and via French and state the time of the borrowing3. What are word-hybrids? Give examples of word-hybrids
consisting of three or more elements different by origin.
4. Read and translate the text given below into Russian. Make a
grammar and vocabulary analysis of the text following t n e
model of Seminar 18. Pay particular attention to foreign
word-building elements. Check your variant with the key.
274
NEW ENGLISH
Ch. Dickens, "David Copperfield",
a. 1850
Charles Dickens (1812—1870), the son of a government clerk,
underwent in early life, as the result of his family's poverty resulting
from his father's imprisonment, experiences similar to some of those
depicted in "David Copperfield", and received little education. He
became newspaper reporter of debates in the House of Commons and
contributed to other periodicals, the articles that were subsequently
republished as "Sketches of Boz, Illustrative of Every-Day Life and
Every-Day People" (1836—37). These were immediately followed by
"The Posthumous Papers of the Pickwick Club", where Dickens
reached the plentitude of his power and achieved success and financial
ease. "David Coppetfield" appeared in monthly numbers in 1849—50.
Later Dickens was to write of it: "Of all my books I like this the best. "
Extract from Chapter 4
Shall I ever forget those lessons! They were presided over
nominally by my mother, but really by Mr. Murdstone and his
sister, who were always present, and found them a favourable
occasion for giving my mother lessons in that miscalled firmness,
which was the bane of both our lives. I believe I was kept at
home for that purpose. I had been apt enough to learn and willing
enough, when my mother and I had lived alone together. I can
faintly remember learning the alphabet at her knee. To this day,
when I look upon the fat black letters of the primer, the puzzling
novelty of their shapes, and the easy good nature of О and Q and
S seem to present themselves again before me as they used to do.
But they recall no feeling of disgust or reluctance. On the
contrary, I seem to have walked along a path of flowers as far as
the crocodile-book, and to have been cheered by the gentleness of
my mother's voice and manner all the way. But these solemn
275
PART 2. SEMINARS
lessons which succeeded those, I remember as the death-blow at
my peace, and a grievous daily drudgery and misery. They were
very long, very numerous, very hard — perfectly unintelligible,
some of them, to me — and I was generally as much bewildered
by them as I believe my poor mother was herself.
Let me remember how it used to be, and bring one morning
back again.
NEW ENGLISH
Seminar 22.
Modern regular and irregular
noun and verb forms
Topics for discussion in class
1 • Origin of New English irregular noun forms.
2. Groups of modern non-standard verbs descending from Old
English weak verbs.
3. Groups of modern non-standard verbs descending from Old
English strong verbs.
Questions and assignments
1-
What traces of the Old English n-stem and root-stem
declensions can we find in New English plural forms of
nouns?
2. Comment on the forms of nouns:
foot — feet; child — children; deer — deer;
ox — oxen; axis — axes
3. Speak of the peculiarities of modal verbs (former preteritepresent) and the verb "to be".
4. Group all verbs in the text below into regular and irregular.
Trace them back to Old English and determine whether they
were weak or strong.
5. Say if the modern division of the verbs into regular and
irregular corresponds to the Old English division into strong
and weak, give examples from your list of verbs to confirm
your answers.
6. Read and translate the text given below into Russian. Make a
277
PART 2. SEMINARS
complete phonetic, grammar and vocabulary analysis of the
text following the models of Seminar 15 and Seminar 18.
Hand in your-written work as Part 3 of your course project.
D. Chrystal, The Cambridge
Encyclopedia of the English Language,
1995
David Crystal, a former professor of linguistics at the University tf
Reading, is a well-known writer, editor, lecturer and broadcaster
divides Ins time between work on language and work on gener
reference publishing. He has written over 40 books on languag >
C xbr
including "Linguistics", "Clinical Linguistics" and "The
f 3^e
Encyclopedia of Language".
In one of his latest books,
Cambridge Encyclopedia of the English Language ", he exPi0> ,
various aspects of the history, structure, variety and range of u s .Jf.
English worldwide, writing about difficult concepts in a language a
and accessible to all.
Many observations concerning the English language have
been based on the analysis of language data samples collecte
together as a corpus. Compiling a corpus is very different пот
the traditional practices of citation-gathering or word-watching
which have guided work on dictionaries since the time of v\Johnson. Corpora are large and systematic enterprises: whole
texts or whole sections of text are included, such a
conversations, magazine articles, brochures, newspapeis,
lectures, sermons,, broadcasts and chapters of novels.
Considerable thought is given to the selection of material so that,
in the most general case, the corpus can stand as a reasonably
representative sample of the language as a whole — a general, о
standard corpus.
A well-constructed general corpus turns out to be useful in
several ways. It enables investigators to make more objective an
278
NEW ENGLISH
confident descriptions of usage that would be possible through
introspection. It allows them to make statements about frequency
of usage in the language as a whole, as well as comparative
statements about usage in different varieties. It permits them, in
principle, to arrive at a total account of the linguistic features in
any of the texts contained in the corpus. And it provides them
with a source of hypotheses about the way the language works. In
addition, a corpus which is widely accessible enables researchers
in separate locations to collaborate in the analysis of particular
problems, and means that results from a range of projects are
likely to be somewhat more comparable than if different corpora
had been employed.
An early printing shop
Source: The New Uiihvrslty Library, 1973
LIST OF KEYS
Key to Seminars 3 & 6. Ohthere's account of his
first voyage
Key to Seminars 4,5 & 7. Anglo-Saxon Chronicle
Key to Seminars 9, 10 & 12. Chaucer, Canterbury Tales
Key to Seminars 11 & 13. Trevisa, About thelanguages
of the inhabitants
Key to Seminars 15,16 & 18. Shakespeare, Hamlet
Key to Seminar 20. Shakespeare, Sonnet
Key to Seminar 21. Dickens, David Copperfield
283
301
316
338
359
396
405
Key to Seminars 3 & 6
Ohthere's account of his first voyage
Ohthere told his lord, King Alfred, that he lived the furthest north
of all Norwegians. He said that he lived in the north of Norway on the
coast of the Atlantic. He also said that the land extends very far north
beyond that point, but it is all uninhabited, except for a few places here
and there where the Finns have their camps, hunting in winter, and in
summerfishingin the sea.
He told how he once wished to find out how far the land
extended due north, or whether anyone lived to the north of the
unpopulated area. He went due north along the coast, keeping the
uninhabited land to starboard and the open sea to port continuously
for three days. He was then as far north as the whale hunters go at
their furthest. He then continued due north as far as he could reach in
the second three days. There the land turned due east, or the sea
penetrated the land he did not know which — but he knew that he
waited there for a west-north-west wind, and then sailed east along
the coast as far as he could sail in four days.
There he had to wait for a due northern wind, because there the
land turned due south, or the sea penetrated the land he did not know
which. Then from there he sailed due south along the coast as far as he
could sail in five days. A great river went up into the land there. They
turned up into the river, not daring to sail beyond it without permission,
since the land on the far side of the river was fully settled. He had not
previously come across any settled district since he left his own home.
The Beormas told him many stories both about their own country
and about the lands which surrounded them, but he did not know how
much of it was true because he had not seen it for himself. "It seemed
to him that the Finnas and the Beormas spoke almost the same
language. His main reason for going there, apart from exploring the
283
PART 3. KEYS
land, was for the walruses, because they have very fine ivory in their
tusks — they brought some of these tusks to the king — and their
hide.
Phonetic analysis
Word as used
in the text
Analysis
Parallels from NE word
cognate
languages or
I related OE words
—
.
SJEde
[s] — voiceless initially; OE S&^de
[ae] — lengthening of [ffi] (variant form)
due to loss of [g]
said
сушпзе
[у] — palatal mutation of OHG kuning
[u] — caused by [i]; later
[yl>[i]
king
ealra
[ea] — breaking of [ж] — Gt alls
before [l]+consonant,
[ae] — fromPGfa]
all
Nor5monna
-monn: [p]=[a] — from
PG[a],later[a>a>£e]
Gt mann(a)
Norman
Iande
[a]— before nasal
consonants; [a] — from
PG[a],later[a>a>2e]
Gfland
land
beah
[ea]—fromPG[au]
Gffcauh
though
swibe
[T] — lengthening due to Gt swinbe
loss of [n] — before
a fricative
Stycce
[y 1 — palatal mutation of OHG Stukki
rel. to Stock
[u] — caused by [i]
{!] —from [p]—by
R пескарь
rel to fish
Grimm's Law
[i] —framfie]—
OSkerrian (v) char
monophthongisation of
diphthongs in EOE
fiscal
cirre
norbryhte
-ryht:[y] —from[ie]monophthpngisation of
diphthongs in EOE
284
G?raihts[e]
—
right
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
пи/агбег
[б] — voiced intervocally, Gt hvabar
M —fromPG[a]
ffini
Щ — palatal mutation of cp OE an
[a] — caused by [i]
any
steor-bord
steonfio] — from
PG fiuj;
bord: [d] — hardening
of [9]
ml. to Gt
stiurjan (v)
Cf. OSk Ьогб
star-board
Ьагс-bord
[ж]—from PG [a]
OSk bak
back
tine
[0J—from[t] —by
/г три
Grimm's Law
[a] — is caused by a back Gt dagos
vowel in the next syllable
[se] —fromPG[a]
OHG was
three
3
°*a3aS
Wffis
whether
days
was
firrest
[i]—palatal mutation of jE'OE'fierest
[eo] — (feor) caused by [i]
(-ist)—suffix of
superlative degree:
[eo>ie>i]
fara|>
[a]—fromPG[o]
3iet
ре] _ (Wess) from PG [e] Gt 3et
- diphthongisation after
palatal Ц]
yet
meahte
[eal —breaking of [ге] — O F G m a h t
before [h]: [a>se>ea]
might
[б]—from PG [a];
Gt atfyar
other
Ьёаз
[&]—fromPGfau]
Gt baug
bSr
r g ] _ froinPG[a],[0]— G^bar
Фшт
Gtfaran(inf)
lengthening due to the
loss of [n] — before a
fricative
farther
fai«
bow
there
initially voiceless
east
[ e a ] ~fromPG [аи]
bad
[a]—fromPGfai]
Gfaustr
Grbaid
285
east
rel. to bide
PART 3. KEYS
sceolde
[eo] — diphthongisation Angl scolde
of [ o l — after [skp]
should
bidan
H—fromPG[e+i]
bide
ff
[T] — lengthening due to G/fimf
the loss of [m] — before
a fricative
five
]ЖЗ
[a;]—fromPG[a]
Gf lag
rel. to lay
an
fa]—fromPG[a+i]
Gt ains
unfribe
healfe
[6] — in the intervocal
OSkfridr
position
[ea] — breaking of [ael— OSk halfr
before [1+consonant]:
[а>ге>еа]
азпит
[a]~fromPG[a+i]
G/aiginf/7)
ham
[a]—fromPG[a+i]
Grhaims
wsron
[r]—rhotacismof[z],M cf.Gt wesum
- voicing of [s] by
Verner's Law
were
hwait
[ae] — fromPG[a]
O^hvat
what
3eseah
Angl saeh
saw
|buhte
(Wess.)[ea]— breaking
of [ге] before [h]
[o] lengthening due to
the loss of [n] before a
fricative
cf. Gt bahta
(<*6a*)Xta)
thought
3e-£eode
[eo] from PG [iu]
Gff>iuda
—
to-ёасап
[ea]fromPG[au]
rel. to Gt aukan e k e
sceawun3e
[ea]fromPG [аи]
habba5
[bb] — West Germanic
gennination (*hafjan >
nabban)
rel. to OSk
skauwon (v)
OSfchafa
tobum
[6] in the intervocal
position
[el — palatal mutation of
[o] caused by [i]
te6
Gfbeidanp]
286
one
—
half
own
home
rel. to show
have
tooth
teeth
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
brohton
[6]fromPG [a]
Gi brahta
hyd
y] — palatal mutation of OHG hut
п] caused by [i]
brought
hide
Grammar analysis
Words as used
in the text
Analysis
notes
Ohthere
noun proper,
nominative singular
verb, 3 rd person
singular, past tense,
indicative mood of
sec5an, weak verb,
class III
siSde
Corresponding
New English
word
Translation
say
Ohthere
(name)
said
his
pronoun personal,
3lxl person singular,
masculine, genitive
his
(to) his
hlaforde
noun, dative singular
of hlaford, masculine,
a-stem
lord
lord
^Elfirede
noun proper, dative
Alfred
singular
noun, dative singular of king
cynin3. masculine,
a-stem
the King
P t
conjunction
that
that
he
pronoun
personal,
rd
3 person singular,
masculine, nominative
he
he
e a
pronoun indefinite,
plural, genitive of gal
noun, genitive plural of
Цогбтопп,
masculine, root-stem
all
of all
northmen
Northmen
(Scandinavians)
cynirnje
ffi
"a
Noromonna
287
Alfred
PART 3. KEYS
to the north
norbmest
adverb
bude
verb, 3^ person
singular, past tense,
indicative or subjunctive
mood of buan.
anomalous verb
cwae5
verb, 3"1 person
singular, past tense,
indicative mood of
cwa5an, strong verb,
class V
obs. quoth
said
t>aet
conjunction
that
that
on
preposition
on
on
|эаёт
pronoun demonstrative, that
dative singular,
masculine of se, seo. past
the
lande
noun, dative singular of
land, neuter, a-stem
land
land
norf)weardum
adjective, dative
singular, neuter of
noroward, used
adverbially
northward
to the North
wij)
preposition
with
of
f*
northmost
lived
(or had lived)
pronoun demonstrative, that
accusative singular,
feminine of se, seo. pset
that (the)
WestsS
noun proper, accusative west sea
singular of Westssg.
feminine, i-stem
Atlantic
Ocean
t>eah
fccBt
t>aet
conjunction
though
also
conjunction
that
that
pronoun demonstrative, that
nominative singular,
neuter of se, seo. paet
that
land
noun, nominative
singular, neuter, a-stem
land
2S8
land
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
SJ
verb, 3 person
singular, present tense,
subjunctive mood of
beon. supplelive verb
be
is
swibe
adverb
—
very
'^З
adjective, nominative
singular, neuter, strong
declension
long
long
| 1 0
Ф
adverb
north
north
jbonan
adverb
thence
from there
ac
conjunction
—
but
hit
pronoun personal, 3rd
person singular, neuter,
nominative
it
it
is
verb, 3"1 person singular, is
present tense, indicative
mood of beon, irregular
verb
pronoun/adverb
all
is
e
e
rd
al
all
Weste
adjective, nominative
singular, neuter, strong
declension
—
uninhabited
(waste)
buton
conjunction
but
but
feawum
adjective, dative plural of few
feaw. strong declension
few
Stowum
noun, dative plural of
stow, feminine, wo-stem
stOW
places
styecemaslum
Wicia5
adverb
stockmeal
verb, 3"1 person plural,
—
here and
there
live
present tense, indicative
mood ofwician.weak
verb, class II
Finnas
noun proper, nominative Finn
plural ofFinn, masculine,
a-stem
(the) Finns
o n
preposition
on/by
on
289
PART 3. KEYS
hunto6e
noun, dative singular of
hunto6, masculine,
a-stem
wintra
noun, dative singular of winter
winter, masculine, u-stem
winter
and
conjunction
and
and
sumera
noun, dative singular of
sumor/er, masculine,
u-stem
summer
summer
fisca|)e
noun, dative singular of
fiscooVad. masculine,
a-slem
be
preposition
pxre
pronoun demonstrative, that
dative singular, feminine
of se. seo. ftaet
that
SEE
noun, dative singular of s e a
sje, feminine, i-stem
preposition
at
sea
sumum
pronoun/adjective,
some
indefinite, dative singular
of sum, strong declension
some
cirre
noun, dative singular of char
cyr/cir. masculine, i-stem
time
wolde
verb, 3 person singular, would
past tense, indicative
moodofwillan,
anomalous verb
/Wisnea
fandian
verb, infinitive of fandian, —
to explore
ast
hunt
hunting
fish
by
rd
fishing
by/from
at/for
Y°№A'
weak verb, class II
to
adverb
how
how
1опзе
land
adverb
noun, nominative
singular of land, neuter,
a-stem
long
land
long
land
290
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
norbryhte
adverb
1жзе
verb, 3'J person singular, lie
past tense, subjunctive
mood of Нсзап, strong
verb, class V
о|фе
conjunction
—
ОГ
hwae5er
conjunction
whether
whether
«ВП13
any
any
mon
pronoun indefinite
[cf.an)
noun, nominative
singular of man,
masculine, root-stem
man
man
benordan
preposition
north
to the north
ba?m
pronoun demonstrative, that
dative singular of JMgt,
neuter
(of) that
westenne
noun, dative singular of —
westen. neuter, ja-stem
adverb
—
uninhabited
land
then
for
verb, 3rd person singular, fare
past tense, indicative
mood of faran, strong
verb, class VI
went/sailed
be
preposition
along
let
verb, 3 person singular, let
past tense, indicative
mood of laetan, strong
verb, class VII
let
him
pronoun personal, 3rd
person singular,
masculine, nominative
him
him
ealnewe3
adverb
always
always
weste
adjective, accusative
—
singular of weste, neuter,
strong declension
ba
north right
lay
3
by
rd
291
right
(straight) to
the north
У
uninhabited
(waste)
PART 3. KEYS
land
noun, accusative singular land
of land, neuter, a-stem
noun, accusative singular star-board
of steor-bord. neuter,
a-stem
land
ba
pronoun demonstrative, that
accusative singular of
seo. feminine
that (the)
w!d-sa3
noun, accusative singular wide sea
ofwid-sae, feminine,
i-stem
wide sea
baec-bord
noun, accusative singular back board
of bacc-bord. neuter,
a-stem
backboard
(port Side)
brie
three
da3as
numeral, nominative
three
/accusative of prie
noun, nominative
day
/accusative plural of das3..
masculine, a-stem
days
ba
adverb
then
steor-bord
—
rd
star-board
W32S
verb, 3 person singular, was
past tense, indicative
mood of wesan. strong
verb, class V
was
swa... s w a
conjunction
so
(so) as ... as
feor
adverb
far
far
norb
adverb
north
(to the) north
ba
pronoun demonstrative, those
nominative plural of |>a
noun, nominative plural whale hunt
of hwaelhunta. masculine;
n-stem
those
adverb, superlative
farthest
degree of feor/fyr
verb, plural, present
fare
tense, indicative mood of
faran, strong verb,
class VI
farthest
hwselhuntan
firrest
farab
292
whalemen
go/sail
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
ballet
adverb
yet
yet
rd
meahte
verb, 3 person singular, might
past tense, indicative
mood ofma?an.
preterite-present verb
could
bsem
pronoun demonstrative, those
dative plural of past
those
obrum
pronoun indefinite, dative other
other
plural of брег
frrlrn
numeral, dative of £пе
da3um
noun, dative plural of
days
da?3, masculine, a-stem
verb, indefinite of siglan, sail
weak verb, class I
(3e—prefix)
adverb
—
3esi3lan
ba
three
three
days
(to) sail
then
Ьёаз
verb, 3"* person singular, bow
past tense, indicative
mood of biigan. strong
verb, class П
curved
(bowed)
bisr
adverb
there
there
eastryhte
adverb
east
seo
pronoun demonstrative, that (the)
nominative singular of
sgo, feminine
that (the)
n
preposition
in
in
1
right
to the east
nysse
= ne wisse: verb, 3"
wit
person singular, past
tense, indicative mood of
witan. preterite-present
verb
did not know
buton
conjunction
but
Wisse
but
ri
verb, 3 person singular, wit
past tense, indicative
mood of witan. preterite
present verb
293
knew
PART 3. KEYS
баёг
adverb
there
there
bad
verb, 3rf person singular, bide
past tense, indicative
mood of bidan, strong
verb, class I
waited (for)
westanwindes
noun, genetive singular
of wcstan-wind,
west wind
wind from
the west
masculine, a-stem
hwon
adverb/adjective
—
a little
norban
adverb
north
from the
north
east
adverb
east
to the east
be
=bi: adverb/preposition
by
by/along
swa-swa
conjunction
so
so...as
feower
numeral
four
four
da3um
noun, dative plural of
day
ds3, masculine, a-stem
verb, singular, past tense, should
of sculan. preterite
present verb
conjunction
—
pronoun demonstrative, that
nominative singular of
past, neuter
SCeolde
for-daem
beet
days
should (had to)
as
that
bair
adverb
there
there
subryhte
*J
adverb
south
seo
pronoun demonstrative, that
nominative singular,
feminine
bonan
adverb
thence
fif
numeral
five
fi
ba
adverb
—
then
right
ь
294
right.
(straight) to
the south
that
from there
ve
.
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
'Ж3
verb, 3 rt person singular, lay
past tense, indicative
mood of licgan, strong
verb, class V
lay (was)
ЯП
numeral
one
one
much
big
micel
adjective
e a
noun, nominative
—'•
singular of ga, feminine,
root-stem (anom.)
up-in
adverb
cirdon
verb, plural, past tense, char
indicative mood of
cyrran, weak verb, class I
turned
™3
pronoun personal, 3"1
—
person nominative plural
pronoun demonstrative, that
accusative singular of
sgo, feminine
they
oa
u p in
river
u p in
that
6&
noun, accusative singular—
of ga, feminine, root
stem (anom.)
ne
particle
dorston
verb, plural, past tense, dare
indicative mood of
durran. preterite-present
verb
dared
forp
adverb
pSre
pronoun demonstrative, that
dative singular of sgo,
feminine
forth
(forward)
that
ea
noun, dative singular of —
ga, feminine, root-stem
(anom.)
river
f° r
conjunction
for (out of)
unfripe;
noun, dative singular of —
on-frifl. masculine, a-stem
—
forth
for
295
river
not
hostility
PART 3. KEYS
.
а
W££S
verb, Ъ person singular, was
past tense, indicative
mood of wesan. strong
verb, class V
was
eall
pronoun indefinite,
singular, nominative of
eal
all
all
ЗеЬпп
verb, participle II of
buan. anomalous verb
—
uninhabited
ofcre
pronoun indefinite,
singular, accusative of
oper
other
other
healfe
noun, accusative singular half
of heal f. feminine, o-stem
pronoun demonstrative, that
genitive singular of seo,
feminine
fcalre
half
(of) that
Sas
noun, genitive singular o f —
ga, feminine, root-stem
(anom.)
river
neraette
verb, 3 r d person singular, meet
past tense, indicative
mood of metan, weak
verb, class I
did not m e e t
(had not met)
asr
adverb
till then
nan
= ne+an: see above an -
ere
ПО (none)
ПО (llOt one)
pronoun
si|5f>an
conjunction/adverb
from
adverb/preposition
his
азпит
ham
fela
since
from
ы
pronoun personal, З
person singular,
masculine, genitive of he
adjective, dative singular
of азеп
noun, dative singular of
ham, masculine, a-slem
adjective/adverb
296
since
from
his
his
own
own
home
home
—
many
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
spella
noun, genitive plural of
spell, neuter, a-stem
spell
stories
pronoun personal, 3rd
person singular,
masculine, dative of he
him
him
SiEdon
verb, plural, past tense,
indicative mood of
sec3an. weak verb,
class III
say
said
ba
pronoun demonstrative, those
. him
those
nominative plural
Beormas
Permians
Permians
a^fcer зе...зе conjunction/pronoun
either
either ...or
of
preposition
of
of/about
hiera
pronoun personal, 3rd
person plural genitive
adjective, dative singular
of щеп
noun, dative singular of
land, neuter, a-stem
pronoun demonstrative,
dative plural
—
their
own
own
land
land
—
those
land
lands
atrium
lande
Ьазт
landum
noun proper plural
noun, dative plural of
land, neuter, a-stem
be
conjunction
—
that
ymb
prcposiiion/adverb
—
about/around
hie
pronoun personal, plural, —
accusative
adverb
out
titan
them
wEEron
verb, plural, past tense,
indicative mood of
wesan. strong verb,
class V
were
on (from)
the outside
were
ac
conjunction
—
but
297
..
PART 3. KEYS
nyste
= ne wiste: verb, 3"1
wit
person singular, past
tense, indicative mood of
witan, preterite-present
verb
did not know
hwast
pronoun interrogative/
indefinite
what
f)aes
pronoun demonstrative, —
genitive singular of baet.
neuter
that
sdpes
truth
waes
noun, genitive singular of sooth
sob, neuter, a-stcm
verb, 3й1 person singular, was
past tense, indicative
mood of wesan, strong
verb, class V
was
fbr-фгВт
see above
aS
hit
pronoun personal
singular, neuter,
accusative
it
it
self
pronoun
self
himself
what
rd
3eseah
verb, 3 person singular, see
past tense, indicative
mood of seon. strong
verb, class V
did (not) see
pa
those
spraecon
pronoun demonstrative, those
nominative plural
verb, plural, past tense, speak
indicative mood of
sprecan, strong verb,
class V
neah
adverb
near
nearly
an
numeral/adjective
one
one
3epeode
noun, accusative singular—
of зе-'beode. neuter,
ja-stem
language
SWIDOSt
adverb, superlative
degree
mostly
—
298
speak
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
dider
adverb
thither
to-ёасап
adverb/preposition
—
pses
pronoun demonstrative, —
genitive singular of fojgt,
neuter
Iandes
noun, genitive singular of land
land, neuter, a-stem
land's
sceawur^e
noun, genitive singular of showing
sceawun.3. feminine,
o-stcm
survey/
exploration
'or
conjunction
because of
рззт
pronoun demonstrative, —
dative plural
those
hors-hwaslum
noun, dative plural of
hors-hw-cl, masculine,
a-stem
walruses
hie
they
habbad
pronoun personal, 3rd
—
person plural, nominative
verb, plural, present
have
tense, indicative mood of
habhan. weak verb,
class III
swipe
adverb
—
very
aepele
adjective
—
excellent
ban
noun, accusative singular bone
of ban, neuter, a-stem
pronoun personal, plural, —
dative
noun, dative plural of
teeth
iojj, masculine, root-stem
pronoun demonstrative, those
accusative plural
noun, accusative plural of teeth
lofe, masculine, root-stem
hiora
tobum
P^
tso
for
299
whale
there (to thai
place)
in addition
(to)
that
have
bone
their
teeth
those
teeth
PART 3. KEYS
brohton
verb, plural, past tense,
indicative mood of
Ьппзап. strong-weak
verb
brought
brought
sume
pronoun/adjective
accusative of sum
some
some
balm
pronoun demonstrative, —
dative singular of sj,
masculine
(to) that
сушпзе
noun, dative singular of king
cynin3. masculine, a-stem
noun, accusative plural hide
ofhyd, feminine, l-stem
king
hyd
hide (skins)
Key to Seminars 4, 5 & 7
Anglo-Saxon Chronicle, A. D. 1013
The year after that Archbishop Elfeah was martyred, the king
appointed Lifing to the archiepiscopal see of Canterbury. And in the
same year, before the month August, came King Sweyne with his fleet
to Sandwich; and very soon went about East-Anglia into the Humbermouth, and so upward along the Trent, until he came to Gainsborough.
Then soon submitted to him Earl Utred, and all the Northumbrians,
and all the people of Lindsey, and afterwards the people of the Five
Boroughs, and soon after all the army to the north of Watling-street;
and hostages were given him from each shire. When he understood
that all the people were subject to him, then ordered he that his army
should have provision and horses; and he then went southward with
his main army, committing his ships and the hostages to his son Knute.
And after he came over Watling-street, they wrought the greatest
mischief that any army could do. Then he went to Oxford; and the
population soon submitted, and gave hostages; thence to Winchester,
where they did the same. Thence went they eastward to London; and
many of the party sunk in the Thames, because they kept not to any
bridge.
When he came to the city, the population would not submit; but
held their ground in full fight against him, because therein was King
Ethelred, and Thurkill with him. Then went King Sweyne thence to
Wallingford; and so over Thames westward to Bath, where he abode
with his army. Thither came Alderman Ethelmar, and all the western
thanes with him, and all submitted to Sweyne, and gave hostages.
When he had thus settled all, then went he northward to his ships; and
all the population fully received him, and considered him full king. The
population of London also after this submitted to him, and gave
hostages; because they dreaded that he would undo them. Then King
301
PART 3. KEYS
Ethelred abode some while with the fleet that lay in the Thames; and
the lady went aftei"vvards over sea to her brother Richard. Then went
the king from the fleet, about midwinter, to the Isle of Wight; and there
abode for the season; after which he went over sea to Richard, with
whom he abode till the time when Sweyne died.
Phonetic analysis
Word as used
in the text
Analysis
NE word
Parallels from
cognate
languages or
related OE words
sefteran
lac]—from PGlal
rel. to Gt aftaro
Зёаге
year
[ёа] — diphthoneisation of
after
OHG fix
[Щ after U ]
wses
[a]fromPG [a]
сугапз
[у] — palatal mutation of OHG kuning
[uj caused by [i]; later
ly>[i]
[y] — palatal mutation of OE buvh
[u] caused by [i]
(пот. case)
.
borough
[о] from PG [a]
month
(Cantware)Ьупз
(dative case)
тбпбе
Gt was
OHG manod
was
king
swlde
[I] — lengthening due lo Gt swings
loss of In] before
a fricative
—
East(englum)
[ea] from PG [au]
EastAnglia
тпбап
[п] — lengthening due to Gt munf)s
loss of [n] before
a fricative
up-weard
Щ — breaking of [aj
before [r+consonant]
andlang
[a] from PG [a] before
a nasal consonant
rel. to Gt austr
302
mouth
rel. in Gt wards upward(s)
OsklungY
along
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
sona
[ojfromPGla]
OHGsan
soon
bean
|ёа] from PG[au]
Gt baug
bow
eorl
[eo] —breaking of [e]
OSaxerl
before [r+consonant]
[ea] — breaking of [a]
Grails
before [11]
[I] — lengthening due to Gffimf
loss of [m] before a
fricative
ealle
FTf(bui3um)
straete
[S]fromLat[a]
Lat strata
man
[S] from PG [a] before a
nasal consonant; later
[a]>[a]>[ae].
Gt mann(a)
earl
all
five
street
man
sealde (Wess) [ea] —breaking of fa]
cf. Angl salde
(past bid. of
before [1+consonant]
Gt say an
Sellan)
'
[e] — palatal mutation of
[a] caused by Ц]
11 — doubling due to loss
of[j]
sold
sell
3ebogen
[o] — LPG mutation of
vowels
Gt bugans
bow
bead
[eaJfromPG[au]
Gt baud
—
sceolde
[eo] — diphthongisation AnWscolde
of [o] after [sk'3
;
betffihte (past [Щ — palatal mutation of cf. OE tacen
ii]d.ofh&z
[a] caused by [j]
(Mi? token)
tsecan)
should
ofer
[v] — voicing in the
intervocal position
over
yfel
[v] — voicing in the
intervocal position
Щ] — palatal mutation of cf. OE an
[a] caused by [j]
[a] before nasal
consonants
evil
32ШЗ
adran3
30?
rel. to teach
any
rel. to drink
-
PART 3. KEYS
опзеап
[ea] ~ diphthongisation OHG
of [x] after [j]
ingangene
гофап
[6] — voicing in the
intervocal position
f>sr
[ie]fromPG[a]
[8] voiceless initially
Gt f>ar
there
ealdor(man)
[eaj — breaking of [a]
before [1+consonant]
[a] from PG [o]
OHGbk
old
Gt farans
rel. to fare
h&fde (past
[v] — voicing in the
uul. o/naboani intervocal position
[ae] from PG [a]
G/habaida
had
|)eodscipe
[eo] from PG [iu]
Gf
ondrsedon
[a;]fromPG [a]
OHGintratan
dread
dead
[ea]fromPG [au]
Gt daufcs
dead
wear6
[ea] —breaking of [a]
before [r+consonant]
Gt warfc
3efaren
friuda
again
—
—
Grammar analysis
Words as used Analysis
in the text
notes
Corresponding
New English
word
Translation
On
preposition
Oil
( )
бзет
pronoun demonstrative, that
dative singular, neuter
offset
(that) the
asfteran
preposition
after
after
Зёаге
noun, dative singular of year
3§ar, neuter, a-stem
relative particle/
—
conjunction
Уеаг
f>e
304
on
when
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
se
pronoun demonstrative, that (the)
masculine of se
nominative singular
that (the)
arcebiscop
noun, nominative
singular of arcebiscop.
masculine, a-stem
archbishop
w a e s
verb, 3rd person singular, was
past tense, indicative
mood of wesan.
anomalous verb
was
3emartyrod
verb, participle II of
3emartvrian, weak verb,
class If
martyred
суптз
noun, nominative
king
singular of cynin3, супз,
masculine, a-stem
king
3esette
verb, 3* person singular, set
past tense, indicative
mood of зе-settan. weak
verb, class I
set (placed)
Lyfinc
noun
archbishop
martyr
proper
Lifing
biscop
noun, accusative singular bishop
of biscop, masculine,
a-stem
bishop
t°
preposition
to
to
Canterbury
Canterbury
Cantwarebyrij noun proper
barn
pronoun demonstrative, that
dative singular,
masculine of se
that
arcestole
noun, dative singular of re), to archarcestol. mascuhne,
bishop
a-stem
archiepiscopal
seat
bissum
pronoun demonstrative, this
dative singular,
masculine of fees
this
ylcan
filca, pronoun indefinite, ilk (in: of that
dative singular, weak
ilk, archaic)
declension
same
305
PART 3. KEYS
toforan
adverb
—
monSe
noun, dative singular of month
тбпаб. masculine, t-stem
month
Augustus
noun proper
August
August
1
before
com
verb, 3" person singular, come
past tense, indicative
mood of cuman. strong
verb, class IV
came
Sweden
noun proper
—
Sweyne
(the king of
Denmark)
mid
preposition
—
with
his
pronoun
personal,
his
3 rd person singular,
masculine, genitive of he
> possessive pronoun
his
flotan
noun, dative singular of
flota. masculine, n-stem
float
fleet
SandwTc
noun proper
Sandwich
Sandwich
(a town in
Kent)
wende
verb, 3 rd person singular, wend
past tense, indicative
mood of wendan. weak
verb, class I
went
SWl6e
adverb
—
у е г
У^Я!]',
exceedingly
rade
adverb
rather
quickly,
soon
abutan
adverb / preposition
about
about
Eastenglum
noun proper, dative
.East Anglia
East Anglia
into
preposition
into
into
Humbra
noun proper, genitive
Humber
Humber
тпбап
noun, dative singular of mouth
тпба. masculine, n-stem
т
SW§
adverb / preposition /
conjunction
SO
306
SO
?Н^ • I
(of the rivet)
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
upweard
adverb
upward
upwards
andlang
preposition
along
along
Trenton
noun proper
Trent
Trent
°o
preposition / conjunction —
until
"e
pronoun personal,
3M person singular,
masculine, nominative
he
he
3enesburuh
noun proper
Gainsborough
Gainsborough
(a town on
the Trent)
sona
adverb
soon
soon
beah
verb, 3rd person singular, bow
past tense, indicative
mood of bG^an. strong
verb, classTl
bowed
(surrendered)
Uhtred
noun proper
—
Utred
^
noun, nominative
singular ofeorl.
masculine, a-stem
earl
chief (earl)
ea
^e
pronoun indefinite, plural all
all
Nor5hymbre
noun nominative plural
ofNor6-hvmbre.
masculine, i-slem
Northumbria
Northumbnans
™ T1
pronoun personal,
3 rd person singular,
masculine, dative of he
him
^4
pronoun indefinite,
all
singular
pronoun demonstrative, that
nominative singular,
neuter of bjet
all
folc
noun, nominative
singular of fojc, neuter,
a-stem
folk (people)
Lindesi3e
noun proper
P^l
folk
Lindsey
him
that
Lindsey (in
Lincolnshire)
307
PART 3. KEYS
si55an
,
adverb
since
afterwards
FFfbunum
noun proper, dative
plural of Fifburhinxas
rel. to Five
Boroughs
the five
shires or
baes
pronoun demonstrative, this
nominative singular,
masculine of bes
this
here
—
Ьё-nordan
noun, nominative
singular of here,
masculine,ja-stem
adverb
north
(the enemy's/
Danish)
army
to the north
Wa&tlin3an
noun proper
Watling
Watling
strSte
noun, dative singular of
street, feminine, o-stem
street
man
pronoun indefinite
man
street (the
road built <n
the Romans)
(man) one
sealde
verb, 3rd person singular, sell
past tense, indicative
mood of sellan. weak
verb, class I, irregular
gave
3islas
noun, nominative /
—
accusative plural of з1§Ы,
masculine, a-stem
hostages
of
preposition
of (from)
ailcere
e a c n
pronoun indefinite,
each
singular, dative of l i e
noun, dative singular of shire
province
sclr.feminine,o-stem
verb, 3 d person singular, rel. to under, get understood
past tense, indicative
mood of UQdeisietajL,
weak verb, class III
sclre
under3eat
of
3ebogen
verb, past participle of
Ьпзап. strong verb,
class II
bead
verb, 3 person singular, —
past tense, indicative
mood of be-beodan,
strong verb, class II
td
308
bow
subjugate
ordered
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
iM
conjunction
sceolde
verb, singular, past tense, should
subjunctive mood of
sculan. preterite-present
verb
should
here
noun, accusative singular—
of here, masculine,
ja-stem
army
mettian
verb, infinitive of
mettian. weak verb,
class II
rel. to meat
(to) supply
With food
horsian
verb, infinitive of
horsian. weak verb,
class II
rel. to horse
(to) supply
V^Vh horses
sudweard
adverb
southwards
southwards
ПК*
preposition
—
with
"M№
adjective, dative singular
of ful, strong declension
noun, dative singular of —
fyrd_, feminine, i-stem
fyrde
that
that
filll
betashte
verb, 3«* person singular, rel. to teach
past tense, indicative
mood of betaecan. weak
verb, class I, irregular
i?3
pronoun demonstrative, those
accusative plural of ]эа
noun, accusative plural ship
of scip. neuter, a-stem
noun, accusative plural —
of?isel. masculine,
a-stem
SCipu
3islas
Cnute
™
s
s u n a
full
army
(military
expedition)
put in trust
those
ships
hostages
noun proper, dative
—
Knute
pronoun
possessive,
rd
3 person singular,
masculine
his
™
noun, dative singular of
sunu, masculine, u-stem
son
son
309
s
__
PART 3. KEYS
ofer
preposition
over
over
worhton
verb, plural, pasl lense,
indicative mood of
wircan. weak verb,
class I, irregular
work
(they)
,
performed
(.did)
fret...
conjunction
that
that... that
mzESte
adjective, accusative
singular, superlative
degree qCmyccl. weak
declension
most
most
yfel
noun, accusative singular evil
{>ав1
evil
of yfeb neuter, i-siem
азтз
pronoun indefinite
don
(to) do
mihte
verb, infinitive of don,
do
anomalous verb
verb, singular, past tense, might
indicative mood of
ma^an, preterite-present
verb
Oxenaforde
noun proper, dative
Oxford
Oxford
SCO
pronoun demonstrative,
nominative singular,
feminine of sgo
rel. to t h e
the
buruhwaru
noun (collective),
nominative singular of
buruhwaru. feminine,
o-slem
rel. to b o r o u g h
citizens
("J " town)
3islude
verb, 3rd person singular, —
past tense, indicative
mood of3islian. weak
verb, class II •
adverb
thence
fcanon
any
any
might
gave
Hostages
Winceastre
noun proper
Winchester
thence (from
there)
Winchester
Hf
pronoun
personal,
3"1 person plural,
nominative of 111
—
they
v
310
-
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
patylce
pronoun
that ilk
(just) the same
dydon
verb, past tense, plural,
indicative mood of don.
anomalous verb
did
did
eastwerd
adverb
eastwards
eastwards
Lundene
noun proper
London
London
m
adverb
much
much (many
folces
noun, genitive singular
of folc, neuter, a-stem
folk
folk
adi-апз
verb, 3ixi person singular, rel. to drink,
past tense, indicative
drench
mood of adrincan.
strong verb, class III
drowned
Temese
noun proper
Thames
Thames
for 6 a m p e
conjunction; 6am —
dative of bjst
rel. to that
as
nanre
=ne+anre, pronoun
not one
Ьгусзе
noun, genitive/dative
singular of hiyS3.
feminine, o-stem
bridge
Щ
cepton
negative particle
not
verb, plural, past tense, k e e p
indicative mood of
S&pjn^weak verb, class I
(did not)
keep •
(guarded)
pa . . . p a
conjunction/adverb
w h e n . . . then
Згёге
pronoun demonstrative, that
dative singular, feminine
of seo
noun, dative singular of borough
hurh, feminine, root-stem
=ne+wolde, verb,
—
singular, past tense,
singular, indicative mood
of-Willan, anomalous
verb
311
ycel
u •
Ь
УПЗ
nolde
negative, genitive/dative
singular, strong
declension
—
no one
(not a single)
bridge
that
town (castle)
did not want
(wish)
-
PART 3. KEYS
Ьизап
verb, infinitive of Ьизап, t>OW
strong verb, class II
to surrender
ac
conjunction
but
heoldan
=heoldon, verb, plural,
hold
past tense, indicative
mood of healdan, strong
verb, class VII
held
mid
preposition (+ dative of
the noun)
(with)
fullan
adjective, dative singular iull
of M i weak declension
\vI3e
noun, dative singular of —
WT3. neuter, a-stem
battle
опзеап
adverb
against
against
forjjan
=fcan,conjunction
rel. to that
because
Ьжг
adverb
there
there
inne
adverb
in
in
ЖЬеШ
noun proper
—
Ethelred
£>urcyl
noun proper
—
Thurkill
(a Danish
freebooter
allied with
Sweyne)
—
—
filfl
Weallingaforda noun proper, dative
Wallingford
Wallingford
swa
adverb
SO
SO
ofer
adverb/preposition
over
over
westweard
adverb
westwards
westwards
Bajpan
noun proper, dative
Bath
Bath (a town)
saet
verb, 3 ri person singulai-, sit
past tense, indicative
mood of sittan. strong
verb, class V
sat
Ж^)е1тжг
noun proper
Ethelmar
—
3)2
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
ealdorman
nO
un, nominative
singular of ealdorman.
masculine, root-stem
alderdman
chief
(alderdman)
Mer
adverb
thither
there
(to that place)
waesternan
adjective, nominative
plural of western, weak
declension
western
western
P e 3enas
noun, nominative plural
ofpegen. masculine,
a-stem
—
rnen .
(warriors)
bu
3on
verb, plural, past tense,
indicative mood of
Ьпчап. strong verb,
class II
bow
surrendered
3islodon
yerb, plural, past tense,
indicative mood of
^islan. weak verb,
class II
—
gave hostages
^
conjunction
—
when
Sus
adverb
thus
thus
3efaren hasfde зс/агеп -verb, participle II fare
of faraiL-Strong verb,
class VI;
lU
hffifde — verb, 3 person had
singular, past tense,
indicative mood of
habban. wpak verb,
class III
had gone
scipum
noun, dative plural of
scip, neuter, a-stem
ships
freodscipe
noun, nominative
—:
singular of peod-scype
suffix rel. to -ship
pronoun personal,
3 rd person singular,
masculine, accusative
—
him
adjective, accusative
singular of M , strong
declension
full
fuH
preposition
after
after
m e
•fi 1
Пе
ffiter
313
ship
,.
people (tribe)
PART 3. KEYS
6am
pronoun demonstrative, those
dative plural of jba
those
ОП
preposition
ОП.
tt
ondrsedon
verb, plural, past tense,
indicative mood of oib
drasdan, strong verb,
class VII
conjunction
dread
)л е Г е ^ Г гП
(dreaaea;
that
that
hi
pronoun
personal,
•3rd person plural,
accusative of hie
—
them
fordon
verb, infinitive offordon rel. to do
(to) destroy
wolde
verb, past tense, singular would
of willan. anomalous
verb
pronoun indefinite,
some
accusative singular
would
(Wisnecy
noun, accusative singular while
• ofhwil, feminine, i-stem
pronoun demonstrative, that (the)
dative singular,
masculine of sg
while
fraet
sume
hwfle
f)am
be
conjunction
—
1
some
that (the)
which (that)
laeg
verb, 3" person singular, lie
past tense, indicative
mood of liejajL.strong
verb, class V
lay
hlaefdi3e
noun, nominative
singular of hlafdlge.
feminine, n-stem
lady
lady
Sffi
noun, accusative singular sea
of §jg, feminine, i-stem
pronoun personal,
her
^""person singular,
feminine, dative of hgo
sea
hire
Ьгфег
noun, dative singular of brother
brajbor, masculine, r-stem
314
her
brother
..
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
Ricarde
noun proper
Richard
Richard
fraw
preposition
from
from
middanwintre
noun, dative singular of - midwinter
-winter, masculine,
u-stem
midwinter
Wihtlande
noun proper, dative
Whitland
Whitland
pronoun demonstrative
that
that
"
a
И
P® I e
noun, nominative
tide
singular of ud, feminine,
o-stem
pronoun demonstrative, that
dative/genitive singular,
feminine of sgo
period
(of time)
that
^е
noun, dative/genitive
tide
singular offid,feminine,
o-stem
period
(of time)
0 9
conjunction
till (until)
бопе
pronoun demonstrative, that (the)
accusative singular,
masculine of se
the
bye
noun, accusative
singular, masculine of
byife). i-stem or ja-stem
—
time (period)
"eacl
adjective, nominative
singular, strong
declension
dead
dead
weat-б
verb, 3«' person singular, -—
past tense, indicative
mood of weordan. strong
verb, class III
—
became (was)
Key to Seminars 9, 10 & 12
From Chaucer's Prologue
to "Canterbury Tales"
1
When in April the sweet showers fall
Andpierce the drought of March to the root, and all
The veins are bathed in liquor of such power
As brings about the engendering of the flower,
5
When also Zephyrus with his sweet breath
Exhales an air in every grove and heath
Upon the tebder shoots, and the young sun
His half-course in the sign of the Ram has run,
And the small fowl are making melody
10 That sleep away the night with open eye
(So nature pricks them and their heart engages)
Then people long to go on pilgrimages
And palmers long to seek the stranger strands
Of far-off saints, hallowed in sundry lands,
15 And specially, from every shire's end
Of England, down to Canterbury they wend
To seek the holy blissful martyr, quick
To give his help to them when they were sickIt happened in that season that one day
20 In Southwark, at The Tabard, as I lay
Ready to go on pilgrimage nd start
For Canterbury, most devout at heart,
At night there came into that hostelry
Some nine and twenty in a company
25 Of sundry folk happening then to fall
In fellowship, and they were pilgrims all
That towards Canterbury meant to ride.
The rooms and stables of the inn were wide;
316
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
30
35
40
1
5
10
15
They made us easy, all was of the best.
And, briefly, when the sun had gone to rest,
I'd spoken to them all upon the trip
And was soon one with them in fellowship,
Pledged to rise early and to take the way
To Canterbury, as you heard me say.
But none the less, while I have time and space,
Before my story takes a further pace,
It seems a reasonable thing to say
What their condition was, the full array
Of each of them, as it appeared to me,
According to profession and degree,
And what apparel they were riding in;
And at a Knight I therefore will begin.
Когда Апрель обильными дождями
Разрыхлил землю, взрытую ростками,
И, мартовскую жажду утоля,
От корня до зеленого стебля
Набухли жилки той весенней силой,
Что в каждой роще почки распустила,
А солнце юное в своем пути
Весь Овна знак успело обойти,
И, ни на миг в ночи не засыпая,
Без умолку звенели птичьи стаи,
Так сердце им встревожил зов весны,
Тогда со всех концов родной страны
Паломников бессчетных вереницы
Мощам заморским снова поклониться
Стремились истово; но многих влек
Фома Бекет, святой, что им помог
317
PART 3. KEYS
20
25
30
35
40
В беде иль исцелил недуг старинный,
Сам смерть прияв, как мученик безвинный.
Случилось мне в ту пору завернуть
В харчевню "Табард", в Соуерке, свой путь
Свершая в Кентербери по обету;
Здесь ненароком повстречал я эту
Компанию. Их двадцать девять было.
Цель общая в пути соединила
Их дружбою; они — пример всем нам —
Шли поклониться праведным мощам.
Конюшен, комнат в "Табарде" немало,
И никогда в нем тесно не бывало.
Едва обильный ужин отошел,
Как я уже со многими нашел
Знакомых общих или подружился
И путь их разделить уговорился.
И вот, покуда скромный мой рассказ
Еще не утомил ушей и глаз,
Мне кажется, что было бы уместно
Вам рассказать все то, что мне известно
О спутниках моих: каков их вид,
И звание, и чем кто знаменит
Иль почему в забвенье пребывает;
Мой перечень пусть Рыцарь открывает.
318
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
Phonetic analysis
Changes of spelling and sounds
Word as used
in the text
whan
that
with
Old English
hwsenne
whan
[hw]
[аз]
hw
[hw]
> [a]
baet
that
fae]
>
[9]
>
ге replaced by
p replaced by
wib
re] ,
p
,,
replaced by
fa]
[9]
a
th
with
> [Q]
his
[s]
shoures
scur
shour/showr
(shour)
[sk']
soote
swote/swete
>•«]
[u:r]
u replaced by
ou/ow
sc replaced by
sh
nerced
fpercen)
r o o j ; e
bathed
(bathen)
v
ёгазоб
that
,
> [as]
> [6]
with
> И
th
his
[s]
droghte
when
> [w]
> [e]
replaced by
w
his
[e:]
New English
Middle English
his
> M
shower
> Ш .
> [аиэ]
swote/sweete
> [«]
sweet
> [i:]
droght(e)/
drought
[u:]
> [u:]
>
u replaced by
o/ou
3 replaced by
gh
—
percen
[e:]+vocalized [r]>
—
rote/roote
[o:]
> [u:] >
ba6ode
bathed
[a] (open syl.) > [a:]
[ode]
> [ede]
d replaced by
th
319
[аи]
pierce
[19]
root
[u] before
a dental cons.
bathed
> [ei]
> [d]
PART 3. KEYS
swich
swilc
PC]
с
which
vertu
flour
swich/s(w)uch
such
> [Ш
> ЕШ
[и]
ch
replaced by
hwilc
Ik']
> [л]
which
> Ml
which
> Ufl
[hw]
hw replaced by
с
replaced by
[hw]
wh
ch
—
yertu
virtue
[i] + vocalized [r>
[э:]
flour
flower
—
>
[w]
[u:] + vocalized [r]> [аиэ]
eek
breeth
eac
eek
breed
[x:]
ш
б
inspired
eke
[ea:]
> [к]
с replaced by
k
breeth
>
replaced by
replaced by
—
(inspiren)
> [к]
breath
[e:]
> [e] before
a dental cons,
ee/ea
th
inspire(n)
inspire
[i:] + vocalized [r]>
[aia]
heath
heeth
hae5
heeth
yonge
зеопз/зипз
yong
sonne
sunne
sunne/sonne
[ж:]
> [e:]
as replaced by
ee/ea
б replaced by
th
> [i:]
[u:]
> fu]
3 replaced by
у
и replaced by
o/ou
>
young
N
sun
[и:]
> [и]
> [Л]
и replaced by
о before n or retained
halfe
healf
cours
—
[ea]
half
> [a]
cours
half
> [a:]
[1] lost in NE
course
[u:l + vocalized [r]> [o:]
320
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
(y)-ronne
smale
(зе)-шппеп
[u]
>
u replaced by
smael
[аг]
>
ш replaced by
(y)-ronne
[u]
о before n
smal
[a] before U
a
foweles
(fowel)
firsjol
fowel/foul
[uy]
> [u:]
из replaced by ow
maken
macia6
[a]
slepen
open syll. > [a:]
slaipa6
x
al
maken
slepen
replaced by
eal
nyght
open
ye
nature
corages
6
thanne
> [aj before H.
neaht/niht
nyght/night
h replaced by
open
fo] open syll. >
еаче
[eaTj
>
3
replaced by
—
gh
open
[o:]
езе/уе/еуе
[e:]
[i:]
у
nature
[a:]
[tjur]
—
corage
Iu] 6
banne/bsenne
thanne
a]/[£e]
> [a]
'ej
i
> [в]
replaced by
small1
> [o:]
fowl
> [аи]
make
> [ei]
sleep
e
al(le)
[ea]
run
> [л]
th
all
> [o:]
night
open
> [ou]
eye
> [ai]
nature
> [ei]
> [tja]
courage
> [л]
then
> [e]
> [6]
folk
folc
[o]
folk
folk
> [o] before Ik > [o:] > [ou]
palmeres
palm
[a]
palmere
> [a:] before I
321
palmer
> [a:]
[1J lost in NE
PART 3. KEYS
seken
secan
[e:]
>
с replaced by
e replaced by
seken/seeken
[e:]
к
ее
seek
> [i:]
straunge
—
straunge
[аи] >[а:]
strange
> [ei]
sondry
syndri3
[y]
Ш]
у
3
replaced by
replaced by
sondry
> [u] South West
Midland dial.
sundry
[л]
> И
>M
lond/land
> [a]
land
> [аз]
o/u
у
londes
land
[a]
specially
—
specially
[sj]
shires (shire)
scTr
[ski
>
[i:]
>
sc replaced by
shire
shire
[П
> [fl
[г.] [ai] + vocalized M> [aia]
sh
hooly
hali3
[a:]
. >
fo]
>
a replaced by
3 replaced by
hooly
[o:]
о
у
ffl
especially
> Ш
' holy
> [ouj
> [I]
martir
martyr
[a]
[tir]
martir/martyr
martyr
> [a] + vocalized [r]> [a:]
> [tir]
> [19]
final r vocalized in NE
were
wa?ron
were(n)
were
[a;:]
> [e:] + vocalized [r]> [э:]
se replaced by e
seeke
seoc
seek/sek/sik
[eo:]
> [e:]
.
с
replaced by к
sick
> [i:]
bifil
(bifallen)
be-feallan
bifallen
[ea]
> [a] before П
ea replaced by a
befall
> [o:]
seson
—
seson
e
322
replaced by
season
ea
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
day
I
ёаез
day
ic
>
1аез
—
come
cumen
>
lay
lay
devout
devout
> [аи]
come
come
[u]
> [u]
u replaced by
о before m
ni3on
> [л]
nyne
nine
> [i:]
—
> [ai]
compaignye/
companye
company
> [л]
[u]
wolde
woldon
ryde
ffdan
(wolden)
wolden
[o] before Jd > [o:]
chaumbre(s)
>
—
ride
[1:]
>
chaumbre
/chambre
[au:]
stable(s)
would
> [u:] > [u] before
a dental cons.
[1] losl in NE
iyde(n)/ride(n)
[i:]
—
> [a:]
> [ci]
stable
wTd
stable
we
esed (esen)
>
[i:J
we
we
[e:]
> te:]
—
scort-llce
[sk1]
sc
wide
>
.
shortly
> Ш
replaced by
we
ease
>
[i:]
shortly
>Ш
lo] + vocalized (i']>
sh
323
[ai]
> [i:]>[i-l
ese(n)
[e:]
shortly
> [ei]
wyd(e)
[i:]
[ai]
chamber
[a:]
wyde
[ai]
> [ei]
[u:]
[i] open syl.
compaignye
I
[i:]
[ay]
> [ai]
эез replaced by ay
devout
nyne
> [ei]
I
[ik1]
lay
day
[ay]
> [ai]
Ж3 replaced by ay
[o:]
PART 3. KEYS
was
wffis
Гге]
>
[s]
>
x replaced by
was
Га]
[s]
a
hadde
hasfde
[a]
> [a]
[f]
losl in ME
ж replaced by a
hadde
> [ж]
spoken
sprecen
spoken
|o:J
spoken
> [oul
с
к
made
forward
erly
for
replaced by
macodon
[a] open syl.
[codon]
fore-weard
[o]
[ea]
mad(en)
> [a:]
> [den]
had
made
> [ei]
> [d]
forward
forward
erlich/erly
early
for
for
> [o] + vocalized [r]> [o:]
>
[a] + vocalized [r]> [э]
азг-lTce
[ж:]
> [e:] + vocalized [r]> [э:]
ae replaced by
a
for
[o]
ryse(n)
was
after [w] > Ы
> [z]
> [o] + vocalized [r]> [oO
ffsan
[i:]
take(n)
tacan
oure
ure
risen
rise
> [i:]
> [ai]
[э] unstressed lost in NE
taken
[a] open syl. > [a:]
с replaced by
к
take
> [ei]
our(e)
our
[u:]
> [u:] + vocalized [r]> [аиэ]
u replaced by
ou
wey
ther
we3
wey/way
[e+jT
> [ei]
3 replaced by
у '
baer
se:]
;e]
) replaced by
as replaced by
ther/there
> У
way
>
[ei]
there
> [9]
> [e:] + vocalized [r]> [еэ]J
th
e
424
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
devyse
—
devyse
> N
while
> [ai]
> [w]
у replaced by
1
but
but
> [u:] > [u] before > [л]
a dental cons.
but
butan
[u:]
whil
hvwl
m
>
[hw]
>
hw replaced by
habbe
[a]
>
[bb]
>
whil/while
M
[hw]
wh
have
[a]
[v]
fima
[i:]
tyme
have
tyme
space
er
ferther
this
tale
—
>
у
have
> [as]
> [v]
time
fa
> [ai]
replaced by
i
space
space
m
>
ser
er(e)
[a?:]
> [e:] + vocalized [rl>
x replaced by e
fyira
ferther/further
[y]
> [el + vocalized [r]>
[6]
>
feis
this
Г0]
> [6]
p replaced by
th
talu
'
tale
[a] opensyl. > [a:]
[u] unstressed > [э]
pace
—
thynketh
Ьепсеб
resoun
devise
И
pace
fa:]
thenketh
/thynketh
[e]
> Ш
p, б replaced by tn
—
resoun
e:]
fu] unstressed
325
[ei]
ere
[еэ]
further
[a:]
[6]
this
> [в]
tale
> [ei]
lost in NE
pace
> fei]
thinks
> [i]
reason
> [i:]
> faj
_ _ _ _ _
PART 3. KEYS
condicioun
—
condicioun
^
ech
semed
they
what
condition
, нь> P
_
aslc
Ю
>
[a::l
>
[1]
BE replaced by
semede
[e:l
>
[e]
>
—
cioun replaced by
ech/eech
[tjl
>
[e:]
>
lost in M E
ee/ea
semed
[e:]
>
[э]
they
[9]
>
hwffit
what
[x]
> [a]
after [w]>
[hw]
> [hw]
>
hw replaced by wh
tion
each
[tj]
[i:]
seemed
[i:]
loslinNE
they
PI
what
[o]
[w]
degree
—
degree
[e:f
degree
> И
an-ay
—
airay
[ai]
array
> [ei]
khyght
cniht
[i]
wol
knyght
> [i:J due to loss
of[h']
[kn]
> [kn]
с replaced by
к
h replaced by
gh
wille
[i]
first
> [i]
/wot(e)..
Lo]
> [n]
will
> [i]
fyrst
fy]
у
bigynne
will(e)/wull(e)
knight
> [ai]
first
first
> [i] (East Midland
dial.) + vocalized [r]> [э:]
replaced by
i
be-3inne
bigynne
01
> Igl
[e] unstressed > [э]
326
fel
begin
. k_
lost in Nfa
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
Grammatical and etymological analysis
Words as used
in the text
Analysis
notes
OE or foreign
prototype
Corresponding
NE word,
translation
whan that
conjunction
OEhwaenne
(adverb/pronoun)
p<£t {pronoun)
when that
(when)
Aprille
noun proper
OFayrill,
L aprilis
April
with
preposition
Qfiwip
with
his
pronoun possessive,
masculine, 3"1 person
singular
shoures
noun, common case,
OE his (pronoun his
personal)
OE scur
shower
plural
soote
adjective, plural
OE swote/swete
sweet
the
definite article
OE se, seo, pset
the
droghte
noun, common case,
OE dni^od
drought
of
singular
of
preposition
OE of
March
noun proper
hath perced
verb, present perfect,
3"1 person, singular of
percen. weak verb,
class 2
preposition
noun, common case,
OF mars, march
March
(dial.), L martius
OE habban
pierce (has
OF percier
pierced)
to
roote
OE to
OSk rot
to
root
OE and
and
singular
and
conjunction
bathed
verb, present perfect
OE badian
(hath bathed), Ъл person,
singular of bathen. weak
verb, class 2
327
;
bathe (Ладbathed)
PART 3. KEYS
_____
every
pronoun indefinite
OE sefre
every
veyne
noun, common case,
OE veine
vein
singular
h
preposition
0£in
in
swich
pronoun indefinite
OEswilc
such
licour
noun, common case,
OF licur, L liquor liquor
singular
(moisture)
of
preposition
OE of
of
which
pronoun indefinite
/interrogative
noun, common case,
singular
verb, passive voice,
present tense, 3"1 person
singular of engendren,
weak verb, class 2
noun, common case,
singular
OE hwilc
which
OF vertu
virtue
(force)
engender
(is engendered)
OF four
flower
(blossoming)
Zephirus
noun proper
L zephyrus
Zephyr
eek
adverb
OEEac
eke (too)
SWete
see above SOOte
see above SOOte
SWeet
breeth
noun, common case,
singular
verb,
present perfect,
rd
3 person, singular of
inspiren, weak verb,
class 2
OE Ьгазб
breath
OF inspirer
L inspirare
inspire (has
inspired)
noun, common case,
singular
noun, common case,
OE holt
holt
OE ha§5
heath
vertu
engendred is
flour
inspired hath
holt
heeth
OF engendrer,
L ingenerane
singular
tendre
adjective
OF tendre
tender
croppes
noun, common case,
plural
OE crop
crop
328
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
yonge
adjective, definite
declension, singular
noun, common case,
singular
sonne
OE зеопз
young
OE sunne
sun
hath y-ronne
verb, present perfect,
3rd person, singular of
rynen. strong verb,
class 3
OE habban
ran
OE (зе)-пппап
Ram
noun proper
OE ram n-ansl. from Ram (in the
L Aries
Ram —first
sign of
the Zodiac)
halve
adjective, definite
declension
GEhealf
half
cours
noun, common case,
OF cours,
course (half
singular
L cursus
of his course
smale
adjective, plural
OEsmasl
small
foweles
noun, common case,
plural
verb, present tense,
plural, indicative mood
of maken. weak verb,
OE fu3ol
fowl (birds)
OE macian
make
noun, common case,
singular
OF melodie
L melodia
melody
(phrasal unit -
that
pronoun, relative
OE past
that
slepen
verb, present tense,
plural, indicative mood
of slepen. strong verb,
class 7
OE slaipen
sleep
al
pronoun indefinite'
OE eal
all
nyght
noun, common case,
singular
adjective, indefinite
declension
OE nihl
night
OE west
open
maken
i
i
melodye
open
c
l
a
s
s
2
329
(has run)
i
sing)
j
-—-
PART 3.KEYS
ye
r.uiar m o n c a s e -
ОЕёазе
%Visi
eye open-a
mediaeval
belief)
SO
adjective/conjunction
OE swa
s 0
priketh
verb,
present tense,
3rd person, singular,
indicative mood of
priken. weak verb,
class 2
OE prician
prick
hem
pronoun personal,
objective case, plural
noun, common case,
singular
OE hie, him
them
OF nature,
L naffira
nature
pronoun possessive,
plural
noun, common case,
plural
OE hira, heora,
hiera, hyra
OFcorage,
reimbior
their
thanne
adverb/conjunction
OE panne
then
longen
verb, present tense,
plural, indicative mood
of longen, weak verb,
class 2
OE Ian3ian
l° n S
folk
noun, common case
OE folc
f°^
to goon
verb, infinitive of goon.
anomalous verb
preposition
OE зап
t 0
OE on
o n
pilgrimages
noun, common case,
plural
OF pelegrinage
. derived from
ш
ME pilgrym
palmeres
noun, common case,
OF palmier
nature
here
corages
ОП
p U r a
courage
(hearts)
»°
pilgrtoag
P
$S/S'«
Palestine)
for
preposition
OE for
toseken
verb, infinitive of seken. OE secan
weak verb, class 1,
irregular
330
e
f° r
to seek
.
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
straunge
adjective
Strondes
noun, common case,
OF estrange,
L extraneus
OE strand
strange
(foreign)
Strand
plural
to
preposition
OE to
to
feme
adjective
OE fyrn
old, far-off
halwes
noun, common case,
plural
verb, participle 2 of
connen, preterite-present
verb, or adjectivised
participle
adjective
OE Шза
hallow
(saints)
(un)couth
(well-known,
hallowed)
couthe
SOndry
londes
specially
noun, common case,
plural
adverb
O£cunan,
OE cu5
OE syndri3
sundry
OE land
land
'<?'. to OF especial especially
(adj.), L specialis
from
preposition
QEfram
from
shires
noun, genitive case,
singular
noun, common case,
OE scir
shire
OE ende
end
OE Engla-land
England
ende
singular
Engelond
noun proper
Caunterbury
noun proper
they
wende
hooly
blisfi.il
martir
0£Cantwarabyri3 Canterbury
M
pronoun personal, 3
person, plural
verb, present tense,
plural, indicative mood
of wendeju weak verb,
class 1
adjective
adjective
QEhali3
holy
rel. to OE blis (n) blissful
noun, common case,
singular
OE martyr,
L martyr
331
OSc jbeir
they
OE wendan
wend (go)
та
г
ЙУ
(StTJiomas
a Becket of
Canterbury)
PART 3. KEYS
hath holpen
verb,
present perfect,
3td person, singular of
helpen, strong verb,
class 3
OE habban,
help (has
OE holpen (pan. 2) helped
were(n)
verb, past tense, plural, OE wSron
indicative mood of been.
suppletive verb
vvere
seeke
adjective
OE seoc
sick
bifil
verb, past tense,
indicative mood of
bifallen. strong verb,
class 7
OE be-feallan
befall (it so
happened)
seson
= sesoun
noun, common case,
singular
OF seson, L satio season
(time, season)
ОП
preposition
OEon
ОП
a
article, indefinite
OJSan
a
day
OE dx3
Southwerk
noun, common case,
singular
noun proper
day
(one day)
Southward
(outskirts oj
London)
at
preposition
OE set
at
Tabard
noun proper
OF tabard
Tabard
(here: the name
of a London
inn; tabard —
a sort of cloak)
as
adjective/conjunction
0£eal-swa
as
I
pronoun
personal,
lsl person singular,
nominative case
OE ic
I
lay
verb, past tense, singular, OE Нсзап
indicative mood of lyen,
strong verb, class 5
lay (stayed)
redy
adjective
O^raede
ready
my
pronoun possessive,
1sl person, singular
QEmTn
my
332
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
fill
adjective/adverb
OEM
full
(most, very)
devout
adjective .
OF devot
devout
corage
noun, common case,
singular
verb, past perfect of
comen. strong verb,
class 4
preposition
see above
courage
(heart)
were come
(there came)
were come
into
that
hostelrye
wel
OE wesan
OE cuman,
cumen (pan. 2)
OE in-to
pronoun demonstrative, OE se, seo, bast
singular
noun, common case,
OF hostellerie
singular
adverb
C£wel
into
that
hostelry
well
(almost)
nyne
numeral, cardinal
OE ni3on
nine
twenty
numeral, cardinal
OE twen-ti3
compaignye
noun, common case,
singular
preposition/adverb
OF companie
twenty (nine
and twenty =
twenty-nine)
company
ОЕЫ
by
y-falle
noun, common case,
singular
verb, infinitive of
failefn). strong verb,
class 7
OF aventure,
L adventfira
O£feallan
adventure
(happening)
fall
felaweshipe
noun, common case,
singular
OSc felagi
fellowship
by
aventure
pilgrimes
pilgrims
were
noun, common case,
OF pelegrin,
• plural
t peregnnus
verb, past tense, plural, OE wieron
indicative mood of been,
suppletive verb
alle=al
pronoun indefinite
all
OE eal
333
were
PART 3. KEYS
toward
pronoun relative
wolde(n)
verb, past tense, plural of OE willan,
would
willen. anomalous verb wolden {past plural)
ryde
verb, infinitive of riden,
strong verb, class 1
OEfidan
ride
chaumbres
noun, common case,
plural
OF chambre
L camera
chamber
Stables
noun, common case,
OF cstable
stable
plural
L stabulum
wyde
adjective
OEvnd
wide
wel
adverb
OE wcl
well
we
esed
pronoun personal,
OEwe
1sl person plural
verb, passive voice, past OF eser
tense of esen, weak verb,
class 2
ease
atte=at the
see above
see above
at the
beste
adjective, superlative
OE god; belsl
best
degree of good
(super!, degree)
adverb
OE scort-lTce
shortly
OE reslan
to rest
shortly
0£to-weard
to reste
verb, infinitive of resten.
weak verb, class 1
hadde spoken verb, past perfect of
spcken, strong verb,
class 4
toward(s)
we
OE habban;
had spoken
liaefde (past tense)
OE sprccan;
sprecen (part. 2)
everichon
pronoun indefinite
OE Sfre aelc
every (all)
that
conjunction
OE t>32t
that
anon
adverb
OE on an
anon (at once)
made(n)
verb, past tense, plural,
indicative mood of
maken, weak verb,
class 2
OE macian;
macodon (past
plural)
made
forward
noun, common case,
singular
OE forc-weard
forward
(made an
agreement)
334
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
erly
adverb
OE xr-llce
early
fbrtoryse
verb, infinitive of risen,
strong verb, class 1
OEtlsan
to rise
to take
verb, infinitive of taken.
strong verb, class 6
OE tacan
to take
oure
pronoun possessive,
1sl person, plural
OE Ore
our
wey
noun, common case,
OE we3
way
ОЕрхт
there
singular
ther
adverb
yow
devyse
pronoun personal, plural, OE eow
objective case
verb, present tense,
OF deviser
singular of devvsen,
weak verb, class 2
but
conjunction
OE butan
but
natheless
adverb
OE na-|)y-laes
nevertheless
whil
conjunction/adverb
OEhwil
while
have
verb, present tense,
l s l person, singular of
haven, weak verb,
class 3
OE habban
have
tyrne
noun, common case,
singular
OE tlma
time
Space
noun, common case,
OF espace,
Space
singular
L spatium
er
adverb/conjunction
OEisr
ferther
adjective
ibis
OE feor; fyrra
(comp, degree)
OE bis
pronoun demonstrative,
singular
noun, common case,
OE talu
singular
tale
Pac6
verb, present tense,
OF passer
singular of paccn/passen.
weak verb, class 2
335
you
devise (say,
describe)
ere (before)
JSltfter,
. ШГшеГ
this
tale
pace
._
PART 3. KEYS
methynketh
impersonal construction OE me, тёс
of the verb thenken.
OE bencan
weak verb, class 1;
rd
3 person, singular,
present tense
think
(/ think)
it
pronoun personal,
objective case, singular,
neuter
OE hit
it
acordaunt
adjective
OF accordant
accordant
(according)
to
preposition
OE to
to
resoun
noun, common case,
singular
OF raison
L ratio
reason
totelle
verb, infinitive of tellen.
weak verb, class 1,
irregular
OEtellan
to tell
condicioun
noun, common case,
singular
OF condicion
condition
ech
pronoun indefinite
ОЕяХс
each
Semed
verb, past tense, singular OE seman
of semen, weak verb,
class 2
seem
whiche
pronoun indefinite
/interrogative
OE hwilc
which
(what kind of
people)
what
pronoun indefinite
/interrogative
OE hwael
what
degree
noun, common case,
singular
OF degnSt
L de+gradus
degree
array
noun, common case,
OF arrai
array
singular
inne
adverb
OE in
in
khyght
noun, common case,
singular
adverb/conjunction
OE cnihl
khight
OE fmnne
then
than
336
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
wol
verb,
present tense,
1
Г person, singular of
willen, anomalous verb
QEwille
will
first
adverb
OE fyrst
first
bigynne
verb, infinitive of
bigynnen/begvnnen.
strong verb, class 3
OE be-3innan
begin
Key to Seminars 11 & 13
TVevisa, About the languages of the inhabitants
As it is known how many kinds of people live on this island, there
are also as many diverse languages and tongues; nevertheless,
Welshmen and Scots that are not in the least mixed with other nations,
hold very near their first language and speech; except that the Scots
who were once confederate and dwelled with the Picts, draw after
their speech; but the Flemings who dwelled in the west side of Wales
have left their foreign speech and speak quite like Saxons. Also
Englishmen had from the beginning three kinds of speech, Northern,
Southern and middle speech in the middle of the land, as they came
from three kinds of people of Germany; nevertheless, by mixing and
mingling first with Danes and afterwards with Normans, in many
respects the country language is impaired, and some use strange
stammering, chattering, snarling, and grating gnashing of teeth. This
impairing of the birth of the tongue is because of two things; one is
because, unlike the situation in all other countries, schoolboys aie
compelled to abandon their own language, and to leam their lessons in
French, and that has gone on since the Normans first came to
England. Also children of the gentry are taught to speak French from
the time that they are rocked in their cradle and can speak and play
with a child's brooch; and country people want to liken themselves to
the gentry and try very hard to speak French to be held as such. This
method was much in use before the Great Sickness, but has since
been somewhat changed; for John Cornwalle, a master of grammar,
changed the learning in grammar school from French into English,
Richard Penrich learned the way of teachning from him and from other
men of Penrich; so that now, in the year of our Lord 1385, and in the
ninth year of the reign of the second king Richard after the conquest, m
all grammar schools in England boys abandon French, and conduct
338
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
their studies in English, which leads to an advantage on the one
hand, and a disadvantage on the other. Their advantage is that
they- learn their grammar in shorter time than boys used to do.
The disadvantage is that boys in grammar schools know no more
French than their left heel, and that is harmful for them if they
should cross the sea and travel in foreign, countries, and in many
other places, too.
Phonetic analysis
Word as used
in the text
Changes of spelling and sounds
Old English
is
i-knowe
is
is
is
[s]
Is]
И
зе-cnawen
i-knowe(n)
known
[а:]
fie]
he]
> [I]
[kn]
> [kn]
3 replaced by
J
с replaced by
к
how
hQ
тагиз
[a]
peple
—
fcis
[9]
L J
iloncHland
13-land
[i:]
a
how
> [au]
many
> [a]
many
>
peple
[e:]
t>is
М
lost in NE
> fn]
how
[u:]
> [u:]
u replaced by
ow
meny=many
New English
Middle English
И
people
> И .
pis/this
this
> [в]
> ф!
f,
replaced by
th
iland
> И
island
>
М
> [a]
> N
+ s under the influence or isle
339
PART 3. KEYS
|эеге
fcser
las:]
x
dyvers
fiere
there
> [e:] + vocalized [r] > [еэ]
p
replaced by
th
replaced by
e
—
dyvers
diverse
Ю
> [ai]
[e] +vocalized [r]> [э]
у
replaced by
i
longage(s)
—
langage
language
[a]
> [x]
+ [w] under the influence of lingua (Lat)
tonges
Шпзе
tonge
tongue
[u]
> [u]
> [л]
3 replaced by
g
u replaced by
о (a ME spelling device)
Walsche=
Wylsc
Welsh
[y:]
Welsh
[sk'l
> Ш
sc replaced by
jiat
fcjet
fat
Ш
> [a]
[6]
> M
ббег
[°;]
nacioun(s)
>Ш
sh
p
ot>er
> Щ
replaced by
ojber
—
heald(an)
neah
[ea:]
th
other
> to:]>[u:]>[u] > W
unstressed [el + vocalized [r] > [a]
5/p replaced by
th
nacioun
hold(en)
[ea] > [a] > [a:] before Jd > [o:]
nyh=neer
that
> [x]
[a:]
[sjun]
hold(ef))
Welsh
> [e:] (Kentish dial.] > [e]
neer
nation
> [ei]
> [?эп]
hold
> [ou]
near
> [e:] >[i:] + vocalized [r]> [is]
340
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
firste
fyrst
first(e)
first
[i] + vocalized [r]> [э:]
[у]
> [i] (East Midland dial.)
у replaced by
i
speche
spraic
speche
[ж]
> [e:]
[k']
> [tj]
[r]
lost in ME
зе replaced by
e
с replaced by
ch
but
butan
[u:]
were
somtyme
but
> [л]
wajron
were
were
sume-tyman
sometyme
sometime
[ae:]
> [e:] + vocalized [r] > [э:]
se replaced by
e
[u]
u
у
drawe
but
> [u]
speech
> [i:]
> [tj]
> [u]
> [л]
[i:]
>
ПО
>
replaced by
о (a ME spelling device)
replaced by
i
сказ(аб)
drawe
draw
[a+j]
> [аи]
3 replaced by
w
> [о:]
side
side
И
side
> M
straunge
—
side
> И
straunge
[ao]>[a:]
Englische
Er^Usc
[sk']
3
hadde
replaced by
Englische
> [fl
g
ha3fd(on)
hadde
[a]
> [a]
[v]
lost in ME
a replaced by
a
341
[ai]
strange
> [ei]
English
>Ш
had
> [se]
______
PART 3. KEYS
bygynn(ynge)
manere
Ье-зтп(ипзе)
begynninge
0]
>
3 replaced by
[g] (Scand. influence) > [g]
g
beginning
—
manere
manner
fa]
> [ae]
unstressed [e] + vocalized [r]> [э]
sowberne
sudeme
[u:]
u
Danes
sowberne
southern
> [u]
> [л]
unstressed [e] + vocalized [r]> [э]
replaced by
ow/ou
6/b replaced by
th
Dene
Danes
Danes
[e] > [a] under the influence ofDani (Lat)
[a] > [a:] (open syllable) > [ei]
[s]
> [z|
afterward
asfter-weard
afterward
afterward(s)
[ae]
> [a]
> [a:] before [ft]
unstressed [e] + vocalized [r]> [э]
[ea]
> [a]+vocalized [r]> [a:] after [w]>[o:]
ae replaced by
a
Norman(s)
—
Norman
Norman
[o] +vocalized [r]> [o:]
contray=
countree
—
countree
[u]
som
sum
som(e)
country
> [л]
some
[u]
> [u]
> [л]
u replaced by
о (a ME spelling device)
burbe=birthe
(3e-)byrd
[y]
[y]
bycause
—
burbe/birthe
>
>
bycause
[аи]
oon
an
[a:n]
birth
[u:] South West Midland dial.
[i] East Midland dial.+vocalized[r]>[9:]
p replaced by
th
oon
because
> [о:]
one
>[o:n] > [u:n] > [wu:n] > [\улп]
342
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
child(ren)
cild(ru)
1
[k ]
scole
scol
[o:]
a3enst
child(ren)
> [tj]
scole
> [o:]
оп-зёап
child(ren)
>
[tj]
school
> [u:]
ayeyiies/a3enst/agayn against
[ea:]
3
alle
> fe:]
- [ai}> [ei]
[gj (Scand. influence)
replaced by
g
eal
[eaj
leve
lgfan
alte
> [a] before U
leve(n)
[«:]
> le:]
f replaced by
v-
owiie
азеп
habb(ad)
[a]
i-tau3t
speke
leave
> [i:]
owne
[a:+j]
> [ou]
3 ' replaced by
w
havep
all
> [o:]
own
> [ou]
hav(e5)
> [a]
(3e-)taht
i-tau3t/y-taught
sprecan
speke(n) ..
Га:1
> [аи] before [hi
[h]
lost in M E
h replaced by
gh
have
>
[в]
taught
> [o:]
speak
[ei]
> te:] open syllable > [i:]
[r]
lost in ME
'
с replaced by
к
cradel
cradol
[a]
playe
ple3ian
[e+j]
child(es)
cild
cradel
cradle
> [a:] open syllable > [ei]
playe(n)/pleye(n) play
> [ei]
> [eil
child
[k']
> [tj]
[i]
> Li:] before lid]
с replaced by
ch
343
child
>
>
[tj]
[ai]
PART 3. KEYS
broche
—
broche
brooch
[o:]
greet
3reat
> [ou]
greet
great
tea:]
> [e:]
3 replaced by
g
besy(nesse)
bisi3/bysi3
[y]
[y]
(i-)tolde
moche
besy/busy
told
told
> [a:] before [ld]>lo:]>[ou]
trade
moche/muchel
[u:]
de
&
deaf)
tea:]
i-chaunged
lore
f> replaced by
th
_
i-chaunged
master
> [Л]
death
> [el before
a dental cons.
change(d)
>
maister
N
master
[a] (loss of [j]) > [a:]
unstressed [e] + vocalized [r] >
N
lar
lore
ta:]
gramer
much
deth
> [e:]
[au]>[a:]
maister
busy
> [i] East Midland dial> [I]
> [u:] South West Midland dial,
retained in NE spelling
tald
[a]
> [el]
lore
> [o:] + vocalized [r]> [o:]
_
^ ^ ^
grammar
[a]
> N
M
unstressed [e] + vocalized [r] > l a i
construccioun
-
construccioun
[u]
tsjun]
lern
(ed)
leorn(ode)
e
t °]
lera(ed)
>
construction
> W
> [M
barn(t)
[e] + vocalized [r]> [э:]
344
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
techynge
t s c a n (inf)
techen
[ж:]
> [e:]
[k'l
> [tfl
ae replaced by
e/ea
now
nu
now
[u:]
> [u:]
u replaced by
ow
Зеге
З
еаг
[ea:]
3
oure
teach
> [i:l
> [tfl
now
> [аи]
Зеге
year
> [e:] + vocalized [r] > [э:]
replaced by
У
ure
oure
our
[u:]
> [u:] +vocalized [r]> [аиэ]
u replaced by
ou
Lord(e)
hlaford
[a:]
t>owsand
f)Qsand
L(h)overd/lord
fcowsand/thousand
[u:l
> [u:]
unstressed [a] > [э]
p replaced by
u replaced by
ow/ou
hundred
hund-red
[u]
score
L J
thousand
>
Ш
tn
hundred
> [u]
scorn
[ol
lord
> [o:] +vocalized [r]> [э:]
hundred
>.[л]
score
score
> [o:] open syllable
•• + vocalized[r]> [or]
fyve ff fyve five
[i:]
*УЩ
> [i:]
cynin 3
>
kyng
№
.king
• [y]
> [i] East Midland dial. > [I]
с replaced by
к
п
Упе
do
°
ш 3 оп
М
пупе
> И
don
doo
[o:]
>
[o:]
345
nine
> fal]
do
>
^
> [ U
'
]
PART 3. KEYS
na=no
na
[a:]
more'
тага
[a:]
can
can
[a]
heele
hela
l«]
harme
hearm
[ea]
schulle
scul(on)
[skf]
passe
—
na/no
> [o:]
more
more
> [o:] + vocalized [r] > [o:]
can
can
> [a]
> [ae]
heele
heel
> [e:]
> [i:]
harme
sae
shulle
—
—
> Ш
passe
pass
> [a:] before [ss]
see
sea
[ж]
, J L > [e:l
ж replaced by
ee/ea
place(s)
harm
> [a] + vocalized [r] > [a:]
[a]
see
no
> [ou]
> M
place
[a:]
place
> [ei]
Grammatical and etymological analysis
Corresponding—
NE word,
translation
-—
Words as used
in the text
Analysis
notes
OE or foreign
prototype
as
conjunction
<?£eal-swa
it
pronoun personal,
3rd person singular,
neuter, nominative case
OE hit
is
verb, 3rd person singular, OE wesan (inf)
К
present tense, indicative OE is (Present tense)
mood of been, suppletive
verb
346
as
U
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
i-knowe
adjective/participle 2 of
knowen, strong verb,
class 7
OE cnawan (in0
OE (3e-)cnawen
(part. 2)
how
adverb
OEM
how
meny
adjective/pronoun
OE mani^
many
manere
noun, common case
OF mankre
PSple
noun, common case
beep
verb, 3rd person plural,
present tense, indicative
mood of been, suppletive
verb
OF pueple
L populus
OE Ьёоб
manner
(sorts, kinds
of)
people
are
n
preposition
OE in
in
P
IS
ilond
pronoun demonstrative, <9£bis
singular, neuter
noun, common case,
ОЕц-\Ш
known
this
island
singular
pere
conjunction
ОЕЩг
there
a
lso
SO
adverb
adverb
0£eal-swa
0£swa
also
so
longages
noun, common case,
plural
language
and
conjunction
OFlangagelangue
L lingua
OEhnd
and
tonges
noun, common case,
plural
OE tun3e
tongue
nopeles
adverb
OE na-py-ISs
nevertheless
Walsche
adjective
O^Wylisc
Welsh
rosn
noun, common case,
plural
noun proper, common
case, plural
OE men
n^0
OE Scot
Scot
Scottes
347
—
PART 3. KEYS
pat
conjunction
OE pxl
that
adverb, negative
OE na-with
not (not in
the least)
i-medled
adjective/participle 2 of
medlen, weak verb,
class 2
OFmedler
meddle
(mingled)
wib
preposition
OE wifi
with
сфег
pronoun indefinite
OE брег
Other
naciouns
holdep
noun, common case,
plural
verb, plural, present
tense, indicative mood of
holden, strong verb,
class 7
OF nacion
nation
L natio
OE healdan (inf) hold
OE healdajb (pres.
tense plural)
wel
adverb
OEwd
well (very)
nyh
preposition / adverb
/ adjective
OE neah
near
hir
pronoun possessive,
plural
OE hyra/hira
their
firste
adjective
OE fyrst
first
speche
noun, common case,
singular
OE sprsc
speech
but
conjunction
OE butan
but
3if
conjunction
OEyf
if(except)
the
definite article
OE se, seo, pffit
the
pat
conjunction
OEpaet
that (who)
were
verb, plural, past tense, OE waeron
indicative mood of been,
suppletive verb
were
somtyme
adverb
OEsume-timan
sometime
confederat
adjective
L conibederatus
confederate
noint
J
348
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
wonede
verb, plural, past tense,
indicative mood of
wonen, weak verb,
class 2
OE wunian (inf)
dwell
OE wunodon (pas; (remained)
tense plural)
be
definite article
OE se, seo, past
the
Pictes
noun proper, common
case, plural
OE Pkt
Pict
drawe after
verb, present tense,
indicative mood of
drawen, strong verb,
class 6
OE dra3an (inf)
OE dra3a6
draw after
(imitated)
Flemmynges
noun proper, common
case, plural
wonep
verb, plural, present
OE wunian (inf) dwell
tense, indicative mood of OE wunia5
wonen, weak verb,
(present tense plural)
class 2
Я
preposition
OE in
П
weste
adjective
OE wesi
west
side
noun, common case,
OE side
side
Flemish
singular
Of
preposition
OEof
of
Wales
noun proper, common
case
verb, present perfect
plural Of leven, weak
OE Wealas
Wales
havebi-left
OE habba6
have left
(present tense plural)
verb, class 1
«B^aJ
straunge-
adjective
^estrange
spekef)
verb, plural, present
OE sprecan (inf)
tense, indicative mood of OE spreca6
(participle 2)
sgange
speak
speken, Strong verb,
class 4
(present tense plural)
Saxonliche
„dverb
2КЕЗЯ5-
likeS
i-now
ad
"Язе-»
«««h
v e rb
349
"°"
S
_
PART 3. KEYS
Englische
adjective
OE En^lhc
English
men
noun, common case,
plural
OE men
men
bey
pronoun personal, 3rd
person plural
OScpeir
they
hadde
verb, past tense,
OE habban <inl)
indicative mood of
OE hajfdon (pasi
haven, weak verb, class 3 tense plural)
had
from
preposition
from
bygynnynge
verbal noun of bigynnen, OE be-зуппап
OEfrom
beginning
strong verb, class 3
(inf)
{>ie
numeral, cardinal
ОЕ$п
three
пофете
adjective
OE побегпе
northern
ЭОУфегпе
adjective
OE siifierne
southern
middel
adjective
СШ middel
middle
myddel
noun, common case
OE middel
middle
lond
OE lond
land
come
noun, common case,
singular
verb, plural, past tense,
indicative mood of
comen, strong verb,
class 4
OE cuman (inf)
OE comon (past
tense plural
came
Germania
noun proper
by
preposition
ОЕЫ
by
comyxtioun
noun, common case
OF commistion
mixture
mellynge
verbal noun of medlen,
mellen, weak verb,
class 2
OF medler.
mingling
firste
adverb
OE fyrst
first
Danes
noun proper, common
case, plural
adverb
OE Dane
Dane
afterward
Germany
350
OE sefter-weard
afterwards
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
Normans
noun proper, common
case, plural
OF Norman
OSc погбтаб
Norman
roeny
adjective/pronoun
OEташз
many (in
many things,
in many
respects)
contray
noun, common case,
singular
OF contree
country
apayred
adjective/participle 2 of
empeiren, weak verb,
class 2
OF empeirer
impaired
sor
n
pronoun indefinite
OE sum
some
f>
verb, plural, present
OF user
tense, indicative mood of
usen, weak verb, class 2
use
Wlafferynge
gerund of wlaffen, weak
verb, class 2
stammering
chiterynge
gerund of chiteren, weak (imit.)
verb, class 2
chirping
harrynge
gerund of harren, weak
verb
with rolling
[r]
garrynge
participle 1 of garren,
weak verb
grisbayting
noun, common case
this
pronoun demonstrative, OE pis
singular
this
apayiynge
verbal noun of empeiren, of empeirer (inf.)
weak verb, class 2
impairing
burpe
noun, common case
OE зе-byrd
/Зе-byrdu
birth
by - preposition;
cause - noun, common
case
ОЕЫ
OF cause,
L causa
because
numeral, cardinal
OE twa/Ш
two
use
bycause
= (by) cause
tweie
OE wlaffian (inf)
(imit.)
rcl.
to OE зуггап
OE 3rist-betun3
351
growling
gristbiting
(gritting of
teeth)
PART 3. KEYS
fringes
noun, common case,
OE bin3
thing
plural
ООП
numeral, cardinal
OE an
one
for
conjunction
OE for
for
children
noun, common case,
plural
noun, common case,
0£cildru
children
singular
OF escole
a3enst
preposition
О£оп-зёап
against
usage
noun, common case
OF usage
usage (custom)
alle
pronoun indefinite
ОЕЫ
all
opere
pronoun indefinite
OE oder
other
beef)
compelled
verb, passive voice,
OFcompeller
plural, present tense,
indicative mood of
compellen, weak verb,
class 2
verb, infinitive of leven, ОЕШап
weak verb, class 1
adjective, definite
OE азеп
declension
verb, infinitive of
L construere
construen, weak verb,
class 2
scole
toleve
OWne
to construe
lessouns
OE scol, L scola, school
are compelled
to leave
own
to construe
noun, common case,
plural
OF lecon, L lectio lesson
frynges
noun, common case,
OEfyins
havef)
plurai
verb^ plural, present
OE ЬаЬЬаб
tense, indicative mood of
haven, weak verb, class 2
have
sep
conjunction
OE si69an
since
first
adverb
OE fyrst
first
Engelond
noun proper
O£Engla-land
England
352
thing
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
gentil (-) men
noun, genitive case,
plural
ef. F gentilhomme gentlemen
i-tau3t
verb, passive voice,
plural, present tense,
indicative mood of
techen, weak verb,
class 1
OE tascan (inf)
ОЕ{^е-)\Ш
(participle 2)
to speke
verb, infinitive of speken, OE sprecan
strong verb, class 4
noun, common case
QEtima
tyme
beep i-rokked verb, passive voice,
plural, present tense,
indicative mood of
rokken, weak verb,
class 2
cradel
OE roccian (inf)
OE (зе-) roccod
(participle 2)
taught
to speak
time
are rocked
kunnep
noun, common case,
OE cradol
cradle
singular
verb, plural, present tense OE cunnan (inf) can
of connen, preterite
OE cunnon
present verb
(present tense plural)
playe
verb, infinitive of pleyen, 0£ple3ian
play
weak verb, class 2
a
article, indefinite
OE an
a
childes
noun, genitive case,
singular
noun, common case,
singular
adjective
OEcild
child
OE broche
brooch
OE пр-lendisc
uplandish
broche'
uplondisshe
wil
verb, plural, present
OE willan (inf)
will (would)
tense, indicative mood or OE willa6 (present
present subjunctive of indicative)
willen, anomalous verb OE willen (present
subjunctive)
likne
verb, infinitive of
rei.
to OE зе-lTc
likne(n), weak verb,
(adjective)
class 2
liken
hym(-)self
pronoun, reflexive
himself
(themselves)
OEhim+self
353
PART 3. KEYS
fondejj
verb, plural, present
OE fandian (inf)
tense, indicative mood of OE fandiab
fonden, weak verb,
class 2
try
greet
adjective
OEyeai
great
besynesse
noun, common case
OE bisknes
to be i-tolde of verb, infinitive passive of OE beon <inf)
lellen, weak verb, class 1, OE tellan (inf)
irregular
OE tald/teald
(participle 2)
business
(very hard)
to be told of
(to be held
/ rated highly
as such)
was i-used
verb, passive voice,
OE waes
singular, past tense of
OF user
usen, weak verb, class 2 L iisare
was used
moche
adverb
QEmicle
much
to
adverb
OE to
too
for
preposition
OE for
for
firsts
noun, genitive case,
singular
noun, common case,
singular
OE first
first
OE dead
sumdel
adverb
OE sumne dael
death (till
the end of the
period until
lately)
somewhat
isi-chaunged
verb, passive voice,
singular, present tense,
indicative mood of
chaungen, weak verb,
class 2
OE wesan (inf)
is changed
OE is (present tense
singular)
OF changier
for
conjunction
OEfor
John
noun proper
John
Cornwaile
noun proper
Cornwall
maister
noun, common case,
singular
deth
354
for
OE ma^ister, from master
OF maistre,
L magister
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
gramer
noun, common case
OFgrammaire
L grammaliea
Gr grammatike
grammar
chaunged
verb, past tense,
indicative mood of"
chaungen, weak verb,
class 2
OFchangier
changed
lore
noun, common case
OE lar
lore
constmccioun
noun, common case
F construction
construction
(interpretation)
in(-)to
preposition
OE \r\-\.o
into
Englische
noun, common case
rei. to OE En3lisc
English
(adjcciive)
(language)
Richard
noun proper
Richard
Pencriche
noun proper
Pencrich
lemed
verb, past tense,
OE leornian (inf)
indicative mood of
OE leornode (past
lernen, weak verb, class 2 tense singular)
gerund of techen, weak OE tajcan (inf)
verb, class 1, irregular
pronoun
personal,
02? him, hine
rd
3 person singular,
masculine, objective case
adverb
OE nu
noun, common case,
OE зёаг
singular
pronoun possessive,
ОЕпте
sl
l person plural
noun, common case,
OE hlaford
learn
techynge
hym
now
3ere
ОШ'е
Lorde
teaching
him
now
year
OUT
Lord
singular
fiowsand
numeral (subst.)
OE pusend
thousand
f)re
numeral, cardinal
QEpri/ргёо
three
hundred
noun, common case,
singular
OE hund-rcd
hundred
355
PART 3. KEYS
.
foure
numeral, cardinal
OEfeower
four
score
noun, common case,
singular
OE scoru
'
score (two
lens)
fyve
numeral, cardinal
<?£fif
secounde
numeral, ordinal
OF second
L secundus
second
kyng
noun, common case,
OE cynins
king
five
(the
yearofl385)
singular
Richard
noun proper
conquest
noun, common case,
singular
numeral, cardinal
nyne
Richard
OF conqueste
conquest
ОЕтзоп
nine (the
ninth year of
the reign of
the second
king Richard
after the
Conquest)
levef)
verb, plural, present
OE laifan (inf)
tense, indicative mood of OE laefad (present
leven, weak verb, class 1 tense plural)
leave
construef)
verb, plural, present
L construere
tense, indicative mood of
construen, weak verb,
class 2
construe
lernejb
verb, plural, present
OE leornian (inf) learn
tense, indicative mood of OE leorniaO
lernen, weak verb, class 2 (present tense plural)
an
preposition
OE an=on
on (in)
|эегЬу
adverb
ОЕЩт-Ы
thereby
avauntage
noun, common case,
singular
OF avantage
advantage
side
noun, common case,
singular
OE side
side
disavauntage
noun, common case,
singular
356
OF disavantage
disadvantage
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
anoper
pronoun indefinite
OE ап+обег
another
lasse
adjective, comparative
degree of litel
OE lalssa
less
pan
conjunction
OE panne
than
i-woned
participle 2 of wonen,
weak verb, class 2
to d o o
verb, infinitive of doon,
anomalous verb
connep
verb, plural, present tense OE cunnan (inf) know
indicative mood of
OE cunnon
connen, preterite-present (present tense plural)
verb
na
negative particle
OE па
ПО
more
adjective, comparative
degree of michel
OE тага
more
can
verb, singular, present
OE cunnan (inf)
tense, indicative mood of OE can (present
connen, preterite-present tense singular)
verb
knows
lift
adjective
OElyft/left
left
heele
noun, common case,
singular
OE hela
heel
fiat
pronoun demonstrative
OE pat
that
harme
noun, common case
OE hearm
harm
for
preposition
OE for
for
hem
pronoun
personal,
3rd person plural,
objective case
OZJhim/heom
them
schulle
verb, plural, present
tense, preterite-present
verb
OE sculan (inf)
have to
OE sculon (present
tense plural)
passe
verb, infinitive of
passe(n), weak verb,
class 2
OF passer
357
wont
(accustomed)
OE don
to d o
pass/pace
PART 3. KEYS
see
noun, common case,
singular
OE sae
sea
travaille
verb, infinitive of
travaill(en), weak verb,
class 2
OF travail lier
travel
landes
noun, common case.
plural
OE land
land
places
noun, common case,
plural
OF place,
L platea
place
Key to Seminars 15,16 & 18
Shakespeare, Hamlet
Hautboys play. The dumb-show enters.
Enter a King and a Queen very lovingly; the Queen
embracing him, and he her. She kneels, and makes show of
protestation unto him. He takes her up, and declines his head
upon her neck: lays him down upon a bank of flowers: she, seeing
him asleep, leaves him. Anon comes in a fellow, takes off his
crown, kisses it, and pours poison in the King's ears, and exit. The
Queen returns; finds the King dead, and makes passionate action.
The Poisoner, with some two or three Mutes, comes in again,
seeming to lament with her. The dead body is carried away. The
Poisoner wooes the Queen with gifts: she seems loath and
unwilling awhile, but in the end accepts his love.
Exeunt
Ophelia What means this, my lord?
Hamlet Marry, this is miching mallecho; it means
mischief.
Oph Belike this show imports the argument of the play.
Enter Prologue
Ham We shall know by this fellow: the players cannot
keep counsel; they'll tell all.
Oph Will he tell us what this show meant?
Ham Ay, or any show that you'll show him: be not you
ashamed to show, he'll not shame to tell you what it
means.
Oph You are naught, you are naught: I'll mark the play.
359
PART 3. KEYS
Prologue
For us, and for our tragedy,
Here stooping to your clemency,
We beg your hearing patiently.
Exit
Ham Is this a prologue, or the posy of a ring?
Oph Tis brief, my lord.
Ham As woman's love.
Enter two Players, King and Queen
Player King Full thirty times hath Phoebus' cart gone round
Neptune's salt wash and Tellus' orbed ground,
And thirty dozen moons with borrow'd sheen
About the world have times twelve thirties been,
Since love our hearts and Hymen did our hands
Unite commutual in most sacred bands.
Player Queen So many journeys may the sun and moon
Make us again count o'er ere love be done!
But, woe is me, you are so sick of late,
So far from cheer and from your former state,
That I distrust you. Yet, though I distrust,
Discomfort you, my lord, it nothing must:
For women's fear and love holds quantity;
In neither aught, or in extremity.
Now, what my love is, proof hath made you know;
And as my love is sized, my fear is so:
Where love is great, the littlest doubts are fear;
Where little fears grow great, great love grows there.
Player King 'Faith, I must leave thee, love, and shortly too;
My operant powers their functions leave to do:
And thou shalt live in this fair world behind,
Honour'd, beloved; and haply one as kind
For husband shalt thou—
360
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
Player Queen 0, confound the rest!
Such love must needs be treason in my breast:
In second husband let me be accurst!
None wed the second but who kill'd the first.
Ham [Aside] Wormwood, wormwood.
Player Queen The instances that second marriage move
Are base respects of thrift, but none of love:
A second time I kill my husband dead,
When second husband kisses me in bed.
Player King I do believe you tliink what now you speak;
But what we do determine oft we break.
Purpose is but the slave to memory,
Of violent birth, but poor validity;
Which now, like fruit unripe, sticks on the tree;
But fall, unshaken, when they mellow be.
Most necessary 'tis that we forget
To pay ourselves what to ourselves is debt:
What to ourselves in passion we propose,
The passion ending, doth the purpose lose.
The violence of either grief or joy
Their own enactures with themselves destroy:
Where joy most revels, grief doth most lament;
Griefjoys, joy grieves, on slender accident.
This world is not for aye, nor 'tis not strange
That even our loves should with our fortunes change;
For 'tis a question left us yet to prove,
Whether love lead fortune, or else fortune love.
The great man down, you mark his favourite flies;
The poor advanced makes friends of enemies.
And hitherto doth love on fortune tend;
For who not needs shall never lack a friend,
And who in want a hollow friend doth try,
361
PART 3. KEYS
Directly seasons him his enemy.
But, orderly to end where 1 begun,
Our wills and fates do so contrary run
That our devices still are overthrown;
Our thoughts are ours, their ends none of our own:
So think thou wilt no second husband wed;
But die thy thoughts when thy first lord is dead.
Играют гобои. Начинается пантомима.
Входят актеры — король и королева; весьма нежно
королева обнимает его, а он ее. Она становится на колени и
делает ему знаки уверения. Он поднимает ее и склоняет
голову к ней на плечо; ложится на цветущий дерн; она, видя,
что он уснул, покидает его. Вдруг входит человек, снимает с
него корону, целует ее, вливает яд в уши королю и уходит.
Возвращается королева, застает короля мертвым и
разыгрывает страстное действие. Отравитель, с двумя
или тремя безмолвными, входит снова, делая вид, что
скорбит вместе с нею. Мертвое тело уносят прочь.
Отрааитель улещивает королеву дарами; вначале она как
будто недовольна и несогласна, но наконец принимает его
любовь.
Все уходят.
Офелия
Что это значит, мой принц?
Гамлет
Это крадущееся малечо, что значит "злодейство".
Офелия
Может быть, эта сцена показывает содержание
пьесы?
Входит Пролог.
Гамлет
Мы это узнаем от этого молодца; актеры не умеют
хранить тайн; они всегда все скажут.
Офелия
Он нам скажет, что значило то, что они сейчас
показывали?
362
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSITION
Гамлет
Да, как и все то, что вы ему покажете; вы не
стыдитесь ему показать, а он не постыдится сказать
вам, что это значит.
Офелия
Вы нехороший, вы нехороший! Я буду следить за
представлением.
Пролог
Пред нашим представлением
Мы просим со смирением
Нас подарить терпением.
(Уходит.)
Гамлет Что это: пролог или стихи для перстня?
Офелия
Это коротко, мой принц.
Гамлет
Как женская любовь.
Входят актеры — король и королева.
Актер-король Се тридцать раз круг моря и земли
Колеса Феба в беге обтекли,
И тридцатью двенадцать лун на нас
Сияло тридцатью двенадцать раз,
С тех пор как нам связал во цвете дней
Любовь, сердца и руки Гименей.
Актер-королева Пусть столько ж лун и солнц сочтем мы
вновь
Скорей, чем в сердце кончится Любовь!
Но только, ах, ты с некоторых пор
Так озабочен, утомлен и хвор,
Что я полна волненья. Но оно
Тебя ничуть печалить не должно;
Ведь в женщине любовь и страх равны:
Их вовсе нет или они сильны.
Мою любовь ты знаешь с юных дней;
Так вот и страх мой соразмерен с ней.
Растет любовь, растет и страх в крови;
Где много страха, много и любви.
363
PART 3. KEYS
Актер-король Да, нежный друг, разлуки близок час;
Могучих сил огонь во мне погас;
А ты на милом свете будешь жить
В почете и любви; и, может быть,
С другим супругом ты...
Актер-королева О, пощади!
Предательству не жить в моей груди,
Второй супруг — проклятие и стыд!
Второй — для тех, кем первый был убит.
Гамлет (в сторону) Полынь, полынь!
Актер-королева Тех, кто в замужество вступает вновь,
Влечет одна корысть, а не любовь;
И мертвого я умерщвлю опять,
Когда другому дам себя обнять,
Актер-король Я верю, да, так мыслишь ты сейчас,
Но замыслы недолговечны в нас.
Подвластны нашей памяти они:
Могуче их рожденье, хрупки дни;
Так плод неспелый к древу прикреплен,
Но падает, когда созреет он.
Вполне естественно, из нас любой
Забудет долг перед самим собой;
Тому, что в страсти было решено,
Чуть минет страсть, забвенье суждено.
И радость и печаль, бушуя в нас,
Свои решенья губят в тот же час;
Где смех, там плач, — они дружнее всех;
Легко смеется плач и плачет смех.
Не вечен мир, и все мы видим вновь,
Как счастью вслед меняется любовь;
Кому кто служит — мудрый, назови:
Любовь ли счастью, счастье ли любви?
364
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
Вельможа пал, — он не найдет слуги;
Бедняк в удаче, — с ним дружат враги;
• И здесь любовь за счастьем вслед идет;
Кому не нужно, тот друзей найдет,
А кто в нужде спешит к былым друзьям,
Тот в недругов их превращает сам.
Но чтобы речь к началу привести:
Дум и судеб столь разнствуют пути,
Что нашу волю рушит всякий час;
Желанья — наши, их конец вне нас;
Ты новый брак отвергла наперед,
Но я умру — и эта мысль умрет.
translated by M.Lozinsky
Phonetic analysis
Changes of spelling and sounds
Word as used
in the text
Old English
trumpet
У
—
sound
—
Middle English
trompet
soun
dumb
[u]
u
show
enter
trumpet
[u]
> [л]
о — a ME spelling device
[u:]
dumbe
New English
replaced by
domb
sound
> [аи]
dumb
[u]
> [л]
[b] lost in NE
о — a ME spelling device
/•<?/. to v. sceaw(ian)
n. shewe
show
[sk1]
> Ш
> Ш
sc replaced by
sn
—
/Vi/entre(n)
enter
unstressed [e] + vocalised [r] > (э]
365
PART 3. KEYS
king
сушпч
[y]
с
queene
embracing
>
replaced by
kyng
cwen
queene
[c:j
>
cw replaced by
[e]
—
queene
> [i:]
qu
»,/ embrace
embrace
la:l
he
her
he
lc:J
hire
decline(s)
>
taken
[a]
с replaced by
[a:] open syllable >
к
inf. declynen
head
his
his
[si
[s]
head
[ea:]
lye(s)
his
head
head
liggen/lyen
of-dflne
—
see(ing)
—
asleep
[aO
down
> Гаи]
bank
> [ж]
flour
flower
[u:] + vocalised [r] > [аиэ]
ou
replaced byow
inf. seon
[c:l
>
banke
[a]
flower(s)
He
a-doune
[u:]
> [u:]
u replaced by
ou/ow
bancke
seen
>
[e:]
on-slsep
asleep
[аг]
> [e:l
x replaced by ec
366
.
> [e] before a dental
consonant
[i:]
down
[ai]
> [z]
> [e:]
inf. Исзеп
take
[ei]
decline
>
[i:l
his
he
[i:l>[i-l
her
[e] + vocalised [r] > |э:]
inf. takan
—
> [ei]
he
> [e:]
her/e
[i]
take(s)
king
[i] (Easl Midland
dialect)
к
see
>
[>:]
asleep
> 11=1
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
leaues
what
meanes
inf. lasfan
[e:]
replaced by
v
hwast
what
[ю]
> [a] after | w]
[hw]
> [hw]
hw replaced by
wh
a? replaced by
a
rnaJnarHinf)
replaced by
зг
bis
01
s]'
j
my
lord
replaced by
mischiefe
belike
impoit(s)
play
we
shall
>
>
leave
fi:]
ea
what
[o]
[w]
mean
>
[i:]
this
> [Щ
> M
th
mm
myn(e)/my
>
hlaford
[a:]
that
[e:]
e/ca
this
> [01
> is]
{i:]
>
menen
>
[SB:]
this
leven
[ж:]
>
ж
f replaced by
>
bset
[i:J
my
>
[ai]
l(h)overd/lord
lord
[o:] + vocalized fr]>
[o:]
that
that
[аз]
> [a]
x replaced by
a
p replaced by
th
>
[ae]
—
mischiefe
mischief
[e:]
>
ПО
rel. /оче-Ис
y-Iich/lik
(be)like
Щ
, . > И
> M
3 replaced by у
с replaced by к
rel. to port
port
[o] + vocalized [r] > [o:]
р!еза
pley/play
play
fe+j]
> [a]
> tei]
3 replaced by у
we
we
we
[e:]
sceal
> [e:]
[ea]
>
[sk1]
>
se replaced by
shal
[a]
Ш
sn
367
> [i:]>|i-]
shall
> fa]
> Ш
PART 3. KEYS
know
cnavvan (inf)
[a:]
>
[kn]
>
с replaced by
knowen
[o:]
[kn]
к
can(not)
can
[a]
keepe
cepan (inf)
keepen
И
> [e:]
с replaced by
к
e • replaced by
ее
all
eal
[ea]
any
гёшз
eni/any
[ar.]
> [e:] > [a]
ae replaced by
a
>
be
beo
[eo:]
be
> fi:]>[i-]
can
> [al
mark
can
> [x]
keep
> [i:]
aValle
all
> [al
before 11 > [o:]
be
> [e:]
(a)sham('d) rel. to scamean (inf) shamen
[a] > [a]
> [a:] open syll.
w
know
> [ou]
> [n]
,
>щ
A
sc replaced by
mearc(ian) (inf)
[ea]
>
с replaced by
any
И
shame
> [ei]
> ш
sh
mark(en)
mark
[a] + vocalized [r] > [a:]
к
our
Ore
our
our
[u:]
> [u:] > [аи] + vocalized [г] >[аиэ]
u replaced by
ou
heere
her
[e:]
hearing
пуппз
[y:]
>
у replaced by
3 replaced by
patiently
,
.
breefe
thirtie
heer
here
> [e:] > (i:] + vocalized [r] > [is]
heringfe)
hearing
[e:] (Kent) > [i:]+ vocalized [r]> [is]
e/ea
g
rel. to patient (adj)
—
prlti3
Yu]
>
p replaced by
3 replaced by
patient(ly)
fa:]
> Ы
[e:]
>
Ltjentl
breer
> IJnt]
brief
[>:]
thritty/bnty
thirty
[i] + vocalized [r] > [e:]
th
у
368
.
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
time(s)
tlma
[i:]
gone
3Ш1
gon(e)
Га:]
> for]
3 replaced by
g
gone
> Го:]
round
—
round
> [аи]
salt
sealt
[ea]
wash
wassc
[se]1
>
[sk ]
>
EC replaced by
sc replaced by
wassh
[a]
after w
Ш
a
sh
wash
> [o]
> Ш
ground
3rund
[u]
>
3 replaced by
u replaced by
ground
[u:] before nd
g
ou
ground
> [аи]
moon(es)
mona
[o:]
scyne
sheene
tyme
> И
time
> [ai]
round
[u:]
salt
> [a]
salt
before И > [о]
mone
> [o:]
shene
1(M
moon
> [u:]>[u]
sheen
№
i iS
about
abutan
[u:]
about(en)
> [u:]
world
woruld
[o]
world(e)
world
> [o] + vocalized [r] > [s:] after w
harts
heorte
[eo]
herte
heart
> [e]
[er] > lar] > [a] + vocalized [r] > [a:]
hand(s)
hand
[a]
hand
> [a]
sacred
•—
band(s)
—
many
mante
many
[a] °
> [a]
3 replaced by
у
369
ret. to sacren (inf)
M
•
band
[a]
> Ё
about
> [аи]
hand
> [аз]
sacred
> [ei]
band
> [as]
many
> [as]
-
PART 3. KEYS
may
sunne
тжз
may
sunne
sonne
[ae+jj
> [ai]
se replaced by
a
3 replaced by
у
may
> [el]
sun
[u]
> [u]
> [л]
u replaced by
о (a ME spelling device)
count
—
counten
[u:]
ore
aer
doone
don
er/or
doon
> [o:]>[u:]>[u]
seoc
seek
[eo:]
> [e:]
с replaced by
к
farre
feor
fer
[eo]
cheere
ere
[ж:]
> [e:] + vocalized [r] > [еэ]
ae replaced by
e
[o:]
sicke
count
> [аи]
done
>
[л]
sick
> [i:] > [i] before к
far
> [e]
[er] > [ar] > [aj + vocalized [r] > la:]
—
cheer
cheer
[e:] > [i:] + vocalized [r] > [is]
former
forma
distrust
—
must
most
[o]
[o:]
feare
hold
dis+trust
[u]
moste/muste
> [o:]> [u:] > [u]
fseran (inf)
former
distrust
>
W
must
> [л]
feren
fear
hoolden
hold
[аг:]
> [e:] > [i:] + vocalized [r] > [ia]
x replaced by
e/ea
healdan (inf)
[ea]
aught
former
> [o] +vocalized [r]> [o:]
unstressed [e] + vocalized [r] > [э]
awiht, aht
>
[a]>[a:]beforeld>[o:]>loul
aughte
[a:+h]
> [au+h]
a replaced by
au
h replaced by
gh
370
aught
> [o:]
.
now
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
nu
now
now
fu:J
> fu:]
u replaced by
ow
made
macode
made
[a]
where
> [аи]
> [a:] open syll.
hwiir
where
doubts
—
doute
grow
3rowan
made
>
[el]
where
[a]
> [e:] + vocalized [r] > [еэ]
[hw]
> [hw]
> fw]
hw replaced by
wh
to:]
3
[u]
replaced by
>
growen
[o:]
g
doubt
> [аи]
b. in NE under the
influence of Lat.
dubitare
>
grow
[ou]
there
peer
se:l
>
'6]
>
i replaced by
a replaced by
ther(e)
[e:] + vocalized [r] > [еэ]
[9]
> [6]
th
e
there
I
1С
I
I
[i] + vocalized [tj> [i:]>[M]
thee
Ы
shortly
scort-llce
1
[sk ]
to
фее
> [i:]
> [6]
short+lich(e)/shortly shortly
> Ш
>Ш
[o]
> [o] +vocalized [r]>
sc replaced by
sh
[o:]
to
too
[o:]
power(s)
thee
e:]
> [e:]
'9]
> [9]
j replaced by
th
—
to
> [o:J
power
> [u:]
power
[u:] > [аи] + vocalized [r] > [аиэ|
do
don
[o:]
doon
> [o:J
371
do
>
[u:l>|u]
PART 3. KEYS
thou
bu
thou
faire
fse3er
fair
u:]
> hi:]
6]
> [9]
) replaced by
th
thou
> [аи]
> (fll
fair
[ге+j]
> [ai] > [ei] + vocalized [r] > [еэ]
ж replaced by
a
3 replaced by
i
behind
be-hindan
behynden
[i]
honour('d)
>
—
[i:] before nd
behind
>
[ai]
honouren
honour
unstressed fu] + vocalized [r] > [э]
[h]lostinNE
one
an
oon
[a:]
kind
cynde
kynde
[i]
husband
> [i:] before nd
hus-bond
> [u]
>
[э]
—
nyde
treason
confound
> [аи]
nede
need
> [i:]
—
treason
> И r ,
tresoun
[e:]
rel. w cursian (inf)
[u]
who
hwa
first
fyrst
wermwod
>
cursen
>
who
first
>
[э]
curse
[u] + vocalized [r] > [e:]
[a:]
> [or]
[hw]
> [hw]
hw replaced by
wh
[y]
wormwood
[л]
[y:l
,
> [e:] (Kent)
у replaced by
e/ee
unstressed [u]
accurst
husband
>
confound(en)
[u]
need(es)
kind
> [ai]
husbonde
Mjr
unstressed [о]
confound
one
> [o:] > [u:] > [wu:] > [wu] > [WA|
>
>
who
[u:]>fu]
[w]
first
,
[i] (East Midland) + vocalized [r] > [W
wormwud
/wermode
wormwood
[o]/[e]+vocalized [r]>|e:]
[o:]
>
372
[u:]
_
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
belieue
be-lyfan
bileven
[v:]
> [e:](Kent)
f replaced by u/v
speake
sprecan
[e]
>
e replaced by
с replaced by
speken
speak
[e:] open syllable > [i!]
e/ea
к
determine
—
determynen
determine
fe] + vocalized [r] > [e:]
slaue
—
slaue/slave
[a:]
birth
(3e)-byrd
birthe
birth
[fj
> [i] + vocalized [r] > [e:]
у replaced by i
poore
—
poore/poure
believe
> [i:]
slave
> [ei]
poor
[o:} > [u:] + vocalized [г] > [из]
which
hwilc
which
which
[hw]
> [hw]
> fw]
hw replaced by wh
vnripe/umipe
un-rlpe
unripe
uraipe
^
[i:] F
> [i:] ^
> [ai] ^
tree
treo
tree
tree
[eo:]
> [e:J
> И
fall
feallan
fallen
fall
[ea]
> [a] before U
> [o]
vnshaken rel. to scacan
shaken
shake
№]
> Ш
> Ш
[a]
> [a:] open syllable > [ei]
sc replaced by sh
с replaced by к
forget
for-xitan
forgeten
forget
[i]
> [ej
> [e]
|j] replaced by [g] irom Sc.
pay
—
payen
pay
fai]
> [ei]
debt
—
dette
debt
[e]
> [ej
h in NE under the
influence of Lai.
debeta
373
PART 3. KEYS
purpose
lose
_____
—
losian
|o]
>
purpos
purpose
fu] + vocalized [r)>
(e:]
losen
lose
[o:] open syllable>
[u:]
griefe
—
their
—
greef
fe:l
faeir
grief
> fi:]
their
owne
азеп
owen
slender
—
c:] +vocalized |r)> [еэ]
0]
> [fll
)
replaced by
ih
[a:+y]
>
3 replaced by
[ou]
w
>
s(c)lendre
own
fou]
slender
unstressed [e] + vocalized [r] > [э]
strange
—
straunge
[au]>la:]
euen
efne
should
scolde
[sk1]
lo]
[e]
>
Г replaced by
>
>
evne/evene
sholde
should
[fl
> (ji
U>:1 before ! d > [ u : ] > f u : ] > [ u l before
a dental cons.
UlloslinNE
—
fortune
change
—
chaungen
[o] + vocalized [r]>
[tjun]
>
[aul>[a:]
—
lead
fortune
[0:1
Itfnl
change
> [el]
questioun
[tju:n]
proue
even
[c:] open syllable > ПО
v
fortunes
question
strange
> [ci]
question
>
|tjn]
profian
proven
fo:] open syllable >
v
[u:]
laidan
leden
lead
[as:l
>
ж replaced by
[e:J
c/ca
[o]
>
f replaced by
374
>
prove
|i:]
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
aduaunc('d)
—
friend(s)
avauncen
[au]
freond
[eo:]
hetherto
—
fiend
> [к]
advance
> [a:]
[d] in NE under the
influence of Latin
friend
> [е]
hider-to
hitherto
fd] > [6] in the vicinity of [r]
neuer
naifre
[se:]
x
f
lacke
never(e)
—
lakken
[a]
want
—
want(e)
[a] after [w]
season(s)
—
order(ly)
—
begunne
never
> [e:]
> [e]
unstressed [e] + vocalized fr] > [э]
replaced by
e
replaced by
v
sesounen (inf)
[e:]
unstressed [u]
lack
> [a]
want
> [o]
season
> [i:]
>
fa]
ordre
order
begun(ne)
begun
[o] +vocalized [r]> [0:1
unstressed [e] + vocalized fr] > [э]
be-чиппеп
[ul
> M
> [л]
[y] replaced by [g] under Scand. influence
3 replaced by
g
mnne
rannfen)
ronn(en)
run
[u]
> [u]
> [л]
u replaced by
о (a ME spelling device)
deuise(s)
—
devys
№
ouerthrowne
ofer-ferawan
[o]
f
p
thought(s)
. overthrow
> [o:] open syllable > [po]
unstressed [e] + vocalized fr] > [э]
[a:]
>
to:]
>
]oul
replaced by
v
replaced by
th
boht
fo+h']
p
h
over-throwen
device
> [ai]
replaced by
replaced by
tliought
> louhf
lh
gh
375
thought
> [o:J
PART
•
3. KEYS
thy
bin
thyn(e)/thy
i]
> [i:J open syllable >
;в]
> [в]
>
) replaced by
th
thy
[ai]
[б]
Grammatical and etymological analysis
Words
as used
in
text
in the
the text
Analysis
notes
Ethymology,
Ethyvnology,
prototype
Corresponding
Corresponding
NEword,
NEword,
translation
translation
the
article, definite
OE se, seo, paet;
ME pat / that
the
trumpets
noun, genitive case,
plural
ME trompette,
OF trompette
trumpet(S)
sounds
noun, common case,
plural
ME soun; OF soun
sound(s)
(oboes play)
dumbe
adjective
OE dumb; ME domb
dumb
show
noun, common case,
singular
ME sheue, rel. to
OE sceawian (v);
ME shaven (v)
show
followes
verb, present tense,
rd
3 person, singular
of
OE fokian, weak, 2;
ME followen
follow
enter
verb, present tense,
ME entren weak, 2;
plural of enter
OFentrer
a
article, indefinite
OE an; ME a/an
a
king
noun, common case,
OE суш'пз; ME kyng
king
follow(s)
(The dumb
show enters}
enter
singular
and
conjunction
OE and; ME and
and
queene
noun, common case,
singular
OE cwen; ME queen
queen
(actors playtnS
the roles of tlU
King and the
Queen)
376
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
the queene absolute participial
ME embracen, weak, 2; the queen
embracing construction
OFembracer
embracing
(nominative with
participle I) of embrace
him
pronoun personal,
objective case,
У* person, singular,
masculine
OE him, hire; ME him
him
he
pronoun personal,
nominative
case,
3rd person, singular,
masculine
OE he; ME he
he
her
pronoun personal,
objective case,
3™ person, singular,
feminine
OE hire; ME her(e)
her
takes
verb,
present tense,
3rd person, singular
of take
OE takan, str. 6;
ME taken
take
vp
adverb
OE up, upp; ME up
declines
verb,
present tense,
3rd person, singular
of decline
ME declynen,
OF decliner;
L declmare
up (raises her
from the knees)
decline
his
.pronoun
possessive,
3rd person, singular,
masculine
OE his; ME his
his
head
noun, common case,
OE heafod; ME heed
head
upon
singular
Vpon
preposition
OE uppon; ME upon
песке
noun, common case
case, singular
verb,
present tense,
3rd person, singular
of he
adverb
OE hnecca; ME nekke neck (on her
shoulder)
OE Нсзап, str. 5;
lie
ME lyen
lyes
downe
bancke
of
noun, common case,
singular
preposition
OE of-dune;
down
ME a-doune
ME banke, OSc banke bank (bed)
OE of; ME of
377
of
-—
PART 3. KEYS
flowers
noun, common case,
plural
ME flour; OF flour;
L florem, ace. o/flos
flower(s)
she
pronoun personal,
nominative
case,
3rd person, singular,
feminine
OE heo; ME he/she
she
seeing
verb, participle 1
of see
OE seon, sir. 5;
ME seen
seeing
asleepe
adjective
OE on-slEep;
ME on sleep, asleep
asleep
leaues
verb, present tense,
3"1 person, singular
of leave
OE liefan, weak, ) ;
ME leven
leave(s)
what
pronoun interrogative
OE hwast, ME what
what
meanes
verb,
present tense,
3"1 person, singular
of mean
OE тгёпап, weak, I;
ME menen
rnean(s)
this
pronoun demonstrative OE fcis; ME this
my
pronoun possessive,
l sl person, singular
OE mTn; ME myn(e)/my my
lord
noun, common case,
singular
OE hlaford; ME lord
marry
interjection
ME marie
this
lord С " 7 ^
does it mean,
my lordO
ME%(ano$
by St.Mary)
munching
verb, participle 1
ofmiche
ME mychen, weak;
OFmuchier
munching
(now dial.skulking,
|
stealing up to)
mallico
noun proper, common
case
OF malice; L malicia
malice
it = that
conjunction
OEpset
that
mischiefe
noun, common case,
singular
modal word
ME meschief;
OF meschief
rel. to OE зе-lic, adj.;
ME y-lich
mischief
belike
378
belike
(probably,
evidently)
_
show
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
noun, common case.
singular
rel. to OE sceawian,
weak, 2; ME shewen
show
/vShowen
imports
verb,
present tense,
3rd person, singular
of import
rel. to OF porter,L portare
import(s)
argument
noun, common case,
singular
noun, common case,
singular
pronoun
personal,
Is1 person plural,
nominative case
ME argument;
OF argument
OE р!еза,- ME pley
/play
OE we; ME we
argument
(plot)
play
Shall
verb,
future tense,
I s1 person, indicative
mood of know
by
preposition
OE sculan (inf), sceal shall know
(pres. sing.), pret.-pres.,
ME shal;
OE cnawan, strong, 7;
ME knowen
OE bl; ME by
by (from)
fellow
noun, common case,
singular
ME fellawe; rel. to
Sc felagi
fellow
players
noun, common case,
plural
rel. to OE pje3ian,
weak,2; ME playen
player(s)
(actors)
cannot
verb, modal + negative OE cunnan (inf), can
can+not
(pres. sing.), pret.-pres.,;
ME can
verb, infinitive
OE cepan, weak, 2;
keep
of keep
MJSkepen
(secrets)
pronoun personal,
OB hie; ME they
they
3 rd person plural,
nominative case
play
we
keepe
they
'11 tell
verb, future tense,
rd
we
OE willan, anom. verb; (they)'ll tell
(=will tell) 3 person, indicative
mood of tejl
ME will;
OE tellan, weak, 1 irreg.;
ME tellen
all
pronoun indefinite
OE eal; M E al/alle
all
VS
pronoun
personal,
nti
2 person plural,
objective case
OE us; ME us
US
379
PART 3. KEYS
meant
verb, past tense,
indicative mood
of mean
OE msnan, weak, I;
ME menen
meant
I (yea)
particle
0 £ зёа; M£ ye
уел (yes)
any
pronoun indefinite
OE аётз; ME any
any
you
pronoun
personal,
2nd person,
nominative case
OE eow; ME you
you
will show
verb,
future tense,
2 nJ person,
indicative mood
of show
OE willan, anom. verb; will show
ME will
OE sceawian, weak, 2;
ME showen
be
verb, infinitive
OE beon, beo (imper.); be
ME been, be (imper.)
not
negative particle
OE na-wiht; ME not
not
asham'd
adjective
rel. to OE scamian,
weak, 2; ME shamen
ashamed
(don't be
ashamed)
he'll
heel© =
pronoun personal,
OE he; ME he
hee( 1)= (he 3 rd person singular,
will)
masculine, nominative
case
shame
verb, infinitive
OE scamian, weak, 2;
ME shamen
OE wesan (inf), earon
/ar (pres. tense),
suppletive; ME am
shame
(be ashamed)
are
are
verb, present tense,
plural of be
naught
adjective
rel to OE na-wiht;
ME naught
naught
(naughty)
Tie t
= I( 11)
pronoun
personal,
1sl person singular,
nominative case
OE ic; ME icIiA
1('Щ
(shall)
mark
verb,
future tense,
l s l person, indicative
mood of mark
preposition
OE mearcian, weak, 2; mark
MEmarken
(see, watcti)
OE for; ME for
tor
pronoun possessive,
l s l person plural
OE fire; ME our
our
for
our
380
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
tragedie
noun, common case
OE tragedie;
tragedy
ME tragedie
heere
adverb
OE her; ME heer
here
Stooping
verb, participle I
OE stupian, weak, 1;
Stooping
of stoop
ME stoupen
to
preposition
OE to; ME to
your
pronoun possessive,
2nd person
noun, common case,
singular
verb, present tense,
plural, indicative
mood of beg
verb, gerund/verbal
noun of hear
OE eower; ME your(e) your
clemencie
begge
heaiing
to
L dementia
clemency
ME beggen, weak, 2;
OF begger, noun
beg
rel. to OE hyran,
weak 1, or OE hyrin3,
noun; ME hering(e),
noun
hearing
patiently
adverb
rel. to ME patient,
adjective, OF patient,
L patens, noun
patiently (we
beg that you
hear patiently)
is
verb, present tense,
3lJ person singular
of be
OE wesan, infinitive;
OE is; ME is
is
posie
noun, common case,
singular
ME poesie=poete;
OF poesie=poete;
L poeta
poesy (motto,
short
inscription)
ring
noun, common case,
singular
OE hnny, ME ryng
ring
tis = it is
breefe
it is
adjective
ME breef; OF brief;
brief
L brevis
as
conjunction
OE eal-swa; ME as
as
WOmans
noun, genitive case,
singular
noun, common case,
singular
OEwTf-ma'n;
ME womman
OE Iufu
WOman('s)
loue
381
love
_____——
PART 3. KEYS
full
adjeclive
OEM; MEM
full
thirtie
numeral cardinal
OE bri-Пз; ME thritty
/pirty
thirty
times
noun, common case,
plural
OE tTma; ME tyme
time(s)
hath gone
verb, present perfect
perfect of go
OE habban, weak, 3;
has gone
ME haven; OE 3§n (inf);
ME goon (inf)
Phebus
noun proper, genitive
= Phoebus case, singular"
L Phoebus
Phoebus( s)
cart
noun, common case,
singular
OE crat; rel. to
OSc kartr
cart
round
adverb/preposition
round
Neptunes
noun proper, genitive
rel. to ME round, adj.,
OF roont
L Neptunus
Neptune( S)
case, singular
salt
adjective
OE sealt; ME salt
salt
wash
noun, common case,
singular
noun proper, common
case, singular
adjective
OE wsesc; ME wassh
L Tellus
wash
(waters)
Tellus
OF orbe; L orbis
orbed
ground
noun, common case,
singular
OE srund; ME ground ground
,
(Tellus - barm
in Roman
mythology)
dosen
noun, common case,
singular
noun, common case,
plural
ME dosayn
dozen
OE mona; ME mone
moon(s)
rel. to OE borgian,
weak, 2; ME borwen
rel. to OE scyne, adj.;
ME shene, adj.
borrow(ed)
sheene
adjective / participle 2
of borrow
noun, common case,
singular
about
preposition
OE abutan;
ME abouten
Tellus
orb'd
moones
boiTOwed
382
Sheen
about
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
world
noun, common case,
singular
haue beene verb, present perfect
OE woruld; ME worlde world
OE habban (inf);
have been
of be
OEbeon(inf)
twelue
numeral, cardinal
OE twelf; ME twelve
since
conjunction
OE si65an; ME sith(e) since
halts
noun, common case,
OE heorte; ME herte
plural
noun, proper, common L Hymen
case, singular
verb, past tense,
L Qmt
indicative mood
of unite
Hymen
did unite
hands
comutuall
noun, common case,
plural
adjective
twelve
heart(s)
Hymen
(did) unite
OE hand; ME hond
hand(s)
F com-; OF -mutuel;
L mutuus
mutual (since
love united our
hearts and
Hymen - our
hands)
most
adjective / pronoun,
superlative degree
of much
OE maest; ME moost
most
sacred
adjective
sacred
bands
noun, common case,
rel to ME sacren,
weak, 2; OF sacrer
ME band, Sc band
band(s)
plural
so
adverb
OE swa; ME so
SO
many
adjective
QE т а т з ; ME many
many
ioumeyes
noun, common case,
plural
verb, present tense,
of may
ME journee;
journey(s)
OF journee
OE ma^an (inf), та?з
may
(pres. sing.), pret-pres.,
ME may
noun, common case,
singular
OE sunne; ME sonne
may
sunne
383
sun
PART
•
3. KEYS
make
verb, infinitive
OE macian, weak, 2;
ME maken
count
verb, infinitive
ME counten, weak, 2
OF corner;
Lcomputare
count
(max the Sun
and the Moon
make us count
again as many
journeys)
ore
conjunction
OE sr; ME er/or
ere (before)
ere=our
be
doone
= done
woe
make
our
verb, present tense,
OE bion (inf); OE beo be
subjunctive, singular
(pres. subj. sing.)
of be
verb, participle 2 of do OE don (inf), anom.
done
verb; OE зе-don
(part. 2); ME doon (inf);
ME y-doon (part. 2)
noun, common case,
OE wa, ME wo
singular
interjection (phrasal unit)
woe is me!
sicke
adjective
OE seoc; ME seek
sick
late
adjective
OE last; ME lat
late
farre
adjective
OE feor; ME fer
far
from
preposition
OE Mm; ME
cheere
noun, common case,
ME cheer; OF chere
(woe) is
woe
me
from
from
cheer
singular
our=your
former
State
distrust
our
adjective
noun, common case,
singular
verb, present tense
of distrust
OE forma; ME former
OF estat, L statum
former
State
ME dis- + trust, помп, distrust
re/ to OSc traust, «сия (/a/» vwmed
about you)
yet
adverb
0£3lt; ME yet
384
yet
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
though
conjunction
OE beah; ME though
though
discomfort
verb, infinitive
of discomfort
ME disconforten, weak, discomfort
2; OF desconforter
nothing
pronoun indefinite
OE nan-Ьтз;
ME no-thing
must
verb, present tense
of must
OE mot, most (past),
must (it must
pret.-pres.,; ME moot, not discomfort
most(e), must (past)
you, milord)
women
noun, common case,
plural
OE wTf-men;
ME wommen
women
feare
verb, present tense,
OE fSran, weak, I;
fear
nothing
indicative mood of fear ME feren (inf)
too
adverb
OE to; ME to
much
adverb
OE micle; ME much(el) much
euen
adverb
OE efne; ME even(e)
loue
verb, present tense,
OE lufian; ME loven
indicative mood of love
womens
noun, genitive case,
plural
OE wff-manna;
ME wommen(e)s
feare
noun, common case,
singular
OE iaer; ME
hold
verb, present tense,
OE healdan, strong, 7; hold
indicative mood of hold ME heold(en)
quantitie
noun, common case,
singular
°
ME quantitee;
OF quantite
quantity
{correspond to
each other)
eyther
conjunction
OE a»3-hwa26er;
either
J
too
feer
even
love (women
fear as much as
they love)
women('s)
fear
ME either
none
pronoun, negative
OE nan; ME noon
none
neither
conjunction
neither
aught
pronoun
QE пе+гБз-hwaeaer;
ME neither
OE a-wiht; aht;
ME aht, aght, aught
ь
385
aught
(anything)
/'ЛДГ J. KEYS
extremitie noun, common case,
singular
ME cxtremyiee;
OF extremite
extremity
(both fear
and love are
extreme)
now
adverb
OE nu; ME now
now
proofe
noun, common case,
singular
ME prove; OF preuve
proof
hath made
verb, present perfect
oi make
OE macod. pan.2;
ME made
has made
know
verb, infinitive
OE cnawan;
ME knowen
know
(you А/юн'
the proof of it)
ciz'd = siz'd verb, participle 2
of size
ME (a)ssis(en), vrraA',2; size(d)
/r/. /« OF assisen
(my fear is me
size of my love)
where
adverb
OE hwSr; M£ wher(e)
where
great
adjective
OE згёа1; ME greet
great
litlest
adjective, superlative
degree of UteJ.
noun, common case,
plural
0Z? lytel, ISscst (snperl. least
degree); ME litel, lestc (smallest)
ME doute; OF doute doubt(s)
doubts
grow
verb, present tense,
OE 3rowan, strong, 7;
plural, indicative mood ME growen
of grow
grow
gl'OWes
verb, present tense,
3'd person, singular
of grow
see above
grow(s)
there
adverb
OE \жг\ ME ther, thar
there
faith
noun, common case,
ME fcith; OF fcid;
L (Ides
faith (excl.: by
my faith!)
thee
OE f)e, pec; ME thee
thee
Shortly
pronoun
personal,
2"d person singular,
objective case
adverb
О £ scort-lice;
ME shortly
shortly
to
adverb
OE 16; ME to
too
operant
adjective
L operant
operant
(effective)
386
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
powers
noun, common case,
plural
ME power; OF poeir
/pouer
power(s)
functions
noun, common case,
plural
F foriclion; L functio
fimction(s)
(my body will
stop doing its
functions)
thou
pronoun personal,
2"d person singular,
nominative case
OE pii; ME thou
thou
Shalt
verb, modal
OE sculan (inf), sceait shall
(pres. tense, 2"d person),
pret.-pres.
liue
verb, infinitive
OE libban, weak, 3;
live
ME liven
faire
adjective
OE fa^er; ME f air
fail-
behind
adverb
honour'd
verb, participle 2
of honour
verb, participle 2
of love
OE be-hindan;
ME be-hynden
ME honour(en),
weak, 2; OF honorer
rel. to OE lufian,
weak, 2; ME loven
behind (after
I'm gone)'
honour(ecft
adjective
rel. to ME hap, noun;
belou'd
haplv
J
^
beloved
(probably)
OSchapp
one
numeral, cardinal
OE an; ME oon
one
kind
adjective
OE cynde; ME kynde
kind
for
husband
preposition
noun, common case,
singular
0jEfor;MEfor
OE hus-bond;
ME husbonde;
OSc htisb.6ndi
for
husband
(honoured,
beloved and
probably
someone as
kind as I am
for a husband
'you'll...)
confound
verb, imperative mood
of confound
ME confounden,
F confondrc,
L confundcre
confound
387
weak, 2; ME cursen
(let me oe
cursed if I
marry a second
husband)
wed
verb, subjunctive
mood of wed
OE weddian, weak, 1;
ME wedden
wed
who
pronoun, interrogative
/ indefinite / relative
OE hwa; ME who
who
kild
verb, past tense,
indicative mood of кШ
OE cyllan, weak, 1;
ME killen
kill(ed)
first
numeral, ordinal
OE fyrst, adjective;
ME
first
first (let no
one wed the
second
husband but
she who killed
the first one)
w o r m w o o d noun, common case,
singular
OE wermwod;
wormwood
ME wermode (corrupted
form), wormwud
instances
noun, common case,
plural
ME instaunce;
OF instance
instance(s)
(motives,
reasons)
marriage
noun, common case,
singular
ME manage;
OF mariage
marriage
388
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
moue
verb, present tense,
indicative mood
of move
ME mov(en), weak, 2;
OF movoir
base
adjective
ME bas; OF bas
base
respects
noun, common case,
plural •
ME respect;
OF respect
respect(s)
thrift
noun, common case,
singular
ME thrift; OSC priu
thrift ('tonconsiderations
when
adverb
OE hwanne/hwaenne;
ME whan(ne)
when
kisses
verb, present tense,
OE cyssan, weak, 1;
3rd person, singular,
ME kissen
indicative mood of kiss
kiss(es)
bed
noun, common case,
singular
OE bed; ME bed
/bedde
bed
see above
do
believe
doe=do
move
belieue
verb, present tense,
indicative mood
of believe
OE be-Iyfan, weak, I;
ME bileven
thinke
verb, present tense,
indicative mood
of think
OE jbencan, weak, 1,
think
irregular; ME thynken
Speake
verb, present tense,
indicative mood
of speak
OE sprecan, strong, 5; speak
ME speken
determine
verb, present tense,
indicative mood
of determine
ME determynen,
determine
weak, 2; OF determiner,
Ldeterminare
oft
adverb
OE oft; ME oft/often
oft/often
breake
verb, present tense,
indicative mood
of break
noun, common case,
singular
OE brecan, strong, 4;
ME breken
break
ME purpos;
OF pourpos;
L propositum
purpose
purpose
slaue
noun, common case,
singular
ME sclaue; OF esclave; slave
5c sclyaff; L sclavus
389
PART 3. KEYS
memorie
noun, common case,
ME mcnioric;
singular
OF memorie; L memoria
violent
adjective
ME violent'; OF violent violent
birth
noun, common case,
singular
pOOre
adjective
validitie
noun, common case,
singular
OE зе-byrd; ME birlhe birth (which Ь
bornmorm
full of life)
ME povre/poure;
poor
OF povre
F validite; L validitas
validity (hWis
"
short-lived)
which
pronoun, relative
OE hvvile; ME which
like
adjective
OE зе-llc; ME y-lich, lik like
fruite
noun, common case,
singular
adjective
ME fruit; OF fruit;
ftuit
L fructus
OE un-ripe; ME unripe unripe
vnripe
memory,
which
sticks
verb,
present tense,
OE stician, weak, 2;
3"1 person, singular,
ME stiken
indicative mood of stick
stick(s)
tree
noun, common case,
singular
tree
fall
vnshaken
verb, present tense,
OE feallan, strong, 7;
indicative mood of fail .ME fallen
adjective / participle 2 OE ип+зе-scacen;
of shake
OE sc'acan, strong, 6;
ME shaken
mellow
adjective
ME mclwe, rel. to
OE melu, noun
bee
verb, present tense,
subjunctive mood,
plural of be
OE beon (inf/prps.
be
subj. plural); ME been
necessary
adjective
ME ncccssarie;
OF neccssaire
forget
verb, present tense,
indicative mood
«f JoEggt
OE Гог-зу1ап, strong, 5; forget
OSc gefen;
(we most
ME (brgeten
necessarily
OE trco; ME tree
390
fall
unshaken
mellow
(ripe)
necessary
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
Ю pay
verb, infinitive
ourselues
pronoun,
debt
noun, common case,
singular
noun, common case,
singular
verb, present tense,
indicative mood
of propose.
passion
propose
reflexive
forge))
ME payen, weak l/2\ to pay
Ofpaier
' J
OE Ore+self(ves);
ourselves
ME ourselves
ME deile; OF dette;
debt
С dt'bita
ME passioun;
passion
OF passion; L passio
F proposer;
propose
£ pro+poser
(promise,
propose to do)
ending
verb, participle I of e_nd_( OE endian, weak, 2;
' ME enden
(the passion absolute predicative
ending)
construction (nominative
with the participle)
ending
doth
verb, present tense,
3"1 person, singular,
indicative mood of do
OE don, anomal. verb; do(es)
ME doon
lose
verb, present tense,
indicative mood of Josg
noun, common case,
singular
OE losian, weak, 1;
ME losen
ME violence;
OF violence;
t. violcntia
noun, common case,
singular
noun, common case,
singular
pronoun possessive,
3rd person plural
adjective
ME greef; OF gref,
grief
(taj.; L gravis
Af£joyc;0Fjoie;
joy
l> gauqia
OE hira/heara;
their
ME beir(e); OSc pejra
OE азеп; ME ovven
own
violence
griefe
юу
their
owne
lose
violence
(the extremes)
ennactures noun, common case,
plural
rel, to ME enacten,
verb
themselues pronoun, reflexive
ME beim/them+sclves; themselves
OSc peim
enactments
PART 3. KEYS
destroy
verb, present tense,
indicative mood
ME destroyen;
OF deslruire
destroy
(prevent mem
destroy then')
reuels
verb, present tense,
ME revelen, weak, 2
3 rJ person, singular,
OF reveler
indicative mood of revel
lament
noun, common case,
singular
ioyes
verb,
present tense,
ME joyen, weak, 2;
3rf person, singular,
OF jour
indicative mood of joy
joy(s)
griefes
verb, present tense,
ME greven, weak, 2;
3rd person, singular,
OF grever; L gravare
indicative mood of grieve
grieve(s)
slender
adjective
ME s(c)lendre;
OF esclendre
slender
accedent
noun, common case,
singular
ME accident;
OF accident
aye
adverb
ME ay; OSC ei/ey
nor
conjunction
ПОГ (and)
strange
adjective
euen
adverb
loues
noun, common case,
plural
noun, common case,
plural
OE na-hw—per;
ME nor
ME straunge;
OF estrange;
L extraneus
OE efne; ME evne
/evene
OE lufu; ME love
ME fortune;
OF fortune; L fortiina
fortune(s)
fortunes
should
change
revel(S)
rel. to F lamenter, verb lament
a
Fcid&^ohtest
(by a *Wm
chance)
.tyffijg*'
Strange fjjj
no wonder)
even
love(s)
verb, subjunctive mood OE scolde (past subj.)\ should
of change
MEsholde
change
ME chaungen, weak, 2;
OF changier
392
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
question
left
to proue
lead
noun, common case,.
singular
verb, participle 2
of leave
ME questioun;
question
OF question
OE lsefan, weak, 1;
left
OE laft (part. 2); ME left
verb, infinitive
OE profian, weak, 2;
ME proven
verb, present tense,
OE ljedan, weak, !;
indicative mood of lead ME leden
to prove
lead
els=else
adverb
OE elles; ME elles/els
else
downe
adverb
OE of-dune;
ME a-doune
down (when
a great man
gets down,
becomes
a nobody)
fauourite
noun, common case,
singular
verb, present tense,
3"1 person, singular,
indicative mood of fly
jF/avorit
favourite
OE йёозап, strong, 2;
MEflyen
fly (leave him)
flyes
poore
noun (substantivised
adjective)
aduaunc'd. verb, subjunctive mood
of advance
ME povre/poure, adj.; poor
OF povre
ME avauncen, weak, 2; advance(d)
OF avancer
(if the poor
advanced, had
luck)
makes
verb,
present tense,
OE macian, weak, 2;
3"1 person, singular,
ME maken
indicative mood of make
friends
noun, common case,
plural
OE freond; ME trend
friend(s)
enemies
noun, common case,
plural
ME enemy; OF enemi
enemy(-ies)
hetherto
adverb
ME hider-to
=hitherto.
tend
verb, present tense,
ME tendcn, weak, 2;
indicative mood of tend OF lendre
393
make(s)
hitherto
tend (love
depends on
fortune)
I'AIif J. KEYS
needes
verb, present tense,
OE nydan, weak, I;
3rd person, singular,
ME neden
indicative mood of need
neuer
adverb
OE nsfre; ME never(e) never
lacke
verb, infinitive
ME lakken, weak, 2
want
ME want(e); OSc vant want
hollow
noun, common case,
singular
adjective
try
verb, infinitive
directly
adverb
seasons
verb,
present tense,
3rd person, singular,
indicative mood
of season
orderly
adjective
to end
bcgunne
wills
fates
contrary
ret. to OE holh, noun:
ME \\o\ow, adj.
ME tryen, weak, 2;
OF traer
rei. to ME direct, adj.;
OF direct
ME sesounen;
OF satsonner
need(s){u7w
is not in need)
lack
hollow
(false)
try
directly
season(s)
(finds)
ret. to ME brdre, noun; orderly
OF ordre
verb, infinitive
OE cndian, weak, 2;
to end
ME cnden
verb, participle 2 (used 0 £ be-3innan;
begun
as past tense)of begin ME bcgynnen;
(began)
OE be-3unnen;
ME bcgunne
nouri; common case,
plural
noun, common case,
plural
adjective
runne=run verb, infinitive
#!£wi!la;MEwillc
will(s)
ME fate; OF fat;
fate(s)
L falum, '
ME contrarie;
contrary
OF contrarie
OE rinnan, strong, 3; run
ME rinnen; ME ronncn,
part. 2
dcuiscs
noun, common case,
plural
Ate devys; OF devis
device(s)
(plans)
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
Still
adverb
.<>£stille;M£sliIIe
Still
(constantly)
are ouertnrowne
verb, passive vpice,
present tense; plural"
of overthrow
OE ofcr+branan,
strong, 7; ME overihrowen
are over
thrown
thoughts
noun, comrnpn ease,
plural
()£t>ohl/3e-poht:
ME thought
thought(s)
ours
pronoun possessive,
Is'person plural
OE fire; ME ours
ours
ends
noun, common case,
plural
QE ende; ME ende
'"
end(s) (their
ends are not
ours)
wilt wed
verb, future tense,
2"a person, singular
of wed
QE willan, anonu verb; will wed
OE wilt ipres. sine.);
ЩЕ willen, ME wilt
^° a person, pres. sing.)
die
verb, present tense,
indicative mood of die
ME deyen/dicn, went; die
OSc deyja
%
pronoun possessive,
2"" person singular
, (?£ bin; /WE thyn(e)
/thy
thy
Key to Seminar 20
Shakespeare, Sonnet
Свой факел уронив, красавец Купидон
Заснул. Одна из дев Дианы подхватила
Огонь любви и вмиг светильник опустила
В холодный ключ воды, но не погас там он.
Из пламени любви священный ключ мгновенно
Впитал бессмертный жар на вечные года,
И стала для людей целительна вода
От злобных болестей, жестоких, как измена.
Зажегши факел вновь от глаз, любимых мною,
Для пробы мальчик им меня коснулся вдруг.
Я исцеленья ждал душой моей больною
От теплых вод, куда тянул меня недуг,
Но исцеленья нет. Ключ животворный льется
В очах возлюбленной, где пламя вновь смеется.
Translated by /L Fyodtirov
Phonetic analysis
Changes of spelling and sounds
Word as used
in the text
Old English
Word as used
in the text
laid
by
New English
Middle English
Changes of spelling and sounds
•
1
Old English
1езёе
1
Middle English
leide
[e] + vocalized [y]> [el]
ез replaced by
ei/ai
be
by
[i:]
>
i replaced by
[i:l
у
•
New English
>
laid
[el]
by
> [ai]
" "
•
his
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
his
Is]
brand
brand
[a]
and
brand
>
and
M
and
> [a]
> [в]
fell
fell
feoll
[eo]
his
> И
brand
> [a]
und
[a]
fell
his
> [s]
> [e:] shortened before Д>[е]
asleep
onslSpe
[o]
>
[as]
>
эг replaced by
asieep/aslepe
И
[e:]
ее
maid
mae3den
mayde(n)
[x] + vocalized fy]> [ai]
щ replaced by
ay
maid
> [el]
this
bis
[8]
(his
> [6]
advantage
—
this
> [9]
asleep
> M
> DO
avauntage
advantage
[au]
> fa:]
d on analogy with Lat. ad; (prefix)
found
fund(on)
found
[u]
> [u:] before nd
u replaced by
ou
love
lufti
love
[u]
> [u]
[u]
>
[e]
u replaced by
о
f replaced by
v
fire
steep
quicidy
found
> [аи]
fyr
fir
—
stepe
[«]>
quykly
love
> W
lost in NE
fi^3
[y:]
> [i:] + vocalized [r]> [аю]
у replaced by
i
cwic+Ece
- lice
> . - ly
cw replaced by
qu
с replaced by
k/ck
397
steep
m
quickly
_____——
PART 3. KEYS
cold
cald (Merc),
ceald (WS)
cold
[eaj>[a]>[a:]beforeld>l°:]
cold
> l° u l
that
past
[as]
>
[0]
>
p replaced by
sc replaced by
that
[a]
[9]
th
a
that
> [tc]
> [fl]
ground
31-und
[u]
>
3 replaced by
u replaced by
ground
[u:J before nd
g
ou
ground
> [аи]
which
hwile
[hw]
which
> [hw]
which
> [w]
fk'l
> ftf] •
> Ufl
hw replaced by
с replaced by
holy
ШИз
wh
ch
holy
holy
M
> [o:]
i3 replaced by у
> lou]
dateless
—
dateless
> [ei]
heat
hsltu
hete
[«:]
> [e:]
ш replaced by e/ea
heat
> [i:l
seething
seo5an •
sethen
|eo:J
> [e:]
9 replaced by th
seething
> [i:]
bath
Ьж5
№
>
ш replaced by
5 replaced by
bath
> [a:]
prove
profean
proven
[o:]
> [o:]
f replaced by
v
strange
—
date+less
[a:]
bath
[a]
a
th
prove
> [u:]
Straunge
strange
[au]> [a:]
> [el]
au
replaced by a
398
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
my
mm
[i:J
eye
myn(e)/my
my
> [':]
ёазе
>
eye/ye
eye
lca:l
> [c:]>[i:]
3 replaced by
у
for
for/fore
[o]
> [ai]
for
for
> | o ] +vocalized [r]> [o:]
needs
nyd/ned
need
|y:]>|e:](A'cw;> fe:]
would
wolde
toudh
—
[o]
need(s)
> M
wolde
would
> [o:] before Id > [u:] > [u] before a
dental consonant
[I] lost in N13
о replaced by
ou
touchen
[ul
breast
fai]
breost
[eo:l
touch
> [л]
bresl
> fc:]
Г
ic
desired
[i] + vocalized (Ш> I'M
desiren
thither
bider
breast
> IeJ
I
1
[i:] +vocalized [r]>
laio]
thider
thilher
> [0]
fei
> №
desire(d)
>
c
[^
[d] in the vicinity of lr] > [o]
p
hied
sad
replaced by
hi3ede
th
hyede
hie(d)
[i] + vocalized [y]>[i:]
3 replaced by
y/i
>
saed
[ю]
sad
> №
x
replaced by
sad(e)
> Ы
a
394
Ш
PART
.
3. KEYS
where
hwser
got
333t
[se]
[se:]
>
[hw]
>
hw replaced by
аг replaced by
wher(e)
where
[e:] +vocalized |ii> [еэ]
[hw]
> fw]
wh •
e
gat
> [a]>[a:]>[o:]
got
> [o] before a
dental consonant
[3I
> [gl from OSc.
3 replaced by g
Grammatical and etymological analysis
Words
as used
in the text
Analysis
notes
OE or foreign prototype
Corresponding
NE word,
translation
Cupid
noun proper
Lat Cupldo, CupidonTs
Cupid
(Veiws's son)
v
laid
verb, past tense OE 1есзап (inf.) weak, I;
OE legae (past tense, sing.);
ME leide (past tense)
laid
by
adverb
OE be; ME be/by
by
his
pronoun
possessive,
rd
3 person,
singular
OE his (pronoun personal,
3"'person, sing., masculine,
genitive case); ME his
(pronoun possessive)
his
brand
noun, common
case, singular
conjunction
OE brand; ME brand
brand
(torch, flare)
and
and
OE and; ME and
fell
verb, past tense OE feallan (inf.) strong, 7;
OE feoll (past tense, sing.);
MEM]
fell
asleep
adjective
asleep
OE onslffipe; ME asleep
/aslepe
a
art. indefinite
OE an; ME a/an
400
a
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION ,
maid
noun, common
OE madden; ME mayde(n)
case, singular
maid
•
(priestess)
Of
prep.
0£of
.Of
Dian's
noun proper,
genitive case
L Diana
this
pronoun
demonstrative
noun, common
case, singular
OE pis (pronoun demonst,
sing., neuter); ME this
ME avauntage; OF a vantage
Diane's
(Jupiter's
daughter)
this
advantage
found
lovekmdling
fire
verb, past tense OE findan (inf.) strong, 3;
OE fond; Affifand
adjective
OE lufu; MElove
(composite)
ME kindel (inf.) rel. to
OSc kynd-a
advantage
found
lovekindling
did steep
noun, common OEfyrjMEfir
case
verb, past tense OE don (inf.) anom. verb;
OE dyde; ME dide
ME stepe rel. to OE stiepan
did steep
quickly
adverb
quickly
h
preposition
cold
OE chid (Merc), сеа\д(Щ);'
Afficold
noun, composite, ME valeie; OF valee
common case, ME fontayne; OF fontaine;
singular
L fontana
valleyfountain
that
ground
which
borrow'd
rel. to OE cwic (adverb)
(+lfce);AEBqUyk(+ly>
OE in
adjective
pronoun
OE bset (se, seo); ME that
demonstrative
noun, common OE 3iund; ME ground
case
pronoun relative QShwilc; ME which
verb, past tense OE bor3ian (inf.) weak, 2;
OE bor3ode (past tense);
ME borwian (inf.)
401
fire
il
cold
Valley.
fountain
that
ground
which
borrow(ed)
^
PART 3. KEYS
_____
from
preposition
OE fram
from
holy
adjective
OE Ш\у, ME holy
holy
dateless
adjective
rel. to ME date+less (OE leas); dateless
OF date/daltc; L data
Ijvely =
living
adjective
/participle I
rel. to OE Whhan (inf.) weak, 3 (lively) living!
/Hfian; AfiElyven
heat
noun, common
case
OE hietu; MEhclc
heat
Still
adverb
OE stille; Л/Я stille
Still
to endure
verb, infinitive
Л4Е cndure(n), weak 2;
OF endurer: rel. to L durare
to endure
grew
verb, past tense OE 3rowari (inf.) strong, 7;
grew
OE 3reow (past tense sing.);
ME, growen. (inf.); ME grew(e)
seething
adjective
/participle I
of seethe
OE seocten (inf.) strong, 2;
ME selhen
seething
bath
noun, common
OE bazd'; ME bath
bath
yet
case, singular
yet
adverb
ОЁ $yv, ME yel
men
noun, common
case, plural
prove
verb, present
OE man (root-stem, masculine, men
i'»?pj; OE men (plural);
ME men
OE profean weak, 2;
prove (test,,
tense, plural
ME proven
use)
against
preposition
OE on-jean; ME agayn
against
Strange
adjective
ME- slraunge; OF estrange;
L eselraneus
maladies
noun, common
case, plural
adjective
noun, common
F"maladie;MEmaIadie
Strange
(difficult,
severe)
malady(-ies)
ME sovercyng; OF soverian
ME cure, OF cure, L ciira
sovereign
cure
OFbutan, Mfibul-
but
sovereign
cure
case, singular
but
conjunction
402
—
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
:
al
preposition
OE xl, ME at
at
т
pronoun
possessive,
1"' person,
singular
OE mm (pen. pronoun,
I" person, genitive case,
sing.), ME myn(e)/my
my
У
mistress'
е
••
Уе
love's
new-fired
noun, genitive ME maystresse,
mistress('s)
case, singular
OF maistrcsse
noun, common OE ёазе, ME eye/ye
eye
case, singular
noun, genitive OE lufu, ME love
Jove('s)
case
(composite)
OE newe (adj.), ME newe
newfire(d)
participle 2 of
rel. to OE fyr (noun),
(new)
fire
ME fire (noun), ME firen (verb)
toe
article definite
boy
noun, common
OE se, seo, pan
ME pe, peo, past / the
ME boy (origin obscure),
the
boy
case, singular re/. Л? OFris. boi/boy
for
preposition
<?£ for/fore, ME for
tor
trial
noun, common
case
noun, common
case, plural
verb, past tense
of will
verb, infinitive
rel. to ME tryen, verA,
weak, 2; OF trier
OE nyd, ME need
trial ('/«z;
would
touch
I
noun, common
case, singular
pronoun
personal,
Is1 person,
singular
OE wttan(ittf.)pret.-pres.
verb, OE wolde, ЛЛ? wolde
ME touchen, weak, 2;
OF techier
OE breost, ME brest
OE'K,MEI
I
sick
adjective
OE seoc, ME seek
sick
Withal
adverb
Ш? wi6+eal, iWE withal
withal
help
noun, common
case
OE help, ME help
help
needs
Would
touch
breast
403
need(s)
breast
PART 3. KEYS
desired
verb, past tense ME desiren, weak, 2;_
desire(d)
OF desirer, L desTderare
thither
adverb
hied
verb, past tense OE hi3ian (inf), OE hi3ede,
ME hyede
adjective
OE seed, ME sad(e)
sad
G l i d e r , ME thider
thither
hie(d) (hurried
poet, arch.)
Sad
distemper'd adjective
ME distempere(d) rel. to
OF distempre (noun)
distempered
guest
noun, common
case, singular
OE 3iest rel to OSc gestr;
ME guest
guest
ПО
lies
pronoun
OE no, ME no
indefinite
verb, present
OE Нсзап strong, 5,
tense, 3"1 person, ME liggan/lyen
singular
Where
adverb
got
verb, past tense ME geten (inf.), ME gat
strong, 5; OSc geta,
OE 3ytan/3etan, OE 3aet
(past stem, singular)
eyes
noun, common
case, plural
0J5hwser,M£wher(e)
OE ёазе, OE eagan,
ME eye(s)
ПО
lie(s)
where
got (get - inf)
eye(s)
Key to Seminar 21
Dickens, David Copperfield
Забуду ли я когда-нибудь эти уроки? Считалось, что их
дает мне мать, но в действительности моими наставниками
были мистер Мердстоун с сестрой, которые всегда
присутствовали на этих занятиях и не упускали случая, чтобы
не преподать матери урок этой пресловутой твердости —
проклятия нашей жизни. Мне кажется, именно для этого
меня и оставили дома. Я был понятлив и учился с охотой,
когда мы жили с матерью вдвоем. Теперь мне смутно
вспоминается, как я учился у нее на коленях азбуке. Когда я
гляжу на жирные черные' буквы букваря, их очертания
кажутся мне и теперь такими же загадочно незнакомыми, а
округлые линии О, С, 3 — такими же благодушными, как
тогда. Они не вызывают у меня ни вражды, ни отвращения.
Напротив, мне кажется, я иду по тропинке, усеянной
цветами, в моей книге о крокодилах, и всю дорогу меня
подбадривают ласки матери и. ее мягкий голос. Но эти
торжественные уроки, последовавшие за теми, прежними, я
вспоминаю как смертельный удар, нанесенный моему покою,
как горестную и тяжкую работу, как напасть. Они тянулись
долго, их было много и были они трудны, а некоторые и
вовее непонятны, и наводили на меня страх — такой же
страх, какой, думается мне, наводили они и на мою мать. Мне
хочется припомнить, как все это происходило, и описать
одно такое утро.
translated by A, Krivtsova
PART
•
3. KEYS
Phonetic analysis
Word as used
in the text
Changes of spelling and sounds
Old English
shall
I
sceal
New English
Middle English
sha!
shall
[ea]
> [a]
> (ж]
[sk-j
> m
> m
sc replaced by
sh
ic
[k'l
I
ttfl
I
[i] + vocalized [tj> [i:]
ever
aefre
> [ai)
ever(e)
ever
[ж:]
> [e:]
> [e]
unstressed [e] + vocalized [r] > [э]
ж replaced by
e
f replaced by'
v
forget
those
for-3itan
[for]
forgeten
> [for]
Ш
>
[e]
fj] replaced by
[g] from Sc.
3 replaced by
g
fra
tho, thos
[a:]
[6]
> [o:]
> [0]
[s]
were
wieron
mother
by
M
> [i:]
modor
sister
d
were
> [с:] + vocalized [r] > [e:]
bl
[o:]
[d]
those
> [ou:]
> [6]
>
M
weren
[ж:]
by
forget
> [Го:] > [fa]
>
[e]
by
> [ai]
• moder
[or]
sweostor
[or]
> [o:] > [u:] > [и]
> [d]
>
[er]
replaced by
swuster/suster
/sister
[i] from Sc.
>
[eri
406
mother
> [л]
> [6]
>
[э!
th
sister
>
Is]
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
who
always
found
occcasion
hwa
who
ealvewe3
alwey/alwayes
fundon
ftinden
—
occasioun
[a:]
> to:]
fhw]
> fhw]
hw replaced by.
wh
[ea]
> [a]
before!
[wej]
>
[wei]
ea replaced by
a
[u]
> fu:]
u replaced by
ou
Ш
for
for
who
fu:]>[u|
[wj
always
> [o:]
> [wez]
found
> [ao]
occasion
>
for
[o]
giv(ing)
>
>
[3]
for
> [o] + vocalized fr] > [0:]
3yfan
yivert/given
give
[g] from Sc.
that
which
that
fat
>
>
hvwlc
ft1]
which
> 1Ш
which
> 1Ш
[hw]
> [hw]
livy. replaced by
wh
bane
bana
Ore
°u
r
bane
>
[el]
our
[u:]
> [u:] > [аи] + vocalized [г] >[аоэ]
u replaced by
6u
lives (pi), life
ff
M
was
> [a:] opensyll.
fa;]
[fl]
> [w]
bane
[a]>[aj
our
that
[аз]
> M
[0]
> [9]
ш replaced by
a
p replaced by
th
wa?s
!if
> [i:]
was
[»]
> [a] after w
ls|
>
[s]
ш replaced by
a
407
life
> [al]
was
> [0:]
>
fz|
PART 3. KEYS
home
ham
[a:]
learn
leomian
when
hwaenne
alone
eal-ana
knee
day
feo]
hoom
> [o:J
home
> [ou]
lemen
leam
whan
when
> [e] + vocalized [r] > [e:]
И
> [a]
> [e]
[hw]
> [hw]
> [w]
hw replaced by
wh
x replaced by
a replaced by
e
tea]
fa:]
alone
> (a]
> [o:]
cneo
/knee
гЗжз
day
[eo:]
> [e:]
[kn]
. > {kn]
с replaced by
к
alone
> [э]
> [ou]
knee
> [i:]
> [n]
day
[а>ну]
>'Дм]
ae replaced by
a
3 replaced by
у
> [el]
fat
faet
M
fat
> [a]
fat
> M
black
blaec
N
black
>,[a]
black
> N
с replaced by
shape
зе-sceap
ck
i-shap(e)
tea]
> [a]>(a:]
[sk'l
••»',>• Ш
sc replaced by
,sh
easy
—
eSy
[с:]
good
xod
To:]
3 replaced by
good
>'fo:]
g
408
shape
> [el]
> Ш
easy
> И
good
>.[u:]
.
nature
seem
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
—
nature
[tj]
seman
..semen
[e:]
(re)call
ceallian
callen
path
call
feel
> [e:]
> [i:]
wealcan
, walken
paed
„path
[eal
> [a] before Ik
с replaced by
к
> [a:] before [8]
far
feor
book
boc
book
—
cheeren
..,. fer
[eo] -
hard
some
book
[o:]
> fo:]
с replaced by
- к
eal
>' [a]
dead
deeth
[ea:]
>••[«]
б replaced by
th
heard
„
hard
sum
'
som
[ea]
> [u:]>[u] before к
cheer
>[i:] + vocalized [r] > [is]
al/alle
[ea]
death
far
> Де]
[er] > [ar] > fa] + vocalfeed [r] > fa:]
[e:]
all
walk
> [Э:]
path
[ж]
> [a]
x replaced by /, a .'
5 replaced by
th
cheered
>. (o:]
felen
[e:]
walked
> [i:]
> [a] before Л
felan
nature
Ml
seem
> fe:]
[ea]
feel(ing)
>
all
before!! >
{o:]
death
> [e] before [0]
hai-d
> [a] f vocalized [r] > [a:]
[u]
> [u]" .
u replaced by
о
409
some
> [л]
PART 3. KEYS
much
mice I
lk'1
michel/muchel
much
> [ф
> Ml
[u]
> [л]
believe
be-lyfan
bileven
[y:]
> [c:]
у
replaced by
f replaced by
v
poor
—
herself
here-self
p:]
back
bsec
back
Ы
> [a]
ac replaced by
a
с replaced by
ck
believe
> [i:]
ie
povre/poure
/poor
poor
[o:]
>[u:l +vocalized (r]> [us]
hineself
herself
> [i:] + vocalized {r] > [e:]
back
> [ac]
Grammatical and etymological analysis
Words as used
in the text
понт
lessons,
letters,
shapes,
flowers
mother's
pronouns
I
Old English forms
Middle English/Early New
English forms
- as (n-stem declension,
masculine gender,
nominative/accusative
plural)
- e s (n-stem declension,
masculine gender,
genitive singular)
-es / - (e)s (common case,
plural)
ic (pronoun personal,
I" person singular,
nominative)
410
-es / - (e)'s (possessive
case, singular)
(ich) i / 1 (pronoun
personal, Iя person
singular, nominative)
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
me
me, mec {pronoun
me / me (pronoun
personal, V person
personal, /" person
singular, accusative/dative) singular, objective)
my
mm (pronoun personal,
myn(e), my / mine/my
I"person singular, genitive) (pronoun possessive,
]" person singular)
her
hire, hie (pronoun
personal, 3"' person
singular, feminine,
accusative/dative)
they
hie (pronoun personal, 3rd. hie, they/they
person plural'nominative) (pronoun personal, 3"' •
person plural, nominative)
them
him, heom (phmoun
hem, them / them
personal, 3"1 person plural, (pronoun personal, 3"'
accusative/dative)
person plural, objective)
this
bis (pronoun
demonstrative,
nominative/accusative
singular, neuter)
this / this (pronoun
demonstrative, singular)
these
fjas (pronoun
danou.stijiiiiic',
nominative/accusative
plural)
thes(e) / these (pronoun
demonstrative, plural)
•that
bajf (pronoun
demonstrative,
nominative/accusative
singular, neuter)
that / that (pronoun
demonstrative, singular)
those
$& (pronoun
demonstrative,
nominative/accusative
plural)
tho, thos(e) / these
(pronoun demonstrative,
plural)
an (numeral, indefinite
pronoun)
an, a (indefinite article)
se, seo, baet
(demonstrative pronoun)
the (definite article)
here, her / her (pronoun
personal, 3"' person
singular, feminine,
objective)
articles
a
the
411
PART 3. KEYS
verbs
shall forget
sceal (present singular of
sculan. preterite-present
verb) + forsietanfstmng
verb, 5 class)
(free word-combimation)
shal forgeten / shall
forget
(analytical future tense
farm)
were presided
was kept
was bewildered
beon/wesan (weorjjan)
+ participle 2 of
intransitive verbs
(free ward-combinations)
been (was, waren) +
participle 2 / be (was,
were) + participle 2
(analytical passive voice
farms)
had been
had lived
habban (hasfde,
hsefdon) + direct object +
participle 2
haven (hadde) +
participle 2 / have (had)
+ participle 2
beon/wesan + participle 2
of intransitive verbs
(free word-combinations)
been + participle 2 of
intransitive verbs / be +
participle 2 of verbs of
movement
(analytical perfect forms)
giving
learning
verbal noun / participle 1
(overlapping of syntactic
functions)
verbal morpheme + ing
(gerund)
to present
to nave walked
-an
to -enne
(preposition + infinitive,
declined, used in various
syntactic functions)
-en / — (zero ending)
to -en/ to —{zero ending)
(particle + infinitive)
to have been
cheered
(to) beon + participle 2
(passive infinitive)
(td) ben / (to) be +
participle 2 (passive
infinitive)
(t6)han/(to)have +
participle 2 (perfect
infinitive)
(to) han been/(to) have
been 4 participle 2 (perfect
passive infinitive)
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
Regular and irregular verbs used in the text
Words used
in the text
Old English
Middle English
preside
—
presiden (F)
believe
leam
live
belyfan (weak, 1)
leornian (weak, 2)
libban (weak, 3)
biliven
lernen
lyfen
look
seem
locian (weak, 2)
seman (weak, l)
loken
semen
use
walk
meaning influenced by Sc.
—
usen (F)
wealcan (strong, 7)
walken
bewilder
(re)call
cheer
succeed
puzzle
bewildrian (weak, 2)
-ceallian (weak, 2)
—
—
—
bewildren
(re)callen
cheerenfFJ
succeeden (F)
apposailen
(etym. doubtful)
sceal, o/sculan
shal
regular verbs
irregular verbs
shall
(preterite-present)
forget
for-3ietan (strong, 5)
foryeten / forgeten
f-geten under the influence
were
wseron, past plural of
wesan (strong, 5/
suppletive)
find
give
findan (strong, 3)
3ifan (strong, 5)
keep
cepan (weak, 1)
413
o/ScJ
weren
finden
yuven / gyven
fgy ven under the influence
ofSc.)
keepen
.
PART 3. KEYS
can
have (had)
bring
can, present singular of
can
Clinnan (preterite-present)
habban (weak, 3), ha?fde, haven, hadde
past singular
Ьппзап (anomalous)
bryngen
Principal forms of the verbs used in the text
OE wesan/beon
ME been
№ be
waes
was
was
waeron
weren
were
weren
been
been
ftindon
founden
found
ftmden
founden
found
OE
ME
NE
findan
finden
find
fand
fond
—
OE
ME
NE
3jefan
given
give
3eaf
gav(e)
gave
3eafan
geven
—
3Jfen
given
given
OE
ME
NE
cepan
kepen
keep
cepte
kept(e)
kept
—
—
—
cept
kept
kept
OE
ME
NE
habban
haven
have
haefde
hadd(e)
had
—
—
—
ha?fd
hadd
had
OE
ME
NE
Ьппзап
bringen
bring
brohte.
brought(e)
brought
—
—
—
OE
—
ME
NE
OE
ME
NE
cunnan
cude
(can- pres. sing.)
connen
couthe
can (pres. sing.) could
belyfan
belyfode
behven
behved(e)
believe
believed
OE
ME
NE
learnian
lemen
learn
broht
brought
brought
cunnen/cud
—
—
—
—
—
.
couth /i-coua
—
belyfod
behved
believed
learnode
—
lerned(e)
—
learned/learnt —
learnod
lemed
learned/ learro
414
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
OE
ME
NE
Iibban
liven
live
lifde
lived(e)
lived
~
——
lifd
lived
lived.
OE
ME
NE
locian
looken
look
locode
looked(e)
looked
-—
—
—
locod
looked
looked
Bofwwedwprdsjised in the text
Scandinavian
they < jDeir
tnem<.beim
both < babe
(mis)called,
(re)called < ceallian
(see word-hybrids)
French
lesson < OF lcssoun L lectionem
favourable < F, XIV с
Miscellaneous
apt < L opius
alphabet <
L alpabetum Gk сЛсра pVa
occasion < OF occasioun
-Loecasionem
reluctance < L reluct•
'" "
+ F -ance (see wordpurpose < OF pourpos
hybrids)
- L propositum
puzzle < ME
mister ,< OFmaistre
apposailen
(etyni. doubtful)
nominal < F nominal L nominalis
present < OF present
- L prasscntfaintly < OF fcindre
- L fingcre
primer < OF primer
- L primus
novelty < OF novelte
- L nouellitatem
easy < OF ese
nature < OF nature
- L natura
numerous < F miniewux,
L numerosus + F ous
(see word-hybrids)
415
PART 3. KEYS
crocodile < F crocodile
- L crocodTlus
- Gk кроко8еЛо0
contrary < OF contrarie
- L contrarius
flower< OF flour - L florem
preside < F presider (XV c.)
- L prjesiderc
manner < OF maniere
- L maneria
disgust < F desgouster (XVI c.)
- L ais+gustare
voice < Anglo-French voice,
cf. OF vois
grievous < OF grever (v) - L grauare
very < OF verai - L uerus
misery < OF miserie - L miserari
gentleness < OF gentil
- L gentilis (see word-hybrids)
use < OF user - L usare
cheer < OF chere - L cara
succeed < OF succeder
- L succedere
remember < OF remembrer
- L rememorarf
Word-hybrids
really
real (F) + ly (native, OE lie;
nominally
nominal (t) + ly (native, OE He)
firmness
firm (L) + ness (native, OE nis;
416
TEXT ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
faintly
faint (F) + ly (native, OE hcj
good-nature(d) good (native) + nature (F)
recall
re (L) + call (Sc)
drudgery
drudge (native) + ry (F)
gentleness
gentle (F) + ness (native, OE nis)
themselves
them (Sc) + selves (native)
generally
general (F) + ly (native, OE lie;
reluctance
reluct (L) + ance (F)
miscall(ed)
mis (native) + call (Sc)
perfectly
perfect (F) + ly (native, OE llcj
unintelligible
un (native, OE unj + intelligible (F)
Tart 4.
Glossary
A University Scholar
Source: The New University Lilmity. 197$
KEY TO THE DICTIONARY
The words in the Dictionary are given in the usual alphabetical order;
the letters a, ae and a are treated as the same letter a; the letters g and
3 - as g; the letter b (d) follows t. For ease of reference the
alphabetical order is shown on the top of each odd page.
Principal abbreviations and symbols
adj.-adjective
adv. — adverb
anom. - anomalous
art. - article
cf. - confer, compare
сотр. - comparative
conj. - conjunction
ENE - Early New English
F — French
fem. — feminine
OFris - Old Frisian
gen. - genitive
G k - Greek
imit. -imitative
indef.-indefinite
L - Latin
masc. — masculine
ME-Middle English
n. - noun
N E - New English
neut. - neuter
num.-numeral
ОЕ-Old English
O F - O l d French
OSc -Old Scandinavian
part.-participle
prep. - preposition
pron. - pronoun
superl. - superlative
v. str. - strong verb
v. weak - weak verb
> - developed into
< - developed from
0 - phrases and word-combinations
with the vocabulary entry as the head
word
a(a,ge)-b-c-d-e-f-g(3)-h-i-j-k-l-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t-^>(6)-u-v-w-x-y-z
A
•chemist in his laboratory
PART 4. GLOSSARY
азеп, own, adj.; OE
a?enst. against, prep.; ME; <
OE оп-зёап
annotacioun, annotation (note), «.;
M£; < L annotatio
anon, anon (at once), adv.; ME; <
0 E On Sn
a g e v n . again, adv.; ME; <
OE оп-зёап
ЖЗ^ег З ё ^ 3£, either (either ...
or), conjJpron.;OE
anofcer, another, pron. indef.; ME; <
OEan+oser
antique, adj.; NE; < F antique;
L
mt
~^uus
Щ , pron. indef.; NE; < OE aeni3;
al=ail, all, pron. indef. ; ME; <
ОЕЫ
alas, interjection, NE; < ME/OF
alas 0 a! las = wretched that I am!
selc. each, pron. indef, sing.; OE
all, pron. indef; NE; < OE eal;
~M£al/alle
a l l o w , v.; NE; < ME alowen;
OF alouer
alone, adv.; NE< ME al one, aloon
along, prep.; NE; < OE andlang;
ME along
apayred, impaired, adjJpart. 2, see
empeiren
a
Payrynge, impairing, verb, п., see
em eiren
P
^ § l e , (excellent),adj.;OE
agt, adj.; NE; < L aptus
jgr, ere (till then), adv.; OE
arcebiscop, archbishop, п., masc,
a-stem; OE
alphabet, п.; NE; < L alpabetum;
Gk c&cpa рлта
arcestob (archiepiscopal seat), п.,
masc, a-stem; OE
also, also, adv.; ME; < OE eal-swa
always, adv.; NE; < OE ealne-we3;
ME alwey
am, see be; NE
an, on (in), prep.; ME; < OE an=on
an, one, numJadj.;OE
analysis. /,; NE; < L analysis
archbishop, archbishop, п.; ME; <
0 E
^rc-bisC0P
are, see be; NE
argument, п.; NE; < ME argument;
0 F
af
gument
M i a n , arise, v.,str. 1;OE
^ Е Ш , array, n,ME; < OF arrai
ME
a n y
^SSr^
Ш,Ш,со,«.;ОЕ
and, соф, MEJNE; < OE and
art
j c l e . п.; NE; < L articulus
andjang, along, prep.; OE
andswarian, answer, v., weak 2;
ar-pam-pe. (before), conj.; OE
^ a S j adjJconJA
<0 E eai.SWa
ME.
_ ,
. , . „„
Eenig, any, pron. Dirfe/!; OE
as, conj.; NE;<OE eal-swa; ME as
—' J
Ob
422
a(a,£e)-b-c-d-e-f-g(3)-h-i-j-k-l-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t-^)(5)-u-v-w-x-y-z
asham'd. adj.; NE; < rel. to OE
scamian, v., weak 2; ME shamen
avauntage. advantage, п.; ME, <
OF avantage
asleep. adj.;NE; < OE on-slaJp; ME
on sleep, asleep
aventure. adventure (happening), п.;
ME; < OF aventure; L adventura
asleepe. see asleep, ENE
away, away, adv.; ME; < OE on-we3
at, at, prep.; ME, NE; < OE xt
awyrgan, (curse, damn), v., weak 2;
OE
set, at, prep.; OE
,, _ '
,
.
,
ave, ever, adv.; NE; < ME ay; OSc
aethnnan. (touch, move), v., str. 1;
Л/еу
J
OE
aught, (anything), pron.; NE; < OE
a-wiht; aht; ME aht, aght, aught
PART 4. GLOSSARY
В
read baking
b a e o b o r d . back board (barboard,
port side), п., neut., a-stem; OE
be-beodan. bid (order, command),
v.,str.2;OE
back, adv.; NE; < OE base; ME bak
bebude. see be-beodan; OE
bad, adj.; NE; < ME badde; OE
bed, п.; NE; < OE bed; ME bed/
bedde
bzeddel
ban, bone, п., neut., a-stem; OE
bee, see be, v. ENE
bancke. bank (bed), п.; NE; < ME
banke
been, be, suppl. v.; ME; < OE beon
bane, п.; NE; < OE bana; ME bane
beef), (are), see been
befealdan. fold (cover), v., str. 7;
OE
bank, bank, п.; ME; < F banque
beforan. before, adv./prep.; OE
base, adj.; NE; < ME bas; OF bas
before,
band, п.; NE; < ME band; 5c band
adv./prep.; NE; <
OE beforan; ME biforen, biforn
base, v.; NE; < F baser
bath. п.; NE; < OE ЬжЗ; ME bath
begge, beg, v., ENE; < ME beggen,
v., weak 2; OF begger, noun
bathen, bathe, v., weak 2; ME; <
OE badian
begin, v.; NE; <; < OE be-3innan, v.,
str. 3; ME begynnen
be. by (along), prep.; OE
begitan, beget (get, obtain, find), v.,
str. 5; OE
begunne. part. 2 (may be used as
past tense), see begin, ENE
behind, adv.; NE; < OE be-hindan;
ME be-hynden
be. v. anom.; NE; < OE beon;
ME been
bead, see be-beodan; OE
beah, see Ьпзап; OE
424
a(a,£e)-b-c-d-e-f-g(3)-h-i-j-k-l-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t- J b(d)-u-v-w-x-y-z
beHeue, see believe, ENE
believe, v.; NE; < OE be-lyfan, v.,
weak 1; MZ? bileven
belike, (probably, evidently), modal
word, ENE; < rel. to OE зе-llc,
adjective;
MEJ y-lich
J
birth, п.; NE; < OE зе-byrd;
Ш
birthe
>
bJSCOp, bishop, п., masc, a-stem; OE
bishop, bishop, п.; ME; < OE biscop
,, ,
,. ..„
_„ , .
,,
И Щ , « 4 ; NE; < OE blac, bl<ec;
MEblak
м-+ • „ .,
, _л г ,
bletsian. bless, v., weak 2; OE
ЪШШЩ, blessing, n.fem., o-stem;
belou'd. beloved, part. 2, see love,
EHE
Ьё-ПОГбап. north (northwards),
Ot/
advJprep.; OE
beon. be, v., anom. (pres. t. sing. ^ Ш М blissful, adj.; ME; < rel. to
o t b h s
beo, bist, bis; pi. beon; past t.
' "•
wass, etc. - see wesanj; OE
blow, п.; NE; < ME blowe (origin
b e r e n . bear, v., str. 4; ME; <
obscure)
OE beran
boga, bow, n. masc, n-stem; OE
beseech, v.; NE; < OE besecan, v.,
weak 1; ME besechen
book, п.; ME, NE; < OE boc; ME
book
beste. best, adj., superl. degr., see bore, see beren ; ME
good
,
borrow, v.; NE; < OE bor3ian, v.,
beswican. (deceive, betray), v.,
weak 2; ME borwen
str.l;OE
,
,,_
borrow'd, adj. I part. 2 of borrow,
besynesse. business , п.; Mb; <
NE;seehorrow
OE bisi^nes
,
_
, .
both, pron.; NE; < ME babe;
beteecan. (put in trust), v., weak 1,
щ{г
S c щ е
irreg. ; OE > rel. to NE teach
, ._, ,
, boy, п.; NE; < ME boy (origin
beteehte, v., past t.; see betscan;
obscure), rel. to OFris. boi/boy
,
, ,
brand, (torch, flare); п.; NE; <
betst. best, adj. /adv., superl. degr.,
Q E b r a n d ; ш
b r a n d
see 3od; OE
,
.,j
,
„„,
-,J •
breake, break, v., ENE; <
bewilder v.; NE; < OE bewildnan,
ОЕЪтеат, v., str. 4; ME breken
v., weak 2; ME bewildren
. .,
, . . , . ,
, ЛЕ,
breast, п.; NE; < OE breost,
bldan, bide (wait), v., str. 1; 0 £
iiffibrest
b i f a l l e n , befall (0 bifil - i t so
b r e e f e , brief, «,/;., ЯЛТЕ; <
happened , v., str. 7; M^; <
M£ breef; OF brief; L brevis
OE be-feallan
bjgyjmen,begyj2nen,begm,v.,,m
breeth, b r e a t h 'п.;МБ-,<ОЕЪйб
3; ME; < OE be-3innan
425
PART 4. GLOSSARY
breken, break, v>., str. 4; ME; <
OE brecan
burh, borough (town, castle), п., fem.,
root-stem; OE
brest, see breast, п., ENE
. -i
,_t лг,
b r ^ e r , «., see brobor; OE
b r i l ^ v.;NE; <O£brin3an,onom. v.;
M£ bryngen
Ь ш з а п , bring, v., яг.-н-евА; OE
buruhwaru, (citizens of a town), п.,
fem., 5-stem; OE > rel. to
^ b'orough
Ь ш ф е
birth д
M E <0 E 3 e . b y r d /
—sTbyrdu
^
conj.
m
m . < QE Ш
ш
b r
^ F d K a S t . '4- NElft °E< b r 5 d '
bQtan, bflton, but,conj.;OE
ME brood, adj. + ME casten, v.;
'
OSc kasta
buy, v.; NE; < OE Ьусзап, v., weak
b r o c h e . brooch, „.; ME; <
/; M£ buggen, biggen
0£broche
bjl, prep./adv.; NE; < OE bl, be;
brochure. „.; NE; < rel. to
ME also bz
F brocher, v.
bycause = (by) cause, because,
ЫШШ1, brough, ,,m , Pl, m
Ьппзап; Oh
br&orMoth^rmscr-stennOE
brjC3,bridge,п.,fem.,o-stem;OE
bflan, (stay, inhabit), v.,anom.\OE
bude. v., past t. sing. Ind. or sub].
mood; see buan; OE
b u g a n , bow (curve, subjugate,
surrender), v., str. 2; OE
bugon, v.,pl.,pastt.;seeЬпзап;OE
%£&c,S-
** *
Щ®Ь (bjd, incline, subject), v..
b y g y n n y n g e . beginning, verbal
noun, see bigynnen
byr(e), (time, period), /;., i-stem orjustem; OE
by rig, /?., dat. sing.; see burh; OE
a(a,£e)-b-c-d-e-f-g(3)-h-i-j-k-l-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t-J3(6)-u-v-w-x-y-z
С
arpenter with his tools
of trade
can, can (know), see connen; ME
cheere, cheer, п., ENE; <
, „n
лг.
ME cheer; OF chere
can, v. modal, NE; < OE cunnan
(inf), can (pres. sing.), pret.-pres.; chekyr, (exchequer, п.; ME; <
ME can
OF eschequier
cart, п.; NE; < OE erst; rel. to cherch, church, п.; ME; <
OSc kartr
OE cirice; Gk кирихкои
c a s e , п.; NE; < ME cas, caas; child, child,п.;ME; < OEcild
OF cas; L casus
children, children, п., pi.; ME; <
c a s k e t , п.; NE; < Span casco,
OEcMvu
confused with F cassette (small c h i t e r e n c h i r p ? v-> w m k 2. ME. <
box
)
(imit.)
cepan, keep (guard), v., weak 1; OE
c h i t e r v n g e
c h i r p i n g f gemnd>
s e e
certain, adj.; NE; < OF certein,
chiteren
certain; L certus + stiff, -anus
citation, п.; NE; < ME citacion;
change, v.; NE; < ME chaungen, i'.,
L citation
weak 2; OF changier
dz'd = MA, part. 2; see size, ENE
СЩШ,
«.; NE; < ME chapitte c l e m e n c j e > c l e m e n c y > „ ENE
<
chapitre;
OF
chapitre,
t
i
Lclemen
a
L capitulum, cf. L caput
i
.
.
.
Т.ЖГ7. ^ clepen. (call, summon), v., weak 2;
c h a
" m u b r t ' c ^ m b e r ' "" ; ME' <
~Ш
< OE clipian > re/, ro
OF chambre;L camera
•
ЛЖ yclept, arf/
с Ь {
* и " | е п ' c I ? a n S e - v., weaft 2; ME; d e ; c l e r g v , clergy, /г.; ME; <
< OF changwsr
OFclergie;Z,clericus
cheer, y.; /V£; < c/. ME cheere,
f?F chiere, n.
427
PART 4. GLOSSARY
rel.
concern, v.; NE; < F concerner;
L concernere
c n a w a n , know (recognise), v.,
strong 7; OE
conceven, conceive, v., weak 2;
ME; < OF concevir; L concipere
COCUr. (case for arrows), n. masc, astem; OE
COndicioun, condition, п.; ME; <
OF condicion
confederate confederate, adj.; ME;
< L confoederatus
clypian, (call), v., weak 2;0E>
to NE yclept, adj.
coffer, п.; NE; < ME/OF cofre;
L cophinum; Gk kdqnvocr
confident, adj.; NE; < L confident
cold, adj.; NE; < OE cald (Merc),
c^d(WS); ME cold
collect, v.; NE; < OF collecter;
L collectare
confound.
v.,;
NE;
<
ME confounden; F confondre;
L confundere
COMien, can (know), v., pret.-pres.;
ME; < OE cunnan
come, v.; NE; < OE cuman, v., str. 4;
ME comen
conquer, v.; NE; < ME conqueren;
OF conquerre; L conquirere
c o m e n , come, v., str. 4; ME; <
OE cuman
c o n q u e s t , conquest, п.; ME; <
OF conqueste
command, v.-.NE: <Fcommander,
L commendare
considerable,
compaignye. company, п.; ME; <
OFcompanie
construccioun, construction
c o l l a b o r a t e , v.; NE; < rel. to
F collaborer; L collaborare
L considerabilis
L comparatlvus
(interpretation), п.; ME; <
F
comparable, adj.; NE; < rel. to
F comparer, v.; L comparare +
OF -able; L -abilis
comparative,
adj.; NE; <
construction
construct. v.;NE; <L construct
construen. construe, v., weak 2;
ME; <L construere
< ME conteinen;
c o n t a m , v . ; NE;
OFcontenir
contrary, adj.; NE; < ME contrarie;
OF contrarie
adj.; NE; <
COmpellen, compel, v., weak 2;
ME;<OF compeller
compile, v.; NE; < F compiler;
Lcompflare
c o m y n g , coming, verb, noun /
gerund, see comen; ME
c o n t r a y , country, п.; Mb, <
OF contree
п.; NE; <
c n n v e r S a t i o n .
ME
conuersacion;
OF
conversation; L conversation
comyxtioun, mixture, п.; ME; < OF
commistion
corage, courage (heart), п.; ME; <
OF corage; rel. to L cor
COmutuall, mutual, adj., ENE; <
Fcom-;OF-mutuel;Imutuus
428
a(a,£e)-b-c-d-e-f-g(5)-h-i-j-k-l-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t-j[3(6)--u-v-w-x-y-z
corpora, п. plur.; see corpus; NE
CUntre,
corpus, п.; NE; < L corpus
cost, cost, п.; ME; < rel. to
OF coster, v.; L constare
cure, п.; NE; < ME cure, OF cure,
L cura
count, v.; NE; < ME counten, v.,
weak 2; OF conter; L computare
country,
OF countree
п.; ME;
<
CWae5, quoth (obs., said), v., past t.
sing.; see cw£e6an; OE
cwaedan. (say), v., str. 5; OE
cours. course, п.; ME; < OF cours;
L cursus
CVnin5, king, п., masc, a-stem; OE
COuthe. (un)couth (well-known,
hallowed), part. 2, see connen;
ME; < OE cunan; OE сиб
СУГ. cir, char, chore (odd job), п.,
masc, i-stem; OE > rel. toNE char
in charwoman
cradel. cradle, п.; ME; < OE cradol
cyrran, char (do a turn of work,
perform), v., weak 1;OE> rel. to
NE char in charwoman
crocodile, п.; NE; < F crocodile;
L crocodilus; Gk крокобеЛоа
croppe, crop, п., pi.; ME; < OE crop
cuman, come, v., str. 4; OE
cyssan, kiss, v., weak 1; OE
PART 4. GLOSSARY
D
octor visiting his patients
depend, v.; NE; < OF dependre;
d a g , day, п., masc, astern; OE
daily, adj.; NE; < OE ds 3 -lic;
MEdayly
data, „.; NE; < ME/OF date; L data
d a t e l e s s , adj.; NE; < rel. to
testoE'Z
date/datt£; L d3ta +
L d e
Pendere
description, п.; NE; < rel. to
f* ^
^ * ;0 F ^ П ^ ' '
L descrTbere
„ . NV. . ME d e s i f e n v.,
Н р ч ! г р
й
^1ЪрВЬ*£1А*
day, „ , ME, NE; < OE d , 3 ; ^ w ^
^
< <Ш
^
^
ME also dffii
destrutre
dead, dead, adj.; OE
destruccioun destruction, п.; ME;
J
'
<OF destruction
death, n.;NE;<OEde*s;MEdeth
<
d e t e r m i n e >
v.;
NE;
deaw., dew, n. masc/neut, wa-stem;
ME determynen, v., weak 2,
OE
OF determiner
debt, п.; NE; < ME dette; OF dette; deth, death, п.; ME; < OE dea6
L debita
deuise. device (plan), п., ENE; <
decline, (bend aside), v.; NE; <
ME devys; OF devis
Ш
fLfdeclmare
- H S y n e " ' °F
d£
?ilfV
w n S 5 f«,« ;
deCUner;
ME;
devout,
devout, adj.; ME; <
QF
d e y o t
*" dewsen. devise (say, describe), v.,
OF defense; L defensa
~ ^ 2 ; M£; < OF deviser
degree, degree, n.;ME;< OF d&gr6t; d e v e n
die v
w e a J f e ; M£?; <
Lde+gradus
—fejeyia
deorwurde, dearworth (precious),
dictionary, п.; NE; < L dictionarius
adj; OE
430
a(a,£e)-b-c-d-e-f-g(3)-h-i-j-k-l-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t-{3(6)-u-v-w-x-y-z
die, v.; NE; < ME deyen/dien, v., dorston. dare, v., past t. pi., (see
weak; OSc deyja
durranj; OE
different, adj.: NE: < F different: dosen,
dozen, п.; NE; <
L different(em)
ME dosayn; OF dosaine
d i r e c t l y , adv.; NE; < rel. to doth, does, see do, ENE
ME direct, of/; OF direct
„.; NE; < ME doute;
d o u b t .
disavauntage. disadvantage. /;.:
OF doute
ME; < OF disavantage
downe. down, adv., ENE; < OE ofdiscomfort.
п.;
NE;
<
dune; ME a-doune
ME disconforten, v., weak 2; d r a w e n d r a w , v „ л б ш
<
OF desconforter
0£dra 3 an; 0 draw after - imitate
disgust «•; ЛГЯ; < /• desgouster; d r i h t e n { Ш
„. ,„
d)
fl.
Ldis+gustare
Sl^OE
Ш-Stemper'd, « g ; ЛГС; • < drmcan, drink, v.,^-.J;OF
MF distempere(d) re/,
to
'
OFdistempre,и.
droghte, drought, /г.; ME; <
u3
d i s t r o y e n . destroy, v., weak 2;
°
MF; < OF distruire
drudgery, п.; NE; < rel. to OE
distrust, v.; NE; < ME dis- + trust,
*%&*• v - ^ 2 ; M £ ё г е У е п +
/г., rel. to OSc traust, /г.
A
»,„
лт- j j
duke, duke, /;.; MF; < OF due;
do, v.; NF; < OE don, anomal. v.;
—^Ux
MF doon
J *
„
,,^/лг. J *
d u m b e , dumb, adj., ENE; <
doctor, п.; NE; < ME/OF doctour;
0 Fdurnb; ME domb
L doctor
,
„хт„
,
durran. dare, v.. pret.-pres.: OE
doe, do, v., FiVF; see do
^
. . .
. . .
dweller, dweller, п.; ME; < rel. to
dommacioune, domination, п.;
OEdwelkn v
ME;
< OF dominacion;
L dominatio
dydon, did, v., past t., pi. (see d5n;;
don, do, v., anom.; OE
,
dyme, dime (one-tenth). /;.: ME; <
л
I / r
n>,j.n
doon, do, anom. v.; ME; < OE don
" ^ F d i s m e ; L decima
doone, done, part. 2; see do, ENE
PART 4. GLOSSARY
E
mily - a personification
of spring
easy, adj.; NE; < ME esy; OF ese
ёа, (river), n.Jem., root-stem (anom.);
0 E
ech. each, pron. indef.; ME; < OE %\c
, , ,
, , -~ „ л р 5Яр
eek. eke (too), adv.; ME; < OE
eac
«.. . . .
, , .,. np >
eft, (again, afterwards), ««?v.; CiJ >
rel. to NE after
,
,
, . . „ ni? »UPSejs = else, adv.; NE; < OE ell»,
M£ elles/els
embrace, v.; iV£; < M£ embracen,
v., weak 2; OF embracer
empeiren, impair, v., weak 2; ME; <
OF empeirer
вас, eke (also, as well), adv.; OE
eadmedan. (show submission), v..
—^aTVOE
ea^e,eye,n.neut.,n-stem;OE
—*-' J
eald, old,flflf/.(сотр. yldra; sup.
yWeSt;;
°E
ealdian, (grow) old, v., weak 2; OE
ealdorman. alderdman, (chief), п.,
masc, root-stem; OE
eall. all,pron. indef. sing.; OE
employ. v.\ NE; < F employer
ealle. pron. indef., pi. (see eallj; OE
enable, v.; NE; < ME enablen, en- +
0 Fable;L habilis
ealne W J , always, adv.; OE
egril, adjJadv, NE; < OE a>rllce;
Eй
^Ш
^
,
end, v.; NE; < OE endian, v., weak I,
ME erly
ME
eart,^wesan;OE
east, east, adv.; OE
^
eastryhte, east right (to the east),
e n d e n
> e n d ' "' ; ME' < 0
E
^
"^Й^в^иЙГ'Я^
adv 0E
eastwerd, eastward, (eastwards),
«dv.;OE
"^ Ш ' < 0
^
Ldurare
e n e m v
n
• NE- < ME enemy;
—Wtmrni'
432
a(a,a3)-b-c-d-e-f-g(3)-h-i-j-k-l-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t-^(6)-u-v-w-x-y-z
engendren, engender,.v., weak 2; esterne. Easter, п.; ME; <
ME; < OF engendrer; L ingenerane
OE Eastru
ennacture. (enactment),' п., ENE; < etan, eat, v., str. 5; OE
rel. to ME enacten, v.; NE enact
^
^
^
^
< Q
enough, adv.; NE; < OE 3enoh,
ME evne/even(e)
Зепбз; ME inoh, enogh
^ ^ ady. m < QE _ f r e . ш
^ f2,- Ot
O entrer
F ^
Ш
entre
" "" Wmk
e v e r i c h o n
ш
.
^
E
^
- ^У
- f r e -«J c Pron. indef,
< QE
enterprise, «.; NE; < OF enterprise ц
^
^ p w n Ш ф .ш . <
eode. (went), v. anom., past t., see
OE asfre
n
0E
3* '>
evyr. ever, adv.: ME: < OE eefre
eojn, « e wesan; O£
experiens. experience, п.; ME; <
eorl, earl, (chief), п., masc, a-stem; OE
OF experience
eorde, earth,n. fern.,n-stem; OE
, , . ,.„
er, ere (before), adv/conj.; ME; <
OExr
ere, see our, OE
i
,
„v
/и? • 1
erles. earl, п.; ME; < OE eorl
~—
„
___ ,.
erlj:, early, adv.; ME; < OE aer-lice
esen. ease, v., weak 2; ME; < OF eser
expressen, express, v., weak 2;
ME;<OFexpresser;Lexpressare
extremme. extremity, п., ENE; <
ME extremytee; OF extremite
„_ л п
SS& п.; NE; < OE ea^, ME eye/yo
^~
_
eyther. either, cow..ENE: < OEЩhw£e5er; ME either
PART 4. GLOSSARY
F
riar- a pillar of his Order
fauourite, favourite, п., ENE; <
faeder, father, п. masc, r-stem; OE
MF
faintly, adv.; NE; < ME feint;
OF feint + ly (OE licj
fltojjj.
ad,, ENE; < OE
favorit;
Lfau6fem
favourable, adj. ;NE;<OF favour;
L
f*3er;
**
^
0™£&L«*
Mth, я7лЖ;< ME feith; OF feid;
£а
^ ^ о и г ^ а " о г "^ ^ '
<
OI
t a v o u r Ь t a v o r
L fides; 0 «ri.; by my faith!
'
fain й
M l , v.; NE; < OE feallan, v., 5Гг. 7 ^ '
' * ; М ^ ! < °E f ^ n
ME fallen
fe,
fee, п.; ME; < OE feoh; OF fe
f a l l e ( n ) . fall, v., str. 7; ME; < feare. fear, п., ENE; < OE fSr;
0 £ feallan
ME feet
fandian. (explore, try, prove), v., weak feare, fear, v., ENE; < OE Шгап, V:-.
2; OE
weak 1; ME feren
£ar,adj./adv.;NE;<OEfeor;MEkr
f e a t u r e , п.; NE; < ME feture,
featUre;
faran. fare (go, travel), v., str. 6; OE
OF
Шк
'>L
Ш
Ш
f
fare, v.; NE; < OE faran, v., str. 6; Шш>
™>adJ-'0E
ME faren
feeling, п.; NE; < rel. to OE felatt,
Щщ, see fa, ENE
v., weak 1; ME Men
fat nAi • MF- *• nv ten- M P <v
fel, (skin, hide), n. neut., a-stem; OE
tat, adj.,Nb,< Ub rastt; Mb tat
— у r ^ (Q NE f e e j
< Ш
fate
F
Ы ;
13
^Шт^'
'' °
fe ' (^my),adjyadv.;OE
jy-. . r
„
.
felaweshipe, fellowship,».; ME; <
л „
tffitniS, fatness,n.fem.,jo-stem; OE
O~ScWaS~
434
a(a,s)-b-c-d-e-f-g(3)-h-i-.j-k-l-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t-jj(5)-u-v-w-x-y-z
fellow. n.\ NE; < ME fellawe; rel. to follow, v.; NE; < OE fo^ian, v., weak
Sc felagi
2; ME followen
feor, far,adv.;OE
fonden, (try), v., weak 2; ME; <
"miMer, four, num.; OE
<W flndian
f e m e , (old, far-off), adj, ME; < MJor (because of), co,ijSPrep,;OE,
OE fyrn
'
iWfi,™ * ^.u * M. J- **r? forbeden, forbid, v., str. 2; ME; <
« £ £ , farther, further, adj.; ME; <
OEfor-kodm
OE feor; fyrra (comp. degree)
fest, feast, „.; ME; < OF feste; ferdon, (destroy), v.; J e e do; ^
L festa
forget
v.; NE; < OE for-3ytan, v.,
trt r,-,„
str. 5; OSc geten; ME forgeten
III, five, num.; OE
fj f - ntx _. t ,
~.t „,.
former, a<//.; ME; < (?£• forma;
tlttene. fifteen (one-fifteenth), /ZHHI.;
M/? former
ME; < OE fif-tyne
" °
«. ,
.._,
__, ,. ,
fortune, ».; A^g; < ME fortune;
hM,
v. NE; < OE findan;
6»F fortune; £ fortuna
ME fynden
findan, find, ,,st,3;OE
todb,
toth.
o*.;OT
fire, «,^;<^ryr;M£fir
^MmU,
^),conj,OE
firmness. „, iV^; < ME, OF ferme; ferfean, (because), c . n ; , ^
Lfirmus+ 0 # -nisj
forward,
forward, n.; ME; < OE fore~
.
,
, ,
weard
Iirrest. farthest, adv., superl. d.; see
fio7; OE
foul,
foul
(ugly), adj.; ME; < OE ful
first, num. / adj. /adv.; ME, NE; < fountain, n.; NE; < ME fontayne;
OE fyrst; ME also firste
OF fontaine; L fontana
fiscad. fiscod, (fishing),«., /nflJC, a- foure, four, ;iwn.; Af£; < OE feower
•rt'«w; ^ ^
fowel. fowl (bird),«.; M£; <OE firjol
jSote, float (fleet),«., majc., «^«»; f^^^ {tomtprep_. 0E
OE
fre uenCV
L frec uentia
flour, flower, n,ME;<OF flour
q
' "-; ^ <; ME
l
F
flower. „.; NE; < ME flour; k f f J T ' ""
' <°
"^
OF flour; Lflorem,ace. of flos
fl^e,fly,v., O f t < Otf fleo3an, , , ^
^
"* < °E f r 5 o n d ;
str. 2; ME flyen
fitlfi, folk (people), „., M « t . a ^ « . ; to, torn,prep, ME; <0E Mm
OE
from, advJprep.; OE, ME, NE; <
folk. n.;ME,m<OB
folc
OE also fAm
435
PART 4. GLOSSARY
fruite. fruit, п., ENE; < ME fruit; function, п.; NE; < F fonction;
OF fruit; L fructus
L functio
frum-cenneda, (first-born), adj.; fyllan. fill (completely satisfy), v.,
OE
weak h OE
fill, full (most, very), adj/adv.; ME; < fyrd. (army, military expedition), п.,
OEM
fem.,i-stem;OE
Ы, full, adj.; OE
full, adj.; NE; < OE, ME ful
fjjvg, five, num.; ME; < OE fif
G
unfire diagram
gan. go, v. anom. (past t. - eodej; g e m a r t y r o d , part. 2; see
OE
3emartyriart; OE
garren. (growl), v., weak; ME;< rel. general adj.; NE; < OF general;
to ОЕзуггап
Lgeneralis
gather, v.; NE; < OE 3aderian, v., generally, adv.; NE; < OF general;
weak 2; ME gaderen
L generalise OE lie
3 | a , yea (yes), particle; OE
gentilMman. gentleman, п.; ME; <
с/. F gentilhomme
л_
Зёаг, year, и., neut., a-stem; OE
, •• . ;
•
.
,
gentle, adj.; NE; < OF gentil;
g e a r w i a n . (make ready, make,
^ gen tilis
clothe), v., weak 2; OE
A1
gentleman, « e gentle, man
^ebl^ed. see bv^an; OE
*—~
.,„ n r
..,
** , J
'
л
i
лп
gentleness. «.; ЛЖ; < OF gentil;
^ebogen. part. 2; see Ьпзап; OE
XgentTlis + (?£ nis
gebfln. part. 2; see bQan; OE
gere. year, /г.; Affi1; < OE зёаг
gecneow. see cnawan; OF,
gedruncen. see drincan; OE
qeeadmedun, see eadmedan; OE
°
Seferen, part. 2; see faran; 0 *
З е Щ Ы , see fyllan; O£
SeSEipian, see 3rapian; O£
Sehlrde, see hyran ; №
gemartyrian. martyr, v, weak 2;
OE > rel. to NE martvr
gerly. yearly,flrfv.;ME; < OE 3Sai- +
437
lice
s e s e a h saw, v., past t., sing.; see
seon; OE
g e s g o n . s e e s6on; 0 £
? e s e t t a n . set, v., weak V; №
g e . s i ? I a n , s a i I ,,,, шак 1; OE
^
^
з § § Ш й > ^
PART 4. GLOSSARY
get, v.;iVE;<0£3ytan/3etan, v.,str.
5; OSc geta; ME geten
5efoeode. (language), п., neut., jastem; OE
3if, if (except), conj.', ME; < OE 3 if
grateful, adj.; NE; < OF grat-;
L gratus + - ful (E)
graunten, grant, v., weak 2; ME', <
OF graanter, creanter; L creantare,
K; credentia
>"•
W*
^Veef'•' ^
Шу,ш1,Ж;<0Е5уЩ
ё
3 i s ^ (hostage), п., masc, astern;
^ ^
^ ^ ^ .
31ШШ1, (givehostages),., , ^ 2 ;
2ive vNE-<
OE ^ifan v йг 5-
<
ME.
^
' ^
< 0 E
ъхШ
^tSStJ^^^
griefe> 8rief' "- Ж
Я ;
<М ^
greef;
;
^
glad, «*•; m < OE 5Ш; ME glad
« ^
go. v.; Л^£; < OE зап, suppl.;
MB goon f&i^
3Od, god, masc, a-steml OE
5od. good, arf/. {decrees of сотр.:
betera, betst); OE
good, good, adj./п.; ME, NE; <
OE 3od; betst (superl. degree)
g o o d l y , goodly, adj.; ME; <
OE 3od-Hc
goon, go, verb, anom. v.; ME; <
OE^an
gramer, grammar, п.; ME; < OF
graniraaire; L grammatica;
Gk урариатисг)
OF grever; Lgravare
grievous. «^.; MJ; < r«Z. »
OF grever, v.; L grauare
-.
grisbayting. grist biting (gritting of
teeth), п.; ME; < OE 3rist-betun3
g r o u n d , п.; NE; < OE 3™ n d ;
ME ground
grow, v.:NE; < OE?rowan, v., str. 7;
ME growen
g u e s t п.; NE; < OE 3iest; rel. to
OSc gestr; ME guest
g u i d e , v.; NE; < ME gyden;
OF guier; F guider
5 r 5 p i a n . grope (touch, feel by.
touch), v., weak 2; OE
g
^ '
-• ^ f
_a(a,ge)-b-c-d-e-f-g(,^)-h-i-i-k-l-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t-b(5)-u-v-w-x-y-z
harrynge. (with rolling "r"),
gerund, see harren
habban. have, v., weak3; OE
had, see han, haven ; ME..
hart heart, п., ENE; < OE theorte;
ME herte
haefde, had; see habban; OE
hasten, hasten, v., weak 2; ME; <
halve, half,aclj.;ME;,<OEhmlf "' OF haster •
halwe. hallow, (saint), п.; ME; < hath, see have, ENE
OEhal^a
. . ,'
haue, see have, ENE.
ham, home, n.,ntosc, a-stem; OE
have, v.; ЛЖ; < OE habban; v., wea/c
han. haven, have, v., weak 3;>ME;
3; ME haven
., <O£habb.an
..
haven, have, v.. weak 3: ME: <
hand, hand, n.fenu u-stern; OE •
O£ habban
:
hand, п.:NE\ < ОЕ ЪШ\MEhond
haven, n.\NR\ < OE haifan,
'
hasfene; ME havene
handjign, handle, v., weaA; 2; OE
. ,
.,
he, he, /?ran. pera. (ЙСС. hme, «a/.
haply, (probably), «&"., ЯЛЖ; < rel. , him, *ei*. hisj; OE
.
to ДЖ hap, noun; OSc happ
.
he, he, pron. pars.; ME, NE; <
happy, adj.; NE; < rel. to ME hap,
QE he
""SchapP
head, п.; NE; < OE hSafod;
h a r d , adj.; NE; < OE heard;
i № heed
ME
hard
healdan. heoldon. hold, v., str. 7;
• harme. harm, п.; ME; < OE hearm
QE
harren. (speak with rolling "r"), v., healf, half, n.Jem., o-stem; OE
. weak; ME; < (imit.)
hadde. had, see haven •
439
PART 4. GLOSSARY
health, п.; NE; < OF ЬГБШ, hS15u;
ME
here, adv.; NE; < OE her; ME heer
h d t h e
here, their, pron. pass., pi; ME; <
02?hira,heora,hiera,hyra
. „_л„ u
л ц . Ш7- <
hearing, gerund/verbal п.; NE; <
rel. to OE hyran, v., weak 1; or
OEhyrin3)n,MEhering(e),„.
Ь 1
^ ЙЬ5: ; мр S h^2f h e ° r C n i a n '
**%&£?• V" " ^ ' '
heretik. heretic, п.; ME; <
v.,weak2,MEbatea
heat, п.; NE; < OE hstu; ME hete
h e a v e n , п.; NE; < OE heofon,
hefon; ME heuen
hed. head, п.; ME; < OE heafod
heeje = he4L£;V2?
heele. heel,«.; M£; < ШШ1а
" ^ " h e r e t i q u e ; L haereticus;
GA: aipenKo?
herself, pron. reflex.; NE; see her, +
OE, ME, NE self
hetherto. hitherto, adv., ENE; <
OE, ME hider-to
М, Me ( t h e y ) , / ; ^ . ^ ^ ; ^
hgere, here, adv., ЯЛЖ; < OE her;
ME heer
heeth. heath,«.; ME; <ОЕЬГЯ
heir, п.; NEj < ME/OF heir;
L herem, heredem
held, held, see holden,; M£
Ь ^ ' hither'adv- 0 E
vr.p.
hie, (hurried - poet, arch.), v., » •
hye6&
< 0 E h i 3 i a n (»'& ME
b t a , (their),pron.per*.,seebM*,
hebrt.;^;<O£help,MEhelp
hme,(him),pr O n.pm.;^h5;^
Ь М , p/wi. pen.; ME, ЛВ;.< OB him,
hire
hfi
Г
feelphan1P' " ' " - ^'
hS
М
£ ;<
Ьшт, (their)^^./,^,,^^,!^
Ш
? b * h T £ m ' ' O T - * • '•'
m
da^^^&CC-%
МП, «heir, P ™ , Pos,, pi, ME; <
OE hyra/hira
hke^Pro,per*,seeMo;OE
> h i s ' p r o n ' p e r s A s e e Ы'> °Е
_, .
his, his, pron. poss., masc; ME, NE;
Ш
heofon, heaven, n. masc, astern;
OE
<
0
E h i s (prO7h
perS }
her, (their), pron. pers.; ME; <
OE hie
her, pron. pers.; NE; < OE hire;
ME her(e).
'
hit, it, pron. pers. (dot. him, genhis ); O i ?
'
• . _,
hlaf, loaf (bread), n. masc, a-stem; Oh
herd, heard, see heren,; ME
hlaefdfoe, lady, n.,fem., n-stem; OE
here, (army), п., masc.Ja-stem; OE
hlaford, lord,п., masc, astern; OE
440
_a(a,^)-b-c-d-e-f-g(^)-h-i-j-k-l-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t-|3C5)-u-v-w.-x-v-z
hlvstan. listen, v., weak 1; OE
huntod, (hunting), п., masc, a-stem;
OE
hold, v.; NE; < OE healdan, v., str. 7;
ME heold(en)
husband, п.; NE; < OE hus-bond;
ME husbonde; OSc hiisb6ndi
h o l d e n . hold, v., str. 7; ME; <
OE healdan
hwaelhunta, whale hunt(er),
(whaleman), п., masc, n-stem; OE
hollow, adj.; NE; < rel. to OE holh,
п.; ME holow, adj.
hwaenne, when, adverb; OE
holt, holt, п.; ME; < OE holt
holy, adj.; NE; < OE ЬаНз; ME holy
hwaet, what, pron. intenog. /indef.;
OE
hwaite, wheat, n. masc, ja-stem; OE
hom, h o o m . home, п.; ME; <
OEhmn
hwaeder, whether, conj.; OE
home, п.; NE; < OE ham; ME hoom
hwll while,n.,fem., i-stem;OE
honour, v.; NE; <ME honour(en), v., hwon, (a little), adv/adj.; OE
weak 2; OF honorer
hy. hi» Ый, (they), pron. pers. (dat.
him, gen. hyra, hiera, heoraj; OE
hooly. holy, adj.; ME; < OE hali3
hyd. hide (skin), п., fern., i-stem; OE
booth, see ooth ; ME
hojje, п.; NE; < OE hopa; ME hope hym. him, pron. pers.; ME; <
OE him, hine
hors-hwael. whale (walrus), п., masc,
hymMself. himself (themselves),
a-stem; OE
pron.
reflexive; ME; <
horsian. (supply with horses), v.,
OE him+self
weak 2; OE > rel. to NE horse
hyne. hind (member of a household,
k o s t e l r y e . hostelry, п.; ME; <
farm worker, etc.), «• masc,
OF hostellerie
n-stem; OE
how, adv.; ME, NE; < OE Ш
hypothesis;
п.; NE; <
L hypothesis; Gk wcoQeaiq
hraedlice. (quickly, soon), adj.; OE
Ы, how, adv.; OE
iiyran, hear, v., weak 1; OE
h u n d r e d , hundred, п.; ME; <
OE hund-red
hys, his (its), pron. pers.; see he and
hit; OE
PART 4. GLOSSARY
I
.nnkeeper serving a meal
I, pron. pen.; ME, NE; < OE ic;
ME also: ich
L see yen
infecten. infect, v., weak 2; ME; <
rel. to OF infect, past part.)
L infectus
im in
adv ME
& see 3 ea; OE
^' '
'> > < 0E i n
1c, I, pron. pers. (ace. mec, me, dot.
'^^in'adv/'0E
me, gen. minj; OE
i-now. enough, adv.; ME; < OE 3 e "
1-chaunged. changed, part. 2; see
chaungen
inscribe, v.; NE; < L inscrlbere
idel. idle (vain, empty), adj.; ME; < inspiren. inspire, v., weak 2; ME; <
OE Idel
OF inspirer; L inspirare
if, conj.; ME, NE; < OE $.f; ME also instance, n.; NE; < ME instaunce;
3if
OF instance
i-knowe. known, adjJpart. 2; see instructour, instructor, n.; ME; <
knowen
L instructor
3L!ie = r i l ; ENE
into, into, prep.; OE, ME, NE
i-leffc Mt,part. 2;seeleven
introspection. «.; NE; < rel. to
L
llond. island, „.; ME; < 0Z?I3-land
i^spicere, v.
MHedJed, meddled (mingled),
adj./ i n v e n t o r y , w.; NE; < rel. to
B
part. 2; see medlen
* J
F mventer; L muent+are
import ,;NE;<rel. to OF porter;
iny^gator,
L portare
in, in, prep.; OE, ME, NE
include, v.; NE; < L includere
^ investrgator; cf. F investigated
iourneve. see journey, ENE
442
^J^
a(a,a&)-b-c-d-e-f-g(^)-h-i-j-k-l-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t-i3(9)-u-v-w-x-y-z
iflX> joy, «., ENE; < ME joye; l-tau^t taught, pdrt.2,,see techen;
ftFjoie;Z,gaudia
MB
i2X§> joy, v., ENE) < ME joyen, v., i-tolde, told, part. 2; see tellen; MB
. W e ^ 2 ; 0 F J"our
Wised, used, port. 2; J e e usen; M £
1§, see be; iV£; been; M ^
j.woned. wont (accustomed), part.
iir it, pron. pers., neut:, ME, NE; <
2; see wonien; ME
OEhit
PART 4. GLOSSARY
I
esters amusing the king
jest. «.; NE; < ME/OF geste;
L gesta; 0 ME tell a "geste" - tell
tales like a professional storyteller,
"gestour"
^ W i ^ S a "
MB
' 0We ' ;
joye. joy, «.; ME; < OF joie;
L gaudia
.
. .
, n. MF-<
JOVen, rejoice, v.; weak 2; Mil, <
OF jour; L gaiudere
J W judge, „, ME; < OF juge;
Ljudex
journey, «.; A^E; < ME journee;
OFjournee
.a(a,^)-b-c-d-e-f-g(^)-h-i-i-k-l-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t-b(9)-u-v-w-x-y-z
K
ight infallarmour
li§§E, V.; NE; < OE cepan, v., weak kiss, v.; NE; < OE cyssan* v., weak
2; ME kepen
1\ ME kissen
feggge, see keep, v., ENE
knee, «.; A^; < OE cneo; M£ cneo,
k e g e r , keeper, n.; MJE; < cf.
OScepan
«„-„,
.T_
__ •
,_,_,
Kgy, /?.; A^JS;
< OE CBB3; M£ keye
mi
»rr» ^.r. n
/ »
gm,v.;NE';<OEcyllan,v.,weakl]
ME1 killen
kne
know, v.: NE; < OE cnawaru v.. str.
7;MEknowen
Ioiowen, kno^y) v., •j/r. 7; ME; <
0E cn g wan
M M , a*'.; ^ ; < OS cynde; tattStt Wght.n.;MB;<OTcnihr
M£ kynde
kindling, adj.; NE; < ME kindel
finf.) rel. to OSc kynd-a
king. n.;ME, NE; < OE cynin3
kunnep. can, see connen; ME
kyng, king,«.; ME; < OE cynin3
PART 4. GLOSSARY
L
awyer- servant of Justice
labouren. labour, v., weak 2; ME; <
OF labourer; L laborare
lacke, lack, v., ENE; < ME lakken,
V Weak 2
"
lady, lady, n.; ME; < OE hla;fdl3e;
ME also ladye
l a m e n t n.; NE; < rel. to F lamenter,
verb
land, land, n., «eM?., a-stem; OE
land, land, n.;ME;<OEland
lar, lore (teaching), n. fern., o-stem;
^Wiargfi'larlS
<
^
^
lasse. less, adj., comp. degree of
litel; ME; < OE laessa
last, v.; NE; < OE testan, v., weak 1;
ME lasten, lesten
iltan,let,v.,^.7;O^
i *
i- ATT- /«ji t , „ ,
late, adj.; NE; < OE 1st; ME lat
Iawe, law, n.; ME; < OE Ia3u; e/j
OSc log
lay., lay, adj.; ME; < OF lai; L laicusj
lav, v,: A^JB; < 0 E Iec3an, v., we^
1; past t. Xz^de, ; ME leggen;
leyen; past t. leide
lead, v.; NE; < OE lffidan, v., weak 1\
iWEleden
,r
learn, v.; NE', < OE leornian, v., weak
2;M£:iernen
legacJOUS. legation, n.\
ME; < OF legation; L legatio
Iegacion<
iMf, Hef (dear, beloved), ^ ; , ^ -f
1123311, lie (tell lies), v.,str.2;OE >
l e r n e n , learn, v., weak 2; ME; <
0E l e o r n i a n
''
lesen. lose, v., sfr. 2; ME; >f
O£leosan
lesing. losing (loss, perdition),
—J^nd, see lesen; ME
446
a(a,^)-b-c-d-ft-f-g(^)-h-i-j-k-I-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t-l3(5)-u-v-w-x-y-z
ifiSSfin, n.\ NE; < ME lessoun; location, n.;NE: <Llocation
OFle9on;Z,lectionem
Joj±, v.; M?; < OE lucan, v., ,m 2;
ifiSSOun, lesson, n.; ME; <
ME lokken
OFkgo^L lectio
]ond, land, „ , ME; <OE fond
let, v. A®; < 0E Uetan; Affi leten
^ m ,ong
M g ^ .m . <m
Mm, Hv.,str. 7i-m<0El**m l o n g a g e . i a n g u a g e , „.. M E ; <
ifiiler, «.; NE; < ME lettre;
OF langage, langue; L lingua
OFlettre;Llittera . . .
longe. l o n g . ^ v . : ^
mm,
leave, v., weak 1; ME; < [ongen, long (belong), v., weak 2;
uziaztan
ME; < OE lanyan
llcsan, lie (rest), v., str. 5; OE
j fiO j £; v . ^ g . < 0 £ : 1Scian> v-> w g a j t
fician, like (please), v-.H'^/t ;;£>£"
2;Affiloken
Ikpur, liquor (moisture),«.; M^; < lord, «.; A?£; < O£ hlaford;
OF licur,L liquor
MSIorde
Ue, (rest) v.; MJ; < OE lic^n v., j/r. Ifirde, lord, «.; MB; < O£" hlaford
• 5, ME liggan/lyen
lore, lore, n.; ME; < <?^ lar
Mt, left, «#.; ME1; < OE lyffleft
j 0 J g ) v>. NE; < 0E ] o s i a n ) v>> weak j .
iikg, fl^-.; NE; < OE 3e-lTc; ME yME losen
lic
h. Hk
..
toue,
jee love,«., EiVE
likely, arfv.; MB; < OE 3e-lic; ME y- j o u e see h
E m
" lich, lik + OE -lie, ME -ly
"
...
,„ 1/p
,,
love, /;.; WE; < OE lufu; ME love
llkne. liken, v.. weak 2; ME; < rel. to
•• OE 3e-llc, adj.
love, v.; NE; <; < OE lufian, v., weak
linguistic, ail; NE; < F linguiste
2; ME loven
(L lingua + ist) + OE-Tc
love-Kindlmg.
arfy. (composite),
litlest, (least, smallest), ^ ; . ^ H .
^ « • l o ^ k i n d l i "§
ofe^. <7/litel, EiVE; < OE lytel; test lustllce. lustily (willingly, gladly),
(superldegr.); ME litel, leste
adv.; OE
Hue, see live, v., EiVE
l^e, lie, v., ENE; < OE Iic3an, v., str.
live, v.;NE;<OElibban,v.,weak3;
5;ME\yen
ME liven
lyen. lie (stay), v., j^r. 5; ME; <
OE I i c a n
lively j«e living, ENE
3
livingl adj./part. 1, NE; < rel. to
#Elibban v., weak 3 I; lifian;
ME lyven
447
PART 4. GLOSSARY
M
.agician consulting the stars
macian, make, v., weak 2; OE
man, man (one),pron. indef.; OE
mad(e). see maken,; ME
man, man, п., masc, root-stem; OE
made(n).madcpastt...yeemaken
made, part. 2 see make. NE
m a n , man, и.; OE, ME* NE; <
OE also man
mXm,™y,V.,Pre,-PreS,OE
«^SS^
magazine, п.; NE; < F magasin
masgd. (kin, clan, tribe), n. fem.,
o-stem; OE
maid, maid (priestess), п.; NE; <
OE m^en; ME mayde(n)
ШШЬ
mas,er, „ , ME; <
3
-
. „.. NE; < OF maniere;
Lmanena
many, adj. I adv. /pron,) MB, NE; <
ОЕтЫз
^
„,„,,„. M £ . < 0 E m a r c
ш
^
<
m e a r o i a n , v .,
weafc 2; MJS marken
^
^
m a n n e r
тайп °* ™С™'"" " * *
marriage, п.; NE; < ME manage;:
<?F manage
• i n t e r j e c t i o i i , NE; <•
m a r r y .
M£ marie 0 used in ME as an
oath by St.Mary
M£maladie
martir,martyr,«.;№;<O£:,martyr;
malice,
malice, п.; ME; <
Lmartyr
OF malice; L malitia, malicia
g
e
m
s t e , most, adj., superl. degr.; seet
m a l l i c o , malice, п., ENE; <
mycel;OE
OF malice; L malicia
m a t e r ( e ) , matter, п.; ME; <
malvs, see malice ; ME
OF matiere; L materia
^МЁ
'
m a t e make, v . wefl/c 2 ; . № <
Ub macian
.
m a l a d y , п.; NE; < F maladie;
448
a{a,a)-b-c-d-e-f-g(^)-h-i-i-k-l-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t-K5)'U-v-w-x-y-z
^^Snal, n.,NE; < ME materyal; micel, much (big), adj.; OE
£ materialis
. ,
,
micelnvs,
(greatness, size;
fflay, v.; NE; < OE m&ym (in/), mae3
multitude), n. fern., jo-stem; OE
(pres. sing.),Pret.-pres-ME may m M ^
0$. ME; < OEmiek ,
m,mQ,Pron.pers,seeic;OE
^A^i^prep-OE
m
£°n'
^^
UE m
'
<
°E
mS>
ffl^flte, might,v.,p^f.; Je ema 3 an;
"iM^nwinter.midwinter, n.,masc,
u-stem; OE
<
m i d d e l
m i d d l e > adu
ME;
. OE middel
mMe
m i g h t V past
^^ME'menen °E m*mU' ^ "**
'
' " "' Se° m^m'
ffi^ins,
n.; NE; < ret. to mM%, mi&ty,adj.; OE
vb masnan, v., weak 1;
•*'
MBmenenmln, mine (my), prpn. posses., sing.;
0E
fflgdiai, meilen. (mingle), v., weak
2; ME; < OF medler
mine, mine (my), pron. posses.,
mpii.,,,
.. .
,. A?J?. .
plural,seemin; OE
IHEUOW, (ripe), adj.; NE; <
^
_
ME melwe, rel. to OE melu,«.
mine, pron. poss.; NE; < OE min;
ME
mellxnge, mingling, verbal noun;
™a
see medlen
miscall, v.; NE; < OE mis +
,
,
,
,
„
OSc kalla; OEceallian,v., weak2;
m
m e l o d i e , melody, n.; ME; <
j^caiien
OF melodie; L melodia; 0 maken
. . .
. ,. .
.,..„
melodye - sing (phrasal unit)
mischiefe, mischief,
n., tNt; <
;
_
.
_,.,-, ^
M£'meschief;£?i 'meschief
n i e m o r i e , memory, «., ENE; <
, .
MiB memorie; OF memorie; misery, /«.; A^^; < OF misene;
Lmemoria
LmiserM
meny. many, adj./pron.; ME; < mister, n.;NE; < OF maistre
O£ m5ni3
mistress,«.; NE; < ME maystresse,
metan. meet, v., weak 1;OE
OF maistresse
mete, meat (food), n. masc, i-stem; moche, much, adv.; ME; < OE micle
OE
modor, mother, n.fem., r-stem; OE
mettian, (supply withfood),v., weak
(
m^n)
QE
2;OE> ret. to NE meat
' \
,
, . (aid),
. .,. v., weak
> monasmeyntenen.
maintain
*
»month, n., masc, t-stem; OE
2; ME; < OF maintenir; L manu money, n.; NE; < ME moneye;
tenere ("hold in the hand")
OF moneie; L moneta
449
PART 4. GLOSSARY
monies, see money
month, month, n.; ME; < OE monaf)
munching, {now dial - s k ^ m g '
stealing up to), n.; Nh; <
ME mychen, weak; OF muchier
m o o n , n.; NE; < OE mona;
ME mone
munificent, adj.; NE; <rd-J°
F munificence, n.; L mumdicenQa
more, adj. /adv.; ME, NE; < OE mar m u s t , v.; NE; < OE mot, most (pafi,
pret.-pres.; ME moot, mostW,
morning.
«.;
NE\ <
OE mor3en, morwen + OE uny,
must (past)
ME morwen, morn(e) + ing
mu5a. mouth (ofthe river), n.,mash
most, adj. I pron.; NE; < OE maest;
n-stem; OE
ME moost
my. pron. poss.; ME, NE; < OE nun;
m o t h e r , n.; NE; < OE modor;
ME also myn(e)
ME moder
o u e . move, v., ENE; < mycel. much (many of), advJadj:, OE
ME mov(en), v., weak 2; myddel. middle,«.; ME; <OE*M&
OF movoir
m u c h , adv.; NE; < OE micle;
ME much(el)
a(a,a5)-b-c-d-ft-f-g(^)-h-i-i-k-l-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t-f3(5)-u-v-w-x-y-z
N«.
US, no," adv. /neg. part; OE
"•
HaU no, negat. particle; ME; <
OE na
neah, nigh, near (nearly), adj. /adv. /
prep.; OE; see also near
nealaecan, (approach), v., we«/t /;
nacjjoun, nation, «.; MJE; <
Of nacion; £ natio
aacod, naked off.; 6>J?
_
.
•„,
nealeante, see nealascan; OE
DME, 1 «^- / a<iv - ; Arj?= < 0 £ : n6ar J
MJE nerre
_
nea£, mgh, near (nearly) adj. /adv. /
fian = ne+an, not one, (no one, not
a siniie),^7™. /**•; ^
Mnre = ne+anre, not one, (no one,
^^oTashTglel^n.n^.j^nan;
necessary,
iV5; <
arfy.;
&
r
Qg
ME necessane; OF necessaire
nan sins, nothing, n. neut., a-stem; n e £ ^ , neck, n., ENE; < OE hnecca;
-Qjg—•*'
M& nekke
rises. = ne wais, see wesan; 6>J?
need, n.; NE; < OE nyd, AflS need
nat = ne+wat see wltan; OE
neede, need, v., ENE; < OE nydan,
,
, ,.„
v., weak I; ME neden
natheless, nevertheless, adv.; ME;
<OEni-bv-lSs
needes, needs, adv., ENE; <
<c/inapy
O£: nyde; ME nede(s)
nativite,
nativity, n.; ME; <
...
OF nativite; L natlvitas
neitner, con].; NE; < OE ne+a33„„
«„ .
hwa}3er; ME neither
nature, «.; ME, NE; < OF nature;
—XTnltura
neuer,_ never, adv., ENE; <
,. n.in
i
<?£ naefre; ME never(e)
naught, naughty, arf;., £W£; < rel.
to OE na-wiht; ME naught
nevyr. never, adv.; ME; < OE naefre
ne not, neg. part.; OE
new, adj.; NE; < OE newe, ME newe
'
451
PART 4. GLOSSARY
new-fired, part. 2 (composite) of
(new) fire (v), NE; see new, fire
not, negat. particle, NE; < OE nawiht; ME not
news, (tidings), n.,NE translation
(caique) ofF nouvelles
note, п.; NE; < F note; L nota
newspaper, п., see news, paper;
NE
niman, (take), v., str. 4; OE
noten. note, v.; ME; < OF nqter;
L notare
nojteles, nevertheless, q'dv.; ME. <
OE na-fiy-ljes
ПО. pron. indef.; NE; < OE no,
ME no
nothing, pron. indef.; NE; <
nolde = ne+WOlde. v.; see willan;
OE
nomt. not (not in the least), adv.;
ME; <0Ena-with
OE папфтз; ME no-thing
nominally, adv.; NE; < F nominal; n o v e l , п.; NE; < It novella;
L nominalis + OE He
F nouvelle
none, pron. neg.; NE; < OE nan; novelty, п.; NE' < OF noveliteit;
ME noon
L nouellitatem
nor, conj.; NE; < OE na-hwas5er; now. adv.;ME,NE;<OEm
ME nor
nfl, now, adv.; OE
norf), north, adv.; OE
numerous. adj.;NE;< F numereiw,
norban. north (from the north), adv.;
L numerosus + F ous
OE
nyght. night, п.; ME; < OE nib
погфегпе. northern, adj.; ME\ <
nyh, near,prep./adv. /adj.; ME;<
Ш?погдегпе
OE neah
norfjmest.riorthmost,adv.; OE
nyne. nine, num.; ME; < OE шЗ<эп
norforyhte. north right (straight to the
nysse = ne wisse. v,; see witan; OE
north), adv.; OE
norf)Ward. northward, adj., used nyste = ne wiste. v.; see witan; OjE
adverbially; OE
_a(a,ffi)-b-c-ci-e-f-g(3)-h-i-i-k-l-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t-|j(a)-u-v-w-x-y-2
bservance of Sunday fl
obiective,arf/.;A^;<tobjectTvus
k
•
MI?
o n l i , adj.; NE; < OE an-lic;
Meoonlicn
ft
~ff<£2vsSe!ianj S'ME observed onto, onto, pre/;.; ME; < OE unto
v.; F observer; I observare
gbgervg, v.; NE; <OF observer;
g g ^ one> numAME; < OE an
QQ^ o a t h ) fl . M £ ; < 0 £ a S
iobseruare
open, open, adj.;
ME; < OE open
y
flccas oh. n.; NE; < OF occas.oun; " * — ' ;
^
it occasionem
fififrant,
(effective), arfj.; NE; <
_ iT_,
I. operant; fre/,tooperate, v)
^rffr-ftWOWflWW
npinLn.
opinion, „, ME; <
LQierj, over, advJprep.; OE
OF opinion; L opTnio
Office, n.; NE; < ME office; o p p r e s s e n o p p r e s s e ) v-i w e a ^ 2;
£, officium
ME; < OF oppresser; L opressare
oft, see often, adv., ENE
Oj^ conj-. # # . < ^ £ a-hw^er,
awjier; ME other, outher, auther
o f ten< adv) tffc < ^ oft; ME oft/
often
gvtf&,adj.;NE;<OFoTbQ;Lorbis
on, on (in, by), prep, /adv.; OE, ME, o r d e r l y adj . NE. < rd w M£
NE
ordre, n.; OF ordre
gngrgdall,dread,v,str.7;OE
S£& e r e ( b e f o r e ) j conj^
ENE. <
one, ««;«•; A*; < OE Sn>ME o o n
o»3Mtt» a 2 a i n ' against, «rfv. /prep.;
—^jjfi
^ y ^
(grasp, perceive,
fia
Sfestend>feel),«'.,^r.5;O£
453
0E S r ; M £ l e r / o r
Oterauns. outeraunce. utterance
(extremity), «.; ME; < rel. to
OEKadv,MEo^co,nP.de8.
+t
ance
PART 4. GLOSSARY
od, (till, until), prep, /conj.; OE
брег, other, pron. indef.; OE
Ours, pron. poss.; NE; < OE ure;
ME ours
Oper, Opere. other, pron. indef.;
ME; < OE ббег
OUrselues. ourselves, pron. reflex.,
ENE; < OE Ore+self(ves);
ME ourselves
Oppe, (or), conj.; OE
Out, adv.; NE; < OE ut; ME out
ouerthrowe.
v., ENE; <
OE ofer+jpriman, v., str. 7;
ME over-throwen
over, adv. /prep.; NE; <OE.ofer,
ME ouer
ought see owe, ENE
o v y r , over (too), adv.; ME; <
OE ofer
ought, v. modal, NE; < OE a^an
(inf), ahte (past), pret.-pres.;
ME aughte, oughte
Owe, (possess), v.; NE; < OE азап;
ME азеп, awen, owen
our, pron. poss.; NE; < OE ure;
ME our
pure, our, pron. poss.; ME; < OE ure
OWne. own, adj.; ME; ENE; <
OE азеп; ME also owen
a(a,^)-b-c-d-e-f-g(^)-h-i-i-k-l-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t-bCQ)-u-v-w-x-y-z
P.
rioress on a pilgrimage
Дасеп, расе, v., weak 2; ME; <
OF passer
'
mimer, paImer,/i.;Af£;<0Fpalmier
»,«
fiap_er,
п.;
OE, ME, NE; <
£ papyrus; G*ramupogfrwZ>.of
WrL
«W
Barlement. parliament, п.; ME; <
OFparlement
particular
arfy.; Л^; <
ME particuler; OF particulier
passen pass/pace, v., weak 2; ME;
^OF'passer
Passion, /г.; ME; < MiS passioun;
OF passion; L passio
path, п.; NE; < OE ршб; ME path
Patiently, adv.; NE; < rel. to
ME patient, adj., OF patient,
L patens, n.
p a t r o n , п.; NE; < F patron;
L patronum
pay. V.;NE;<ME payen, weak 1 or
2; OF paier
п а у е й , pay. "•» weak J o r 2'< M E > <
(5Fpaier
455
peace, п.; NE; < ME, OF pais;
ipacem
peple, people, п.;ME; < OFpueple;
L
populus
.
percen, pierce, v., и><^ 2; ME; <
OFpercier
perfectly adv.; NE; < ME perfit;
0 F
P a r f i t ; L Perfectus+ OE he
permit, v.; NE; < OF permettre;
L permittere
peyne, pain, я.; ME; < OF peine;
L
Poena
piece, п.; NE; < ME/OF piece
p i l g r i m , pilgrim, л.; МЯ; <
OF pelegrin; L peregrmus
pilgrimage, pilgrimage, п.; ME; <
OF pelegrinage or derived from
MEpilgrym
place, place, п.; ME; < OF place;
L platea
plate, п.; NE; < ME/OF plate;
L platta
play, п.; NE; < OE р1еза; ME pley/
play
PART 4. GLOSSARY
-
playen. pleyen. play, v., weak 2; p r e s e n t , v.; NE; < OF presenter;
ME; < OE ple3ian
L prassentare
player, player (actor), «.; NE; < rel. preserve, v.; NE; < OF preserver;
to OE ple3ian, v., weak 2;
L pra-seruare
ME playen
p r e s i d e , v.; NE; < OF presider;
poor, adj.; NE; < ME povre/poure;
L prassidare
OF vre
P°
p r i k e n . prick, v., weak 2; ME; <
poore. poor, n. (substantivised
OEprician
adj.), ENE; < ME povre/poure, p r j m e r „ . N£; < OF primer;
adjective; OF povre
L p]flmus
pjort, n.; NE; < F porte; L porta
p r i n c i p a l , principal, adj.; ME; <
posie. poesy (motto, short
OF principal; L principalis
inscription),
n., ENE; < principle, n.: NE; < ME pryncipal;
ME
poesie
=
poete;
OF principal; L principalis
OF poesie = poete; L poeta
,,
_
»*ir/p
.
^
p r o b l e m . «.; NE; < ME/F
p o s s e s s i o u n . possesssion, «.;
probleme;Lproblema
ME;
< OF possession,
,
. .
t, ?.
L possessio
p r o c l a m e n , proclaim, v., weak 2,
ME;
< OF
proclamer,
possible, adj.; NE; < ME possyble,
L proclamare
TpoiiMfc, °F
P SSiMe;
°
W ^ g t , ..; NE: < jr p.ojec,
Lprojectum
POUM.pound, n.; ME; < OB pwdi
L pOndO
p o w e r , „.; ME, NE; < OF poeir/
pouer
p r a c l i c e , n.; NE; < ME practise,
rel. to practise, v.; OF practiser;
Lpractizere
pray., v.; NE; < ME preyen, v., weak
2;OFprener;Lprecan
p r a y e n , preyen. pray, v., weak 2;
ME; < OF preiier; L precari
p r e s e n s , presence, «.; ME; <
OF presence; L praesentia,
praesens
p r e s e n t , aJy.; iVE; < OF present;
,uENE<<
{e
f>
ME preve; OF preuve
p r o p o s e . v i V £ . < ^ prO p OS er;
Lpro+poser
p r o u e .
prove,
v ,. ENE;' <
* o F profian, v., weak 2;
ME proven
proven, prove, v., weak 2; ME; <
OE pr 5fi a n; rel. to OF proven;
L
Prob3re
provide, v.; NE; < L providere
puple, see pgple ; ME
XTr,
%jrr,
p u r p o s e , n.; NE; < ME purposs;
OF pourpos; Z- propositum
< MjB apposailen
puzzIe
NE
456
a(a,as)-b-c-d-e-f-g(^)-h-i-.i-k-l-m-n-0rp-q-r-s-t-}3(6)-u-v-w-x-y-z
uarrel at a tournament
ШШх, п., ME; < F qualite;
L qualitas, qualitatem (ace.)
l, п., NE; < ME/OF querele;
Z-querela
fluantitie.
quantity, п., ENE; <
ME quantitee; OF quantite
q u e e n e , queen, п., ENE; <
OE cwen; ME queen
question, п.; NE; < ME questioun;
Of question
quickly, adv.; NE; rel. to OE cwic
(adv.) (+hce); ME quyk (+ly)
PART 4. GLOSSARY
ive- a steward supervising
the estates and tenants
for the landowner
researcher, п.; NE; < OF/L re- +
ME serche; OF cerchier +
OE/ME -er
ra5e, rather, adv.; OE
range, v.; NE; < F ranger, rel. to
OF reng, п., OHG hrinc; cf.
OE Ъпщ (NE ring)
resoun. reason, п.; ME; < OF raison;
L ratio
r e s p e c t п.; NE; < ME respect;
OF respect
rest, п.; NE; < OF reste; L restare, v.
reaf. (garment, clothing, armour), n.
neut., a-stem; OE
really, adv.; NE; < OF reel; L realis
+ ly (native, OE \xc)
reasonably.
adv.;
r e s t e n . rest, v., weak 1; ME; <
OE restan
NE; <
ME resoun, п.; OF raison; L ratio
+ OF -able; L -abilis + OE -lie;
ME -lich, -ly
result, п.; NE; < rel. to F resulter, v.,
L resultare
reuel. revel, v., ENE; < ME revelen,
v., weak 2; OF reveler
recall, v.; NE; < L re + OSc kalla;
OE ceallian, v., weak 2; ME callen
r e c e i v e n . receive, v., weak 2;
ME; < OF receivre; L recipere
riden. ride, v., str. 1;ME; < OE ndan
ring, п.; NE; < OE hrin3; ME ryng
redy. ready, adj.; ME; < OE rede
rise, v.; NE; < OE rlsan, v., str. 1;
ME risen
reluctance, п.; NE; < L reluct +
F -ance
remember.
v.;
NE;
OF remembrer; L rememoran
rokken, rock, v. weak 2; ME; <
OE roccian
<
roote, root, п.; ME; < OSc rot
representative, adj.; NE; <
round, adv. /prep.; NE; < rel. to
ME round, adj., OF roont
OF/F
representatif;
L reprasentatlv(us)
458
a(a,ae)-b-c-d-e-f-g(3)-h-i-i-k-l-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t-{3(d)-u-v-w-x-y-2
ruh, rough, adj.; OE
M.IO
xrr. ,,J-- r . , / , p
rule, n., NE; < ME reule, nwle; OF
riule, reule; L regula
run5v.>^;<O^rinnan,,,^5;
ME rinnen
JTUWan. see ruh fw ^e/(?re vovvefaj;
0£
ryht-norfoan-wind,rightnorth wind
(direct north wind), n., masc, aK
s(em.
QE
'
rM2!run,,J^i;M^;<^rinnan
rysen, rise, v., str. 1; ME; < OE ffsan
PART 4. GLOSSARY
s
quire dressed in all his finery
Sjg, sea, n.Jem., i-stem; OE
s a c r a m e n t , sacrament, n.: ME: <
L sacramentum
s a c r e d , adj.; NE; < rel. to
MBsacren, v., weak 2; OF sacrer
sad, adj.; NE; < OE ssed, ME sad(e)
~
safe, adj.; NE; < ME sauf; L saluum
saide. see seven ; ME
sajl, v.; NE; < OE si3lan, v., weak 1
andse$ian, v., weak2; MEseiten
saint, n. / a # ; NE; < ME seint,
saint; OF seint; L sanctum
schal. see schulle ; ME
schuld. see schulle; ME
s c h u l l e . shall (have to), pret.-pres.
verb; ME; < OE sculan
„„.„ . .
.
^,M./IF
scip. ship,«., neut., a-stem; UP
_ .. .
. , f , ? vtemSCiJC, shire (province), n.Jem., a-stem,
OE
scote. school, >».; M^; < OE scol;
L s c o l a ; 0 F CSCole
score, score (two tens), ».', Wo; <
O^scoru
scrowe. (scroll, roll of parchment,
cnlt n,v, • MI?- ^ nj? coni*. TUIV ann
written document), n.; ME; <
salt, adj.,mNE; < /OE
sealt; ME salt
Sm
^^ ^w /7W'!';M^<
S
Sc sami, O ^ same
^ampiSslmSSamPle;
QF e s c r Q u e > rd w m
escroW
scrvddan. shroud (cover and
conceal), v., weaJt 7; OE ••
C/
S^UfelH, shall,v.,^.-p.,;OF'
that pm
» ^ < « W ^ * ^JBfeJ!?^*•• ' "
Mil seggen
sceawun^. (survey.exploration), „.,
fem.,o-stem;OE
sceolde. should, v., past t. sing, (see
sculanj; OE
flfl»«ld,v..p«r*.:«<.«llan;flS
s e a s o n , v.; ME1; < M£ sesounen;
OF s a i s o n n e ! t
§£M» see sgoflan; O£
460
a(a,£e)-b-c-d-e-f-g(?;)-h-i-i-k-l-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t-br5)-u-v-w-x-v-z
secganT say, v., weak 3; OE
,
,,„
,
Second, num.; NE; < ME secounde;
OF second
j
»,,-,
secounde, second, num.; ME; <
OF second; L secundus
..
. , .
section, n.; NE; < L sechon(em)
see n.; NE; < OE seon, v., str. 5;
ME seen
see, sea, n.; ME; < OE see
seeke, sick, adj.; ME; < OE seoc
seem, v.; NE; < OE seman, v., weak
1 (meaning influenced by Sc);
MB semen
seethe, v.; NE; < OE seosan, v.; str.
2; ME sethen
seething, adjJpart. 1, see seethe,
NE
seken, seek, v., weak 1, img.\ME;<
OE secan
selectioji,«.; NE; <I sciecti6n(em)
self,self(hims<zlf),pwji.;OE
sellan sell (give, hand over), u.,
weak 1, irrcgA OE
semen seem, i'., weak 2; ME; <
OEskman
send en send, v., weak 1; ME;, <
OE scndan
eo
(that), pron. demonstr.fetn., see
S
s'e; OZ? > «/. » NE the
Sgon see,v.,str.5i.0E
seoSan, seethe (boil, cook, by
-polling), v.. -y""- 2<0E
ggggratg, oajf.; NE; < ME separate;
t separatus
sermon, n.; NE; < ME sermun,
sermoun;
OF
sermon;
L Serm5nem
segon = Sgsoun, season (time),«.;
ME; < 0F s e s o n ; L s a t i o
setten, set, v., weak 1; ME; <
tfzTsettan
^ sinC6)
•. ME. < 0E s i a 5 a n
several, adj.; NE; < F several;
ZTseparal
seyjen, say, v., weak 3; ME; <
OE sec3an
}
;]
(in^
s ia
v . NE; < 0E s c u l a n
sceal (pres. sing.), pret.-pres.;
ME shal
shalt. see shall, ENE
shame, v.; NE; < OE scamian, v.,
weak 2; ME shamen
s h a p e
n . NE. < 0E
3e.sceap;
ME i-shape
§M
pwn
pgr^
NE; < QE h e o .
ME he/she
sheene, sheen, n., ENE; < rel. to
OE scyne, adj; ME shene, adj.
shine.' v.; NE; < OE sclnan, v., str. 1;
M£ shynen
shjre, shire,«.; ME; < 02? scir
shortly, adv.; ME, NE; < OE scortlice
s h o u I d . V-. ^ ; < 0E s c u I a n f W f
scolde
f/»«sr
subjunct.j;
161
ME
sholde
shoure, shower, it.; ME; < OE scur
ishow. n.; NE; < ME sheue, «•/. to
0/j sceawian, v., weak 2;
ME shaven/shewen/showen
PART 4. GLOSSARY
show, v.; NE; < OE sceawian, v.,
weak 2; ME shaven/shewen/
showen
_
SI, see beon, wesan; OE
sick, adj.; NE; < OE seoc, ME seek
sjcke, sick, adj., ENE,see sick
. A a .,
,„
«„ _,
Side, side, n.; ME; < OE side
solemn, adj.; NE; < ME,
OFsolempne;L solemnem
som, some, pron. indef.; ME;<
OE sum
s o m e , pron.; NE; < OE sum;
M£som
somewhat. /?ron. / adv.; NE; <
OE sum hwxt; ME som-what ^^
Sje, « « beon, wesan; O^
SJ3, see beon, wesan; O£
Sin, see beon, wesan; OE
Since, con;.; ME; < OE si3San;
ME sith(e)
SJT, «.; iVS; < short for sire, F sire;
somtvme. sometime, adv.; ME; <
OE sume-timan
sona, soon, arfv.; OE
s o n d r v . sundry, aJ/.; ME:
(?£syndri3
sonne. sun,«.; ME; < OE sunne
L senior
soote. sweet, adj.; ME; < OE swotfe/
Sister, n.; NE; < OE sweostor;
swete
ME suster (form influenced by §QX& s o r e ( h a r d ) > adv / adj.. ME;k
bc)
OEsare
SJttan,sit,v.,^r.5;O£
o
S r r v . adj.; NE; < OE saris;
si55an. since (afterwards), advJeonj.;
ME sory
0E
SO t h a t . conj.,NE; < OE swa;
Size, v.; NE; < ME (a)ssis(en)i v.,
ME swo, so + OEfcaet; Affi that.,
wea^ 2; rel. to OF assisen
^
s o o t h ( t r u t h ) > n#> n e M t ) a.stemslaue. slave, n., JEWE; < ME sclaue;
0#
OFesclave; 5c sclyaff; L sclavus
n.; NE; < ME soun;
S0Und.
slender, adj.; NE; < ME s(c)lendre;
OF soun
OF esclendre
sounden. sounen. sound, v., weak
s l e p e n . sleep, v., str. 7; ME; <
2;ME; < OF suner; L sonare
OFslSpen
s o u r c e , n.; NE; < ME source;
smale. small, adj.; ME; < OE smasl
OF sours
smede, smooth,adj.; OE
sovereign,
adj.;
NE; '<
, ,
,,
ME sovereyng; OF spvenan
snybben. snubben. snub, v., weak
.
,_
2; ME; < Sc snibbe, snubba
sowperne. southern, adj.; ME; <
OE suoerne
SO, conjJadv.; ME, NE; < OE swa
,,_
. „
*
space, space, n.; ME; < OF espace;
SOlg, adj.; NE; < OF sol; L solum
Lspatium
462
a(a,£e)-b-c-d-e-f-g(^)-h-i-j-k-l-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t-}j(d)-u-v-w-x-y-2
s p e a k e . speak, v., ENE;'<
OE sprecan, v., str. 5; ME speken
s p e c h e . speech, n.; ME; <
OE spralc
specially, especially, adv.; ME; <
rel. to OF especial (adj.),
Ispecialis
s p e k e n . speak, v., str. 4; ME; <
OE sprecan
spell, spell (story), n., neut., a-stem;
stoop, n.\ NE;'< OE stupian, v.,
weak J; ME stoupen
stow, stow (place),«., fern., wo-stem;
OE
Strange, adj.; NE; < ME straunge;
OF estrange; L extraneus
street, street (the road built by the
Romans), n.,fern., o-stem;OE
s t r a u n g e , strange (foreign), adj.;
ME; < OF estrange! L extraneus
OE
strond, strand (shore), n.; ME; <
sprecan. speak, v., str. 5; OE
OE strand
Stable, stable, n.; ME; < OF estable; stycce- mSIum. stockmeal (here
Lstabulum
and there), adv.; 02?
stand, v.;NE;<OEstandan,v.,str. s u b j e c c i o n .
subjeccioun.
6; ME stonden
subjection,
n.;
ME;
<
.rr,
..
OF subjection,
L subiectio
J
J
standard,
adj.; NE;
<
OF estandard; L standardum
succeed, v.; NE; < OF succeder;
L succedere
r . .
State. «.; NE; < OF estat, L statum
s u c h , pron.; NE; < OE swilc;
Ijrr,ME,
statement, n.; NE; < ME/OF estat; —^fE Swich/swuch
L status + OF -ment
,rr,
/>r. t * •
SJUHJ some,pronJadj.;OE
statut. statute, «.; ME; < OF statut;
'
'y
•"
• L statutum
sumdel. (somewhat), adv.; ME; <
.„
,
OE sumne dael
Steep, v.; NE; < ME stepen rel. to
OE stlepan, v., weak 1
sume. some, pron. indef.; OE
stefn, (voice, sound), n. masc. / Sumer, sumor. summer. /;.. masc. u, neut. /fern., o-stem; OE
stem; OE
slgnM!, = stefn, see above; OE
sun, n.; NE; < OE sunne; ME sonne
stenc, stench, n. masc, i-stem; OE
sunne. see sun, n., ENE
5|ggr-bord, star-board,«., neut., a- sunu. son, n., masc, u-stem; OE•
swm 0E
su|)rvhte. south right (right/straight
gjgVjrardL »•; NE; < OE stlweard
to the south), adv.; OE
stick, v.; NE; < OE stician, v., weak sudweard. southward (southwards),
—2TM#stiken
adv.;OE
Still, adv.; NE; < OE stille; ME stille
SWa, so, adv. /prep, /conj.; OE
463
PART 4. GLOSSARY
swa... swa. so (so as... as), conj;, OE SWTde. (very much, exceedingly),^.;
OE
SWech. such, pron.; ME; < OE swilc
SWfjbOSt. (mostly), adv., superl. d:,see
SWeltan. (die, perish), v., str. 3; OE
swi6e; OE
sweren, swear, v., str. 6; ME; < Swore, see sweren ; ME
OE swerian
swura. (neck), n. mascn-stem; OE
SWete. sweet, see soote; ME
sylle; see sellan; OE
SWJch, such, pron. indef.; ME; <
synd. see wesan; OE
OE swilc
SWJlc, such, pron.; OE
systematic,
adj.;
L systematic(us)
NE;, <
take, v.; NE; < OE takan, v., str. 6;
ME taken
t h a t , pron. demonstr ./pron. relat./
conj.; ME, NE;<OE ba?t (se, seo)
t a k e n , take, v., str. 6; ME; <
OE tacan; cf. OSc taka
the, art.; ME, NE; < OE se, seo,
6aet; ME also bat / that
tale, tale, п.; МЯ; < 0 Я talu
thee, pron. pers.; NE; < OE f>e, J)ec;
t a s t e , v.; NE; < ME_ tasten;
OF taster; L taxitare, taxare
, , .,„
techen, teach, v., и/ед^ 1; ME; <
OE
tecan
techvnge, teaching, gerund, see
techen; ME
tell v.; NE; < OE tellan, v., weak 1,
' 'irreg.; ME tellen
tellen, tell, v., weak I, irreg.; ME; <
ДО tellan
their, pron. poss. ; M?; < 0Z? hira /
heara;MEbeir(e); OScbeira
v
*
them, see they; NE
themselues, see themselves, ENE
themselves, pron. reflex.; NE; <
ME f>eim/them; OSc {)eim +
OE self
t h e r . there, adv./conj.; ME; <
OE baer
tend, v.; NE; < ME tenden, v., weak
2;'OFtendre
there, adv.; NE; < OE Ьагг; ME ther,
thar
tendre tender, adj.;ME; < OFtendr&
these, pron. demonstr.; ME, NE; <
^ 7 ;
°*** M
NE; < F texte; L textus
^p^m'aiso&?Bi
П С 1 а П
ti^i i*?at 2;
Рш^тШ
'
Mb tnanken ^
V
E
a l
"
thise
'
a
"™ PL
<
&%$*• "«*•• ™-' <ME ^
"
1ЫШЬ
thither (to that place), adv.;
M£,.< O£, ^jder
465
PART 4. GLOSSARY
thin, thine, thy, pron. poss.; ME; <
E
to^prep.; ME, NE; < OE to
n
° &
tO,to,prep.;OE
thinke, think, v., ENE; < .
, , . „ _„,_
OE pencan, v., weak 1, irregular; & ' t 0 0 ' adv/>ME' < 0E t o
ME thynken
too, adv.;NE;< OE t5; ME to, too
t h i r d e , third, num.; ME; < to-eacan. fin addition to). advJprep.;
OE pridda
OE
t h i r t i e , thirty, num.; ENE; <
0F,priti3;MEthritty/pirty
this, pron. demonstr.; ME, NE; <
OEpis
.
.
,
A
t h i t h e r , adv.; NE; < OE f>ider,
M£ thider
t h o r o w o u t e , throughout, prep.;
ME; < OE
frurh-ut
t h o s e , pron. demonstr.; NE; <
OE f)os; ME thos
thou, (you), / W H . pers., ENE; <
OEt>\x; ME thou
t h o u g h , conj.; NE; < OE £eah;
ME t h o u h
8
t h o u g h t , n.; NE; < OE Jjoht /
3e-{)oht; ME thought
thrift, n.; NE; < ME thrift; OSc fnift
through, prep.; iVfi; < 0 £ f>urh;
M£ thurgh
thus, adv.; NE; < OE fws; M£ thus
thy, (you), pron. p o ^ ; ENE; <
OE $>m; ME thyn(e)/thy
thynken, think, v., weak 1; ME; <
O£'fyncan^metnynketn-1[tnink,
impers. construction
tld, tide (period of time), «., /em.,
o-stem; OE
time, n.; NE; < OE tima; M£ tyme
toforan, (before),adv.;OE
together, pron. demonstr.; NE; <
OE to-^sedere; ME toeedere
°
x
tonge. tongue, n.; ME; < OE tun3e
777"
,
total. «<://.; AE; < F total; L total(is)
tQ&, tooth, n., ma^c, root-stem; OE
touch, v.; AE; < ME touchen, v.,
weak2, OF tochier
toward, toward(s), pron. relative;
ME;<OEto-weard
traditional,
adj.; NE; <
F traditional; L traditional(is)
t r a g e d i e . tragedy, «., ENE; <
0E
tragedie; ME tragedie
travaillen. travel, v., weak 2; ME; <
OF travaillier
treason, n.; A^£; < M£ tresoun;
OF tresoun
iE£§. "•'. ME; < OiS treo; M£ tree
trial
i «•; A^5 < rc/- ^ ME tryen, v.,
weak 2; OF trier
trumpet, /!.; iV£; < ME trompette,
OF trompette
^
v . NE-t < ME trye^ Vi> wefl/t 2 ;
OFtraer
turn, v.; A'E; < <?^ turnian, v., weak
2; ME turnen; re/, to OF turner;
Us = it is, ENE
466
a(a,£e)-b-c-d-e-f-g(3)-h-i-j-k-l-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t-|3(5)-u-v-w-x-y-z
twa, two, num.; OE
tweie. two, num.; ME; < OB trtto
t w e l u e . twelve, num.; ENE; <
OE twelf; ME twelve, twelue
t w e n t y , twenty, num.; ME; <
OEiwen-ti3
twice, num.; NE; < ME twies;
O£ twiwa, twi3es
^^cen, (kid), „ neut., a-stem; OE
tyme, time, n.; ME; < OE tima
PART 4. GLOSSARY
T
hree Catholic
zealots fleeing
persecution
jba, (then), adv.; OE
p_agt vice, that ilk (just the same),
Pronr'
^ j p '
fct, (when), conj.; OE
|>a, those, pron. demons*., pi; OE
yet, «*.; «?
ujm,
O E
( w h e n " t h e n ) ' conjJadv.;
M j
б а е т , foam, that (those), pron.
demonstr.; see se; OE
w h i c h > t h a t ) > pwn
r d a t
,
conj.
(often
placed
in
combination with pronouns); OE
p a n , than, conj.; ME; < OE fcanne fee, the, art.; ME; < OE se, seo, |>aet
foanne, foonne, than, then (when), foeah. though, cwy.; OJB
COT;.,
foe5en.
(warrior), п., inasc, a-stein;
|>anon, thence (from there), adv.; 0Л?
OE
5Г£Г, |)Sra, there, дЛ. /conj.; OE
f)eodscipe. (people, tribe),n.;OE;<
»—
,
,
,
suffix rel. toNE-ship
JJ
o a e r e , that, pro/i. demonstr., dat. sing.,
*
fem.; see seo; OE
foeowian.
(serve), v\; weak 2; OE
|)ser-of, thereof, adv.; OE
fcerby.
thereby, adv.; ME; < OE
>
*
i •
fcaer-b!
i
pa3S, p e s , шг^, /;го/г. demonstr.;
OE
fcere,
paes-f>e, ^ей pss, pe; OE
_ _,
. .
,
9get, that, co«/. / pron. demonstr.;
<7J5"
bat, that, pro/7, demonstrJpron. relatJ
conj.;ME;<OE$azt
'
. __
paet... paet, that... that, conj.; OE
there, adv./conj.; ME; <
pes, this, рго/г. demonstr., masc; OE
f
1
p e y , they, р/шг. perj.; MJE ; <
OScb&a
Older, thither (there, to that place),
adv. OE
468
a(a,a)-b-c-d-e-f-g('Q-h-i-i-k-l-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t-b(d)-u-v-w-x-v-z
frjn, thine, thy, pron. posses.; OE
fere,
three, num.; ME; < OE f>n
fcing. thing, n. neut., astern; OE
frrle.
three, num.; OE
jbing, thing, n.; ME; < OE f>in3
forim.
see f>rle; OE
fois. this, pro/i. demonstr.; ME; < feu, thee, thou (you), pron. pers,
OE f)is
sing. (ace. pec, $e, dat. £e, gen.
bissum. this, pron. demonstr., dat.
*""* °E
sing., masc. (see jbes,); OE
dus. thus, adv.; OE
foonan. thence (from there), adv.; OE ftyder, thither (there, to that place),
-done, that (the),pron. demonstr.;see
_a V"'
se; Oi?
foystrian,
(become dark), v., wea/t 2;
bowsand. thousand, ««/». (subst.);
ME; < OE fcusend
PART 4. GLOSSARY
^шшУ
ncleSam
unanswered, adj.; NE; < rel. to
OE un + OE andswarian, v., weak
2; ME answeren
undergietan. (understand), v., weak
3; OE > rel. to NE under, get
unfrid. (hostility), п., masc, astern;
OE
upweard, upward (upwards), adv.;
OE
US. pron. pers.; NE; < OE us; ME us
usage, usage (custom), п.; ME, NE;
< OF usage
use, v.; NE; < F user, L Qsare
unintelligible, adj. ;NE;<OEun +
Fintelligible;/, intelligibilis
useful, adj.; NE; < ME/OF us;
L Osus + OE/ME -ful
unite, v.; NE; < L unit
u s e n . use, v., weak 2; ME; <
OF user; L usare
unto, prep.; < rel. to und (OFries,
Goth, OSax) + OE to; ME unto
fit, out, adv.; OE
up, adv.; NE; < OE up, upp; ME up
fltagan.
(go out, go forth), v.,
anom.; OE
up-in, up in, adv.; OE
uplondisshe, uplandish, adj.; ME;
< OE up-lendisc
u p o n , prep.; NE; < OE uppon;
ME upon
Utan. out (on/from the outside), adv.;
OE
a(a,ae)-b-c-d-e-f-g(3)-h-i-j-k-l-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t-l3(6)-u-v-w-x-y-z
V.
irtuous wife
validitie. validity, п., ENE; <
F validite; L validitas
v i s i t a t i o n . «.; NE; < rel. to
F visiter; L uisitare + F -tion
valley, п.; NE; < ME valeie;
OF valee
vnripe. unripe, adj., ENE; < OE unripe; ME unripe
valley-fountain, n. (composite), vnshaken, unshaken, adj. I part. 2
of shake, ENE; < OE ип+зеsee valley, fountain; NE
scacen; OE scacan (inf), v., str. 6;
variety. n.;NE; < rel. to ME varien,
ME shaken
v.; OF varier; L variare; F variete,
voice, п.; NE; < ME, OF vois;
n.;L varietas
L uocem
vertu. virtue (force), п.; ME; <
vouch, v.; NE; < MF voucher;
OF vertu
L uocare
Very, adv.; NE; < OF verai; L ueras
vouchsafe, v.; NE; see vouch, safe
yeyne. vein, п.; ME; < OE veine
voyden. void, v., weak ; ME; < rel.
Violence, п.; NE; < ME violence;
to OF voide, adj.
OF violence; L violentia
Vp. see up, ENE
violent, adj.; NE; < ME violent;
Vpon. see upon, ENE
OF violent
visit, v.; # # ; < F visiter; L uisitare
VS, see us, ENE,
PART 4. GLOSSARY
w
ifeofBath
walk, v.; NE; < OE wealcan, v., str.
7; ME walken
want, n.; NE; < ME want(e); OSc
Vant
warm, adj.:NE: < OE wearm
——— •*
wasron. were, v., past t.; see wesan;
wel, well (almost, very), adv.; ME; <
OEwel
welcome, see well, come; NE
well, adv.; NE; < OE, ME wel
.,tU. ,
w e n a n . ween (think, suppose,
believe), v., weak I; OE
w e n d a n . wend (go), v., weak 1; OE
•,
,, .
, , H,p.
w e n d e n . wend (go), v., weak 1;ME;
< OE wendan
w e n t , went , past t., see wenden;
waes. was, v.,past
t. (see wesan); OE
y
'
wash, n.; NE; < OE wsesc; ME wassh
Wast, see witan; OE
Western, western, adj.; OE
w a t c h , v , NE; < OE wa^ccan, v., ^^Mk,
(become), v., str. 3;OE
weak 3; ME wacchen
were(n). were, pas? f., see been; ME
way, n.; NE; < OE we3; ME wey, were. seebe,NE
Way
w e s a n . (be), v., 5?r. 5, defective
we, /?ron. perj.; ME, NE; < OE we
fprej. /. sing, eom, eart, is; pi. sint,
.,,««ir /• \rc
i * /IE- synd. sindan, sindon; pcwf f. wass,
3£§aSi
' ^ ' ^ ^ r e t t o ° W££Can '
w«ron; J M y . si, sl 3 , pi. sin; « «
y.,w^7;M£:weken
beon);OE
w e a r v^; yVE; < O£ werian, v., weak w e s t a n w i n d . west wind,«., /WOK?., fl/;M£weren
'
s(em.OE
Weddian V
^•'ME^wcdden
' "' ^ ^
weste. waste (uninhabited), arfj.; O£
weste, west, at//.; ME; < OE west
472
a(a,a)-b-c-d-e-f-g(^)-h-i-i-k-i-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t-b(d)-u-v-w-x-y-z
Westen. waste (uninhabited land), n.,
neut.,ja-stem;OE
westwearri, westward (westwards),
adv.;OE
WJ5£, way, n.; ME; <0Ewe^
3
W WC
^ J
a§yk, weak, adj.;ME;<OEwac
y
'
S h a n , when, adv. /pron.; ME; <
waenne
willan, will (want, wish), v., mom.; OE
.,,
.,, ,
WlHen, will (would), anom. verb;
ME; < OE willan
win, wine, n. neut., astern; OE
. .
«„
winter, winter,».. masc. u-stem: OE
• „
, , .
,.
,
Wircan, work (perform, do), v., weak
1, irreg.; OE
wirisan. wyrgan. (outlaw, curse),
Shat) pron. indef./interrogative;
v.,weakl;OE
ME,NE;<OE^xt
wisely, adv.; NE; < OE wis;
ffihech, which, pron. rel.; ME; <
SJien, adv.; NE; < OE hwanne/
hwa3nne;M£:whan(ne)
^
^^whSSrNEi
< 0E hwSr:
mn wner(e)
Svlnch., /?^o/z. rel. / indef. /
interrogative,
ME, NE; <
0 £ hwile; MEflfaowhiche
SEll!l,whUe,awyVflrfi».;MB;<Ofihwil
S!hQ,pron. interrog./indef./rel.; NE;
< OE hwa; ME who
ffihole, ^ y , ^ ; < O£ hal; ME hal/
whole
, __
V^lCian. (live), v., »pea& 2; O£
•J i
„,,„
-J
nT^
w i d e l y , arfv., £A^£; < OE wid;
ME wyd + OE -lie, ME -ly
Wld-saL wide sea, 7i., fern., i-stem; OE
~Z
._
Wlj, (battle), n., neut., a-stem; OE
...
__ ...
Wilde, wild,adj.;ME;<OEwide
Will, «.; A®; <OEwilla; ME wille
Will, v.; A^E; < OE willan, omwia/. v.;
ME willen
Willa. will, n. m « , n-jton; OE
473
ME wys + OE lie
WJSSe, (knew), v., past t.; see witan;
OE
wiste. J g g witan; O£
HBM*
wit (know observe know
'
'
'
understand), v., pret.-pres. (pres.
t. sing, wat, wast, wat; pi. witon;
past t. wisse, wist; part. 2 witenj;
0£"
with, prep.; ME, NE; < OE wid;
withal. Wv.; A^£; < C751 wifl+eal;
^ withal
Wlthdrawen. withdraw, v., str. 6;
M£; < £>£" wi3 + dra3an
Wltodhc, (certain, sure), «*#.; OJ?
wijj, with, /;/•<?/?.; OE, ME
wlaffen, stammer, v., weak 2; ME; <
OEwlaffian
wlaifervnge. stammering, gerund;
— j e e wlaffen
y ^ n . ^jj. < 0 £ wg; M £ wo; 0
woe is me! - interjection (phrasal
Uttit
>
wol, will, see wilien; ME
PART 4. GLOSSARY
wold, would, see willen; ME
wolde, would (wished), v., past t.;see
willan; OE
wormwood,
п.;
NE;. <
OE wermwod; ME wermode
(corrupted form)
wolde(n), would, see willen; ME; <
OE willan, wolden (pastpi.)
w o r s h i p , п.; NE; < short for
worthship, OE weor5 scipe;
ME worth ship
woman, п.; NE; < OE wlf-man;
ME womman
Worst, adv.; NE; < OE wyrst;
ME wurst, werst
WOnen, (dwell, remain), v., weak 2;
ME; < OE wunian
Would, v., see will; NE
WOnien, (be used to, dwell, remain),
v., weak 2; ME; < OE wunian
write, v.;NE; < OE wrltan, v., str. 1;
ME writen
Word, //.; OE, ME, NE
wyde, wide, adj.; ME; < OE wld
WOrhton, v., past t.; see wircan; OE
wylle, see willa; OE
work, п.; NE; < OE weorc; ME were
w o r l d , п.; NE; < OE woruld;
ME worlde
a(a,ge)-b-c-d-e-f-g(^)-h-i-i-k-l-m-n-o-p-q-r-s-t-l3(9)-u-v-w-x-y-z
Y
eoman - a proper forester
y_§, eye, n.; ME; < OE Ea^e.
yes, particle, NE; < OE yse, 3ese;
ME yis, yus
.Vet, adv.; NE; < OE 3it; ME yet
fcfaUe,falUee fallen; MS
,,P l
.„
yjel, evil, n.,neut.,i-stem;OE
yjc = i k , ilk (same) (0 of that ilk,
archaic - the same), pron. indef.;
OE
yldre. elder, fli/;., comp degr., see
eald;<9£
ymb. (about/around),prepJadv.; OE
yonge. young, adj.; ME; < OE3eon3
YOU, pron. pers.; NE; < OE eow;
ME you
your, pron. poss.; NE; < OE eower;
M2?your(e)
y o w , you, pron. pers.; ME; <
J
o~E ^ow
y . r o n n e . r u n ) p a r U 2 ; see r y n e n ; ME
y§. - IS, see wesan; OE
^ t t = 1M, jee etan; OE
Tart 5.
Summary
Philosopher in his study
John Stanbridse, London, 1520
Основные вехи в истории английского языка
449
- высадка первых германцев на Британские острова
7 век - введение Христианства
7- 9 века - Семицарствие. Территориальные диалекты
871 -901 - правление короля Альфреда Великого
9 век - скандинавское завоевание
878
- раздел Британских островов на зоны англосаксонского и датского (скандинавского) правления
9-10 века- превосходство Уэссекса и уэссекского диалекта
- основного диалекта древнеанглийского периода
1017-1042 - переход всей Англии под власть датского
(скандинавского) короля
1066 - Битва при Гастингсе. Норманнское завоевание
11-13 века - французский язык - язык государственного
устройства, судопроизводства и обучения
13 век - первый Парламент страны
1258 - Прокламация короля Генриха III впервые
опубликована на французском и английском языках
14 в е к - возврат английского языка во все сферы жизни
страны. Лондонский диалект - основной диалект
языка. Творчество Дж. Чосера
1477 - введение книгопечатания
1455-1485 - война Алой и Белой Розы. Централизация
страны, образование национального языка.
15 в е к - установление абсолютной монархии
16 в е к - разрыв с Римской католической церковью
16-17 века - начало эпохи Великих географических
открытий
1649-1660 - Великая буржуазная революция. Правление
Оливера Кромвеля
1660 - реставрация монархии
17-18 века установление
литературной
нормы
английского языка. Творчество Уильяма Шекспира
17-20 века - географическая экспансия английского языка
17 век - первые английские поселенцы в Америке
18 век - колонизация Индии и Канады
19 век - освоение Австралии
20 век - появление английских поселенцев в Южной Африке
Лекция 1.
Введение. Общие характеристики
германских языков
/. Цель изучения предмета. Любой язык представляет собой
постоянно изменяющееся историческое явление. Изменения охватывают
все аспекты языка: грамматику и словарь, фонетику и письменность.
Основная цель изучения истории языка состоит в объяснении
сегодняшнего этапа его существования, позволяющем лучше понять его
современные особенности.
2. Внутренняя и внешняя история языка. Внешняя история
любого языка - это события в жизни народа, говорящего на нем,
оказывающие влияние на сам язык, это отражение истории людей в
языке, на котором они говорят. Внутренняя история языка описывает
изменения, происходящие в самом языке, его грамматике, словарном
составе, фонетическом строе и письменности.
3. Основные характеристики германских языков. Германские
языки принадлежат к индоевропейской языковой семье. В начале
первого тысячелетия германские племена проживали на обширных
территориях Западной, Центральной и Восточной Европы.
3.1. Фонетические особенности. К основным характеристикам
фонетического строя германских языков относятся: динамическое
ударение, фиксированное на первом корневом слоге; абляут позиционно независимое чередование гласных в корне, суффиксе или
окончании слова, способствующее формо- и словообразованию; умляут фонетическая ассимиляция корневого гласного с гласным окончания,
проявляющаяся как своего рода внутренняя флексия; передвижения
согласных - регулярные фонетические соответствия согласных
германских и прочих индоевропейских языков.
3.2. Грамматические особенности. Германские языки были
языками синтетического строя. Именные части речи имели категории
падежа, рода и числа, глагольные - времени, наклонения, лица и числа.
Основными способами формообразования были окончания, а также
чередование гласных в корне слова (особенно в глаголах) и в редких
случаях супплетивизм - образование разных форм слова от разных
корней.
5.3. Система письма. Германцы имели собственный, так
называемый рунический алфавит, и фонетическую систему письма, при
которой каждый звук передавался одним символом - руной. Этот
алфавит появился во втором веке нашей оры и просуществовал у
некоторых народов в течение всего средневековья.
479
PART 5. SUMMARY
Лекция 2.
Древнеанглийский период. Общая
характеристика
/. Внешняя история. История английского языка начинается с 5
века нашей эры, когда произошло вторжение западногерманских племен
англов, саксов, ютов и фризов на Британские острова. Захватив почти все
плодородные земли, они частично уничтожили, частично вытеснили, а
частично подчинили себе местное население - кельтов.
/./. Основные письменные памятники. Первые письменные
памятники представляют образцы рунического письма.
В 7 веке с приходом Христианства на Британские острова пришли и
многочисленные монахи, говорившие на латыни и использовавшие
латинский алфавит, который постепенно вытеснил рунический,
позаимствовав из него отдельные символы для обозначения звуков,
отсутствовавших в латыни - так возникло так называемое инсулярное,
или островное письмо.
1.2. Диалектная классификация письменных памятников.
1.2.1. В отличие от племенных диалектов германских, племен до их
переселения на Британские острова, диалекты древнеанглийского
периода являются территориальными и именуются по названию
королевств, в которых на них говорили. Наиболее важными
королевствами и, таким образом, диалектами того периода были
Нортумбрия (нортумбрийский диалект), Мерсия (мерсийский диалект) и
Уэссекс (уэссекский диалект).
1.2.2. Основные письменные памятники периода написаны
инсулярным письмом. Большинство их них относятся к уэссекскому
диалекту и представлены трактатами религиозного содержания, а также
хрониками, историческими и философскими трудами.
2. Внутренняя история. В течение древнеанглийского периода
язык развивался крайне медленно.
2.1.
Фонетические
особенности. Фонетический
строй
древнеанглийского периода отличался фиксированным динамическим
ударением, падавшим на первый корневой слог слова.
Количественные и качественные характеристики гласных звуков
были позиционными, т.е. зависели от положения звука в слове. Долгота
ударных гласных была фонематичной, позволяя различать слова только
долготой ударного корневого гласного. Существовал полный
параллелизм долгих и кратких гласных звуков, как монофтонгов, так и
дифтонгов.
Согласные были менее многочисленны, чем в современном языке. В
их числе не было некоторых фрикативных, звуков. Имелся ряд
480
ЛЕКЦИИ 1—12
позиционных качественных характеристик согласных, в том числе
звонкость/глухость звука.
2.2. Система письма. Древнеанглийская письменность была в
основном фонематична - каждой букве соответствовал один звук.
2.3. Грамматические особенности. Как и другие германские
языки, древнеанглийский был языком синтетического строя с хорошо
развитой системой флексий. Основными средствами передачи
'Рематических значений были суффиксация, чередование гласных и
супплетивизм. Порядок слов в предложении был относительно
свободным.
2.4. Словарный состав. Словарный состав почти полностью
состоял из исконных слов. Немногочисленные заимствования были
'лавным образом из латыни. Новые слова образовывались путем
Деривации (создания производных слов) и словосложения.
Лекция 3.
Среднеанглийский период. Общая
характеристика
1. Внешняя история.
1.1. Скандинавское вторжение. Скандинавское вторжение
продолжалось в течение более двух веков, с конца 8 по начало 11 века,
когда под контроль завоевателей перешла вся Англия. Скандинавское
вторжение и последовавшее за ним переселение скандинавов на
территорию Англии, их постоянные контакты и смешение с местным
населением оказали глубокое воздействие на все аспекты английского
языка. Относительная легкость взаимопроникновения языков
объяснялась отсутствием каких-либо политических, социальных,
культурных или языковых барьеров между их носителями.
1.2. Норманнское завоевание. Началом норманнского завоевания
считается 1066 год. Норманны, скандинавское племя, переселившееся за
два века до этого на территорию современной Франции, восприняли
язык и культуру своей новой страны, и именно французский язык они
принесли с собой на Британские острова.
В результате норманнского завоевания французский язык на два с
лишним века стал языком правящих классов, языком королевского двора,
парламента, судопроизводства, церкви и школы, отодвинув английский
на второй план. Восстановление утраченной роли английского языка в 14
веке сопровождалось большим количеством заимствований из
французского и существенным изменением грамматической структуры
языка.
481
PART 5. SUMMARY
1.3.
Образование
национального
английского языка.
Национальный английский язык сложился к 15 веку на базе лондонского
диалекта, сформировавшегося из ранних южных и юго-восточных
диалектов. Столица Англии, начиная с 11 века, Лондон был крупнейший
экономическим, политическим, а также культурным центром, в котором
жили и работали многие лучшие писатели и поэты того времени. Однако
литературная норма языка возникла гораздо позднее, только в
новоанглийский период.
2. Внутренняя история. Среднеанглийский период был временем
беспрецедентно быстрого развития языка. Этому способствовало то, что
в течение первых трех веков периода английский был исключительно
устным языком, не имел письменной нормы и мог изменяться без
существенных ограничений. В результате все аспекты языка претерпели
фундаментальные изменения.
2.1. Фонетические особенности. Фиксированное динамическое
ударение сохраняется в исконных словах, в заимствованиях (особенно
французских) ударение падает на последний слог слова.
Появляются новые согласные (фрикативные и аффрикаты). Качество
согласных перестает быть позиционным.
Ударные гласные претерпевают количественные изменения под
влиянием так называемой ритмической тенденции, усредняющей
длительность слога.
2.2. Грамматические особенности. Грамматический строй в
среднеанглийский период претерпевает фундаментальные изменения,
превращая синтетический древнеанглийский язык в язык аналитического
строя. Возникающие аналитические средства передачи грамматических
значений в конце периода становятся доминирующими.
2.3. Словарный состав. Словарный состав языка в течение
среднеанглийского периода почти полностью обновился за счет
чрезвычайно большого числа заимствований, главным образом
скандинавских и французских. Наряду с внешними источниками
пополнения словаря определенную роль играли и внутренние - в том
числе образование производных слов с использованием исконных и
заимствованных элементов.
Лекция 4.
Новоанглийский период. Общая
характеристика
/. Внешняя история
11 Становление нации. 15 век стал поворотной вехой в истории
английского народа. Закончившаяся в 1485 году война Алой и Белой
482
ЛЕКЦИИ 1—12
Розы означала конец феодальной раздробленности и переход к
пигализму, реальное политическое и экономическое объединение
траны, появление единой нации и единого национального языка.
повоанглийский период стал периодом великих географических
рыгии, присоединения к британской империи новых земель и
роких контактов с носителями других языков на всех континентах,
оставивших свой след в английском языке.
Именно этот период дал миру такие великие имена, как Шекспир,
1енсер, Бэкон, Марлоу и многие другие.
Относительно спокойное развитие страны было нарушено в 17 веке,
когда противоречие королевской власти и парламента привело к переходу
власти к последнему, казни короля, а затем, через несколько лет,
Реставрации монархии. Возвращение на престол сына казненного
короля, прожившего более десяти лет в ссылке во Франции, знаменовало
новую волну влияния французского языка.
^•2. Установление литературной нормы. Литературная норма
английского языка сформировалась в конце 17 века, когда появились
первые словари и грамматики, основанные на научных принципах и
ставившие своей целью стабилизировать использование языка.
Существенный вклад в становление литературной нормы внесли также
многие знаменитые литераторы своего времени, и в первую очередь
Уильям Шекспир. Стандарт разговорного английского языка установился
несколько позднее.
1.3. Географическое распространение английского языка в 17-20
веках. Новоанглийский период стал периодом языкового объединения
страны и вытеснения нормированным английским других языков и
Диалектов - кельтского, уэльского, ирландского и др.
В 16 веке с экспансией британского колониализма началось
проникновение английского языка в другие регионы земного шара: в 17
веке - в Северную Америку, в 18 - Индию, 19 - Австралию и 20 Южную Африку. Сейчас английский язык является национальным
языком более 300 миллионов человек во всем мире, а в качестве своего
второго языка его признает во много раз большее число людей.
2. Внутренняя история. Скорость развития языка в течение всего
периода постепенно замедляется, чему особенно способствует
установление литературной нормы, оказывающей стабилизирующее
воздействие на язык.
2.1. Фонетические особенности. Ударение в исконных словах
фиксировано, в заимствованных может падать на любой слог.
Ритмическая тенденция привела к возникновению вторичных ударений в
многосложных словах.
483
PART 5. SUMMARY
Изменения в согласных звуках были не столь велики, как в
среднеанглийский период. Новым явлением была позиционная
вокализация согласных.
Безударные гласные на конце слов в большинстве случаев исчезли,
гласные под ударением подверглись влиянию так называемого Великого
сдвига - качественного изменения, в результате которого они стали более
узкими и передними по месту их артикуляции
2.2. Грамматические особенности. Грамматический строи в
новоанглийский период не претерпел фундаментальных изменении.
Основные изменения касались усиления аналитических черт языка,
расширения использования вспомогательных слов, увеличения числа
аналитических форм, укрепления фиксированного порядка слов в
предложении.
2.3. Словарный состав. Словарь - самый быстро развивающийся
аспект языка новоанглийского периода. Способы обогащения словарного
состава языка - как внутренние (образование производных слов,
конверсия), так и внешние (заимствования). Источники последних
весьма многочисленны благодаря не только прямым, но и косвенным
(через книги, а в 20 веке - через кино, радио, телевидение) контактам со
всем миром.
Лекция 5.
Фонетика древнеанглийского периода
/. Гласные древнеанглийского периода.
1.0. В древнеанглийский период существовал полный параллелизм
долгих и кратких гласных, как монофтонгов, так и дифтонгов, что
позволяет говорить о фонематичности качественных и количественных
характеристик гласных.
/./. Все гласные древнеанглийского периода происходят от гласных
общегерманского праязыка, хотя и с некоторыми изменениями,
результате которых монофтонги могли превращаться в дифтонги
наоборот.
1.2. В доисторический период развития английского языка в
гласных произошел ряд качественных изменений, объясняющих различие
между древнеанглийскими и общегерманскими гласными фонемами, ^т
изменения были двух видов: позиционными (или ассимилятивными)
независимыми
(неассимилятивными).
Наиболее
важным^
ассимилятивными изменениями были преломление и палатальна
перегласовка.
1.2.1. Результатом преломления стало появление дифтонгов и
монофтонгов в определенном фонетическом окружении.
ЛЕКЦИИ 1—12
1.2.2. Палатальная перегласовка привела к сужению и сдвигу вперед
Р'г"куляции большинства гласных под влиянием последующих звуков
и появлению новых гласных фонем.
1.2.3. Последствия палатальной перегласовки проявились как в
грамматике, так и в словарном составе языка. В грамматике она привела
к
чередованию гласных в корне слова у существительных корневого
склонения и в степенях сравнения прилагательных, а также у
неправильных слабых глаголов. Чередование гласных в корне в
результате палатальной перегласовки стало также средством
словообразования.
110 а
2. Согласные древнеанглийского периода
2.0. Система древнеанглийских согласных отличалась от
современной рядом особенностей. Среди них можно отметить
сравнительно небольшое число фонем, отсутствие фрикативных
согласных и аффрикатов, а также зависимость качественных
характеристик фонемы от ее непосредственного окружения в слове,
последнее привело к появлению так называемых позиционных
вариантов, впоследствии развившихся в разные фонемы.
Соответствие английских согласных согласным других
индоевропейских языков объясняется двумя фонетическими законами,
именуемыми по имени их авторов Законом Гримма и Законом Вернера.
Лекция 6.
Грамматика древнеанглийского
периода. Система имени
0. Древнеанглийский язык был языком синтетического строя,
предусматривавшего передачу всех основных грамматических значений
изменением формы самого слова, сочетавшего в себе как лексическое,
так и грамматическое значение. Он отличался большим количеством
флексий как в парадигме имени, так и в парадигме глагола, и наличием
нескольких вариантов формоизменения в рамках каждой парадигмы в
зависимости от первоначальной структуры слова.
1. Общая характеристика системы имени. В древнеанглийском
языке было пять склоняемых частей речи: существительное,
местоимение, прилагательное, числительное и причастие.
2. Существительное.
Парадигма существительного в
древнеанглийский период объединяла три грамматических категории:
род, число и падеж.
2.1. Категория рода была образована оппозицией трех форм:
мужского, женского и среднего рода. Отнесение существительных к тому
485
PART 5. SUMMARY
или иному роду не основывалось на их биологической принадлежности к
таковым.
2.2. Категория числа была образована оппозицией форм
множественного и единственного числа.
2.3. Категория падежа объединяла формы четырех надежей:
именительного, родительного, дательного и винительного.
Различие в типах склонения существительных объясняется
особенностями их первоначальной структуры. В общегерманском языке
большинство существительных имело три элемента: корень,
основообразующий суффикс и окончание. Именно этот изначальный
основообразующий суффикс и является основанием для классификации
существительных но группам, или "склонениям", хотя сам он в
древнеанглийский период зачастую уже не виден, так как слился с корнем
или претерпел некоторые иные изменения.
2.4. В доисторический период развития английского языка каждый
падеж имел собственные отчетливые окончания, зависящие от типа
склонения существительного и его рода. Однако впоследствии
различные семантические и фонетические процессы привели к
сближению окончаний в пределах одной парадигмы и появлению
омонимичных падежных форм. Это послужило одной из предпосылок
создания новых средств для передачи грамматических значений.
3. Местоимение. В древнеанглийский период существовали
различные классы местоимений: личные, притяжательные, указательные,
вопросительные, относительные и неопределенные. Система склонения
различных типов местоимений была неодинаковой, поскольку одни и те
же грамматические категории имели различное число категориальных
форм.
3.1. Личные местоимения имели грамматические категории,
сходные с категориями существительного. Однако различие в роде
проявлялись только у существительных третьего лица единственного
числа, а категория числа местоимений первого и второго лица была
образована оппозицией не двух, а трех форм: единственного,
множественного и двойственного числа.
Другим отличием местоимений является то, что в их парадигме
широко используются супплетивные формы, а омонимия проявляется
незначительно.
3.2.
Все
прочие
местоимения
склонялись
подобно
существительным, за исключением того, что в отличие от них некоторые
местоимения имели пять падежных форм, добавляя форму
инструментального падежа.
486
ЛЕКЦИИ 1—12
4. Прилагательное.
Парадигма прилагательного схожа с
парадигмой существительного и местоимения. Она включает формы
падежей, родов и чисел.
4.1. Особенностью склонения прилагательных было наличие двух
1Ипов склонения: определенного и неопределенного, по которым могло
склоняться одно и то же прилагательное. Значение данного явления было
впоследствии воплощено в категории артикля, возникшей существенно
нозднее.
4.2. Еще одной категорией прилагательных были степени
сравнения. Способы выражения значений степеней сравнения, как и
Других грамматических значений, были синтетическими: суффиксация,
чередование гласных в корне и супплетивизм. Чередование гласных в
формах степеней сравнения стало результатом палатальной перегласовки,
происшедшей в дописьменный период развития языка, и не встречается в
Других германских языках.
Лекция 7.
Грамматика древнеанглийского
периода. Система глагола
/• Общий обзор личных и неличных форм глагола. Глагольная
система древнеанглийского языка была представлена личными и
неличными формами глагола, различие между которыми было более
существенным, чем в настоящее время, поскольку неличные формы не
только спрягались, но и склонялись, подобно именным частям речи.
2. Грамматические категории личных форм глагола. Система
спряжения древнеанглийского глагола включала категории времени,
наклонения, числа и лица.
2.1. Категория лица глагола включала формы первого, второго и
третьего лица. Это различие проявлялось только в формах единственного
числа изъявительного наклонения.
2.2. Категория числа была образована оппозицией форм
единственного и множественного числа.
2.3. Категория времени была представлена формами настоящего и
будущего времени. Значение будущего времени выражалось с помощью
формы настоящего в сочетании с временным наречием или сочетанием
модального глагола с инфинитивом.
2.4. Категория наклонения включала формы изъявительного,
повелительного и косвенного наклонения. Последнее использовалось
для выражения как нереальных, так и проблематичных действий (для
4S7
PART 5. SUMMARY
чего в современном английском используется два разных наклонения), а
также вместо изъявительного наклонения для передачи косвенной речи.
3. Морфологическая классификация глаголов. Все глаголы
древнеанглийского языка можно подразделить на группы в зависимости
от грамматических средств, используемых при образовании их основ чередование гласных в корне и суффиксация.
3.1. Т. наз. сильные глаголы использовали в качестве основного
средства выражения различных грамматических категорий чередование
гласных в корне, или абляут. Грамматические окончания присоединялись
непосредственно к корню-основе глагола.
Сильные глаголы относятся к наиболее древним глаголам языка.
Существовало несколько классов сильных глаголов, отличающихся
формой проявления абляута, зависящей от первоначальной фонетической
структуры основы глагола.
3.2. Т. наз. слабые глаголы более новые по времени своего
появления в языке. В качестве основного грамматического средства
образования основы они использовали суффиксацию. Этот способ
образования форм был наиболее продуктивным, и именно его
использовали вновь образуемые или заимствованные глаголы, постоянно
расширяя число слабых глаголов.
Слабые глаголы, в отличие от сильных, имели перед
грамматическим окончанием основообразующий суффикс, в зависимости
от которого их также можно разделить на несколько классов.
Лекция 8.
Изменения в фонетической системе в
среднеанглийский и новоанглийский
периоды
1. Среднеанглийский период.
1.1. Гласные в безударном положении. Все гласные в безударном
положении претерпели качественное изменение, превратившись в
нейтральный звук'[]. Это фонетическое изменение оказало очень сильное
влияние на грамматическую структуру языка, поскольку в результате него
многие грамматические окончания слов стали омонимичными.
1.2. Гласные под ударением претерпели как количественные, так и
качественные изменения.
1.2.1. Качественным изменениям подверглись три долгих и два
кратких монофтонга, а также все дифтонги, которые в конце
древнеанглийского периода претерпели стяжение, превратившись в
488
ЛЕКЦИИ 1—12
монофтонги. Одновременно возникли новые дифтонги, образовавшиеся
из сочетания гласного звука с согласным, подвергшимся вокализации.
1.2.2. Имелись также количественные изменения ударных гласных.
Они происходили в определенных позициях, называемых удлиняющими
или сокращающими.
Эти процессы оставили свой след в грамматике и словарном
составе языка; приведя к возникновению чередования корневых гласных
в различных формах одного и того же слова, а также появлению
различных гласных в исторически однокоренных словах.
1.3. Согласные. Наиболее важным изменением в системе согласных
среднеанглийского периода было возникновение фрикативного [f] и
а
Ффрикат[1<|"] и № ] из палатальных согласных или сочетаний с
палатальным согласным, имевшихся в древнеанглийском языке. Это
привело к разделению аллофонов на самостоятельные фонемы.
Самостоятельными фонемами стали и аллофоны согласных,
отличавшихся в древнеанглийский период по глухости/звонкости (s/z, f/v,
о\9).
2. Новоанглийский период.
2.1. Гласные в безударном положении, нейтрализованные в
среднеанглийском, в новоанглийский период опускаются и в редких
случаях остаются исключительно для благозвучия.
2.2. Гласные под ударением претерпели как количественные, так и
качественные изменения.
2.2.1. Все долгие монофтонги подверглись процессу, именуемому
Великим сдвигом гласных, в результате которого они стали более узкими
и сдвинутыми вперед по способу артикуляции. Некоторые из них при
этом превратились в дифтонги. Особо следует отметить случаи, когда за
долгим гласным, претерпевавшим Великий сдвиг, следовал звук "г",
который, вокализуясь, изменял предшествующий гласный, делая его
более открытым и превращая монофтонг в дифтонг, а дифтонг - в
трифтонг.
Определенные позиционные качественные изменения произошли и
с некоторыми краткими монофтонгами ([а], [и]).
Два из четырех среднеанглийских дифтонгов ([ai], [аи]} под
влиянием Великого сдвига также сузились, причем один из них, [аи], при
этом превратился в монофтонг [и].
2.2.2. Количественные изменения гласных в новоанглийский период
были вызваны главным образом вокализацией согласных [г] и [h],
удлиняющих предшествующий краткий гласный, а в некоторых случаях и
изменяя его качественно.
489
PART 5. SUMMARY
2.3. Согласные. Изменения в согласных звуках в новоанглийскии
период не очень многочисленны. К ним относится появление новой
фонемы [3] и развитие аффрикат из палатальных согласных в
заимствованных словах, а также озвончение фрикативных согласных
после безударных гласных и в словах, не несущих синтаксического
ударения.
3. Изменения в алфавите и системе письма в среднеанглийский и
новоанглийский
периоды.
Фонетическая система письма,
существовавшая в древнеанглийском, в 13-14 веках подверглась
существенным изменениям в результате деятельности переписчиков,
находившихся под влиянием французских традиций письма, а также
зачастую допускавших смысловые ошибки.
"Островное письмо" было вытеснено "континентальным", в
результате чего были утрачены некоторые буквы, а соответствующие им
звуки стали обозначаться новыми, позаимствованными из французской
письменности, а также сочетаниями букв - диграфами, что также было
характерно для французского языка.
Орфографическая норма возникла одновременно с литературной
нормой, однако она подвергалась неоднократным попыткам ее
улучшения или рационализации. В 16 веке был предложен новый
принцип письма, стремившийся отразить исконную форму слова, но
приводящий зачастую к ошибкам.
В то же время крупные фонетические изменения, включая Великий
сдвиг гласных, практически не отразились на системе письменности. В
результате в современном английском языке один и тот же звук
передается зачастую разными буквами и их комбинациями, а одна и та же
буква может иметь разное прочтение. Кроме того, имеется большое
количество нечитаемых, букв, как отражающих написание прежних
периодов, так и добавленных впоследствии для обозначения
особенностей чтения предшествующих, букв.
Лекция 9.
Изменения в системе имени в
среднеанглийский и новоанглийский
периоды
/. Общая характеристика грамматических изменений в
среднеанглийский и повоангпийский периоды. Грамматика языка
претерпела кардинальные изменения: многие грамматические значения,
ранее выражавшиеся синтетическими средствами, либо исчезли, либо
начали выражаться аналитически, что привело к изменению самого типа
языка.
490
ЛЕКЦИИ 1—12
2. Имя существительное.
• '• Среднеанглийский период. Сложная именная парадигма
Древнеанглийского языка в течение среднеанглийского периода
существенно упрощается.
2т
'-1^ Морфологическая
классификация.
Различные типы
клонений сохраняются, но происходит перераспределение числа
носимых к ним существительных. Первоначальное а-склонение все
льше расширяется за счет существительных других склонений, а также
заимствований.
2.1.2. Грамматические категории. В системе склонения остаются
ко^две грамматические категории: число и падеж. Количество
падежей сокращается до двух: общего и родительного.
2.2. Новоанглийский период. Процесс упрощения системы
склонения продолжился.
2.2.1.
Морфологическая
классификация.
Подавляющее
большинство существительных склоняется по типу а-склонения;
остальных типов склонений не существует (исключения единичны).
2.2.2. Неправильные формы существительных. Все современные
неправильные" формы существительных представляют реликтовые
формы малочисленных склонений или заимствования из латыни в форме
и единственного, и множественного числа.
2.2.3. Грамматические категории. Количество категорий и
категориальных форм среднеанглийского периода сохраняется, но
Уменьшается число существительных, используемых в родительном
(притяжательном) падеже, а также сужается значение притяжательного
падежа.
3. Прилагательное.
В парадигме прилагательного в
среднеанглийский период представлены грамматические категории
склонения (сильное и слабое) и числа (единственное и множественное).
В новоанглийский период эти категории прекращают свое
существование.
Напротив, степени сравнения прилагательных получают дальнейшее
развитие. При этом из трех основных средств образования форм
степеней сравнения, существовавших в древнеанглийский период,
продуктивной остается только одно - суффиксация, но в дополнение к
нему возникает новое, аналитическое средство - использование
вспомогательных слов.
4. Местоимение.
Сложная парадигма местоимения в
среднеанглийский период существенно упрощается. К концу
среднеанглийского - началу новоанглийского периода остается только
два падежа, исчезает род как грамматическое явление, а двойственное
491
PART 5. SUMMARY
число перестало существовать еще на рубеже древнеанглийского и
среднеанглийского периода.
5. Артикль. Эта категория как оппозиция определенного и
неопределенного артикля возникла в среднеанглийский период. Форма
определенного артикля восходит к указательному местоимению se,
неопределенного - к числительному an.
Лекция 10.
Изменения в системе глагола в
среднеанглийский и новоанглийский
периоды
/. Неличные формы глагола. В процессе истории неличные формы
постепенно теряют именные черты (элементы системы склонения),
приобретая взамен глагольные (элементы системы спряжения). В
среднеанглийский период также возникает новая неличная форма герундий.
2. Морфологическая классификация глаголов в среднеанглийский
и новоанглийский период
2.0. В среднеанглийский период разделение глаголов на сильные и
слабые сохраняется.
2.1. Сильные глаголы
2.1.1. В новоанглийский период в группе сильных глаголов
происходят изменения. Это вызвано разделением первоначальных
классов на подклассы, присоединением глаголов одного класса к
другому, переходом сильных глаголов в группу слабых и в редких случаях
наоборот.
2.1.2.
Четыре
основных
формы
сильных
глаголов
древнеанглийского периода в новоанглийском переходят в три
вследствие того, что вместо разных гласных абляута все чаще
употребляется одна.
2.2. Слабые глаголы. Группа слабых глаголов становится все более
многочисленной, так как пополняется за счет заимствований и вновь
образованных слов.
2.2.1. Классы слабых глаголов теряют свои различия, глаголы
первого и третьего классов становятся неправильными.
2.2.2. В позднем среднеанглийском - раннем новоанглийском
периоде вторая и третья формы слабых глаголов становятся
омонимичными.
492
ЛЕКЦИИ 1—12
2.3. В новоанглийский период вследствие различных фонетических
изменений две основных группы древнеанглийских глаголов - сильные и
слабые - дали две главных ipynnbi современных глаголов: правильные и
неправильные, ни одна из которых не происходит непосредственно от
тех или иных ipynn древнеанглийских глаголов.
Основными источниками неправильных глаголов были
немногочисленные неправильные глаголы древнеанглийского периода,
ольшинство сильных глаголов, слабые глаголы первого класса, а также
глаголы - скандинавские заимствования.
j . Грамматические категории английского глагола. В дополнение
к
Древнеанглийским категориям лица, числа, времени и наклонения в
среднеанглийский и новоанглийский период постепенно возникли еще
т
Ри грамматических категории: залога, аспекта и временной
отнесенности. Для их образования использовались новые средства аналитические формы.
Аналитические формы стали применяться и для прежних
грамматических категорий - времени и наклонения
Лекция 11.
Словарный состав английского языка
1. Древнеанглийский период.
1.1. Общая характеристика. Словарный состав древнеанглийского
периода был достаточно обширным. Он состоял главным образом из
исконных слов. Среди них были слова, унаследованные из общего
индоевропейского праязыка, слова общегерманского происхождения, а
также небольшое число слов, характерных только для английского языка.
1.2. Для выражения новых значений любой язык постоянно
обогащает свой словарный запас. Основными средствами пополнения
словаря в древнеанглийский период были внутренние.
1.2.1. К внутренним
средствам
обогащения
словаря
Древнеанглийского периода относится создание производных слов путем
аффиксации или чередования гласных, а также словосложение.
1.2.2. Внешние средства обогащения словаря, или заимствования, в
древнеанглийский период были не очень многочисленны. Основньши
заимствованиями были латинские, главным образом связанные с
торговыми контактами германцев, а позднее - с введением
Христианства.
2. Среднеанглийский период.
2.1. Общая характеристика. Словарный состав среднеанглийского
периода изменялся крайне быстро, отражая диалектные особенности, а
также влияние контактов с другими нациями.
493
PART 5. SUMMARY
2.2.1. Внутренние средства обогащения языка сохраняются, однако
многие аффиксы становятся менее продуктивными.
2.2.2. ^Основными
средствами
обогащения
словаря
среднеанглийского периода становятся внешние, заимствования.
Наиболее сильное влияние на английский язык оказали два языка:
скандинавский и французский, хотя природа и количество заимствований
из этих языков, а также их последствия были различными.
3. Новоанглийский период.
3.1. Общая характеристика. Словарный состав новоанглийского
периода растет очень быстро, не поддаваясь количественному учету.
3.2. Как внутренние, так и внешние средства обогащения словаря
имеют большое значение.
3.2.1. Основным внутренним средством обогащения словарного
состава выступает конверсия - переход слова из одной части речи в
другую.
3.2.2. Большое число заимствований новоанглийского периода
отражает особенности контактов носителей языка с другими нациями.
Ранние новоанглийские заимствования представлены главным
образом словами латинского происхождения (поскольку латынь была
языком культуры своего времени), а также итальянскими (в связи с
эпохой Возрождения, 15 век), испанскими и португальскими (16 век).
Открытие Америки принесло заимствования из языков местных
народов, отражавшие реалии нового континента.
Заимствования позднего новоанглийского периода представлены
словами французского происхождения (заимствованными в связи с
Реставрацией монархии в Англии), а также отдельными
заимствованиями из немецкого, хинди, китайского, арабского, русского и
других языков.
Лекция 12.
Этимологические слои современного
английского языка
/. Общая характеристика. Сегодняшний словарный состав
английского языка как никакой другой аспект языка отражает глубокие
исторические изменения и различные контакты нации. Преобладающее
число заимствований позволяет усомниться в самой природе
английского языка, если не принимать во внимание превалирующую
функциональную роль исконного элемента: значения, передаваемые
собственными словами, частотность и регулярность их употребления,
отсутствие стилевых и функциональных ограничений их использования.
494
ЛЕКЦИИ 1—12
2. Исконные слова английского языка представлены двумя
зимологическими слоями: общеиндоевропейским и общегерманским.
2.1. Слова общеиндоевропейского происхождения относятся к
амым древним словам языка, и корни их можно найти во многих других
языках этой семьи.
2.2. Слова общегерманского происхождения отражают период
ремени вплоть до начала распада общегерманского языка на отдельные
ТУппы, происшедшего на рубеже 1 века до Н.Э. - ! века Н.Э.
3. Иностранный элемент (заимствования) составляет более
половины словарного состава английского языка. Основными слоями
являются латинские, скандинавские и французские заимствования.
3.1. Латинский элемент представлен
заимствованиями
щегерманского п е Р и ° Д а (главным образом наименования бытовых
"редметов и продуктов); заимствованиями раннего древнеанглийского
периода (через посредство кельтского языка - наименования объектов
материальной культуры римлян); словами, связанными с введением
Христианства в 7 веке; словами, вошедшими в язык в 15-16 веках в
связи с возрождением науки (главным образом "книжные
заимствования", слова научной номенклатуры). Большинство этих слов
может быть достаточно легко определено благодаря характерным
внешним признакам, а также семантике.
3.2. Скандинавский элемент представлен заимствованиями 8-10
веков, включающими слова повседневного обихода. Они настолько тесно
переплелись с исконными словами, что точное этимологическое
отнесение их к заимствованиям не всегда возможно.
3.3. Французский элемент английского словаря имеет чрезвычайно
большое значение. Ранние французские заимствования относятся к
периоду норманнского завоевания. Эти слова в основном относятся к
сфере политической жизни, судопроизводству и государственному
Устройству. Большинство из них полностью ассимилировались в
английском языке и не воспринимаются как заимствования.
Средневековые французские заимствования представляют более
обиходные слова. Заимствования новоанглийского периода, связанные с
Реставрацией монархии, включают много слов' - названий объектов
материальной культуры Франции, жизни высшего общества и
развлечений.
4. Слова-гибриды. Большое число заимствований из разных языков
и их ассимилирование привело к возникновению в английском языке
слов, состоящих из элементов, разных по своему происхождению.
5. Этимологические дублеты. Этимологические дублеты - это
слова, развившиеся из одного корня, но вошедшие в английский язык
495
PART 5. SUMMARY
через посредство разных языков. Зачастую это приводит к
существенному изменению как из формы, так и значения.
Приведенные примеры различных этимологических слоев
современного английского словаря лишний раз свидетельствуют о том,
чю долгая и сложная история английского языка может быть в полной
мере понята только при изучении его в тесной связи с историей, жизни
народа, являющегося его носителем.